JP2019130190A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of changing a probability of lottery winning and suppressing change of the probability of winning by a dishonest act.SOLUTION: A game machine can apply a prescribed profit by a lottery result of winning, and comprises: a main control part 1310; a main control board box 1320; and a setting switch 1311a capable of changing a game setting related to a winning probability of lottery. The main control board box is configured so that, the main control part is stored in an internal space 1320s of a base body 1302 and a cover body 1301, the setting switch has an attachment part 1311d and a setting key cylinder 1311e and is configured so that, a top part of the setting key cylinder faces outside from an opening 1301h of the cover body. The setting key cylinder is fitted to a cylinder reception part 1301i provided on the internal space side of the cover body, on the other hand, a cylinder end part 1301z of the cylinder reception part is approached to the top part of the attachment part, and passage of a foreign matter inserted from a gap t1 between the cylinder reception part and setting key cylinder may be inhibited.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 144F

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of nails are implanted in the game area of the game board, and a receiving port through which game balls can enter is provided. Then, when the game ball launched by the launching device hits the nail and flows down the game area while changing the course and enters a specific entrance (for example, a start winning opening), a lottery is performed when a predetermined condition is established, There has been proposed a gaming machine in which a gaming state advantageous to the player occurs when the lottery result is a win (for example, Patent Document 1). In such a gaming machine, the path of the game ball flowing down the game area changes depending on the attitude of the nail, thereby changing the probability of entering a specific entrance, so the player can check the state of the nail. It was common to select a gaming machine.

JP 2008-012194 A

However, the difference in the position of the nails is subtle, so that only a small number of players can select an advantageous gaming machine from a plurality of machines installed in the gaming hall, so that the profit of the game is obtained. There is a problem that some people who can do it are unevenly distributed, and there is a problem that the profit of the game hall is harmed by some professional players if the view is changed.
In order to solve such a problem, a lottery winning probability can be changed to any one of a plurality of stages, but if this is done, the winning probability may be changed by some players or There is a risk of unauthorized changes by employees on the side of the game hall collaborating with these, and an effective measure to prevent such fraud has been desired.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to change the probability of winning a lottery and that makes it difficult for the winning probability to be illegally changed.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention as described in claim 1,
A gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A main control board box for accommodating the main control unit;
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing a game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a cover body covering the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
The setting switch includes a mounting portion that is attached to the main control portion, and a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key in a cylinder shape that is smaller in diameter than the top shape of the mounting portion, and is opened in the cover body. The top of the setting key cylinder is formed so as to face the outside from the opened opening,
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted into a receiving tube portion protruding from the inner space side of the cover body,
On the other hand, the tube end portion on the side opposite to the opening portion of the receiving tube portion is brought close to the top of the mounting portion that protrudes outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, so that the space between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder is reduced. There is provided a gaming machine capable of inhibiting passage of a foreign object inserted into a gap into the internal space.
According to such a gaming machine, even if a wire-like foreign matter is inserted from the opening of the cover body into the gap between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder, it hits the top of the attachment portion ahead of the foreign material in the traveling direction, and stops. Even if it is possible to change the direction of the tip of the foreign matter there, the passage is difficult because the progress is blocked by a narrow gap between the tube end of the receiving tube and the top of the mounting. Therefore, the illegal act by the wire-like foreign material which aimed at the clearance gap between a receiving cylinder part and a setting key cylinder from the opening part of a cover body can be prevented.
In addition, such a fraud prevention effect can be achieved by using the stepped shape of the setting switch itself, so that no special cost is required.

In the above gaming machine, the interval between the cylinder end of the receiving cylinder part and the top of the setting switch mounting part is formed to be smaller than the dimension of the gap between the receiving cylinder part and the setting key cylinder. It is good to do.
This is because the clearance t1 between the receiving cylinder part and the setting key cylinder is normally set to the minimum width (clearance) necessary to pass the setting key cylinder through the receiving cylinder part, and the foreign matter passing therethrough is extremely fine. Therefore, even if such a thin foreign object passes through the gap t1, it is easy to change the direction after hitting the top of the mounting portion and break through the portion of the gap t2 that is equal to or less than the gap t1 in that state. In addition, even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign object toward the target point after that.

In the gaming machine, the setting switch may be attached to the surface of the main control unit and in the vicinity of the junction with the main control board box.
Even if the main control part is pressed in the surface direction, the vicinity of the joint part of the main control part with the main control board box is not easily bent due to the rigidity of the main control board box. Therefore, if a setting switch is provided at the site, it will be difficult to sink even if it is pressed from the outside. Therefore, pressing the setting switch forcibly depresses the main control unit to forcibly increase the interval t2. It ’s hard to break. Further, suppressing the bending of the main control unit when the setting switch is operated is effective in preventing cracks in the main control unit when used for a long period of time.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to change the probability of winning a lottery and that makes it difficult for such a winning probability to be changed illegally.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the press operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right when the press operation part of a production | presentation operation unit is a raise position. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including the partial enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine which shows other forms and includes the partially enlarged view seen from the front in the state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled each of the outer-frame left assembly and outer-frame right assembly of an outer frame, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame, and was seen from the front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and was seen from front upper, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. (A) is a disassembled perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is the XX sectional view taken on the line of Fig.38 (a). It is the YY sectional view taken on the line of FIG. 39 including a partial enlarged view. It is a disassembled perspective view of the foul cover unit containing the partially expanded exploded view which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. It is a cross-sectional top view including the partially expanded view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member, (b) is the cross-sectional top view. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. 45 which shows the normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), (c) is the principal part enlarged view of FIG. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line invalidating member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. 49 (a) is an enlarged view of a Z portion in FIG. 49, and (b) is an enlarged view of the Z portion in FIG. 49 showing a state where a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state by which an operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) shows the state which electrically operated the operation line invalidation member, and is an enlarged view equivalent to Z section of Drawing 49 showing the state where an operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of the principal part which shows the other form of the operation line invalidation member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the handle unit in a door frame and was seen from the front, (b) was the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the handle unit and was seen from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in a plate unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in a dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate decoration unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is the top view which looked at the production | presentation operation unit in a plate unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the production | production operation part button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the upper front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation ring and was seen from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotational drive unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the front right. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotational drive unit and was seen from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation button unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. (A) is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a press operation part is a lowered position, (b) It is sectional drawing of the production operation button unit when a push operation part is a raise position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and a rotation drive unit in the left view of an effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between an effect operation ring and an effect operation ring decoration board in the top view which looked at the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of the press operation part. (A) is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation part is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation part of the pressing operation part. It is a front view of a tray unit when pressing is performed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decoration board. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner in a main body frame, (b) is an expansion perspective view which shows the front lower left corner of a main body frame when a door frame is opened with respect to a main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball launcher from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in a main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. FIG. 6 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. (A) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. It is a rear view of the payout device for explaining ball clogging and ball omission prevention. It is a modification of a payout device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the board | substrate unit from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from back lower. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and was seen from the back. It is expanded side surface sectional drawing which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the left-right direction center. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit of the main body frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the locking unit from back. (A) is a top view of a main body frame, (b) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows an upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. (A) is the perspective view seen from the front upper direction in the state which assembled the tank rail etc. to the ball tank, (b) is the perspective view which looked at (a) from the lower front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled FIG. 120 (a) and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in a main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball to the detour path in the main body frame upper part. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of a tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the back on the hinge side. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of Fig.118 (a). It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 3rd Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is another structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 4th Embodiment) of this invention by which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is the other structure (structure of the metal powder countermeasure which concerns on 5th Embodiment) of this invention in which a metal powder countermeasure is taken. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board of FIG. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. (A), (b) is the principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows another form. FIG. 138 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in FIG. 137. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the game board which shows the modification of FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the game board for every main structure and was seen from back. FIG. 4 is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component member outside the game area. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of the wiring from the function display unit in the main control board. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of the main control unit of other forms. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view of the main control unit of another form. It is a principal part longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the rotation operation state by the setting key of the main control unit of another form. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part enlarged partial front view of a main control unit. It is a ZZ line sectional view of Drawing 144J. FIG. 144 is an enlarged partial front view of the main part of the main control unit showing a state in which the change suppression unit has changed to the second state from FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of a main control unit. It is a schematic perspective view of internal structures, such as a back left movable decoration body. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of the XX of FIG. FIG. 148 is a view on arrow A in FIG. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure of a frame earth substrate. It is the schematic of the handling of the conductor which floated with respect to the earth with which the various production units with which a game board is equipped are equipped. It is a circuit diagram explaining the outline | summary of the circuit structure of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. It is a B arrow view of FIG. It is the silk printing (the 1) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is the silk printing (the 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of a manufacture cancellation electronic component. It is the structure of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary of the wiring to the board | substrate handled as a main board | substrate. It is a block diagram explaining the electrical connection of each decoration board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board | substrate provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of the arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit. It is an enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in the D part of FIG. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 170 is an enlarged view of the D ′ portion of FIG. 169 or the D ″ portion of FIG. 170 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. It is the structure of countermeasures, such as a reflectance fall which concerns on 4th Embodiment. FIG. 172 is an enlarged view of the D ″ ″ portion of FIG. 172 as seen from the LED non-mounting surface. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a decoration board provided with a magnetic-type magnetic pole change detection circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 175 is a flowchart showing a continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an error display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting value confirmation display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 181. FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on process following FIG. 182; It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part V blank interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power failure warning signal interruption process. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which provided the color code from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine which provided the color code | cord | chord into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from back. It is a right view which shows the upper part of the door frame which provided the color code in the state which made a part a cross section. It is a schematic block diagram explaining the gaming machine management method by color code. It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a game board. It is the center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the game board containing a partial enlarged view. FIG. 199 is an enlarged view of a Z1 portion indicated by an arrow in FIG. 199 including a partially enlarged view. FIG. 199 is an enlarged view of a Z2 portion indicated by an arrow. FIG. 198 is a sectional view taken along line XX in FIG. 198. FIG. 222 is an enlarged view of a portion Z3 in FIG. 202. It is the end surface front view of the game board which cut | disconnected the middle of the thickness direction of the light-guide plate. It is the front view which decomposed | disassembled and arranged the game panel and the center member which abbreviate | omitted the back decoration member. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the base panel and front enclosure member of a game panel. It is a perspective view which shows the base panel and back decoration member of a game panel. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the base panel and back decoration member of a game panel. It is an exploded perspective view of a production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a production support frame and a drum unit of the production unit. It is an exploded perspective view showing a drum unit of the effect unit. FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear cover of the effect unit. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view of the principal part explaining the movement state of a drum. 196 is an enlarged view of a portion Z4 in FIG. 195. FIG. It is a partial enlarged front view of the door frame which shows a handle unit. It is the SS sectional view taken on the line of FIG. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is a front view of the pachinko machine provided with two handle units. It is a perspective view of a door frame provided with two handle units. It is a right view of a door frame. It is an enlarged view of Z5 part of FIG. FIG. 23 is a partially enlarged front view of the door frame showing the right handle unit as viewed in FIG. 220. FIG. 227 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT in FIG. 224. 227 is a sectional view of the handle unit showing a state in which the handle unit is linearly moved from FIG. 225. FIG. It is an exploded sectional view showing a handle unit. FIG. 223 is a cross-sectional view corresponding to the line TT in FIG. 224 showing the handle unit on the left side in FIG. 220. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the handle unit showing a state in which it is linearly moved from FIG. 228. FIG. 229 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line U-U in FIG. 229. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the door frame which shows the other form of a handle unit. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the principal part expansion perspective view which looked at the upper part of the pachinko machine from back. It is a principal part enlarged front view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part expansion right view of the upper part of a pachinko machine. It is a principal part expansion right view of the upper part of the pachinko machine which shows the modification of a front top top plate. It is a principal part expansion right view of the pachinko machine upper part which shows the other form of a front top top plate. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. 229 is a partially enlarged front view showing the lower half of the game board of FIG. 238. FIG. It is a perspective view of a game board. It is a disassembled perspective view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from back. FIG. 237 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear side opposite to FIG. 242. It is a center longitudinal cross-sectional view containing a partial enlarged view. It is the combination plane sectional view which changed the cutting position centering on the lower layer game zone of a game board. It is a perspective view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of a 3rd display apparatus. It is a front view of the 3rd display which shows the changed state. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the 3rd display device. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the rear surface side of the 3rd display apparatus. It is a perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the lower layer game zone of a game board. FIG. 25 is an exploded perspective view showing a lower game zone of the game board as viewed from a direction different from that in FIG. (A) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view which shows the distribution apparatus of a 3rd distribution part, (b) is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of the distribution apparatus which shows the state of the game ball which received the vibration by external force. It is a principal part expanded sectional view of the ball rolling member which shows the other form of a ball guide part. It is a perspective view of the right-handed game zone including a partially enlarged view. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows D cut angle position formed in the rotating shaft of a 1st, 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is a circuit diagram of a voltage switching circuit. It is a schematic diagram which shows arrangement | positioning of a polyswitch. It is a table explaining the drive management block of a 1st distribution stepping motor. It is a table explaining the drive management block of a 2nd distribution stepping motor. It is the schematic of the mounting method of a field effect transistor. It is a circuit diagram which shows a vibration detection circuit. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the main body frame from the left side, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the main body frame from the right side. It is the perspective view which looked at the lower part of the door frame from the back side. It is a principal part expansion perspective view which shows the upper left corner of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
Hereinafter, a pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. For convenience of explanation, the side facing the player of the pachinko machine is referred to as “front” or “front”, and the opposite side is referred to as “rear” or “back”.

  First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 13. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position as viewed from the right front. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  The pachinko machine 1 supports a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of the game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so as to be opened and closed, and a door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. A main body frame 4 that is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a main body frame 4 that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 and that is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are spaced apart from each other and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50, and a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

  Further, the door frame 3 is configured such that when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 is provided as an operation medium operated by the player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the production, and in addition to the game by the game ball B, the player can also be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 for attaching the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be opened and closed, and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550 In addition to a payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side and a power supply board 630 provided with a power switch 630a capable of powering on the pachinko machine 1, payout control A board unit 620 having a plate 633, a back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. A locking unit 650 that locks the space.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. In addition, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a into which a game ball B is driven by a player's operation, a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and a front component member 1000 A plate-like gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the gaming area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310X and a setting change board 1310Y, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X, and a rear panel of the game panel 1100 Peripheral control unit 1500 arranged and in the center of the game area 5a in front view, a predetermined effect image is displayed Noh rendition display device 1600, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes a back effect unit 3100 that can perform a movable effect and a light emission effect according to the gaming state.

  In the game area 5 a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that are implanted in front of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined gauge arrangement and change the movement of the game ball B, and a game by receiving the game ball B Receiving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player, such as a general winning port 2001, a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, and a big winning port 2005, and a game A gate portion 2003 that gives a player a predetermined privilege (for example, allowing a player to win a second start opening 2004 for a predetermined time) by passing the ball B, and a game ball B that can enter the ball A disadvantageous first receiving port 2006 (details will be described later) is provided that does not provide any profit. The front winning unit 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005 and the first receiving port 2006 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, the player operates the player operation handle unit 180 and inputs a game ball for adjusting the hitting force, thereby driving the game ball B with an arbitrary strength. be able to. As a result, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, etc. in the gaming area 5a. The player can enter the operation of driving the handle 182 so as not to enter the entrance 2006.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, The player can be entertained by performing a lighting effect.

  When the player rotates the handle 182 while a game ball is stored in the upper plate 201 described later, the pachinko machine 1 has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 (the amount of operation of the handle 182) by the ball launcher 540. A game ball is launched, and the game ball is guided into the game area 5a of the game board 5 through the launch ball passage formed by the launch passage portion 1012 formed by the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001, and the inner rail 1002. The Then, when the game ball that has been thrown into the game area 5a is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like, a predetermined number of gaming balls are opened by the payout device 580 described later according to the received winning opening. To the upper plate 201.

  It should be noted that, due to the strength of the game ball being thrown in, etc., when the game area 5a cannot reach the game area 5a, that is, when the game ball launched with a weak launch force does not reach the game area 5a, FIG. As shown in FIG. 39, it falls on a foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the end portion (end portion) of the launch rail 544 and the end portion (start end portion) of the outer rail 1001, and this is returned as described later. The ball is received by the foul ball receiving portion 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the passage portion 1014, and is discharged to the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening through the foul cover unit 150.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19. 14 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 16 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame whose shape in front view extends vertically.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 that connects the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, a lower right side surface of the outer frame left assembly 10, and an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40. ing.

  In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward by phase inversion.

  In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 so as to be coaxially rotatable by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as viewed from the front.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view in which the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the body frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially with respect to the outer frame 2. It is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that opening and closing is possible.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper left connecting member 12 that is attached to the upper right side of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded material of aluminum alloy. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flattened to the right in the rear portion of the left and right sides of the front and rear direction, and a right portion from a portion on the right side opposite to the concave portion 11a. A bulging portion 11b that bulges in the direction and a hollow portion 11c that penetrates the bulging portion 11b vertically. The outer frame left member 11 is enhanced in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with an outer frame right member 21 of an outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 12b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 12c is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. It is attached to the outer frame left member 11. In addition, the upper left connecting member 12 causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 on the left end side, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the left notch 30a of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, so that the outer frame upper member 30 is attached.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat plate-like upper and horizontal portion extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixing portion 13b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from the rear side portion of the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b, and the right side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b And a flat plate-like contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 13d on the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and abuts the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. The screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and allows the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction, and an upper right connecting member that is attached to the upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower left side lower end of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. And a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extrusion mold. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is recessed leftward in a flat shape in a rear portion of the right and left sides of the front and rear direction, and a left portion from a portion on the left side opposite to the concave portion 21a. A bulging portion 21b that bulges in the direction, and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The outer frame right member 21 is increased in strength and rigidity by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat upper plate fixing portion 22b extending from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat horizontal lower fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 has the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a abutted against the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and the front side Further, by screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 in a state where the rear lower fixing portion 22c is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The outer frame right member 21 is attached. Further, the upper right connecting member 22 makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch portion 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, thereby being attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending backward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat plate-like lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion behind the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b A flat plate-like abutting portion 23d extending short in the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 abuts the rear surface of the abutting portion 23d on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper lateral fixing portion 23b on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. The screw is screwed into the upper lateral fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a being in contact with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, the lower right connecting member 23 causes the horizontal fixing portion 23a to abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a flat plate-like hooking piece 24b on which the outer upper frame flange 653 is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. A flat plate-like latching piece 25b to which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hooking piece 25b in the front-rear direction And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other in the left-right direction. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 includes notches 30a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the notches 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes an attachment step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end. The outer frame hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as seen from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41 extending left and right. A box-shaped curtain plate front member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and is open to the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate front member 42. A box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and that extends to the left and right, and a ball engagement prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, has a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the notches 41a at both left and right ends, respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface and includes a recess 41b into which the lower part of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and extends from the position closer to the rear of the center in the front-rear direction to the front end side. By this recess 41b, the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 is made as large as possible.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a lateral length that is the same as the length of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally-long rectangular parallelepiped box shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 closes the opened rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, thereby cooperating with the curtain plate rear member 43 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 is provided with a long hole-like opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends to the left and right in the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with the front open. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a curtain plate front member 42 attached to the front surface to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate front member 42. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a cylindrical connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends in the left and right direction and protrudes upward at the center portion in the horizontal direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so that the upper end is positioned upward as it goes rearward from the front end side that coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. The enclosure 624 is formed in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is configured such that the game ball B stays at a portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is placed between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. This is to prevent pinching.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later is confronted, and a mounting portion A first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as it goes rearward. Part 44e.

  The 1st discharge port 44b is formed in the position which corresponds with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 mentioned later. The 1st discharge port 44b and the 2nd discharge port 44c are formed in the magnitude | size which the game ball B can pass. The first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40 a and are opened on the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44 b and the second discharge port 44 c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  This ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. Intrusion of an unauthorized tool can be prevented by the standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the placement portion 44a. Even if the tip of an unauthorized tool contacts the standing wall 44d and bends upward, it contacts the upper end protruding part 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall 44d and further intrudes. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placement portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B dropped on the placement portion 44a for some reason is Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the placement portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44 a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Therefore, there arises a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B dropped on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placement portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the outlet 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to prevent the sphere B from being caught.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat grill member 46, and a port member 47 having two cylinders attached to the front of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extending in the front-rear direction. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The pair of guide members 45 are configured such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having a low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide to facilitate opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) and the front of the outer frame 2 through the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders that are formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length. The port member 47 resonates and amplifies a bass sound emitted backward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main body frame speaker 622 based on the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4. This prevents the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is used to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be rotatable. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a flat plate extending horizontally, and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30 and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixed portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the front and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion A flat plate-like lateral fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and extending downward from an edge from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. And a flat end edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage lateral fixing portion 51d. The outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the body frame hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending in the front-rear direction, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending obliquely left front and an attachment hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is pivotally attached to the rear side of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by the mounting screw 53.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame hinge member 51, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the outer frame hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52 c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 52 a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall portion 51 e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in the direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock body 52a.

  The lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c by operating the operation piece 52b. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can pass through. Thereby, the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the hinge pin 512 on the body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Outer frame lower hinge member]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like raised portion 60b that rises upward from a rear portion of the left side of the horizontal portion 60a with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size penetrating the horizontal portion 60a vertically and allowing only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to the left position near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. In the horizontal portion 60a, the discharge hole 60d is in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the upright portion 60b, and is formed to extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. The discharge hole 60d has substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Is fixed to the curtain plate rear member 43. Further, the upright portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 in front of the bulging portion 11b with a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60 c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60 d coincides with the first discharge port 44 b of the ball engagement prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B that have fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. 4 is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 60d. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay on the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame as seen from the rear.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a quadrangle that is substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is attached to the inside of the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front side. It has been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is to be visibly viewed from the front side, stores the game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by the player for driving the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 is a quadrangular and frame-like door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically, and is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and includes a game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and the door frame base unit 100 Is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200. Attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose front view extends vertically, and penetrates forward and backward, and the front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle attachment member 102 attached below, the speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner in the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the vicinity of the right end in the rear view on the lower part on the rear side of the door frame base 101 The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame sub relay board 105. Rear handle relay board 106, door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub relay board 105 that cover a part of door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and handle rear relay board 106 from the rear side. A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and give rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 one by one. Further, the foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which has been launched with a weak launch force by the ball launcher 540 and has not reached the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202, This is for guiding the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It ’s what you type

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side of the front view is hinge-rotatable, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 has a rectangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 for mounting the handle unit 180 attached to the lower right front surface of the door frame base 101, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. Door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. A rear handle relay board cover 108 that is attached to the rear side and covers the rear handle relay board 106 from the rear side, and a case that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and a door attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110. A frame lower hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view of the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in the front view extends vertically. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located about 1/3 of the direction. Thus, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door window 101a penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner in front view on the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b inclined so that the left end side protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. Between the right side and the right side of the front, and is recessed from the rear to the front. The insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c penetrates back and forth. A cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b pass through front and rear on the left side when viewed from the front, and pass forward through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. And a ball feeding opening 101e to face the surface.

  Also, the door frame base 101 is located on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower dish facing the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a bowl passage opening 101g for an upper dish that penetrates forward and backward so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in front view, and faces the through-ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 forward, A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a plurality of vertically long slits 101i that are formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrate forward and backward. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. In addition, the plurality of slits 101i are located in the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 includes a through-hole 101j penetrating in the front-rear direction below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. The through-hole 101j is inserted through a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side, and passes through the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle attachment member 102 is for attaching the handle unit to the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tube portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tube portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 102a, A plurality of (three in this example) protrusions 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the tube portion 102a and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the tube portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101b with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 101b in the door frame base 101.

  The cylindrical portion 102 a is formed so that its inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three protrusions 102c is provided on the upper portion of the cylindrical portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the cylindrical portion 102a. These three protrusions 102 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181 c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

  The handle attachment member 102 is attached to the inclined handle attachment seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylinder portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The cylinder part 102a is inclined so that the axis of the cylinder part 102a extends to the right front, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a similarly inclined state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101 i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear end of the cylindrical part of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thereby, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the body frame speaker 622 of the body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101 i of the door frame base 101 and the plate unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, it can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a that holds the connection cable 503 on the rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103 a is arranged on the left side of the front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board / door frame sub relay board / handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 33 and FIG. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the post-handle relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and a connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 99). And a part of (see FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay substrate 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which a quadrangle extending left and right is combined on the right side of the front of the upper part of the quadrangle extending up and down. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left in the rear view. The door frame sub relay board 105 includes a handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the window interior decoration part decoration board 413, the door frame right side decoration board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are configured so that the door frame base relay board 104 and a portion extending vertically from the door frame sub relay board 105 in the state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled are doors. The rear side is covered with the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered with the foul cover unit 150.

  The post-handle relay substrate 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is attached to the rear side of the handle attachment seat surface 101 b below the ball feed opening 101 e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The post-handle relay board 106 connects the door frame main relay board 104 to the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. It is for relaying. The rear handle relay board 106 is in a state where the rear side is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the post-handle relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a part extending in the inverted L shape vertically) It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front and the left in front view opened. When assembled in the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and opened. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the terminal from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and is a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and give the door frame base unit 100 rigidity. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 has left and right left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112 that are spaced apart from each other and are connected to the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and 112. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 attached to the upper end from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending rightward to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 A cylinder mounting frame 115 that connects the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of the cylinder mounting frame 115 that are mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 so as to be spaced apart from each other vertically. The hook member 116 is provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically with substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, these insertion holes are inserted through the ends of the door frame collars 652 of the locking unit 650. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends from side to side with a width that is wider in the vertical direction than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a through portion 114b that penetrates forward and backward near the right end. The cutout portion 114 a is formed at a position that coincides with the upper dish ball passage opening 101 g of the door frame base 101 and the through portion 114 b is aligned with the through hole 101 j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart from the left and right, and a pair of rear piece portions formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically in a front view and the pair of rear piece portions facing each other. A pair of side piece portions extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front side and a flat plate-like front piece portion for connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extension portions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to a portion of the insertion hole penetrating forward and backward on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. These hook members 116 are hooked with door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hook member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by stamping a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. The door frame base 101 is assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passing port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. In addition, the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 to 34. The door frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The door frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a door frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a door frame hinge pin 122. A member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 122 to move upward are provided.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-like mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat plate-like protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has an attachment piece 121 a attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is obtained by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, the vertically extending portion penetrates from below in the vicinity of the front ends of the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. The part that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and that extends horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The eaves member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b in the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and covers a portion extending vertically between the upper hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the door frame upper hinge pin 122 upward through the flange member 123.

  The door frame hinge assembly 120 is such that the door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame hinge pin 122 is the lower protruding piece. By contacting the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

  When the part of the door frame hinge pin 120 that extends horizontally at the lower end of the door frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame hinge assembly 120 can insert the upper end of the door frame hinge pin 122 into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame hinge member 510 from below or pull it downward. it can. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the upper end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the main body frame hinge member 510. It can be supported as possible.

  Further, in the door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame hinge pin 122 is positioned coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thereby, the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-like protruding piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 23 and the like) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b.

  The attachment piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod, and the outer periphery of the lower end is tapered chamfered. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is coaxial with the portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above the door frame hinge pin 122 of the door frame hinge assembly 120 in the assembled state in the door frame base unit 100. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be able to rotate by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can do.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 includes a columnar cylinder main body 131 extending in the front-rear direction, a key hole 132 formed in the front end surface of the cylinder main body 131, and a rear side of the cylinder main body 131. And a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 has a rear end attached to the front piece through the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115 from behind. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and moves from the rear end to the front side at a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 are inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is in a state substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball supply unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 36A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 36B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and games stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be extracted to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball extraction button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with the door opened, and a game ball that has entered the front entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a box shape with the front end closed and the rear end of the front cover 141 closed. A rear cover 142 having a hitting ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, and a front cover that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. The ball removal member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b on the rear side of the 141, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one in the rear cover 14 , The ball feeding member 144 supported so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. A ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in front view, and a ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 includes an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of a ball pulling member 143 described later extends from 141c to the front. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball is assembled. And it is formed so that the site | part opened to the back of the upstream end side of the ball extraction guide path 241c may be closed from the rear side.

  The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a that divides the entrance 141a and the ball discharge port 141b below the entrance 141a and has an upper surface that becomes lower toward the ball feeding member 144, and a partition 143a Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144, bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction A pivot rod 143b that is pivotally supported by the pivot rod 143b, a rod-shaped actuation rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot rod 143b, and a pivot rod 143b below the actuation rod 143c. A weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side of the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper dish ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Abut the top surface.

  The ball feeding member 144 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. A sphere holding portion 144b that is recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the rotating shaft core side, and a rod-shaped flange portion 144c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 144b are provided. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angular range of about 180 ° with the rotation axis as the center. In addition, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar 144c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b of the partition portion 143a. It rotates between the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a) by the blocking unit 144a and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where the game ball B remains in the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the side of the flange 144c closes the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a which is the standby position is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 includes a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip is swung in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip which is swung in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around the axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates the ball feeding member 144 around the axis extending in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. It has been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operation rod 146 draws the iron plate 146a toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and feeds the ball around the right end. It rotates so that the left end side close to the crank 147 moves upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward with the right end portion as the center. And return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 is swung vertically by the ball feeding solenoid 145 at the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147.

  The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that moves up and down and engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 144c (see FIG. 36B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 through the ball feeding operation rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held. To turn. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B in the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State) and the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542 by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 151) of the payout control board 633.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is applied with a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is pivotally supported or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is operated by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the dish unit 200. Therefore, in the normal state, the partitioning part 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and the ball extraction port 141b side. The game ball B does not enter.

  Then, when the player presses the upper dish ball removal button of the dish unit downward, the upper dish ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c is moved along with the downward movement of the operation transmission unit. Will also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball extraction member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition. Is released. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball outlet guide path 241c of the unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball in the dish unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower dish 202 through the lower dish ball supply port 211c.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 formed with the action transmitting portion 242b with which the action rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 contacts is biased upward by the spring 243, so that the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be It is possible to prevent the 143a from bouncing back.

  In addition, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) or the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, The operation line invalidating member 700 serving as the first fraud prevention means is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so as to be detachable from the rear side. Yes. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated by cutting, pinching (pinching), entanglement (winding), or bonding with hot melt or the like. It means making it into a state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right, and is a first piece that is vertically separated at the approximate center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. An inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape on the distal end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the portion 701 and the second piece portion 702, and the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702. And. The first piece 701 of the operation line invalidating member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700 so that the right end in front view protrudes rearward in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line invalidating member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V shape toward the right.

  The operation line invalidating member 700 is attached to the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 is formed in the hitting ball supply port 142a. It will be in the state connected with.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 700, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having almost the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. When an illegal act is performed by operating the operation line to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or causing an illegal ball to be taken in or out of the first starting port 2002 or the like, the ball launcher 540 plays a game The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 by the momentum of the illegal ball launched (hit) with a strength that can reach the region 5a. Thus, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described form, but may be another form. For example, if the operation line attached to the illegal ball is cut or narrowed so as to suppress illegal acts, the operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent or bent in a form different from that described above. It is good also as a structure provided, and it is good also as a structure which replaces with a metal plate and has the resin molding member which has the shape which can cut | disconnect or narrow the operation line attached to the illegal ball | bowl.

  Further, when the illegal ball is made of synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the above-described standby position (on the above-described partition portion 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving condition of the ball feeding solenoid 145 as the electric feeding means, thereby preventing the illegal ball from being launched. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal sphere made of synthetic resin and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not perform driving for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the door cover base unit as viewed from the front of the foul cover unit, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball launcher 540 with a weaker force (a launch force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a launch force that can reach the game area 5a) and the game area 5a of the game board 5 The game ball B (foul ball) that has not reached the inside is guided to the lower plate 202, and the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and the upper tray ball supply port 211a which is a sphere opening of the tray unit 200. And a through ball passage 150a that communicates with the lower full tank discharge passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 that opens rearward on the lower right side of the through ball passage 150a when viewed from the front. And a full ball receiving port 150b.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is opened upward on the right side when viewed from the front of the full ball receiving port 150b, and the momentum unit 540 is launched from the launch rail 544 by the ball launcher 540 of the main body frame 4, but lacks momentum. A foul ball receiving portion 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop opening 1013 formed between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the game area 5a, and a front view right A lower tray ball supply port 211c that is opened forward in the vicinity of the lower corner and that releases the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and that serves as a ball opening of the dish unit 200. 150d, a ball discharge port 150d communicating with the ball, a ball discharge port 150d (more precisely, a storage passage 150e to be described later), and a communication passage 150 connecting a foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h includes an upper passage wall 150i disposed on the lower side of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c with a slope opposite to the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one game ball from the upper passage wall 150i ( The lower end wall 150j is disposed in parallel with a distance of one ball), the starting end opens upward at the downwardly inclined end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, and the terminal end is stored. It opens downward with respect to the passage 150e.

  A series of passages from the foul ball drop opening 1013 established between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h and the storage passage 150e are returned to the foul ball. A return passage portion 1014 is formed by a series of elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving unit 150c and the ball discharge port 150d by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. A storage passage 150e having a possible size is provided.

  The penetrating sphere passage 150 a is formed across both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-like movable piece 153 attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152 so that the lower end thereof is rotatable, and the movable piece 153. A full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the dish unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not released from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is somewhat in the storage passage 150e. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155 by the weight of the game balls B. Thus, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. Accordingly, since it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of the game balls B, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects the full tank, the payout of the game balls B beyond this is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, a staff member of the game hall, and the like so as to prompt the player to cancel the full tank 202.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150a, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 (to be described later) of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 150f with which the operation protrusion 613a of 613 can contact is provided (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated so that the downstream end of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b ( The front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud due to the illegal sphere Q attached with the operation line L. Similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The foul ball dropping opening 1013 opened during the period is provided with operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S as third fraud prevention means.

  The second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the drawing, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit main body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixed (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, from the viewpoint of safety, the unit main body 151 and the cover member 152 are externally covered and accommodated so that the hands of employees, game machine assembly workers, and the like are difficult to contact.

  A specific operation line invalidating member 7000 includes the same components as the operation line invalidating member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shaped opening that opens in a direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece 7010 and the second piece 7020 extended from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece 702. The shearing part 7000v is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the foul cover unit 150 of the present embodiment has the center of the V-shaped shearing part 7000 v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the lid member 152 constituting the foul cover unit 150. It is arranged so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000. A tapered guiding portion 150k capable of guiding the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on its upper surface, and is directed toward the lid member 152 toward the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line invalidating member 7000 side, and the width narrows toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the lid member 152 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. A tapered portion 150k having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L) and a second inclined portion 150kb. When the operation line L that receives tension by rolling of the illegal sphere Q or pulling from the outside is brought into sliding contact with the guide portion 150k, the second inclined portion 150ka to the second inclined portion due to the tension applied to the operation line L. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 so as to slide on the inclined portion 150 kb. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for the smooth flow of the normal foul sphere and the guidance of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corner portions of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guide portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line disabling member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is set using the space communicating from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The illegal ball Q that has been attached is allowed to enter the game area 5a and the manipulation line L on the lower tray ball supply port 211c side is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q. Unauthorized actions that cause the ball Q to be taken in and out of the first starting port or the like can be suppressed.

  For example, a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act”) in which the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and is caused to flow backward to the launch position of the ball launcher 540. A ”) is performed, and when the illegal ball Q goes over the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and goes to the firing position of the firing rail 544, When pulled (with tension applied), the operation line L wraps around the U-turn along the folded portion. Then, the operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v by the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally Since the operation line L cannot be operated as a result of the disconnection, it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal sphere Q.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, which is intentionally made into a foul ball, and a lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when a fraudulent act (hereinafter referred to as “fraud act B”) is performed in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball that has become a foul ball is grabbed and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a. The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent launch of the illegal sphere Q (tension is applied) and the operation line. L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing part 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above. As a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. OK To become. 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. In addition, for the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line invalidating member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent sphere Q that becomes a foul sphere (for example, a foul sphere is formed). In some cases, even if the illegal ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength, the operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention unit. Therefore, the present embodiment reinforces the fraud countermeasure by the first fraud prevention unit. It also has an effect. For this reason, when targeting the fraudulent act B, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line invalidating member 7000H serving as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are preferably used together as appropriate, and the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 or the third operation line disabling member 7000H, 7000S, which are different from the first operation line disabling member 700, are provided. It is good to install together in the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the first operation line disabling member 700 and the second operation line disabling member 7000 are not conspicuous because they are provided together on the door frame 3 side and are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble, fraud countermeasure information is difficult to leak. In addition, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the crime prevention performance if the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 are exchanged together with the door frame 3 because the reduction in sharpness or the like affects the crime prevention performance.

  By the way, the operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 serving as the first and second fraud prevention means described above cut and invalidate the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v. In other words, the operation line L is sandwiched between, for example, two metal plates 7011 and 7022 so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. You may make it invalidate like this.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed by two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined at the hatched portion of the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 are formed. The first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two is expanded in a V shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is designated as a pinching portion 7044. Such an operation line invalidating member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and further, for safety reasons, it is difficult to contact the hands of employees, game machine assemblers, and the like. And the cover member 152 is covered and accommodated from the outside.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the fold-back portion of the metal plate 701 wraps around in a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line invalidating member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the fold-back portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joint portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044 is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed back from the lower dish ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the launch position of the launch rail 544, or the illegal ball Q that is intentionally made a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, and the operation line L is sandwiched between the operation line invalidating members 7000 even if it reaches that position. For this reason, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L that can be fed cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to suppress fraud using the illegal sphere Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joining portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V shape to form the introduction guide portion 7033, and the latter half of the non-joining portion is the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, a single metal plate is bent so that the plate surfaces overlap each other, and the leading end portion of the bent one plate surface is expanded in a V-shape to introduce guide portion 7033 (guidance portion). In addition, the sandwiched width portion of both plate surfaces may be used as the retaining portion 7044. Thereby, the assembly work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of a metal plate can be improved, producing the same effect as the above-described fraud prevention effect.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in the gap of the second inclined portion 150 kb in FIG. 42 or an adhesive that does not harden is filled. Then, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be adhered to the adhesive portion so as not to move.

  Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000 that clamps the operation line L is changed from the above-described one composed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. You may install and form so that the induction | guidance | derivation direction of the 2nd inclination part 150kb of the induction | guidance | derivation part 150k and a self center axis line may be substantially orthogonally crossed. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb is fitted between the adjacent coils of the coil spring and clamped.

  Coil springs that have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when no load is applied, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, need to be placed in a compressed state like compression coil springs. It is advantageous in terms of installation work.

  Of course, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when there is no load, but as shown in FIG. 43, the coil on the entry side of the operation line L is bent so as to be slightly expanded. This is preferable because the operation line L can enter smoothly. Thus, when the operation line invalidating member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, the cost can be reduced because it can be manufactured at a low cost.

  In addition, a foreign object such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line invalidating member 7000 from the opening for the sphere (lower tray ball supply port 211c), and the cell plate closes the guide portion 150k to the operation line invalidating member 7000. In order to cope with this, in the form described above to cope with this, the course changing part of the return path part 1014 of the foul ball (the part corresponding to the upper part of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in this embodiment) A slit 1015 into which such a cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Thereby, the further unauthorized operation | work which inserts a foreign material from the opening for balls (lower tray ball supply port 211c) and blocks the guide part 150k can also be suppressed. In addition, as a countermeasure for an illegal work to insert a foreign object such as a cell plate from the opening for the sphere (the lower tray ball supply port 211c) and close the guide portion 150k, a foreign object such as a cell plate is used as in the slit 1015 described above. As shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 39, the configuration is provided with a projecting obstacle 1016 that collides with a foreign substance such as a cell plate and blocks the arrival to the guiding part 150k. As a result, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Further, the first and second operation line invalidating members 700 and 7000 described so far have a static structure that is invalidated after the operation line L enters, but FIG. 49, FIG. 50, FIG. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that actively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal sphere Q may be used.

  49, FIG. 50, and FIG. 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is a foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). Is pivotally attached to the path changing portion (the corner corresponding to the upper portion of the lower dish ball supply port 211c).

  That is, the operation line invalidating member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-like ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-like invalidating portion 2646 that protrudes perpendicularly to the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645 in FIG. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the disabling part 2646 intersects, and an arc-shaped ball stop 2648 centering on the shaft hole 2647 protruding from the upper edge of the disabling part 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving posture of FIG. 50 (a). Can swing to the release position. The operation line invalidating member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the shaft hole 2647 of the invalidating portion 2646, and the ball receiving portion 2645 is energized by the biasing of the balance weight 2660. 50A is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, a load for one game ball) is applied to the ball, while a load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. Sometimes it swings to the release posture of FIG.

  Further, the edge of the disabling portion 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D is an intersecting side portion 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the disabling member 7000D swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 having the above dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball passes through the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course downward by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving part 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving attitude. Due to the load of the foul sphere, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. Then, the foul sphere placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, so that the operation line invalidating member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached to the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul balls may be generated at one time. Even in such a case, while the previous foul ball is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul ball is as shown in FIG. The arc-shaped ball stop portion 2648 stops the operation line, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D moves backward to continue the processing. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul balls are generated simultaneously, they can be processed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-mentioned fraud act B (a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of them is launched from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. The foul sphere is intentionally weakly fired to form a foul sphere, which is taken out from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, which is the opening for the sphere, and the operation line L connected to the illegal sphere is grabbed and the subsequent fraud When the illegal ball Q flows due to the illegal act of launching the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. Immediately after that, it is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, the operation line invalidating member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 by the load of the irregular sphere Q and changes to the release posture shown in FIG. At this time, the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D also rotates, and the crossing edge part 2651 at the edge of the operation line disabling member 7000D crosses the foul ball return passage and fits into the receiving part 2652 on the passage side. When the foul ball return passage is crossed, the operation line L passing there naturally also crosses, so that the operation line L is sandwiched between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, and the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D is not released from the illegal ball Q and continues the release posture. Of course, since the operation line invalidating member 7000D is in a position that cannot be reached even if a hand is put in from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a sphere opening, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q that stops at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If it is made difficult for the operation line L to reversely move by meandering the operation line L between the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the operation line L is captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000D. It is also difficult to pull the illegal ball Q back to the hitting ball supply port 142a. Thereby, the illegal sphere Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D can be stored and collected as a evidence sphere.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above uses the dead weight of the illegal sphere Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D may be operated by the electric drive means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line disabling member 7000D in FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as an electric drive means to the portion provided with the balance weight 2660 and a ball detector connected to the disabling part 2646 of the operation line disabling member 7000D. 2655 is provided, and when a game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D is changed from the ball receiving posture to the released posture. When the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change in signal from presence to absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is changed. The disabling member 7000D returns from the release posture to the ball receiving posture. .

  When a normal foul ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the generation and release of the foul ball is detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response to the detection. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one in the same manner as the operation line invalidating member 7000D using its own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, so that the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is raised and the operation line is invalidated. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is pinched by the intersecting side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since the release signal is not emitted from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stops at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the target ball opening, it is possible to prevent fraud.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade in the intersecting side portion 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. Further, the operation line invalidating member 7000D of the present embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the sphere opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 blocks the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as a reverse prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line disabling member 7000D has, for example, a disabling portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and the front end of the shutter plate Is formed as an intersecting side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream of the movable region of the intersecting side and passes through the movable region of the intersecting side. Then, the invalid ball Q is detected by this ball detector and the invalidation unit is operated, and the operation line L is clamped or cut at the crossing side crossing the communication passage 150h. Also good.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above can also be applied to the first operation line invalidating member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the illegal deterrent effect can be reliably increased.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L and invalidates it.

  In other words, the operation line disabling member 7000D is a square ring disabling portion 2646 that is attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be able to rotate around the rotation shaft 2656 oriented in a direction orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 serving as an electric drive means for rotating the invalidating portion 2646 and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the invalidating portion 2646 as an intersecting side portion 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotating) region of the intersecting side portion 2651. The invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul sphere is detected by the sphere detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h and passes through the invalidation unit 2646, and the foul ball detects the ball. The invalidation unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul sphere flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside through the sphere opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q enters the invalidating unit 2646. Since the illegal sphere Q is detected by the sphere detector 2655 and the invalidation unit 2646 makes one rotation because it passes through the invalidation unit 2646, the operation line L is wound around the invalidation unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q reaches the unauthorized person.

  Note that the sphere detector 2655 for detecting the illegal sphere Q may be displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q. In such a case, the illegal sphere Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, useless emptying of the operation line invalidating member 7000D that winds up the operation line L described above can be eliminated.

As described above, the following description regarding the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
“A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launcher that launches game balls;
A launch passage portion that forms a launch ball passage communicating with the game area from a launch position of the ball launch device; and
A return passage portion that forms a foul ball return passage that connects a foul ball drop opening that is established in the middle of the launch ball passage and a ball opening that discharges a game ball to the outside of the aircraft,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing operation from the front of the operation line attached to the illegal ball,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by pinching, cutting, or winding.
The operation line invalidating member includes an intersection side portion that traverses the foul ball return passage of the game ball, and operates the intersection side portion after the illegal ball passes through the movable region of the intersection side portion, thereby the foul ball. A gaming machine that traverses the return passage, and thus invalidates the operation line passing through the foul ball return passage at the intersection by pinching, cutting, or winding. "

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 10, 11, 39, 47, and 48, the third fraud prevention means provided in the foul ball dropping opening 1013 described above is the end portion (end terminal) of the firing rail 544. And an operation line invalidating member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a rail base 1001x made of resin).

  The operation line disabling member 7000H provided at the projecting side end of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-toothed so that the operator's hand does not directly touch the blade edge. It covers with the safety cover part 1017 arranged in order. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover portion 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, an illegal act of pushing the illegal ball Q back into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c using a dedicated tool such as a cell plate and sending it to the launch position of the ball launcher 540 When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls by tilting toward the launching position, the manipulation line L is pulled (with tension applied) and the operation line L becomes an operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching a cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the launch position, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even when an illegal act B is performed in which the operation line L connected to the illegal ball Q is grabbed and the subsequent illegal ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the illegal ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage portion 1014 is Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of dropping, the operation line L is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line invalidating member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 39 and FIG. Protruding.

  According to the operation line invalidating member 7000S, if the illegal ball Q reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, the end of the operation line L is a lower tray ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if an unauthorized person is grasping via 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is pulled between the wires of the operation line invalidating member 7000S by the tension. After that, even if the hand that manipulates the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is loosened, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. The movement of the loosened hand is not transmitted to the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, the illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  As described above, the third fraud prevention means is effective in the operation line invalidating member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side in the initial stage of the fraud acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line invalidating member 7000S on the side exhibits an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Of course, any one of the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S can be used alone, and the specific invalidating members of the operation line invalidating member 7000H and the operation line invalidating member 7000S are both used. The forms may be interchanged or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  In addition to the case where the operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S are made as separate parts and attached to the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 as in this embodiment, the operation line is invalidated by appropriately processing, for example, a metal plate constituting the firing rail 544 The forming member 7000H is integrally formed, or a wire rod is integrally formed on a resin-made rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or a corner portion of the rail base 1001x has a V-groove shape as shown in FIG. 8B. It is also possible to engrave the clamping part 7000Sv and attract the operation line L to the back of the groove of the clamping part 7000Sv.

  Furthermore, the operation line disabling member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line disabling member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIG. 41 and FIG. , 7022, and a guide base 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, the second operation line disabling member 7000 for disabling the operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q is provided in the return passage 1014. Similarly, the third operation line disabling member 7000 is the foul ball. Although the form provided in the drop opening 1013 has been described, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above-described form.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, the inlet portion of the communication passage 150h. The disabling member 7000 is provided at the exit portion (see z in FIG. 39) of the communication passage 150h, the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. 38A, or the outer rail constituting the foul ball dropping port 1013. The operation line L is a part where the operation line L abuts against a part of the return passage portion 1014 and bends, such as being provided at each of the start end part 1001 and the end part of the launch rail 544, and the operation line L is illegal with the weight of the illegal sphere Q etc. It is provided at any position in the return passage portion 1014 on the condition that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be stretched straight by receiving a tension by a person's tensile force. It may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of this embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if the fingertip is inserted from the ball opening, and this position is the player's safety aspect and the operation line invalidity. It is preferable in view of a crime prevention surface that makes it difficult to perform illegal manipulations on the adjusting member 7000 itself.

  Further, in this embodiment, the operation line invalidating member 7000 is provided to be shifted to one side of the communication passage 150h. However, as shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the operation line invalidating member 7000 is filled to the full width of the passage. A cutting blade may be arranged. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the end of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end of the communication passage 150h are used as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is the operator. Is not touching. In this case, the cutting blade of the operation line disabling member 7000 uses a well-known broken blade structure or chip structure, which is installed in the sheath-like holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i and the unit main body 151. If each of the lid members 152 is provided with a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 so that the cutting blade can be pushed out in place to replace the old and new ones, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44A and 44B, reference numeral 1021 denotes a clamping line portion for the operation line L cut into the trough portion of the safety cover portion 1017, and the operation line L can bite into the clamping line portion 1021. It is like that. Therefore, even if the operation line disabling member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L can bite into the clamping part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the reliability of fraud prevention is ensured. improves.

  Moreover, although the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown in the above-described form, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where there is no lower plate). In this case, a fraudulent act (the fraudulent acts A and B described above) that causes the illegal ball Q attached with the operation line L to enter the game area 5a using the space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the game area 5a. Fraud). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is exemplified that the second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper tray ball supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  In the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side. However, the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Moreover, in the above-mentioned form, although the 2nd fraud prevention means was provided in the foul cover unit 150 which comprises the return channel | path part 1014, you may make it provide multiple. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portion of the above-described form are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (for each of the folded portions) has a second shape as described above. A fraud prevention means may be provided. Thereby, it becomes possible to further enhance the deterrence effect of fraud using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014. However, a resin molded product having the same configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Or, the molding itself of the foul cover unit 150 may have a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud prevention means in the above-described form is not provided, but instead, a tapered shape provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest part (narrowest part) of the guiding part 150k, a slit-shaped capturing part is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage part 1014. The operation line L attached to the illegal sphere Q may be clamped by the capture part which is the narrowest part of the guide part 150k. Even with such a configuration, an illegal deterrent effect equivalent to that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  In the above-described form, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. However, as shown in FIG. 46, 49, the intrusion of the illegal sphere Q from the opening for the sphere is prevented without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere (the reverse of the illegal sphere Q is prevented). By providing the advance prevention means, fraud due to the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a dedicated tool such as a cell plate (foreign material) that pushes the illegal ball Q into the course changing portion (the portion corresponding to the portion directly above the lower dish ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of an attracting part 1022 for attracting the illegal sphere Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal sphere reverse prevention means). As a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal action A, without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. In addition, a trapping valve that can swing only in the intrusion direction of the backflowed illegal sphere Q into the attracting part 1022 at the inlet part of the attracting part 1022 (allows the intrusion to the attracting part 1022 and A single-open valve (not shown) that disables disengagement may be provided, so that traces using the illegal ball Q and evidence of fraudulent activity can be left.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 46, it is exemplified that a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the flow-down direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (back flow). Yes (second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an illegal act that causes the illegal sphere Q to flow backward, such as the above-described illegal act A, without affecting the normal flow of the foul sphere. Note that the operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a kind of check valve, and exhibits the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  The static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  In the above-described embodiment, an operation line invalidating member different from the first operation line invalidating member 700 is provided in the return passage 1014. However, such an operation line invalidating member is, for example, a foul ball dropping port 1013. It may be provided between the launch position or between the foul ball dropping opening 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Moreover, although what was applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine was shown in the above-mentioned form, it is not limited to this, It applies to a pachislot machine or the gaming machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 30 and 31. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably mounted so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. The glass unit 160 allows the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed from the player side (front side) when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The front of the region 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the outer periphery of the glass unit 161 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units for attaching the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101 rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. An attachment member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of attachment pieces 161a extending outwardly from a position below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 161b. The attachment piece 161 a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163 b of the glass unit attachment member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 116). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated in the front-rear direction so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 116).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 is a disc-shaped base portion 163a that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101 h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is positioned below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thereby, the glass unit 160 is detachable with respect to the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position positioned below the base portion 163a, the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is restricted by the protruding portion 163b. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position so as to be above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction | limiting of the movement to the back of the glass frame 161 is not cancelled | released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not remove | deviate from the door frame base 101 naturally.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged with a flat plate-like main body portion 171 whose outer periphery is formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-like rear protruding piece 172 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 160 in a state of being attached to the door frame base unit 100. The main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 with the upper end assembled in the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in the shallow box shape open | released back by the main-body part 171 and the back protrusion piece 172, and intensity | strength and rigidity are high. Further, the rear protrusion 172 protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. The rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  Note that the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not contact the rear protrusion 172 of the crime prevention cover 170, and the game area The game ball B is not hindered into the 5a.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body portion 171. The removed rear protrusion 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component member 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 54A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 54B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 (see FIGS. 30 and 32 to 34) of the door frame base unit 100, and the player operates the game ball B in the upper plate 201 to play the game board 5. Can be driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylinder portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; and a front side of the handle decoration board 184 so as to cover And a handle cap 185 attached to the cover base 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188, and a handle base 181 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation starting end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 biasing in the direction.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 at the rear of the inner base 186, and a distal end projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 which is attached to the handle base 181 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending rearward and forward on the handle base 181 at the end side behind the inner base 186, and a single button attached to the handle base 181 by detecting the pressing operation of the single button 193 And an operation sensor 194.

  A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base portion 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base portion 181a, and an inward direction from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 181a. And three groove portions 181c formed in the circumferential direction at irregular intervals and extending in the axial direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the center of rotation, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked A locking projection 182f.

  The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusion 182b, the third protrusion 182c, and the fourth protrusion 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front view of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is counterclockwise on the opposite side. The side surface of the direction is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 182b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 182a that protrudes most in the clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. Slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 182b bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The portion of the third protrusion 182c that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is away from the most protruded portion of the second protrusion 182b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the first protrusion 182a It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 182c is inclined substantially linearly on the side surfaces on both sides, and more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction where the side surface in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 away from the most protruded portion of the third protrusion 182c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a that protrude rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has translucency. The handle cap 185 includes a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member. The handle cap 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, it is easy for a player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and it is possible to perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launching device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182, that is, the strength input by the player.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is greatly rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball B is strongly driven into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated by the fourth protrusion 182d. Therefore, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the game by reducing the feeling of fatigue.

[3-5. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the tray unit, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and is seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 200 is an upper dish 201 that stores a game ball B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is disposed below the upper dish 201 and is supplied from the upper dish 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The dish unit 200 includes an upper dish 201, a dish base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower dish 202 attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210. And a stage operation unit 300 that is attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and can be operated by the player.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped dish unit base 211 extending in the left and right direction, an upper dish body 212 having an upper dish 201 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211, and a right side of the upper dish body 212. A mounting base 213 that is attached to the front of the mounting base 213, a dish unit relay board 214 that is mounted to the right of the mounting base 213, and a ball lending operation unit 220 that is mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. A unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball attached to the lower side of the mounting base 213 and a unit 240 after removing the upper bowl ball attached to the rear of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl ball are provided.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the front lower portion of the dish unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202 and the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit body 252 in the left and right directions, and The dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are provided below the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes, as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a cage rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring transmission for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302 A gear 350 and a gear attachment member 351 for rotatably attaching the operation ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decoration board 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, the decoration board cover 353 covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And.

  The entire plate unit 200 bulges forward, and the rendering operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the rendering operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward in the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the rendering operation unit 300 on the upper surface. In addition, a ball lending operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201. As is apparent from the above description, the upper plate 201 and the production operation unit 300 and the like of the plate unit 200 are projected toward the player side in the middle region in the left and right direction of the lower half of the front surface of the door frame 3. A forward bulging structure is formed.

[3-5-1. Top plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212) has a portion of about 1/3 bulging forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the horizontal direction. As the upper plate 201 moves from the most bulged portion to the right in front view, the front end is retracted rearward, and the guide passage portion 201a whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 62). For example). The upper plate 201 is inclined so that the entire bottom surface including the guide passage portion 201a is lower on the right end side, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 201a is under the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game ball B released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper tray ball feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal grounding metal 201b that is electrically grounded (earth ground) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) so that the game The static electricity charged on the sphere B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by the lower plate body 251 and the plate unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in a container shape that can store the game balls B, and includes a lower tray ball hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall in the vertical direction so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is closed by the lower dish ball removal unit 260 so as to be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape in plan view extending left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The lower dish 202 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower dish ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a of the lower dish 202 is positioned in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c and below the rendering operation unit 300 in a state assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The lower dish 202 can store the game ball B released forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c in a state in which the lower dish ball hole 202a is closed, and open the lower dish ball hole 202a. Can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c, and therefore forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower dish ball hole 202a by movement of the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 59 to 62. 59 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit as seen from the rear after being broken down for every main member. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the rendering operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The dish base unit 210 is a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front part of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper dish attached to the upper front part of the dish unit base 211 and having an upper dish 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 that is attached to the right of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and is attached to the right of the mounting base 213 on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

  The dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper surface of the attachment base 213, and a unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the attachment base 213. , A unit 240 after removing the upper dish ball attached to the rear side of the dish unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit base 211 is attached to the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (shallow open at the rear). It is formed in a box shape.

  The dish unit base 211 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth below the upper dish ball supply port 211a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear and the upper dish ball supply port 211a. A speaker opening 211b having a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower dish ball supply opening 211c penetrating forward and backward in a lower left portion with respect to the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front, and extending rearward in a cylindrical shape; A notch 211d that is cut out in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right side wall of a portion that extends in a cylindrical shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear in the upper right side of the lower dish ball supply port 211c And an upper tray ball feeding port 211e that extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

  The dish unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and is placed on the left side of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e. Under the dish main body, it penetrates back and forth and passes through the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 in the unit 240 after the upper dish ball removal is inserted, and the front right and left in the lower right corner of the front view. The handle insertion port 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 passes through the front and rear in the vicinity of the right corner when viewed from the front. And a mouth 211i.

  The upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball of the door frame base 101. The opening 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3 and has a front end that opens to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a cylindrical rear end that opens the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrical portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 is moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, After the dish ball removal, the ball 240 is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 through the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 and the notch 211d.

  The upper tray ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper tray ball in a state assembled to the tray base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper plate body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) whose upper and rear sides are open. The upper plate body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger than the center of the left and right when viewed from the front, and bulges forward. The upper plate body 212 has a front end that is retracted rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper plate body 212 is closed at the upper part near the right end.

  The upper plate body 212 is attached so that a portion where the upper portion near the right end is closed in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200 lies under the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, the upper plate body 212 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a formed at an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the tray unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the tray unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with the top opened. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the left end and a through port 213b penetrating up and down in the right corner of the rear end.

  The insertion opening 213a of the mounting base 213 is used to insert the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, the through-hole 213b is for inserting a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5-3d. Plate unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish lower left decorative board 283, the dish lower right decorative board 288, and the operation unit relay board 392. Is to do. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211 f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202 or cashes a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. Or a prepaid card, and a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out into the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is displayed, This is for subtracting and returning the game balls B from which the rented cash or prepaid card has been lent.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base part 221 attached to the upper side of the attachment base 213, an upper dish ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base part 221, and an upper dish ball on the upper surface of the base part 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 disposed on the right side of the unplug button 222, a translucent disk lending operation base 223, a ball lending button 224 disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation A return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223 and a ball lending display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball lending operation base 223 are provided.

  The upper dish ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221, and can be moved downward by a player pressing. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light-emitting state.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game balls B that have been rented are deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine. In the ball lending display section, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine is displayed. The ball lending display section displays an error code when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper bowl and after removing the upper bowl]
The pre-top bowl removal unit 230 and the post-top bowl removal unit 240 in the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to operate the upper plate 201. The game balls B stored inside are discharged to the lower plate 202.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the lower side of the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. The unit 240 after the top dish ball removal is attached to the rear side of the unit 230 before the top dish ball removal on the rear surface of the dish unit base 211.

  The unit 230 before removing the upper dish ball is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 and has a cylindrical front base 231 that extends vertically, and a front part 231 that is inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 so as to be vertically movable. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached near the front of the upper tray ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g on the front surface of the tray unit base 211. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end that is in contact with a lower end of the upper dish ball removal button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper dish ball removal slider 242 after the upper dish ball removal unit 240. It is in contact with the top surface.

  The post-top ball removal unit 240 includes a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball removal slider 242 that is slidably attached to the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward, a rear cover 244 that is attached to the rear side of the rear base 241; It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and is connected to the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass and the ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward, and a game on the rear surface of the rear base 241 from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b. A ball extraction guide path 241c that guides the sphere B downward and then guides it to the right in the rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled to the plate base unit 210, and moves forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at an opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state assembled to the door frame 3. Accordingly, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The part extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view, and inclines so that the right end side in the rear view is lower than the part where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached. It opens on the right side when viewed from the back. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball extraction guide path 241 c is closed by the rear cover 244. The ball extraction guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the upper portion of the portion extending vertically below the ball supply guide path 241b is located in front of the ball extraction opening 141b of the ball supply unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending in the left-right direction as viewed from the back is connected to the notch 211 d of the lower dish ball supply port 211 c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c through the ball outlet guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 242 is formed in a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. An operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  The upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the operation receiving portion 242a protrudes forward through the slider insertion port 211g of the tray unit base 211 from the rear side, and the operation receiving portion 242a. Is in contact with the lower end of the front slider 232 of the unit 230 before removing the upper bowl. Further, in the state where the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes rearward of the rear base 241, and the operation at the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 is on the upper surface. The collar 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper dish ball removal slider 242, and urges the upper dish ball removal slider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the spring 243 and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

  In the pre-top ball removal unit 230 and the post-top ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the moving end upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper pan ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward movement end by the biasing force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball extraction member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b to partition the two.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 separates the entrance 141a and the ball withdrawal port 141b from the upper plate 201 and sends them to the ball reception port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hitting ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper dish ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper dish ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 is rotated by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the tray 202, and the game ball B in the upper tray 201 is discharged into the lower tray 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper dish ball removal button 222 is released, the upper dish ball removal slider 242 is moved upward by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the upper dish is moved via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. While the ball removal button 222 is raised, the ball removal member 143 is rotated by the operation rod 143c that is in contact with the operation transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is fed to the ball launcher 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as seen from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the main body of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the rear. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has a lower dish 202 and is attached to the front surface of the dish base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower front portion of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202. The dish unit base covers the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. 211, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the lower plate 211, a lower dish ball removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252 separately from each other on the left and right. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit of the dish unit main body 252 that are attached below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the dish. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The lower dish body 251 forms the lower dish 202 in cooperation with the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and is open at the top and rear. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower front portion of the plate unit base 211 so that the opened rear side is closed.

  The lower dish main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape whose plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in plan view. The lower plate body 251 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball hole 202a. The lower dish ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower dish body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the dish unit body 252 in a state where the lower dish body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. The bottom plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, and the bottom surface is positioned below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball discharge hole 202a has the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball | bowl B discharge | released ahead from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Plate unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front surface of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward and extends downward from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction at the upper part, and a left side from the center in the left and right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear opened, and the dish upper left decoration unit 270, the dish lower left decoration unit 280, the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the dish lower right decoration unit are provided on the respective front surfaces. 285 is attached. The left upper side bulging portion 252a has a lower right end connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Moreover, the lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed with a lower dish opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging part 252a and the lower front decoration part 252b. The lower dish opening 252d has such a size that the player's fingers can be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower dish opening 252d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the front-rear direction by the lower dish body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging part 252a.

  The dish unit main body 252 includes a front notch 252e that is cut upward from the lower front end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251 in the lower front decorative part 252b, and a lower dish main body 251 in the bottom plate part 252c. , And a bottom notch 252f that is notched at a portion below the bottom. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is inserted into the front cutout part 252e and the bottom cutout part 252f.

  Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b and is inserted into the handle insertion port 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and the lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252g. An effect operating unit formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that passes through the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and through which the cylinder main body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are the center in the left-right direction. And an effect operation unit attachment portion 252i to which 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is about 1/3 of the horizontal width of the dish unit main body 252.

  The dish unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the dish base unit 210 when assembled in the dish unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower dish opening 252d. . When assembled in the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces the front from the front notch 252 e and the lower dish ball removal unit 260 has a lower dish ball removal base 261. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed and the bottom surfaces are in the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower dish ball removal unit]
The lower dish ball removal unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251, and opens and closes the lower dish ball removal hole 202 a to store the game ball B in the lower dish 202 or discharge the game ball B from the lower dish 202. It is for letting you do.

  The lower dish ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish body 251 and has a flat plate-like lower dish ball removal base 261 having a through-hole penetrating up and down at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower dish ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower dish ball removal button 263 attached to the front end of the slider 262, a spring 264 urging the slider 262 forward, A lower dish ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes the through hole by the movement of the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower dish ball removing lid 265 through the slider 262 are provided.

  The lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position that coincides with the lower dish ball removal hole 202a of the lower dish 202 (lower dish body 251). A penetrating through-hole is formed. The through hole of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is formed in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to a portion of the lower dish ball removal base 261 leftward from the center in the left-right direction so as to be slidable back and forth. The slider 262 includes a projecting pin that projects upward in a cylindrical shape.

  The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 261 at the left end side of the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable about the vertically extending axis, and the right end side is attached to the slider 262. The right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower dish ball removal lid 265 is formed with a slit extending left and right into which a protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  When the lower dish ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish ball removal base 261 closes the bottom surface notch portion 252 f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower dish ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the normal dish ball removal unit 260, the slider 262 is positioned at the moving end on the front side by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right edge side of the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is located immediately above the through hole. The through-hole (lower dish ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower dish ball extraction hole 202 a is closed by the lower dish ball extraction cover 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front cutout portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 is pressed rearward and moved backward against the biasing force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower dish ball removal button 263. It becomes. As the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower dish ball removal cover 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower dish ball removal cover 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will turn in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 located immediately above the through hole moves backward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower tray 202 can be discharged to the lower side of the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball extraction hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward by the biasing force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower dish ball removal lid 265 is rotated rearward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower dish 202 are continuously placed. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower dish ball removal hole 202a from this state, when the lower dish ball removal button 263 retracted from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. The When the lower dish ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the biasing force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower dish ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower dish ball removal lid 265 rotates and the right end side is positioned immediately above the through hole, and the lower dish ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower dish ball removal cover 265. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored in the lower dish 202.

[3-5-4d. Dish upper left decorative unit and Dish upper right decorative unit]
The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the dish unit 200.

  The dish upper left decorative unit 270 is a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper left decorative body 271, and the dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the center axis extending obliquely to the upper left at the left end and the center axis extending left and right at the right end, so that the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper left decorative body 271 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The dish upper left decorative substrate 273 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be decorated with light emission by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction of the dish upper left decorative body 271, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, A dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper portion of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, so that the semicylinder is twisted. Is formed. This dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative board 278. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right so as to follow the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full color LEDs, and the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish upper right decorative body 276, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4e. Dish lower left decorative unit and Dish lower right decorative unit]
The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively. It is done. The dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the dish lower right decoration unit 285 cooperate with the dish upper left decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The dish lower left decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends left and right and has translucency. The dish lower left decorative body 281, and a dish lower left reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the dish lower left decorative body 281, And a dish lower left decorative board 283 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 extends in a curved line so as to move forward and move downward as it goes from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper left and rear at the left end and the center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that the half cylinder is bent. The dish lower left decorative body 281 has a left end formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc is changed so that the dish lower left decorative body 281 becomes thinner toward the left end side. The dish lower left decorative body 281 is milky white.

  The dish lower left reflector 282 is inserted into the dish lower left decorative body 281 from behind, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. The dish lower left decorative substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower left decorative body 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower left decorative body 281 can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is positioned below the left end of the dish upper left decoration unit 270, and the right end of the dish center lower decoration body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. In the dish lower left decorative unit 280, the left end of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower left decorative unit 280 does not have a rib in the longitudinal direction of the dish lower left decorative body 281, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower left decorative board 283 are caused to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish lower left decorative body 281 is exposed. The light emission can be decorated almost uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The dish lower right decoration unit 285 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending right and left and has a translucent dish right lower decoration body 286, and a dish lower right decoration body 286 attached to the rear side of the dish lower right decoration body 286. A reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative board 288 mounted on the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are provided.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as it goes from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging part 252a on the right side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the dish upper left decorative body 271 and the dish upper right decorative body 276, with the central axis extending slightly diagonally to the upper right rear at the right end, The central axis extends to the left and right, and the semi-cylinder is bent. The dish lower right decorative body 286 has a spherical right end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the dish lower right decorative body 286 becomes thinner toward the right end side. The dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed at a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288. The dish lower right decorative substrate 288 is formed in a long and narrow strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the dish lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are full color LEDs, and the dish lower right decorative body 286 can be decorated by emitting light.

  In the state where the dish lower right decoration unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decoration unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Continuation with the right end of. In the dish lower right decorative unit 285, the right end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be embedded in the door frame 3. Since the dish lower right decorative unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the dish lower right decorative body 286, when the plurality of LEDs on the dish lower right decorative board 288 are caused to emit light, the dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided. It is possible to decorate the entire front surface of the lamp substantially uniformly and to make it appear that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advance / retreat direction of the effect operation buttons. FIG. 68A is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68B is a perspective view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 300 is provided at the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and participates in the production by the player operating when the player participation type production is executed. It is something that can be done. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 with respect to the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is disposed in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, an outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303 a, and the rotation operation unit 302. It is comprised with the annular | circular shaped outer periphery press operation part 303b arrange | positioned between inner periphery.

  The production operation unit 300 is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 accommodated in the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. A ring-shaped production operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the production operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the production operation ring 330. An operation ring transmission gear 350 that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear attachment member 351 that rotatably attaches the operation ring transmission gear 350 to the operation unit base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and an effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330 An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation part relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation part base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The production operation unit cover unit 310 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open.

  The production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a semispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semicircular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from behind in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of emitting light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 mounted from behind in the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 are attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light forward. The dish center lower decoration board 316 with which a plurality of LEDs which can irradiate is mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the back in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side is the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed at the upper edge extending in a semicircular arc shape at the front part is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a at the lowest part when assembled in the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward so that the shape in plan view is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and the unit front cover 312 is formed at the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a that extends in a semicircular arc shape so that a semicircular arc that bulges forward is along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a front lower portion of the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A dish center lower decorative body 312b extending in a semicircular arc shape so that the bulged semicircular arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 divide a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extend in a semicircular shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a bent shape. The dish center lower decorative body 312b extends in a semicircular arc shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b is slightly thinner than the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. In the state where the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. When assembled in the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish center upper decorative body 312a are continuous with the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left edge of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, respectively. The left and right ends of 312b are continuous with the right end of the dish lower left decoration unit 280 and the left edge of the dish lower right decoration unit 285, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about ½ of the full width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light toward the front (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a can be decorated by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular arc shape that bulges forward, and is inserted into the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear and attached. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decoration board 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be decorated by emitting light.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 while extending in a semicircular shape. When the LED on the center upper decorative board 314 and the LED on the dish lower central decorative board 316 are caused to emit light, each of them can be light-decorated substantially uniformly and can appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  In the state in which the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201 and the lower dish 202. In addition, the production operation unit cover unit 310 includes a plate center upper decorative body 312a that is continuous with a plate left upper decorative body 271 and a plate upper right decorative body 276, and a plate center lower decorative body 312b is a plate left lower decorative body 281 and a dish right The lower decorative body 286 is continuous. Thereby, the production operation unit 300 is made conspicuous, and the appearance is improved by the integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the production operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the production operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is attached to the production operation unit of the upper plate body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape that is open at the top.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in a box shape having an outer shape of a substantially cubic shape, and has a main body 321 that is open at the top, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality (four in this case) of leg portions 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper attachment formed on the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. And a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed such that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 therein. In the main body 321, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall from the lower side, and the portion where the vibration speaker 354 is attached on the lower surface is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354. The vibration can be amplified, and the vibration can be converted into sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

  A leg portion 361 b of the button unit base 361 in the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. In addition, the main body 321 is formed with a through-hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 at the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The main body 321 has a rotation drive unit 340 attached to the outside of the left side wall and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The flange portion 322 has a diameter that substantially matches the inner periphery of the upper central decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. On the upper surface of the flange portion 322, the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the decoration board cover 353 are attached, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of leg portions 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear attachment member to attach the operation ring transmission gear so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending in the left-right direction. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. Under the 322, it is exposed to the outside.

  In the state where the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is positioned slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached in contact with the lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production control ring]
The production operation ring 330 of the production operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71A is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from above, and FIG. 71B is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from below. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation portion base 320 and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by the player. The production operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) that is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and an inner diameter that is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In this embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring attachment base 331 attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation part base 320, an annular rotation base 332 that is rotatably mounted on the ring attachment base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of 332 and are rotatably attached to the ring mounting base 331 about an axis extending vertically, and the upward movement of the rotating base 332 is attached to the ring mounting base 331. And a ring retaining member 334 that regulates.

  Further, the production operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and the lower ring outer cover 335. A ring outer lower cover 336 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and an inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and constitute a part of the rotation operation unit 302. A ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

  The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320 and has an inner diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 has a mounting portion 331a on which the rotation base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge, and is spaced apart in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. Boss portion 331b for projecting in a cylindrical shape upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions and rotatably mounting bush 333, and spaced apart in the circumferential direction on the outer side of mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. A plurality of through holes 331c penetrating vertically. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

  The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332 a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward as it goes toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. When assembled in the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state assembled to the rendering operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed three-dimensionally on the outer upper surface part 335a in which the circular arc that forms the outer and upper part in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. A decorative portion 335b, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Yes. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of ¼ of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attaching portion 335 c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335 a and is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc that forms the outer and lower part of the circular shape extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and centrally from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b. An outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc that forms an inner portion and an upper portion in a circular shape extends in an annular shape, and a cylinder that extends downward from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel to the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and a plurality of inner cover attachment portions 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical surface portion 337 b has a cylindrical inner diameter that is the same as the inner diameter of the rotation base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface part 335a, the outer lower surface part 336a, and the inner surface part 337a constitute a part of a range of 1/2 or more of a circle, and the whole becomes a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be decorated with light emission by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 73A is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 73B is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the back. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the right front side, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as seen from the left front side. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 that is attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 that is attached to the rear side of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects leftward. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350 345, a transmission gear 344 and a transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with a rotational drive base, and are covered from the left side of the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344 and the transmission detection gear member 345. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 348 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and extends in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. Yes. The second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345 a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a larger diameter than the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b), and protrudes leftward from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a. And a plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345 a meshes with the second gear 344 b of the transmission gear 344 and meshes with the drive side gear portion 350 b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple of the interval between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Thereby, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It is like that. Thereby, the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotary drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the rotation operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate by causing the operation ring drive motor 342 to rotate the drive gear 343 forward and backward within a predetermined rotation angle range. it can.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. Therefore, the operation ring drive is performed in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the player's rotation operation. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operational feeling corresponding to the content of the player participation type effect or a click feeling.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits the rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330. The bearing portion 325 is rotatably attached.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the rotation detection unit 340 detects transmission by rotating integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a. A spur gear-like drive side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles with the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350 a is constricted in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation shaft of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above, and the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320, so that the operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320. It is done.

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a is engaged with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b is engaged. The rotation detection unit 340 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Stage control ring decoration board]
The effect operation ring decoration board 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 in the operation unit base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

  The production operation ring decoration substrate 352 is formed in a shape in which an annulus is divided into front and rear, a front decoration substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle It is comprised by the back decoration board | substrate 352b formed in the elongate strip shape which has arc shape. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs on the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decoration board 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative board cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form, similar to the production operation ring decorative board 352, and covers the front decorative board 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The stage operation ring decoration board 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface thereof, thereby allowing the decoration board cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to pass through the through-hole 331c. The cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 can be decorated with light emission from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration such that an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. 69 and FIG. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sound such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as sound, sound effects, music, and the like by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. The vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire presentation operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player will feel as if the production operation unit 300 has trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with more various effects.

  The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information and vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, when resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, the hardness, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency is input. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variation in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb variations in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (sweep) eight times in one cycle for about 1 second in units of 1 Hz. This is intermittently performed by sweeping for 1 second and inputting again after 1 second.

  In the assembly work of the gaming machine, for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated. Based on that. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the gaming machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the gaming machine with the RAM clear switch operated), the main control board The 1310X transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to a peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs vibration speaker operation confirmation processing for performing inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm sound (sound) such as voice and music from the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing, and can also confirm vibration of the presentation operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. .

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the top and front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as seen from the front and bottom. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The press operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a columnar center press operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer periphery press operation unit 303b formed to cover the outer periphery of the center press operation unit 303a. ing.

  The production operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged on the object with the button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward in a columnar shape, and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 and a pair of guide shafts 362 are attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. The disc-shaped lifting base 364 and the pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 and has an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotating shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 mounted so as to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mounted on the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting / lowering driving motor 367, and the lifting / lowering driving gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 that is rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and a lift cam drive gear member that is rotated by the driven gear 369 and is rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough. 370, elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are coupled and the central shaft 66 is inserted so as to be rotatable and is rotated so as to cover the elevating cam member 371 for elevating the elevating base 364, the elevating drive gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above. A disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Further, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362. A central button main body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the central button main body 373 and the lifting base 364 and biasing the central button main body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the central button main body 373 A central button cover 375 is formed on the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a central button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button body 373 and the central button cover 375 constitute a central pressing operation portion 303a.

  In addition, the production operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion outside the central button body 373 on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 in which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. An outer peripheral board cover 378 that is attached to the lifting base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and cover the outer periphery of the central button main body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer periphery of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer periphery decorative lens 379 that is arranged on the outer periphery side above the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 and has a three-dimensional decoration, and the outer periphery and the upper surface of the outer periphery decoration lens 379 are moved up and down. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 and having a central button cover 375 facing upward at the center. Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral board cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the button operation base unit 361 is attached to the button unit base 361 and the lift cam drive gear member 370. And a lift detection sensor 382 that detects the lift of the lift base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape and a plurality of legs 361b projecting downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 has an outer diameter that is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lift cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 attached to the upper surface, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lift detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is installed. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg 361 b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are respectively attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a position that is half the diameter of the base body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal bars. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The upper base 363 has an outer diameter that is about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361 and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The lifting base 364 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b penetrating vertically with a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass through in the center, And a pair of guide pins 364d projecting so as to face each other into the center hole 364b in the vicinity of the lower end of the standing wall 364c. Yes. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are attached to be rotatable around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided to be movable up and down by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 through the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the standing wall 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and has a space in which the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364. Forming. The elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

  The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-like gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and to which the lower end of the raising / lowering cam member 371 is connected, and a gear portion 370a. And a lift detection piece 370c that is notched at two locations facing each other and is notched and is detected by the lift detection sensor 382. The raising / lowering cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting the central shaft 366 through the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the columnar outer peripheral surface and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the shaft center in the vicinity of the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward in parallel with the axis from the end, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  The elevating cam member 371 includes a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The raising / lowering cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the raising / lowering cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pins 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

  The central button body 373 includes a cylindrical tube portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tube portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts passing through the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which 362 is slidably inserted, a central port 373d penetrating with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the standing wall 364c of the elevating base 364 at the center of the bottom 373b, and downward from the bottom 373b A pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a cylindrical shape and are inserted into the button spring 374 are provided.

  The central button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button body 373 is formed such that a bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and an upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central port 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends short downward, and the lower end of the central port 373d abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364, thereby restricting the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the standing wall portion 364 c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central port 373 d of the central button body 373.

  The central button body 373 is biased upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed such that their lower ends pass through the lifting base 364 and extend downward, and screws with washers inserted into the lower ends are attached. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, so that the upward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 (the lower end of the central port 373d) abuts the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate through 364 and protrude downward. The central button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a lower urging force than the elevating spring 365.

  The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having a diameter substantially the same as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the central button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylinder portion 373 a in the central button main body 373.

  In the central button decoration board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can decorate the central button cover 375 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are full-color LEDs. The outer periphery button decoration board 377 can make the outer periphery decoration lens 379 and the outer periphery button cover 380 emit light decoration by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The outer peripheral board cover 378 extends in a cylindrical shape upward from the inner periphery of the base board portion 378a. A cylindrical portion 378b covering the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed to be transparent.

  In the outer periphery decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction as it goes upward are arranged in a row at a constant interval in the circumferential direction. The outer periphery decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378 a in the outer periphery substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical cylindrical portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the cylindrical portion 380a toward the center. As for the outer periphery button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical part 380a is attached to the raising / lowering base 364. As shown in FIG. The annular portion 380 b has an inner diameter that is substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378 b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  When the production operation button unit 360 is assembled, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the guide pin 364d of the lift base 364 is in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. It is inserted from below into the engaging portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the lift base 364 is in the lowered position where it has moved downward, and the pair of lift springs 365 is compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is positioned at the upward movement end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, when assembled in the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 79, etc.).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward in this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A) and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body 373 is moved. The pressure detection piece 373e is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation portion 303a is detected. In a state in which the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height that substantially matches the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  In this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  When the lift drive gear 368 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367 in the lowered position, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 engaged with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a seen in front in FIG. 78 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the first position. The cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the lifting base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the two cams 371d extend vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the urging force of the elevating spring 365 moves the guide pin 364d along the second cam 371d, and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the lifting base 364 is raised to a raised position.

  In the raised position state, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the driving of the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the raised position, the upper end of the upright wall portion 364c of the lifting base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the lifting base 364 is restricted. In the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the lowering position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When assembled in the production operation unit 300 and moved to the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of projecting larger than the upper surface of the production operation ring 330 (see FIG. 81B and the like). reference).

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303 a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the raised position, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The center button body 373 comes into contact with the lifting base 364 by moving downward against the force. In a state where the central button body 373 is in contact with the lifting base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protrudes downward from the lifting base 364, but the lifting base 364 is the button unit base 361. Therefore, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  When the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the central button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

  As described above, when the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the central button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) is pressed downward with a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved up and down via the outer peripheral button cover 380. The lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 by moving downward against the urging force of 365. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364. However, since the central button cover 375 (central pressing operation portion 303a) protrudes upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button body The pressure detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the lift base 364, and the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the raising / lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise by the operation button raising / lowering drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the biasing force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  When the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b along with the rotation of the lift cam member 371, the downward movement of the lift base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation By stopping the rotation of the lift cam member 371 by the button lift drive motor 367, the original lowered position is obtained.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 in the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 attached in the board box 391.

  The board box 391 has a motor cover part 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when the board box 391 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, a production operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button lifting / lowering drive motor 367, the central button decorative board 376, the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, the press detection sensor 381, the lift detection sensor 382, and the tray unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 are relayed. Yes.

[3-5-5j. Effect of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81 and the like. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. It is a front view of a dish unit when an operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a located at the center of the rotation operating unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit disposed between the central pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operating unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation portion 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in an inclined state so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is lowered. Accordingly, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the normal operation state, the production operation unit 300 has a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79 and the like).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the left side by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating normal rotation and reverse rotation within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. Unlike the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350 and rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is smaller than the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b that are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. The interval is not an integer multiple. Thereby, the 1st rotation detection sensor 347 and the 2nd rotation detection sensor 348 are constituted so that detection piece 345b may not be detected at the same timing.

  In this embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b after the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. . On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates counterclockwise in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) according to the order in which the detection pieces 345b are detected. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightly assisted. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation portion 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state in which the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. .

  Thereby, since the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated to rotate in a manner that is easy for the player to perform. Sexuality is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lowered position or the raised position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a car handle.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. In addition, since the plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302 in the production operation ring decorative substrate 352, the plurality of LEDs arranged in sequence are sequentially arranged in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to decorate only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating. Thereby, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), the production operation unit 300 has a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 with an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 in a normal state. It is in a state of a lowered position slightly protruding upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation portion 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380). The pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In this normal (downward position) state, even if the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b of the pressing operation portion 303 is pressed downward, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b (outer periphery button cover 380) does not move downward, and pressure detection is performed. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

  When the lifting cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in a normal state, the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 is detached from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Thus, the pressing operation portion 303, together with the lifting base 364, protrudes upwardly by the urging force of the pair of lifting springs 365 and enters the raised position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In this raised position state, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is positioned higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upwardly from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

  When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303 a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation portion 303 a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303 b are the rotation operating portion 302. The height is approximately the same as the top surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

  Further, when the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation portion 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation portion 303a remains protruding above the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b and the center pressing operation portion 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation portion 302 (see FIG. 81 (a)). . In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect pressure.

  As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the lower moving end regardless of the lowered position or the raised position. Yes. Accordingly, it is possible to prompt the player to firmly press the center pressing operation portion 303a, and therefore it is possible to attract attention to the operation of the effect operation portion 301 in the player participation type effect. , The player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated. Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier with the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 being in the way. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84. 82A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front side of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative substrate 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402; A door frame left side decoration body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and opens forward. The door frame left side decorative board 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative board 402a and a left side lower decorative board 402b. Has been. In the door frame left side decorative substrate 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative board 402 can light up and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through-hole 403a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left-side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 in the state assembled to the door frame 3 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right front portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of side window decorations 410b capable of emitting light disposed in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or is playing with the right pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 that is attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extends vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window decoration parts 410b attached to the front surface and extending in a cylindrical shape forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the part corresponding to the interior decoration part 410b, and the side window interior decoration part decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and the plurality of side window interior decoration members 412 And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window decoration portion 410b.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and is attached to the right side reflector 415 extending vertically and the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through-hole 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes the side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical direction and the front / rear direction so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. The door frame is formed with a through-hole 417a that extends in a shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms the side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is opened rearward. The side window decorative member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three here) of side window decorative portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The side window decorative member 410b of the side window decorative member 412 is formed in a truncated cone shape having a slightly smaller outer diameter on the front end side than the rear end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window decorative member 412, the front end of the side window decorative portion 410 b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window decorative member 412 is attached to the upper portion of the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from the lower position with respect to the vertical center. The side window decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

  The side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window decoration member 412, and on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411, the side window decoration member 412. It attaches to the site | part which becomes the back of the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 are full-color LEDs. In the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape on the top, bottom, left, and right around the axis of the side window decoration part 410b in the rear part of each of the side window decoration parts 410b. Has been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 partitions the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 is vertically extended at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wave shape that moves forward and then moves backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed through which the LEDs on the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends up and down and front and rear, the rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through-hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the door frame and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side inner panel 417 is flat and extends vertically and front and rear. The rear side extends vertically linearly, and the front side extends in a wave shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through-hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction and formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decoration member 412 and the door frame. The rear side of the right side decorative board 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be covered. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative board 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and includes a right side upper decorative board 418a and a right side lower decorative board 418b. Has been. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative board 418 can light up and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in milky white having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward extends in a wave shape up and down along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed such that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

  The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3, and a portion of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a columnar fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The door frame right side unit 410 has a front end (front side) that extends forward in a wave shape so that a quarter portion from the top projects forward, and is formed in a partition shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is provided with a cylindrical (columnar) side window decorative portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413 to emit light. Thus, the side window decoration part 410b can be decorated with light emission. Then, by decorating the side window decoration part 410b with light emission, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LED of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b is turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be viewed from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the three interior side window decoration portions 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b can block the line of sight of the player located nearby, It is possible to make it difficult for a player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to feel like being seen by other players, so that other players can play games without hesitation. .

  Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are caused to emit light by the LED of the side window decoration portion decoration board 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let At this time, since the three side window decorative portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is emitted in a band shape and a radial shape. It can be made difficult to see, and it can be made difficult to look into the game area 5a from other players such as the neighbors. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult to look inside the game area 5a, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, so that other players are interested in being noticed. It is possible to prevent feelings of discomfort from being unable to devote themselves to the game and to feel uncomfortable due to mistakes being induced, making the game more enjoyable by dedicating the player to the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 88A is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front top, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front bottom. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached to the upper side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451, and the upper front surface. The top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. Door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower ends of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 that is attached to the front center of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front surface of the top upper cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. I have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452; The top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, a lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and a door frame top Door frame top relay mounted near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 451a that extends to the left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from both the left and right ends of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. A forward projecting portion 451b projecting forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front ends go downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protrusion 451b on the right side when viewed from the front is also open upward.

  The top upper cover 452 is formed in substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451 in a front view. The top upper cover 452 is formed in a shape that covers the outer sides of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and connects the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top upper cover 452 protrudes most forward in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the left-right direction center toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. The opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which the semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top upper cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and are formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. As shown in FIG. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is vertically spaced between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and connect the front and rear ends and extend upward in a flat plate shape. A pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is attached between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative board 455 can light-decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can light-decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left-right direction. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can light-decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, respectively. A through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a position corresponding to each mounted LED.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is attached between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454 a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full range speaker and outputs sound such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surfaces of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay substrate 467 includes a door frame top center decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, a top central speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and the door frame base unit 100. This relays the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top upper cover 452, the front end is locked to the top upper cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in a state assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. Yes. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side through the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a front view of a door frame shown together with each decorative board. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the rendering operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire periphery.

  Dish left upper decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312 a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101 a Since 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration such that the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, and the door frame top central decoration. Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be decorated with light emission, It is possible to show the player the light emission effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is coaxially disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A doughnut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) two large dish central upper decorative body 312a and dish central lower decorative body 312b are attached two apart vertically and The door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side unit 41 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decorative body 312a and the dish lower central decorative body 312b. Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  As a result, in the dish unit 200, three donut-shaped members are lined up and down in the rotation operation section 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

  Further, the upper left decorative body 271, the upper right decorative body 276 of the dish, the lower left decorative body 281, the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and the lower central decorative body 312 b of the dish are arranged in half. The thickness of the tube-like tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the production operation unit 300, since it becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 that can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Accordingly, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 92 to 98. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. 97 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view in which the main body frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B used in the game. Is discharged to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 in front view. A main body frame upper hinge member 510, which is rotatably attached to the outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. A body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end of the base unit 500 on the left side when viewed from the front and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. A solid body 520.

  The main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a lower portion of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launcher 540 for driving a game ball B therein, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the main body frame base unit 500 A back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be opened and closed and covers the rear side of the game board 5; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member for guiding a main body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5 are provided.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in the shape of a box extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and has a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, and a first rail attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is spaced from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 The ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position of the tank rail 553 and the downstream end of the tank rail 553 It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame flanges 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame collars 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the door frame collar 652 or the outer frame collar 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame collar 652 attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is energized and urges the outer frame collar 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame collar 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 99A is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99B is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and the main body frame base 501 is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically, and guides the connection cable 503. A connecting cable guide member 502, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 about an axis extending in the front-rear direction and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a formed in a rectangle whose front view extends vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion slot 501b through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and a lower side of the game board insertion slot 501b and the game board 5 is placed. A placement unit 501c and a game board restricting part 501d that protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 501c and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear are provided.

  Moreover, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward at the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and a launching device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launching device 540, and a launching device mounting Cylinder insertion port 501f that penetrates forward and backward on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted, and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the game board mounting portion 501c in front view. A circular speaker opening 501g facing the front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in 620, and a main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and below the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted and the cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape rearward from the right side of the game board insertion slot 501b in the base main body 501a, and a locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and a back cover 640 is provided at the rear end. It is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends of the rear end of the base body 501a and the left end in front view on the rear surface of the base body 501a, and is used to attach the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. The upper hinge attaching part 501k and the lower hinge attaching part 501l are provided.

  The main body frame base 501 is a door for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted on the front surface of the base main body 501a. A frame opening switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (opened) with respect to the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 4 a is released from the pressing and can detect the opening of the door frame 3. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a is input to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. Further, the main body frame base 501 is attached with a main body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface of the base main body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch 4a is attached. It has been. When the main body frame 4 is opened (opened) with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame opening switch 4 b is released so that the opening of the main body frame 4 can be detected. A detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633.

  A game board lock member 505 is attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board mounting part 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 allows the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b to be detachable by enabling the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 501b to be restricted.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 is a flat guide body 502a that extends to the left and right, and protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends to the right from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and through the front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and left and right A plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a direction.

  The connecting cable guide member 502 has a length in the left-right direction that is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that the attachment shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Thereby, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinged) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-board of the door frame 3. Connected to the relay board 105.

  Then, the effect by the connection cable guide member 502 is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame base 501 so as to be able to rotate the hinge in the left-right direction. ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in parallel with the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is connected to the interface board 635 on the side connected to the connection cable guide member. The left and right directions of the plurality of through-holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being tightened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear side of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l and passes through the cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 to open the door frame relay board cover. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103 a of the door frame 3 is disposed on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, if the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated so as to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side attached to the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). It is formed (see FIG. 100 (b)).

  The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases. However, the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In this embodiment, the maximum angle of the open angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pushed rearward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side moves rearward about the attachment shaft 502c. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an open angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the door frame 3 from moving in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503. It is possible to prevent a malfunction from occurring.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is positioned closer to the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 holds the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 with the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame 3. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 can be pulled toward the central axis (axial core) side.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door frame passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and is centered on the central axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 rather than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The tangent line in contact with the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axial core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 and the angle intersecting the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. It is comprised so that. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) when the door frame 3 is opened and closed can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on main body frame]
The main body frame hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame hinge assembly 120 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame upper hinge member 510 has an upper hinge main body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate member is bent downward in an L shape, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape upward from the front end of the upper hinge main body 511. And a hinge pin 512 on the body frame that is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side when viewed from the front of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extending portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a portion that is bent downward and extends vertically in the upper hinge main body 511. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51 c of the outer frame hinge member 51 in the outer frame hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 from below.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 cooperates with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the body frame 4 as a door frame. 3 can be hingedly mounted.

[4-3. Body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably attached.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is provided with a portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 extending horizontally from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 521 extending horizontally and spaced downward. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the first hinge main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c in the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. A hinge hole 521a is provided. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521a is formed coaxially with the body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restriction piece 522b for extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and for restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. It is equipped with. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the body frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. It is done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, and to the main body frame 4, the door frame 3. Can be hingedly mounted.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 and 98. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view, with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion mold material.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and downward on the rear side of the portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( The unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from behind. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the five game areas 5a. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front face of the door frame 3.

  The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher attachment portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting ball 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and from the vicinity of the tip of the hitting ball 543 A launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  The ball launcher 540 is configured such that the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the launch position at the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is placed at the launch position of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the supplied state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting ball 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting ball 543 passes through the launch ball passage (see FIG. 39) of the launch passage portion 1012 including the launch rail 544, the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game area 5a. Be driven into.

  If the launched game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, as shown in FIG. 39, the space between the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 From the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened in the foul ball drop unit 150c of the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage 1014, and falls through the foul cover unit 150 from the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. It is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as seen from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a extending in the left-right direction with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a with the same width as the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A back plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end of the width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the back plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and the left plate portion 551b From the front of the lower side to the right It includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward of the L shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, a flange portion 551da is formed in the left-right direction so as to protrude rearward at a portion separated by a predetermined length from the lower side.

  The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a width substantially the same as the width of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends vertically with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. The payout base 551 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 at the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c.

  The payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f, and extends upward and downward. A unit 560 is attached. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes to the right at the upper part of the right side surface in front view of the inner plate portion 551f, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a ball tank 552 that is open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. A tank rail 553 which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Also, the payout base unit 550 has a first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the left and right directions at the upper end of the tank rail 553, and is spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view and on the upper end of the tank rail 553. A second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stopper member 557 attached near the left end in front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and has a horizontal direction that is approximately half the horizontal width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the right side in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a. The bottom surface of the sphere tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. The ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553 on the left end side.

  The tank rail 553 is molded from a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction on the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view that is slanted to the left and rear from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one depth from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to become the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward, thereby forming a single guide passage. Has been. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the single guiding passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the dispensing unit 560.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has an upper end of a portion extending straight to the left so that the height on the left end side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B so that it is more steep with respect to the horizontal than the bottom surface. It is inclined so that the left end side is lowered at a certain angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed on substantially the same surface. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is bent multiple times downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. Further, the tank rail 553 has a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopper member 557 attached to the upper end of a portion extending straight to the left.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth in the front-rear direction of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Is.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The end of one rail cover 554 is attached so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The sphere straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 111). By delaying the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B circulating in two upper and lower stages by the rectifying piece 556a and rectifying the flow so that it flows in a single stage on the downstream side, the flow in the tank rail 553 The ball is not clogged even if the height is lowered.

  The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidable in the left-right direction near the left end of the tank rail 553 when viewed from the front. , The opening at the bottom left end of the tank rail 553 is closed, and the game ball B can be prevented from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is downward as it goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times. A part of the plurality of bent portions is formed as a substrate housing portion 551aa to which the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 are attached. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded from a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from behind). And 10 external terminals of XCN10 are provided.))) And the substrate is accommodated so that its mounting surface is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 when the payout base 551 is viewed from the front. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 is horizontally oriented with its mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are mounted) facing downward. As seen from the front, the payout base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558 and attached to the board housing portion 551aa and covered with the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 is housed in a space formed by the substrate housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be viewed from the outside of the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm). In contrast, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm). When the frame ground substrate 559 is accommodated and attached inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is attached to the rear surface of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is seen. Is hidden due to the presence of the external terminal plate 558, but it is difficult to visually recognize, but of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. 1 can be visually recognized from the back surface (for example, refer to FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the ground terminal ECN3 is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. As described above, the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for once collecting the electromagnetic wave noise generated at various places and grounding (earth ground) to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. In accordance with an instruction from the payout control board 633, a payout device 580 that pays out one by one, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full ball path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the gaming balls B aligned in a line by one guide passage of the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 can flow, and a single ball pullout branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In a normal state, the game ball B is released from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball extraction passage 580b to the upper full ball path unit 600 side.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B released from the ball removal passage 580b separately. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full ball path unit 600, and is released from the ball extraction path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the board unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base unit 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. Is to do.

  The ball guide unit 570 has a guide passage 570a extending in a serpentine shape through which the game ball B can flow and has a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open forward and a front side of the guide unit base 571 is closed. The front guide passage front cover 572, the movable piece member 573 movable by the game ball B flowing in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of (see FIG. 111).

  The spherical guide unit 570 is formed such that the shape of the front view of the guide unit base 571 and the guide passage front cover 572 is a quadrangle extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide the guide unit base 571. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning back and forth between the widths in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guidance unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front-rear right direction and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B flows. Can be guided in a single row.

  In the vicinity of the upper part of the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached to an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outside of the front view of the guide passage 570a, and a part of the lower end projects into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and is not retracted and protrudes from the inside of the guide passage 570a when the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a. It becomes.

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball-cut detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 moves backward from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not projecting, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Accordingly, the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

  In the state where the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570 a is the discharge passage of the discharge device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering manner, the guiding passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are placed in the guiding passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 106 (a) is a rear sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. 106 (b) is a sectional view taken along the line AA in FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the payout vane, the payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be seen from the back of the payout device are described so as to be visible, and are the subject of explanation. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotational position of the payout blade, prevention of clogging of the balls, and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of dispensing device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side of the back plate 551e in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550. The payout device 580 has a payout device main body 581 having a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow and a ball extraction passage 580b branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. A flat-type dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be viewed from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear cover 582.

  The payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and has a payout motor 584 whose rotation shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and a rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur-gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached, a spur gear-like shape that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device front lid 583. Of the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The transmission gear 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-like payout gear 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587 and the payout gear 588a extend outward. A payout gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and paying out between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 A payout vane 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that is attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581 are detected. Blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and is step-driven. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the rotation shaft rotates stepwise at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in this embodiment). That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation. A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The payout blade 589 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, the payout device main body 581 and the back of the payout device. The ball removal movable piece 592 attached to the lid 582 so as to open and close the ball removal passage 580b at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a, and the ball removal movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball removal passage 580b is closed. And a ball ejecting lever 593 that is slidable in the vertical direction by a dispensing device main body 581 and a dispensing device rear lid 582. In addition, the ball removal movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in opaque white. The ball release lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

  The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose plan view extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opened upward at a position to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to move gradually to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about ３ of the left and right width and extends downward substantially vertically so as to go to the center (rotary axis) of the delivery vane 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the outer periphery of the payout blade 589 Is extended downward in a concentric circular arc shape with the discharge vane 589, and vertically extends to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the discharge vane 589.

  In the payout passage 580a, a payout detection sensor 591 is disposed below the payout blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch.

  The ball extraction passage 580b is branched at a portion that extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side when viewed from the back. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension, and a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball extraction passage 580b. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 are opposed to each other on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to protrude rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball extraction passage 580b. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a branch from the ball extraction passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a position about 1/3 from above. It is formed at the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed obliquely upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to constitute the side wall of the ball extraction passage 580b. The ball extraction movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right in the rear view of the part where the payout passage 580a in the payout device main body 581 extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are disposed in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three plate-like detection pieces 588b having an arcuate shape extending outward at an interval of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The payout blade 589 is disposed between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having a circular arc shape extending concentrically outwardly from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends in the payout passage 580a from the upper side toward the rotation axis and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage B is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout vane 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed with an arc having a radius that is slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed with an arc on the outer peripheral portion of the columnar shape. By forming the ball storage portions 589b at equal intervals, the blade pieces 589a serving as peaks and the ball storage portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a and rotate in the clockwise direction when viewed from the rear. Thereby, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

  The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are attached coaxially by a payout device rear lid 582 and a payout device front lid 583 so as to be integrally rotatable. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a square shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the dispensing passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 has a depth in the front-rear direction that is smaller than a gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is possible to project into the ball extraction passage 580b or retreat out of the ball extraction passage 580b through the gap between the two.

  The ball release lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction in the rear left view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 passes through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and protrudes backward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can come into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 106). Thus, the ball removal can be performed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated, the game ball B that has been in the state of daisy chaining upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 However, it will flow down to the ball removal passage 580b side over the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible.

  In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

  Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotating position of dispensing blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-like drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-like first transmission gear 586 (meshing with the drive gear 585). Tooth number Z1: 20), spur gear-like second transmission gear 587 (tooth number Z2: 20) meshing with the first transmission gear 586, spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a (tooth number) meshing with the second transmission gear 587 Z3: 24) and a dispensing gear member 588 having a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, and the like. When the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is driven to rotate, the rotation is paid via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotational speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotational speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation based on the mechanism. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 360 steps ( = 18 degrees × 20 steps))), the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when one rotation (360 degrees rotation), 4.5 turns. It will rotate an extra degree.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so that the dispensing blade 589 rotates once (360 degrees). It is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 step by step 53.333 (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and the stepping drive to the dispensing motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degrees rotation) of the dispensing blade 589 is performed. The number of steps that is the number of times is not an integer.

  That is, in this embodiment, three ball storage portions 589b are formed at equal intervals on the payout vane 589, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to step driving. The delivery blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the delivery gear 588a of the delivery gear member 588 (that is, the rotational axis of the delivery motor 584 is 1). Since the payout vane 589 rotates 6.75 degrees when it is stepped (rotated 18 degrees), one game ball B can be sent out every 120 degrees of rotation. In order to rotate the blades 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in this embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, is set as the number of times of step driving to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, whereby the payout blade 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)), so that the rotation position of the payout vane 589 reaches the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it rotates (360 degrees), but only one game ball B may be paid out. For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, every time one game ball B is paid out, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation that is an integer rounded up to the nearest decimal point, as described above. The payout vane 589 is rotated more than 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 degrees)) and paid out each time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the blade 589 is performed to increase the accuracy of the rotational position of the payout blade 589.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout vane 589. Each time it is paid out, the accumulated error can be reset. Thus, even if an error occurs every time a game ball is paid out due to the influence of cigarette dust, dust, etc., the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an error from occurring in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  In addition, as described above, the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that each game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Naturally, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout vane 589 is Detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 resets when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotational position of the ball feed rotating unit that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the positions where the dust and dust adhere are distributed to the dust and dust. On the other hand, a strong dispensing device 580 can be provided. The payout device 580 has a single payout passage 580a as described above. For this reason, when compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment when the payout speed of the game balls is the same. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 in comparison with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is also doubled, the probability that cigarette dust or dust adheres to the dispensing blade 589 is high.

  In this embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the dispensing blade 589 exceeds one rotation, so that one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 is equivalent to the 54-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. If the control is determined and managed as a set to be managed, an angular difference of 4.5 degrees with respect to one rotation of the dispensing blade 589 occurs every 54 steps of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584. For example, 80 sets In this case, the angle difference is finally increased to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of game balls B to be paid out increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three plate-like detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120 degree regions having a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60 degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588 b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the dispensing control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. As a management range, a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed is used as one game ball B. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, first, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed in the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588. Since this is a state, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as the light shielding range (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 rotating integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). The 60 ° region where the detection piece 588b is not formed is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is not cut off by the detection piece 588b, so that the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps as the light receiving range. (Corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  In other words, in this embodiment, the rotation gear rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is detected with the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 as the light-shielding range and the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is set as the light receiving range and is managed by 18 step rotation including the 9 step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. This is done by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). Since the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, a 60-degree region (light-shielding range) in which the detection piece 588b is formed, A 60-degree region (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method for setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 has a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has changed the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state ("first edge "Detected state") is set with the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 from this point A by 5 steps, as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout vane 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 for four steps from the origin, as a B point. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state where the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is changed from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In a region where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from point A to the origin and point B, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the above-described dispensing gear). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed.

  The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which has rotated the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 for nine steps from the point B, as the point A described above again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in the region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. In the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of FIG.

  Here, the control of the dispensing device 580 by the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). In the payout control side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady process when executing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly confirms whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation process. The payout control board 633 detects the rotation of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation, that is, this time and the previous time. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in a state of blocking or non-blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having a width of 8 bits. After bit shifting one bit at a time, when both the current and previous confirmation results are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or this time (For example, one of the confirmation results of this time and the previous time is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the blade rotation detection sensor) When the detection piece 588b is not blocking the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  In this manner, the payout control board 633 updates and creates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms for switching the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation in the history creation process. The payout control board 633 executes origin setting processing for setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 for five steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the delivery blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected by the detection piece. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having a width of 8 bits, the detection piece 588b has the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A. 000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis of the optical fiber is changed from the cut-off state to the non-cut-off state (first edge detection state). . When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 advances from the point A to the origin, the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width is set to 00111111B. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, and extracts the data from the previous 8 times to the previous 5 times as the calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result is 00110000B by the first mask processing), and the second judgment value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second mask processing for the extracted data, so that the previous five times from the history information. Data is extracted as an operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process). When the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotation position of the payout vane 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotational position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotational position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

  In addition, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is set to point B, and the rotational axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing vane 589 is located at the point B (that is, exceeding the light shielding range). This processing is finished as it is for a total of 13 steps with the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 as the point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates for a total of 13 steps passes. An origin detection prohibition time for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589 is provided.

  The payout control board 633 switches the excitation of the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing a payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 107, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, and sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. Is set to 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is changed to B. The time taken as a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the discharge motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the B point (that is, the light shielding range is reduced). The time when the rotation position of the delivery vane 589 again becomes point A again is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one game ball B is paid out. By performing 18 step rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 step rotation) is obtained.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, No. 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is rotated 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps, so that one game ball is paid out. ing. In a pachinko machine installed in a pachinko parlor, it is inevitable that tobacco dust or dust adhering to the game ball will adhere to the inside of the dispensing device. In addition, since the dispensation device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensation device that is strong against cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, since the payout motor rotates 30 degrees by driving the payout motor for 4 steps and is set to pay out one game ball, an accurate operation can be expected. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the position at which tobacco dust and dust adhere is fixed and easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball omission prevention]
Next, ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention will be described with reference to FIG. Here, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the dispensing motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, the ball pulling lever 593 is positioned at the rising end so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. It can be done. When ball removal is performed, the ball removal lever 593 is raised so that the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated. At this time, in a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, a part of the inner wall of the passage that forms the payout passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the payout vane 589 as shown in FIG. Are in a state where a total of four game balls B are parked over the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r projecting toward the ball extraction passage 580b with a predetermined distance dimension. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 is present). It is a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging preventive portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a has a predetermined distance from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and protrudes toward the ball extraction passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stays in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B that stops stops from the ball clogging prevention portion 581r toward the ball removal passage 580b. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball removal passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the above-mentioned main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball extraction passage 580b. In this way, a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stops on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r in a state of protruding toward the ball extraction passage 580b (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The length of a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball extraction path 580b), and the width of the ball extraction path 580b is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down. Be able to.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has an upper surface and a passage inner wall surface that forms the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane and has a right downward inclined surface in a rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if it collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a right downward inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clog prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and the downstream side of the left end side of the ball clog prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from bouncing due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a from causing a ball blockage in the vicinity of the left end of the ball blockage prevention unit 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is moved along the ball removal path (the body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the flow path to the side) is restricted to a width that allows one game ball B to flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b, as indicated by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. Thus, clogging of the balls can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent clogging of the balls when removing the balls. In this embodiment, although the width of the ball extraction passage 580b varies depending on the rotation position of the dispensing vane 589, it is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in places where the width of various passages is narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) and slightly narrower (eg, 21 mm) than the diameter of the game ball.

  Next, a description will be given of prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584. In a state where the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589. And the game ball B is stopped in the payout passage 580a in a state in which the following game balls B are in contact with the game balls B. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left as it goes downward from the upstream end, and slightly to the right from there. After being bent obliquely downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the discharge vane 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 ( When the rotational position of the payout vane 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 follows the game ball B. A rightward force (that is, a force rotating in the clockwise direction) is applied to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 by the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B to be played.

  In such a state, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the dispensing motor 584 naturally rotates in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589 and is accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (send out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will drop out.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by the rotation axis of the payout blade 589 even if the payout motor 584 rotates naturally in the clockwise direction with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout vane 589 in the rear view is formed so as to be able to stop by 6-step rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and 108 (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. , The game ball B that comes into contact with the game ball B housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 has a point S1 that comes into contact with the side wall of the payout passage 580a and the outer periphery of the blade piece 589a having the arc shape of the payout blade 589. Of the surface, the side closer to the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed (that is, the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed, and the ball housing portion in which the game ball B following this ball housing portion 589b is not housed Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a that connects the portion 589b and the S2 point that contacts the ball storage portion 589b side where the game ball B is stored from the center of the outer peripheral surface. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the discharge blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 can be stopped by rotating six steps from the origin of the discharge blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stopped, the payout motor 584 is rotated by 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), it is in a state where it has advanced by rotating 2 steps in the light shielding range (9 steps) beyond the point B which has been rotated 4 steps from the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the remaining 7 step rotation + 5 step rotation from the point A because it proceeds by rotating 2 steps out of 9 steps), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, and the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout vane 589 flows down (sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotated and advanced by 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of balls from which the game balls B are paid out does not occur.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 receives the payout command from the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 as described above. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery after power recovery after a momentary power failure (momentary power failure), first, the operation of returning the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin by controlling the payout motor 584 is not performed. As described above, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout vane 589 (rotating 6 steps) and stopped, an excessive number of game balls B are paid out. This is to prevent this.

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 109 is a modified example of the payout device, and is a cutaway rear sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 including the four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with the radio wave sensor. 109 is a rear cross-sectional view of the payout unit of the payout unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and is given the same reference numerals as in FIG. When the payout blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, the above-described payout gear member 588 has a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is defined as the light-shielding range as the 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by an 18-step rotation including a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and a 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the 45-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 18 steps for paying out one game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, respectively.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is provided with the payout detection sensor 591 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch and detects the passing of the game ball B. When the game ball B is affected by the radio wave, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B is not passing due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the payout motor By controlling to rotate the 584 rotation shaft excessively, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such an illegal act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave”), as shown in FIG. 109, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided near the upper part of the payout detection sensor 591. And can be configured. When the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633, the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is irradiated based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594. The rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310X receives the radio goto notification command having an 8-bit width from the payout control board 633, the radio goto notification command is changed from 8 bits to 16 bits and the radio goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume. Flowing from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.) and setting various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode flashing red) The information is shaped into a content that can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs in the warning notification light emission mode. To do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594 'which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch may be used. A detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′ is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 receives a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact ball passing sensor 594 ′. Based on this, it can be configured that it can be determined that some fraud has been made when the number of game balls B paid out does not match. When the payout control board 633 determines that any fraud has been made, the payout motor 584 stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 in an emergency and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310X. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310X receives the goto notification command having an 8-bit width from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X sets the goto notification command from an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width and sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume and from various speakers. While flowing, various LEDs are set in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and are shaped into a content that can be notified of a goto and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the peripheral display board 1600 displays a large message “abnormality has occurred” on the effect display device 1600, and controls various LEDs to the warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation shaft by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is connected to the rotation gear via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. , The delivery blade 589 can be rotated, and the rotation shaft of the delivery motor 584 is rotated at a low speed to rotate the rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The speed may be increased via the second transmission gear 587 ′ and the payout gear 588a ′)) of the payout gear member 588 so that the payout blade 589 can be rotated. By doing so, the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drivings to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different. As a result, the contact position between the game ball and the payout blade 589 is different each time, so that the positions where dust and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, when the speed increasing ratio of the rotation transmitting member described above that causes such a positioning error is set, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is reset by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotary shaft of the payout blade 589, and the accumulated error is accumulated to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is ensured. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increasing ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotational position of the payout vane 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, so By dispersing the position where the water adheres, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dirt.

[4-7-3. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full sphere path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached to the lower side of the rear surface of the back base left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 below the payout device 580 from the rear. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is used to guide the game ball B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full sphere path unit 610. The upper full sphere path unit 600 is formed in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically.

  The upper full sphere path unit 600 is attached to the dispensing base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full base 601 that is open on the rear side, and a box-like shape that is attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and is open on the front side. The upper full tank cover 602 and a discharge device pressing member 603 that is rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and can press the discharge device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side when viewed from the front, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

  The upper full ball path unit 600 is opened upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends upward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a and the upper paying ball receiving passage 600a communicate with each other, extend about 3/4 of the full width to the right in front view, and extend downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal payout passage 600c that extends downward from the left side of the front view from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b and opens downward on the lower surface, and an upper upper portion that is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward on the lower surface, and in the vicinity of the right end in front view on the upper surface. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 111).

  The upper full tank path unit 600 has an upper normal payout passage 600c, an upper full tank payout path 600d, and an upper full ball discharge path 600e that are open in a line from the left side when viewed from the front. In the state where the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball removal passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thereby, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank discharge passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the above. The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 is released downward through the upper ball extraction passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550 and attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game ball B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the board unit 620 side. The lower full sphere path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal full passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c. The lower full tank base extends in the front-rear direction and is opened upward. 611, a lower full cover 612 that is attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611, a lower normal discharge passage 610a that is attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around a front and rear axis. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharge passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are attached. A closing spring 614.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout path 610a, a lower full tank payout path 610b, and a lower full ball discharge path 610c arranged in order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, the respective upstream ends are open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610 a and the lower full tank payout passage 610 b extend forward in a state where they are aligned side by side, and are opened forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full tank discharge passage 610b extends forward in a slightly lower state than the lower normal discharge passage 610a. The lower ball extraction passage 610c extends forward along the right side surface of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b as viewed from the front, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 614, and in the normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. The opening is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a protruding forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the turning center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and the front end surface approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled with the discharge unit 560, and the lower normal discharge path 610a, the lower full tank discharge path 610b, and the lower ball discharge path 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear, It is located immediately below the downstream end of the upper normal discharge passage 600c, the upper full tank discharge passage 600d, and the upper bulb discharge passage 600e of the sphere path unit 600. Thereby, the game ball B released downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flows through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B released downward from the upper full payout passage 600d is lower lower full payout passage 610b. And the game ball B released downward from the upper ball extraction passage 600e flows through the lower ball extraction passage 610c.

  In addition, the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, and the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. In addition, the downstream end of the lower ball extraction passage 610c is opened to face the ball extraction guide portion 627 that opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In a normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 to be in contact with the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b are opened, and communicated with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank reception port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613. Is rotated clockwise by the biasing force of the closing spring 614, and the respective downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Next, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full ball path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is open.

  In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of ball tanks 552 are detected from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of the ball breakage by the ball breakage detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570 Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied / stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) downstream from the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stays upstream from the payout blade 589. It becomes.

  Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball-cut detecting sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thereby, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in at least the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout vane 589 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the payout vane in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout vane 589 (the ball housing portion 589b) is detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and then sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  In a normal state, the game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 is disposed directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game ball B paid out from 580 becomes accumulated in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower side of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full sphere path unit 600 in communication. Then, when the game ball B is paid out while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B starts to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d side passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full ball pass unit 610, and fills up the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. Can be received. Thereafter, the game ball B received by the full ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thereby, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game balls B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  If the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the lower plate 202 is filled with the game balls B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate The game ball B stays and is stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 is moved and detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 enters a non-detection state.

  When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the raised end position. After that, the lower end side of the ball removal movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction when viewed from the back, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is connected to the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It will be in the state pushed out to the outside of ball extraction passage 580b. Thus, the game ball B can enter the ball extraction passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the upstream game ball B is released downward through the ball extraction passage 580b.

  At this time, since the game ball B flowing down comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball removal movable piece 592 at the part of the ball removal movable piece 592, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

  The game ball B released downward from the ball extraction passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball extraction passage 600e of the upper full ball passage unit 600 and the lower ball extraction passage 610c of the lower full ball passage unit 610. And then discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball extraction passage 610c to the ball extraction guide portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, and then through the discharge ball receiving portion 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to the rear outside (game hall). To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 112A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 112B is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 113 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower back. FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 115 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 116 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The substrate unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500, and a body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 attached below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500, and a front side in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. A main body frame speaker 622 and a container-like speaker box 623 which is attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and is opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates forward and backward in the vicinity of the left end when viewed from the front, and includes a circular speaker mounting portion 621a configured by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The front concave portion 621b that is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the spatial front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction toward obliquely downward and rearward A connecting portion 621c that is open.

  A body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass sounds.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open forward, and the rear part of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most backward, and as it goes to the right in the front view, it goes backward in a staircase shape. The protrusion is formed so as to be small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the right side of the front center of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 excluding the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620 a forms a part of an enclosure 624 that encloses sound output from the main body speaker 622 with the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623. The enclosure 624 is formed with a space front recess 621b that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, so that the speaker box 623 protrudes rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a staircase shape so as to reduce the amount, a space on the right side of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently wide.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43 a so that the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 sandwiches the seal member 48, and the rear of the main body frame speaker 622. And the curtain plate interior space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, a wide space enclosure 624 can be formed on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel member 42, and the rear panel member 43. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain front member 42.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right in the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and Since the communication is made to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side through the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not particularly attenuated in the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 without attenuating the bass range. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted low sound range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the curtain plate front member 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state in which the phase is reversed. The sound radiated from the 200 speaker openings 211b resonates so as to be amplified, so that a large sound with a heavy bass sound can be output even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass-reflex type, and a player can hear a heavy bass. Thereby, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the dish unit 200, and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 By this, the player can listen to a sound having a rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the speaker cover 621 at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the space front recessed portion 621b, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a is formed which communicates with the through hole 621d and extends in a cylindrical shape and penetrates in the front and rear direction. In the state assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and are independent of the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 that is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear power supply unit that is attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which 620c is attached.

  The base unit 620b is formed by cooperation of the front base 625 and the rear base 626. The base unit 620b receives the game ball B released from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and receives a front view. A ball extraction guiding portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that opens upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guiding portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball removal guiding portion 627 and the discharge ball receiving portion 628 downward.

  The ball extraction guiding portion 627 has an upstream end opened leftward at an upper portion of the left side surface in a front view, and a downstream end opened to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. The ball extraction guide portion 627 faces the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 so that the upstream end opening coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower full ball path unit 610 in the assembled state of the main body frame 4. The game ball B released from the ball extraction passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

  The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is opened upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is continuous so that the left end in front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B extracted from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball extraction guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then Since it discharges | emits below from the discharge port 629, it can make it easy to ensure the space of the left side rather than the center of the left-right direction in front view. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer sound than the conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. The power supply board cover 631 is shaped with a transparent synthetic resin, and the power supply board 630 can be visually observed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. Yes. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC100V) is stepped down to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC 24 volts (AC24V). AC24V, which is stepped down in the island facilities of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from AC24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall and supplies them to various boards. In addition, the power supply board 630 originally needs to be supplied with a 24V AC game machine power supply voltage, but there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of AC100V will be supplied due to an incorrect connection of a power supply cord (not shown), resulting in destruction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a common screwdriver (plus screwdriver) (without using a common tool such as a plus screwdriver, the fastener It can also be configured so that it can be attached and detached by manually operating.

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-like payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 116). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Thus, the instructed number of game balls B are to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The dispensing control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. The cover body and the beta body are transparently molded of polycarbonate resin, so that the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the dispensing control board 633 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized IC is mounted) It is possible to confirm whether or not it has been done from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the dispensing control board box 632 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively, and when the dispensing control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the dispensing control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the dispensing control board box 632. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent against fraud to the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The substrate base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most backward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end (the main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503. The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The back cover 640 is attached to the rear end of the main frame base 501 with the right side extending up and down of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis. Are attached to the back cover attaching portion 551i and the back cover attaching portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

  The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending in the up, down, left, and right directions is bent forward, and an abutting portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. In a state assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be positioned substantially on the same surface as the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the flange portion 551 da formed on the above-described back plate upper portion 551 d). Yes. Further, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551, and this contact portion is , And is covered with a flange portion 551da formed to protrude from the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Except for the contact portion 640a, the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be viewed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 117A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 117B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of lockable units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of being locked to the door frame 3. A door frame flange 652, a plurality of outer frame flanges 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and engageable with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, depending on the rotation direction. And a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the flange 652 or the outer frame flange 653 in the vertical direction.

  The locking unit 650 has a lock spring 655 that biases the door frame collar 652 downward and an outer frame collar 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from the upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame collar 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame flanges 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are forward of the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It protrudes. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501 and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key engaged with the transmission member 133 and inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame cages 652 are engaged with the hook members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outer frames. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and a key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of the locking units 650 are connected via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame collar 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 are moved downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state in which the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame ridge 652 and the outer frame ridge 653 are inclined so that the distal end sides thereof become thinner. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over 24 and the lower hook member 25, the locked state is brought about by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration at the top of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 118B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 119 is an enlarged view showing the upper part in an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 120 (a) is a perspective view seen from the front top with the tank rail and the like assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 120 (b) is a perspective view seen from the front bottom. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 120 (a) as seen from the front. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing an area where game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame circulate. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the back on the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped main body frame base 501 that is rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-letter shape that is mounted along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base 501. A payout base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551 and extending upward in a box shape (container shape) extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tab spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a tank rail A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553, a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551, and for paying out the game ball B to the player side; It is equipped with.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a quadrilateral shape in plan view that extends in the left-right direction, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front wall and a rear wall of the bottom wall 552a, respectively. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from the left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape that is open on the upper side. Has been. In the ball tank 552, a game ball B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed is stored.

  In addition, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is notched from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper end edge. The overflow portion 552f is approximately 3/4 of the length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the end of the left wall 552d in the front wall 552b toward the end on the opposite side (right wall 552e side). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view and a downstream side extending to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 has a bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a that extends from near the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom and is formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. Further, the main guide portion 553a extends to the left after extending from the right end to about 1/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction from the right end to the left in plan view. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to the position of about 4/10 of the entire length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  In the main rail 553a, a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in parallel to the axis extending in the horizontal direction from the left end to the right extends to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. Further, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed. Is formed at a height that allows only one to be distributed (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  Further, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left-right direction (in the present embodiment, about the bottom surface of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a when viewed from the front, at a portion where the upper side is closed. Three rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a predetermined interval (in this embodiment, approximately 10 mm) are formed. Due to the rectangular cutout portion 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a has a thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment) from the rear wall toward the front of the main guide portion 553a. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate on the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a is formed upward from the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a (in this embodiment) , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a lateral length of about 30 mm is formed, and these rectangular holes are formed in communication.

  The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 fall off with the metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to wear such as the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is prevented, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. It becomes difficult to supply the game ball B, and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a, and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a by naturally falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa, Metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a due to vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa. Thus, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. It is possible to remove the metal powder from the main guiding portion 553a by performing the work of removing the removed metal powder.

  The tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and that changes in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to coincide with the width of the main guiding portion 553a. Yes. By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side toward the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is in a line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature arranged on the inner side, and is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight gap between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. Chamfered corners are formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature at the downstream side than at the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B that circulates in the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b side acts depends on the position of the bulge portion 553b that abuts. It will change to various directions, and generation | occurrence | production of a spherical spot can be suppressed in the bulging part 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B that circulates in the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force is less likely to disperse, so that the internal game ball B is always pushed in a certain direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and causing ball clogging (ball clumps) to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. Since the direction in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed is dispersed is dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball balls) can be made difficult to occur.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be seen from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball clog) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is clogged can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, since the ball clogging in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the ball clogging can be shortened as much as possible, and the player's game can be enjoyed for the interruption of the game. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 through the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized from the rear. When a malfunction occurs in various production units, etc., the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, and belt can be checked with the game board 5 still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operational effects as the effects can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined so that the front end side is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Extending from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open and the rear end side being low And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the bypass passage 552g, and the space in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is open, and a side opposite the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j in between, are provided at a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m. The external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a that can be connected to the electrical wiring from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558), the upper surface being the overflow surface portion And a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501 m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from the lower side to the rear side from the upper side of the rear surface of the base body 501a, which is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically, from a position lower by 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. It extends to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about ½ of the outer diameter of the game ball B. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed with a gap of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the outer frame upper member 30 and the main body frame 4 closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and has a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and right step portion 501o that extend substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m. The upper ends of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o are both higher in the left and right direction than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o, and extend in a strip shape in the front-rear direction. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower in front view. The right step portion 501o is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is longer than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the right step portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane such that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower in front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. Is formed at a height that is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  When the main body frame base 501 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501 m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552 f in the ball tank 552 in the front view, and the overflow surface portion 501 m The left end of the bypass passage 552g and the left end of the bypass passage 552g coincide with each other in the left-right direction, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, a container-like region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and the passage surface 552h is inclined so that the front end is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the rear end is low. And a weir portion extending upward from the end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g has a left end side (weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side in the front view extending rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552, and the left end side It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes to the right end side. The passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that the rear end thereof is along the front end side of the portion extending obliquely with respect to the left-right direction in the tank rail 553 extending in a crank shape in the left-right direction. It extends. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Thereby, the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the rear end that is inclined so that the circulation direction is perpendicular to the oblique rear end. The rear end of the bypass passage 552g that extends obliquely extends substantially parallel to the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally (the direction in which the game balls B flow in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is wide in the tank rail 553. Can receive a game ball B from Further, since the game ball B is supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular direction) to the distribution direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g. It is possible to make it difficult for ball clogging in 553 to occur.

  The bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, so that the game ball B moves from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the rear end that extends obliquely allows the game ball B to be discharged to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrow, , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball scum in the tank rail 553.

  Further, the part for guiding the game ball B through the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the outside of the left part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left part of the rear wall 552c in front view in the tank rail 553. A game ball B that lies under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening portion 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, in the portion of the tank rail 553 that is behind the bypass passage 552g, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the wall of the tank rail 553). (Height) is not exceeded. Therefore, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B is not spilled rearward from the tank rail 553.

  The ball tank 552 is a flat plate that extends to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f in the left side wall 552d on the inner side surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in front view that is approximately 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b and from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left-right direction of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to a position near about 1/2 of the total length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the total length, it extends to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c in parallel with the left side wall 552d, From there, it is formed in a shape extending in parallel with the rear wall 552c from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c with a constant width.

  The spherical tank 552 includes a right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the shape described above in a plan view, and a straight line connecting the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed region has an opening 552k formed so as to penetrate vertically. Further, the spherical tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction and the vertical direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and on the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. Part 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper end edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper end edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper end edges (the main body frame base 501) of the left side wall 552d and the rear wall 552c. The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the upper step).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled with each other, the upstream end (right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. In addition, the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion that extends straight in the left-right direction on the left side of the tank rail 553 are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the bypass passage 552g on the left side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of a portion extending obliquely of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge part 551j is assembled in the main body frame 4 so that it is lowered stepwise from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side when viewed from the front to the tank rail 553, the position is higher along the tank rail 553 to the left than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center in the left-right direction of the second rail cover 555). It extends to the rear and then extends backward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is attached in a state where a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction on the rear surface. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can be grasped at the tip of the electric wiring by opening the grip portion by operating the lever. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l in the ball tank 552.

  Next, the effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are configured such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g is lower as shown by the white arrows in FIG. The left step 501n is inclined so that the rear end right corner is lower, and the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear end left corner is lower. Further, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guiding portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side is lowered in front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

  Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 is increased by being supplied from the island facility, first, over the upper overflow edge 552f having the lowest height among the outer peripheral upper edges. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can be discharged to the overflow surface portion 501m and discharged from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned to the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 123). Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent further increase in the game balls B in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In the ball tank 552, it is possible to prevent clogging (so-called ball play) due to the engagement between the game balls B.

  Since the bypass passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from strongly acting backward on the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is blocked in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented. Further, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 through the bypass passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m is spilled on the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. It is possible to prevent the game balls B from being clogged by preventing the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than that of the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g. The upper end edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction in the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, the game ball B flowing from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g after overflowing the overflow portion 552f from the ball tank 552 and flowing into the overflow surface portion 501m is left on one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour path 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour path 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 to It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being clogged in the tank 552.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). Therefore, the game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. Thereby, since the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) to the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is made to flow backward from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553 can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from being pressed against each other due to the different directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B, and the game balls B can be blocked. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the main guide portion 553a extending to the downstream end is provided at the bottom of the tank rail 553, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide portion 553a, so that they are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are in an aligned state, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, in the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged is provided, so that the game released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g The sphere B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  Further, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side, and the width of the main guiding portion 553a is increased. Since they are changed so as to match, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a row in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B flows is lowered toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) The plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction in FIG. 1 are circulated downstream through the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (the payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553.

  Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored in the overflow surface portion 501g and the bulging portion 553b is provided in the tank rail 553. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  In addition, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (on the opposite side of the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between. Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a. The game ball B does not cause a problem such as short-circuiting or disconnection of the electrical wiring.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is stored in the ball tank 552. As described above, it is possible to make it difficult to get on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k even if it bounces at the overflow surface portion 501m, and to make it difficult to fall from the rear side even if the game ball B gets on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side (rightward in FIG. 123) of the ball tank 552 due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction against the game ball B in the ball tank 552, and the game ball B is clogged in the ball tank 552. This can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 jumps at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. However, as shown in FIG. 123, the game ball B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g due to the inclination thereof, and the malfunction occurs due to the game ball B spilling outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes through the lower side of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, the game ball is stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Accordingly, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, a space (vacant space) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured. The game ball B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

  Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a malfunction.

  The ball tank 552 is molded from a conductive resin, whereas the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded from a nonconductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 has the same polarity. It is repelled and is not drawn to the peripheral control board box.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of cutout portions 553aa so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the same cutout portion, hole, or groove as the cutout portion 553aa may be formed in the ball passage where the game ball B rolls. Specifically, in the ball guide unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner as shown in FIG. 111, the metal of the game ball B in the guide passage 570a. A notch, hole, or groove that can remove powder from the guide passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 111, a payout device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570. The payout device 580 includes a substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 112, on which various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the induction unit 570. Therefore, a hook-shaped member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the payout device rear cover 582 of the payout device 580 shown in FIG. 103, or formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be formed and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the dispensing device 580 is mounted can be configured to be shifted. It can also be configured. Also, the hook-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, etc. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed. It is possible to configure by shifting the positions of these, and it is also possible to employ both. 112 is not formed on the side wall of the cover provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 and the power supply board cover 631 of the power board 630 shown in FIG. Can prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310X arranged below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310X is arranged at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 becomes a saddle, or the main control unit It is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering by disposing a bowl-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or by not forming a vent hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300.

[4-12. Metal powder countermeasure configuration]
Next, an electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 126. FIG. 126 is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 118 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for countermeasures against metal powder. In FIG. 126, the outer shape of the game board 5 is indicated by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a malfunction in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided with an IC such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM described later, and the peripheral data ROM board described later is provided with an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. The pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, thereby narrowing the spacing of various connectors. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is also narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 126, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about one half of the diameter of the game ball B). The distance is shifted by a distance of.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a staircase shape that is bent multiple times downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, a bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is arranged. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  Thereby, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is received and attached at the top plate portion 551a, or received and attached at the convex portion 551da. Be able to. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 come into surface contact protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since it is covered with the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa abuts. It cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear face of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  In this way, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are metal of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (on the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 that is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 that is attached to the cover body 1501 is displaced (in the present embodiment, the displacement is about a distance of about half the diameter of the game ball B). (In other words, because the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch 553aa), the electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 This is effective for preventing metal powder.

  The plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, whereas the upper side, the left side, and the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the cover body 1501.

  Further, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a FAN mounting recess having a square shape for mounting the air cooling fan FAN formed on the center side thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are formed along each. Further, the cover body 1501 has seven connector holes at positions corresponding to the volume control switch and seven connectors described later provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 along the lower side. Volume adjustment holes are formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In the state in which the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, the gaps are formed by seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole formed in the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume adjustment hole. In addition, in a state where a liquid crystal output board (to be described later) is attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing part by this rotation. Air from the outside of the unit 1500 passes through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. In addition, the gaps described above (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, gaps formed in the peripheral control board 1510, volume control switch provided in the peripheral control board 1510, cover) A volume adjusting hole formed in the body 1501; During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The area (total area) of each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess of the cover body 1501 is the total area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 as described above. Clearance (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501, gaps formed on the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the cover body 1501. The volume adjustment hole, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate, the two connectors provided in the liquid crystal output substrate, and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501) It is getting smaller. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air flow is taken in via the air flow rate, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be kept small. Thereby, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from entering the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az due to the influence of the air flow.

  Incidentally, when the wing part of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotates, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wing part by this rotation, the air cooling fan FAN Since the air flow velocity due to the rotation of the wings of the game ball increases, the probability that the heavy powder of metal powder of the game sphere B is sucked into the inner space of the cover body 1501 due to the influence of the air flow is increased. Due to electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by metal powder, various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 may cause problems (failures). Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing the fan FAN from being sucked in, and by forming a protrusion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, a game ball It can be configured to have a function as a bowl that prevents heavy powder of metal powder B from being sucked into the air cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) of the cooling fan FAN in the depth direction compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting recess) When the air cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501 by selecting a short distance dimension), the heavy powder of the metal ball of the game ball B is blown by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured to have a function as a bag for preventing inhalation by FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B can be avoided (hereinafter referred to as “the metal powder countermeasure according to the second to fifth embodiments”). Will be described with reference to FIGS. 127 to 130. FIG. 127 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 128 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 129 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 130 is a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 127 to 130, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 126 (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the part of the game board 5 necessary for explanation is represented as a cross-sectional view.

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a where the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the bent end surface of the top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. While the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same surface. In addition, the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 disposed substantially on the same plane as the tank rail 553 is branched from the portion to which the effect display device 1600 is attached and is extended rearward.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. The mounting recess 3010da is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered with an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back box in the back unit 3000 are arranged. 3010 is different from the rear surface 3010d in that it is arranged on substantially the same plane. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the mounting recess formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010. 3010da is in contact with the surface, and the contacted portion is covered by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a is received on the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting recess 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact is formed by the upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. Since it is covered, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000) from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Toward the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. The main guide part 553a is arranged so as to protrude below the notch part 553aa formed in the main guide part 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially on the same plane. It is different in that it is arranged in. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553. The abutting portion 6 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a and is in contact with the top surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. And the upper surface of the contact portion 640a of the back cover 640 can be received and attached. Further, the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551 a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in abutment is in abutment. As a result, no gap is formed, so that the game panel of the game board 5 starts from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa comes into contact. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) and the base body 1502. It is like that.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 has the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a trap that can be prevented. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  Note that the abutting portion where the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in abutment with each other is in abutment. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is in close contact with the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Or the positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is intimately buried under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. A gap is not formed in the close contact portion between the formed contact portion 640a and the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is connected to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface.

  Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553 as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the back plate upper portion 551d are arranged. The rear surface is arranged on substantially the same surface.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is directed rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is below the tank rail 553. The bent top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab that protrudes downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, and the contacted portion is in contact with the tank rail 553. Is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, in the configuration of measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a. The bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly protrude rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is disposed below the tank rail 553. In addition, the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is Disposed below the tank rails 553, it is different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is a bent top plate portion disposed below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered at 551a. Further, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and projecting downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a, Since the abutting portion where the surface contacts is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, it falls from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa. Attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the contacted portion of the metal balls of the game ball B The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot be dropped toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  In this way, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a via a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as a bag that can prevent the game ball B and also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as a cage disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component). It can also be configured to be attached to.

  Further, when the top plate portion 551a is a separate member (another structural component), a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the attachment position and returned to the attachment position for the purpose of removing attached metal powder may be used. In this case, the top plate portion 551a has a different color from the surrounding members, so that a mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the attachment position and returned to the attachment position can be clearly defined, and the workability of removing the adhered metal powder is improved Let

  In addition, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa is the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

[Contrast between the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side of the top plate portion 551a to the rear side ( The back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d are disposed. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 130, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is the front of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d described above in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment is formed in a step shape that is bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Are not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward as compared with the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The front surface of 640a is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a disposed so as to protrude downward relative to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is the dispensing base 551. The back plate upper portion 551d is in contact with the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, and the contact portion is covered with a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. ing.

  In contrast, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a bowl-shaped main guide. It is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the portion 553a and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to project downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guiding portion 553a. The contacted portion is arranged so as to be largely displaced forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail Whereas the rear surface of 553 and the rear surface of the upper portion of the back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same surface, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment. The bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553, and the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward and formed in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. Further, in the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in the state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551. The abutting portion is in surface contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered with a convex portion 551da formed to protrude rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is connected to the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guide portion 553a. It is arranged in parallel and is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to protrude downward as compared with the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  Also in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fifth embodiment, the same effects as the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B that has dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is the upper side of the back cover 640 disposed below the tank rail 553. The side can be received and attached to the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by being greatly bent forward. Furthermore, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the bowl-shaped main guiding portion 553a are disposed parallel to the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The abutting portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a comes into surface contact is arranged to be largely shifted forward from the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a and is in contact with the gap. Is not formed. For this reason, from the portion where the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch 553aa comes into contact, the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000) The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface 3010 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward greatly is formed from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. To the peripheral control unit 1500 where the metal powder of the dropped game ball B is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as a bowl that can be prevented from falling down, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game ball B. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

  In the metal powder countermeasure configuration according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, in order to improve the cooling effect, the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is preferably provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later).

  Incidentally, a gaming machine including a tank rail that guides a game ball from a ball tank to the downstream side has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). The tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter that falls from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board located below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. It was. In recent control boards, the pin spacing of the connector is narrowed by increasing the number of controlled objects, the connector spacing is narrowing by increasing the number of connectors, and the IC pin spacing is further reduced. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electrical problems caused by foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. FIG. 131 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, and FIGS. 132 to 139 are enlarged front views of main parts of the game board. FIG. 140 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the front after being disassembled for each main structure, and FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the game board as viewed from the rear after being disassembled as the main structure. FIG. 143 is a schematic view of a function display unit attached to the upper left corner of the front component member outside the game area, FIG. 143 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the rear, and FIG. 144 is a view from the function display unit on the main control board. It is a schematic explanatory drawing of the routing of this wiring.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit when the player operates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a includes a first game area 5a1 in which a game ball launched with a predetermined firing force (when the amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player is small) can flow down, and a specific launch stronger than the predetermined launch force. A second game area 5a2 in which a game ball launched by force (a firing force that is strong enough to jump over the first game area 5a1 / a large amount of operation of the handle 182 by the player) can flow down, and this second It can be divided into a game area 5a2 and a third game area 5a3 downstream where the first game area 5a1 merges.

  In the left half of the first game area 5a1 of the game area 5a and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side of the game area 5a, a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B is given to the player by receiving the game ball B). Are provided with a plurality of general prize winning ports 2001, and the right half of the second game area 5a2 and the third game area 5a3 connected to the downstream side of the second game area 5a2 are provided to the player by receiving the game ball B. And detecting the passage of the general winning port 2001, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the game ball B for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, paying out a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player. And a gate portion 2003 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, opening and closing the opening / closing piece 850 of the second start port 2004 for a predetermined time to change the winning position), and the center of the third game area 5a3. In Specific privilege to the player by receiving the game ball B (e.g., payout, etc. of a predetermined number of game balls B.) Is first start hole 2002 to grant is provided.

  Further, in the second game area 5a2, as a unique receiving port that can receive the game ball B, the game ball B can be received, but the disadvantage is not to collect the game ball B and give the player a profit. One receiving port 2006 is provided. In the second game area 5a2, the second winning opening 2004 and the second winning opening 2004 that are more advantageous than the first receiving opening 2006 are configured to receive the game ball B and give a predetermined privilege to the player. Also called an entrance. The second receiving port only needs to be relatively more advantageous than the first receiving port 2006, and therefore, the setting of the first receiving port 2006 does not give any game ball to the incoming ball. For example, one game ball may be given by entering the ball. Further, if the setting of the first receiving port 2006 is to give one game ball to the incoming ball, two or more game balls may be given by the incoming ball.

  In addition, the game area 5a is connected to the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 at the top, so that the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force enters the second game area 5a2. The communication passage portion 5a4 can be passed through.

  The game board 5 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and the outer shape of the front component member 1000 is substantially square when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-like game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at a portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 is a game that is performed by driving a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100 and a game ball B attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and attached to the front of the game panel 1100 A front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat base panel 1110 and the base panel 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 to which the rear unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The front unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001, and the first game. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 near the middle area between the area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and has two general winning ports 2001, the second game area 5a2 and the third game area , An attacker unit 2400 having a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a second starting opening 2004 (second receiving opening), a gate portion 2003 and a first entrance 2006 having a center slightly upward from the front in the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1, the second game area 5a2, and the third game area 5a3). A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to state) surrounded three sides of the both lateral and bottom, and a.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a rectangular opening 3010a2 on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of parts attached in the back box 3010 And a back production unit 3100.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays connection between the main control board 1310X (see FIG. 151) and various sensors and various switches provided on the game board 5, and a peripheral control board 1510 included in the peripheral control unit 1500. A panel drive board 1720 for driving various decorative boards and various electrical drive sources (various motors and various solenoids) in response to a command from a drive board box 1730 for accommodating a panel relay board 1710 and a panel drive board 1720, It has.

[5-1. Previous component]
The front component member 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000 and the upper portion thereof being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the game ball B of the outer rail 1001 And an impacting portion 1006 made of rubber or the like provided at the intersection of the end in the hitting direction and the upper end of the right rail 1005.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an out ball opening 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the center lower portion in the left-right direction when viewed from the front in the frame. The game ball B guided backward by the out guide part 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component member 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out ball port 1008.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that are substantially perpendicular to the lower end, a lower portion of the outer guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer portion of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1009 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess portion 1009 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 172 and the security recess 1009. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. Front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the path unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The gaming panel 1100 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached thereto. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat base panel 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the base panel 1110. And a frame-like panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and attached to the rear unit 3000 on the rear surface.

  The base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of the base panel 1110 is thinner than the panel holder 1120, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently retained even if the obstruction nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In the present embodiment, the base panel 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The base panel plate 1110 includes a decorative pattern formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right diagonal lines rotated counterclockwise 60 degrees at the same interval as the horizontal lines, and horizontal lines and upper right diagonal lines. The geometrical pattern is composed of a plurality of left-upward diagonal lines that pass through the intersections and are rotated 60 degrees clockwise at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines. In other words, the decoration pattern is a geometric pattern pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines formed by a horizontal line, an upper right oblique line, and a left upward oblique line are arranged in a fixed pattern. The decorative pattern is assembled to the game board 5 and includes two equilateral triangular contour portions on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three equilateral triangular contour portions near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Are further provided with a pattern composed of two equilateral triangular outlines of different sizes.

  The decorative pattern has a V-shaped cross section. This decoration pattern 1150 is visible from the player side in front even when a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 mounted on the panel decoration substrate are not emitted. The game area 5a is decorated. Further, the base panel plate 1110 is formed in a geometric pattern pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangle outlines when the panel decoration LED of the panel decoration substrate is caused to emit light and light is incident on the inside of the base panel plate 1110. The decoration pattern can be illuminated.

  The decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 includes a radiating portion that mainly reflects light radiated inward from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 and a light radiated inward from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 to the front. And a radiation light guide part that guides light along a linear shape. The radiation light guide unit satisfies at least one of the depth of the groove and the peripheral length of the cross section being longer than those of the radiation unit. The radiation light guide unit is formed so as to connect (or intersect) a plurality of radiation units, and diffusely reflects light irradiated from the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 within the base panel plate 1110. The light can be guided in the extending direction of the groove. In other words, the radiation light guide unit plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiation units to which the radiation guide unit is connected to the other. Among them, the photosensitivity (ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern of the base panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, the radiation light guide unit is disposed outside the normal light guide region from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel decoration LED of the lower left panel decoration board, which will be described later. The light is guided to the part and the radiating part emits light, so that the photosensitivity of the entire decorative pattern is increased.

  This allows more light to reach the radiating light guide part against the radiating part of the decoration pattern formed in the part where light from the panel decoration LED is difficult to reach (usually the part outside the light guiding region). Thus, the radiating portion can be decorated with a sufficient amount of light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED on the panel decoration substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the inside of the base panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion and the radiating light guiding portion, and is formed of a plurality of equilateral triangular outlines. The decorative pattern formed on the school pattern can be illuminated and decorated with uniform brightness over substantially the entire pattern.

  The base panel 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end is formed at a position corresponding to the out ball opening 1008 of the front component member 1000. The base panel 1110 has a plurality of through-holes 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction for attaching the front unit 2000.

  The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the base panel 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the base panel 1110 (in this embodiment, approximately 20 mm). Panel holder 1120 is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the base panel 1110 in a detachable manner and is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a through-hole 1121 through which the inside penetrates in the front-rear direction with a size substantially equal to the game area 5a. It has.

  The panel holder 1120 includes a notch 1122 that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component member 1000, and penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. The front end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 faces forward.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140 and 141. FIG. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in the assembled state on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

  In the state in which the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, all of the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out ball opening 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The discharge part 1201 formed on the bottom surface can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 140, 141, 143, 144A to 144O, and 151.
The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control unit 1310 having a main control MPU 1310a that controls the progress of the game, and a main control board box 1320 that is a container that houses the main control part 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ing.

[5-4-1. Main control board box]
The main control board box 1320 is generally constituted by a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, as shown in FIG. 144C. The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate and are molded of a transparent synthetic resin. A main controller 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space 1320 s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. Since the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded transparently from a synthetic resin (polycarbonate), the state of the front side and the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed or unauthorized Whether or not an IC chip is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1320z so as to correspond to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1320z, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the one sealing mechanism 1320z, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Accordingly, by observing the trace of the opening / closing remaining in the sealing mechanism 1320z, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against the illegal action to the main control unit 1310 is enhanced.

[5-4-2. Main control unit]
The main control unit 1310 has a main control board 1310X (see FIGS. 144C and 151) for controlling the progress of the game, the payout of the game ball B, and the like, and a lottery probability to be described later and an area advantageous to the player. A setting change board 1310Y (see FIGS. 144C and 151) that can set a game setting relating to a distribution rate or the like to any one of a plurality of setting values.

[5-4-2-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1310 is connected to the interface board 635, the peripheral control board 1510, and the setting change board 1310Y. The main control board 1310X includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2401, a second start port sensor 2402, a large winning port sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor 2406, a starting port solenoid 2404, an attacker solenoid 2405, and a general winning port sensor. 3001, a first start port sensor 3002, a magnetic sensor 3003, an out port left sensor 1008a, and an out port right sensor 1008b.

[5-4-2-2. Setting change board]
A setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1310 includes a setting switch 1311a that can perform switching of the setting value and confirmation of the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switching button 1311b that can select and switch the setting value, A setting change permission lamp 1311c indicating a state in which switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted.
The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X (inter-board connection) (the harness between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) It may be electrically connected via By this connector connection (inter-board connection), the signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.
In the setting change board 1310Y, the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, and the distance dimension in the horizontal direction of the main control board 1310X A center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the setting change board 1310Y. It matches.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is located on the center line along the right side of the setting change board 1310Y, and the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is disposed on the center line. The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X is A position that is the center of the vertical distance dimension is arranged on the center line along the left side of the control board 1310X.
The setting change board 1310Y is provided with a setting switch 1311a having a notch 1311i that is rotated by inserting the setting key K1 below the center line, and a pressing operation unit 1311p above the center line of the setting change board 1310Y. The setting change button 1311b having a setting change is set, and the setting change can be made to emit light in a single color (for example, red) on the center line of the setting change board 1310Y and at the upper left of the setting switch 1311a (lower left of the setting change button 1311b). A permission lamp 1311c is arranged.
A setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is disposed above the center line of the main control board 1310X and in the vicinity of the connector MSCN, and the center line of the main control board 1310X A base monitor 1310h is arranged which is arranged in a lower line and has six decimal points with a decimal point (so-called dots) from the center toward the right side. The base monitor 1310h is arranged near the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X. Further, a RAM clear switch 1310f having a pressing operation unit similar to the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is disposed.

  In the present embodiment, at a position where the setting key K1 is ready to be inserted into the insertion port formed in the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion port extends in the vertical direction). The setting switch 1311a is turned off as the initial position. When the notch 1311i is at the initial position, the setting key K1 can be inserted into the insertion slot, and the setting key K1 can be extracted from the insertion slot.

When the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and the first ON operation is performed, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON, and this setting key ON signal is the setting change board. Input from 1310Y to main control MPU 1310a of main control board 1310X. Further, the setting switch 1311a can be set to ON by turning the notch 1311i counterclockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position to be turned ON, and the setting key ON signal is set. Input from the change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
Further, the notch 1311i is rotated counterclockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotating position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON. The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by being rotated 60 degrees toward the OFF direction, and the initial position (that is, the original position from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13ON is set to ON) The setting switch 1311a can be turned off by turning the notch 1311i clockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting switch 1311a to the rotational position of the notch 1311i turning off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.
In the present embodiment, two completely different functions of the setting key ON and the determination key ON can be realized by only the setting switch 1311a alone depending on the direction in which the notch 1311i is rotated, and only by the setting switch 1311a alone. The operation of the setting key ON and the decision key ON can be performed together.

The front surface of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, and the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f are each an opening 1301h formed in the cover body 1301 of the corresponding main control board box 1320. Is exposed to the outside through the front surface of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the corresponding opening 1301h. A portion corresponding to these openings 1301h of the cover body 1301 and the setting switch 1311a so that a foreign substance such as a wire cannot enter from the formed “gap” to modify the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X. , Constant switching button 1311 b, between the RAM clear switch 1310F, the foreign matter intrusion preventing section for preventing a foreign matter wire such intrusion 1301V (eg mating cylindrical body 1301c each other as shown in FIG. 144K) are molded, respectively.
Although the setting indicator 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are accommodated in the internal space 1320s formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 and cannot be touched at all, the cover body 1301 is transparently molded as described above. Therefore, the set value displayed on the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed on the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover body 1301.

  In order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting switch 1311a being OFF. Are routed between the wiring pattern through which the signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is routed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y. At the same time, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) of the setting change board 1310Y is also formed apart, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, setting key O of setting switch 1311a) Of the setting switch 1311a, the wiring pattern of the setting switch 1311a ON signal, and the wiring pattern of the setting switch 1311a OFF signal) and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b. The wiring pattern is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the routing from the RAM clear switch 1310f is not close to each other. (Separated from each other).

[5-4-2-3. Setting switch, setting change button, setting indicator]
The setting switch 1311a, the setting switching button 1311b, and the setting display 1310g will be briefly described. Here, the case where the setting value of the game setting is changed will be briefly described first, and the case where the confirmation display of the current setting value is performed will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key K1 is an important one that can be used to check the current setting value that has been set, in addition to changing the setting value, two to three people including the store manager of the game hall Only a limited number are possessed.

When changing the set value, the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 when the power is restored after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or power recovery after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that momentarily causes a power failure). 4 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise, and the first ON operation is performed. It is necessary to establish a “predetermined set value change permission condition” that 1311a is set to ON.
That is, the person who actually changes the setting value performs the work of opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and then turns off the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the power switch 630a and then the setting switch 1311a. The setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i, the setting key K1 is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed to turn on the setting switch 1311a, and then the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 1 is powered on with the switch 630a.

  Thus, the setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a sets the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1311c is switched from the off state to the on state.

  Next, when the pressing operation unit 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b is pressed, a detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Each time a person who changes the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switching button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a starts from the current setting value based on the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. When the value increases by 1 and reaches the setting value 6 which is the maximum value, the control returns to the setting value 1 which is the initial value, increases by 1 again, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

  Next, when determining the set value, the notch 1311i is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (that is, the initial position is the original position from the rotation position of the notch 1311i when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON). (That is, turn the setting switch 1311a OFF to rotate the setting key cylinder to rotate it 60 degrees counterclockwise and turn it OFF, and then rotate it counterclockwise 60 degrees) The second ON By operating the setting switch 1311a, the determination key is turned ON. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  Next, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is returned to the original position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i when the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13ON is turned on. Then, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF by performing the OFF operation. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g to the non-display state and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c.

  Next, the setting key K1 is removed from the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and the operation of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the setting value setting change operation is completed.

In addition, when confirming and displaying the set value that is currently set, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that causes a momentary power failure) The main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the frame 2, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to be turned on first. By being operated, it is necessary to establish a “predetermined set value display permission condition” that the setting switch 1311a is ON.
In other words, the person who performs the confirmation display of the set value that is actually set first checks the state in which the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (the state in which power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). Then, the main frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and then the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a and is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. By doing so, the setting switch 1311a is turned ON.
This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X.

  The main control MPU 1310a sets the current set value (set value 1 to set value 6 when the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a is first turned on) stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Displayed value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c is kept off, and even if a person who confirms the setting value presses the pressing operation portion 1311p of the setting switching button 1311b, the setting value corresponds to this pressing operation. No change is made at all, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g is not changed.

  When the confirmation of the currently set value is completed, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on is changed to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned off). Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return and turn OFF. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the state of the set value by the setting display 1310g disappears.

  Finally, the setting key K1 is removed from the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and the work of closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is performed, and the confirmation display of the currently set value is completed. .

In addition, as described above, the predetermined set value change permission condition is that when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure in which an instantaneous power failure occurs), 2 is opened, the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation. As described above, the set value display permission condition is determined when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when a power failure occurs (a momentary power failure occurs). After the power recovery after the instantaneous power failure, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key K1 is inserted into the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a. i it is necessary that it is set the key ON operation by the first ON operation is 60 degrees rotation operation in the clockwise direction.
Thus, the predetermined set value change permission condition and the predetermined set value display permission condition are set in the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. There is a common requirement in that the key K1 is inserted, and the setting key is turned on when the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and the first ON operation is performed. The difference is that the permission condition requires “when power is restored”, whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires “after power recovery”.

  Here, the setting value of the game setting will be described. The “setting value” means a probability for lottery determination as to whether or not a big hit or a probability for lottery determination as to whether or not a big hit, as well as the probability change time. Probability for determining lottery when shifting to normal time (the above is collectively referred to as “probability for lottery”), and the distribution ratio to an area that is advantageous to the player can be changed. The probability (advantage) that is advantageous for the player (that is, the number of game balls that can be acquired by the player can be increased) is set in advance. In this embodiment, setting values 1, setting values 2, setting values 3, setting values 4, setting values 5 and setting values 6 are prepared in advance as setting values of a plurality of stages, from setting value 1 to setting value 6. On the other hand, the probability (advantage) that is advantageous for the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table in which the ratio of the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, Big hit symbol determination table that defines the percentage of decision value for decision, small hit judgment table that defines the proportion of small hit judgment value that indicates winning for small hit, and the percentage of decision value for decision of small hit symbol A small hitting symbol determination table, a normal transition determination table in which the ratio of determination values for transition determination from the probability change to the normal time is specified), and used at various distribution rates associated with set values Select various tables (for example, a sorting table in which the sorting time is specified, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid). To or. Various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values are allocated to various determination values at a predetermined ratio. Various tables used in various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values are different from each other, and various tables used in various allocation rates are set so that at least some values are different from each other. In some cases, the values differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electrical drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electrical drive source. Some are set to. In addition, as the setting values described above, six setting values (integers) in the range from the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 were used. However, the setting values may be in a smaller range or in a larger range. It may be a thing. For example, four set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 4 may be used, or eight set values (integer) in the range from set value 1 to set value 8 may be used.

  As described above, the setting indicator 1310g displays the setting value, and the main control MPU 1310a checks the contents of the RAM built in itself when power is restored to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off process has not been completed normally when the power is turned off, the content stored in its own RAM is abnormal (or trusted) Display an error message to that effect. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h is collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 among the game balls launched in the game area 5a. The number of game balls is displayed. Among the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the out port 1008 are detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b, and this detection signal is displayed on the panel. It is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the relay board 1710.

  The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the count result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It has become.

  In the embodiment described above, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a extends from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. As a setting switch 1311a 'that can be rotated only within the range. Good. In this case, the setting switch 1311a ′ is rotated 60 in the counterclockwise direction so as to return from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position which is the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a ′ can be set to ON by turning it OFF and turning it OFF, and a signal of this determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. (The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be described as “determination key modification (1)”).

In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, although not shown, a determination key button having a pressing operation unit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y. It may be provided. In this case, the determination key button pressing operation unit is exposed to the outside through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button, and the determination key button pressing operation unit; Preventing entry of foreign matter into the setting switch button 1311b so that foreign matter such as a wire cannot enter from the “gap” formed in the opening corresponding thereto and the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X cannot be modified. A foreign matter intrusion prevention unit similar to the unit 1301v is provided.
When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the setting change board 1310Y may be in the vicinity of the setting switch 1311a or in the vicinity of the setting switching button 1311b. The cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is pasted with a sticker on which the name of each button is printed on the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b so that the decision key button and the setting switching button 1311b are not confused. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers either one of the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b so as not to confuse the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b (for pressing the pressing operation unit). The cover may need to be opened.), The pressing operation unit may have a different color, or the outer shape of the determination key button and the setting switching button 1311b or the pressing operation. Different types of switches may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit may be employed as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key board and the setting switching button 1311b are provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switching button 1311b are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the setting change board 1310Y to the connector SMCN terminal (terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. Also in the main control board 1310X, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are not close to each other ( Formed apart from each other). Further, in the case where the decision key button is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. 1311a ′ (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (2)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, whether the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 in the handle unit 180 is determined. According to the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 to be detected and the player's will, the game ball B A detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not to forcibly stop launching is branched at the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, while the palm or finger is on the handle 182. When not touching, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON, and / or when the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, the enter key is ON. While it can be determined that the game ball B is not forcibly stopped, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON (including a handle touch sensor mode (including a single button operation sensor mode). May be described as “determination key modification (3)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The firing reference pulse is branched in the payout control board 633 and passed through the payout control board 633, Is input to the main control MPU1310a control board 1310X, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse with which 100 gaming balls B can be launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillation circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the firing reference pulse from the payout control board 633 is input, and determines that the determination key is not ON when the firing reference pulse is not input. (The mode of the firing reference pulse may be described as “determination key modification (4)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the distance measuring sensor that can detect the operation of the player sitting on the opposite side of the pachinko machine 1 is a game. The detection signal from this distance sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the relay board. In this case, the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the relay board, and it is determined whether or not the enter key is ON based on the detection signal. May be. In the distance measuring sensor, the light emitted from the light emitting unit passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and is reflected on the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance dimension. The reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit, so that the player's motion can be detected. In this case, when the detection signal from the distance measuring sensor is input via the relay board, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation based on this detection signal. While it can be determined that there is no operation, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when it is determined that there is no operation (the mode of the distance measuring sensor may be described as “determination key modification (5)”). .

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the notch 1311i clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and performing a first ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be turned on second and the setting switch 1311a. The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and from the rotation position of the notch 1311i when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. The initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is set to OF The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the notch 1311i rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position of the notch 1311i, and the setting key 1311a is turned ON. The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the notch 1311i. Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. And the information that tells OFF as serial information, The serial output circuit capable of serially outputting the parts may be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with the serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may be provided on the main control board 1310X or may be provided on the payout control board 633 instead. When serial information serially output from the serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key ON, the decision key ON, and the It is possible to determine which one of OFF is to be transmitted (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as “determination key modification (6)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the notch 1311i clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and performing a first ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be turned on second and the setting switch 1311a. The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and from the rotation position of the notch 1311i when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. The initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is set to OF The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the notch 1311i rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so that the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF, and the setting switch 1311a is turned ON. The notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) from the rotated position of the notched 1311i. Thus, the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. And information that tells OFF as a pulse signal A pulse output circuit which can output to be provided to set the switch 1311a. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1310Y, but may instead be provided on the main control board 1310X or may be provided on the payout control board 633. For example, if the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is information that informs the setting key ON, the pulse width is set to 1 ms, and if it is information that informs the enter key ON, the pulse width is set to 3 ms. In the case of information indicating OFF, the pulse width is set to 5 ms. When the pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a receives the setting key ON, the decision key ON, It is possible to determine which information is to be transmitted between OFF and OFF (the mode of the setting switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as “determination key modification (7)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the notch 1311i clockwise by 60 degrees from the initial position and performing a first ON operation. Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and the notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to be turned on second and the setting switch 1311a. The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, and from the rotation position of the notch 1311i when the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. The initial position that is the original position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is set to OF The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF by turning the notch 1311i rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position of the notch 1311i, and the setting key 1311a is turned ON. The notch 1311i is rotated 60 degrees clockwise and turned OFF so as to return from the rotation position of the notch 1311i to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF, and this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, The voltage level of the ON key signal and OFF In the main control board 1310X, an intermediate potential (for example, a potential from 2V to 3V out of zero V to 5V) is used between the boards ranging from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control board 1310X. A comparator circuit is provided, and the comparison result by the comparator circuit is input to the main control MPU 1310a, so that the main control MPU 1310a turns the setting key ON signal ON / OFF, the decision key ON signal ON / OFF, and the OFF signal ON / OFF may be determined. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting switch 1311a (the mode of the setting switch using the intermediate potential may be described as “determination key modification (8)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X from the setting change board 1310Y. Instead, the payout control board 633 may be provided with a determination key button having a pressing operation unit. . In this case, the pressing key button pressing operation portion is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the determining key button, and the pressing key button pressing operation portion corresponds to this. And a structure in which a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening so that the wire or the like cannot enter from a “gap” formed in the opening and the payout control board 633 cannot be modified. Become. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. On the cover body of the payout control board 633, a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the decision key button and the error release switch 633d so that the decision key button and the error release switch 633d are not confused. (The name of each button may be formed on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers one of the pressing key button and the error canceling switch 633d (to press the pressing operation unit) so that the determination key button and the error canceling switch 633d are not confused with each other. The cover may need to be opened.), A different color of the pressing operation portion may be used, or the outer shape of the determination key button and the error release switch 633d or the pressing operation Different types of switches may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit may be employed as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. A switch can be mentioned. In addition, when the determination key button and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the connector terminal of the payout control board 633 (the connector terminal of the main control board 1310X) is also formed apart from each other. Also, in the main control board 1310X, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the determination key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted are not close to each other (mutually Formed apart). Further, in the case where the determination key button is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the enter key button (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (9)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the signal from the error release switch 633d having the pressing operation unit on the payout control board 633 is received. The main control board 1310 is branched from the payout control board 633 and passed through the payout control board 633. Is input to the main control MPU1310a, may determine whether the determination key ON on the basis of this signal. As described above, the error cancel switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and after the power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started (the power supply of various control boards). When the time input process is completed and the interrupt process is performed), when no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d, while the error control switch 633d Based on the signal, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the mode of the error release switch may be described as “determination key modification (10)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the signal from the error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion on the payout control board 633 is displayed. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs a logic when the payout control unit is turned on, which will be described later. A command is generated by monitoring in the port input process, and the command generated in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described later is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control of the main control board 1310X that has received this command The MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. As described above, the error cancel switch 633d is for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display 633c, and after the power recovery, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is completely started (the power supply of various control boards). When the time input process is completed and the interrupt process is performed), when no error has occurred as the state of the pachinko machine 1, the pressing operation portion of the error release switch 633d is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated based on a signal from the error release switch 633d in the frame command reception processing in the main control timer interrupt processing described later, and notifies that. When the command to be transmitted is received, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is not operated based on the signal from the error release switch 633d and transmits the command to that effect Can be determined that the enter key is not ON. Accordingly, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (the error release switch mode 2 may be described as “determination key modification (11)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13 is set to ON. The setting switch 1311a is determined by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the rotational position of the notch 1311i and turning it OFF, and further rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise. The key ON signal can be turned on, and the determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the RAM clear switch 1310f is discharged. A RAM clear switch 1310 is provided for the control board 633. Is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, branched at the payout control board 633, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a Whether or not the enter key is ON may be determined based on the input operation signal. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f Can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a turns on the determination key ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it is determined that the determination key is not ON. In That. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON.

  The pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the payout control board box 632 corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v is the same as the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v so that the dispensing control board 633 cannot be modified by infiltrating a wire or the like from the “gap” formed in the portion and the corresponding opening. The part is formed.

  Note that the position at which the RAM clear switch 1310f is arranged on the payout control board 633 may be in the vicinity of an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation unit described later. The name of each button is printed on the cover body of the payout control board 633 at a position corresponding to each of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused. A seal is affixed (the name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). In addition, a button with a cover that covers either one of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d (a push operation on the press operation unit is performed so that the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are not confused). In order to achieve this, the cover may need to be opened), the pressing operation unit may have a different color, or the outer shape of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d. Or what differs in the shape of a press operation part may be employ | adopted, and the other type of switch which does not have a press operation part as RAM clear switch 1310f may be employ | adopted. Other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include, for example, a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. Various switches can be mentioned. Further, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error release switch 633d are provided on the payout control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f and a wiring pattern to the error release switch 633d The payout control board 633 is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection of the payout control board 633 to the connector terminal (the connector terminal of the main control board 1310X) is also separated. Also on the main control board 1310X, the routing of the wiring pattern to which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the detection signal from the error release switch 633d is transmitted do not approach each other. (Separated from each other). When the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the payout control board 633, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. The switch 1311a ′ may be used (the mode of the RAM clear switch (the mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) may be described as “decision key modification (12)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310X, and the initial position (that is, the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13 is set to ON. Rotate the setting switch 1311a counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and further rotate by 60 degrees counterclockwise. The determination key ON signal can be turned on, and the signal of the determination key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the RAM clear switch 1310f is changed. The RAM clear switch 131 is provided for the payout control board 633. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the operation signal from f in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and the payout control unit power-on process command described later The command created in the transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command may determine whether the determination key is ON. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f The main control MPU 1310a can use the RAM clear switch 1310f based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the pressing operation unit is operated and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the determination key is ON, while the RAM clear switch 1310f provided in the payout control board 633 It can be determined not determined key ON when receiving a command to communicate that fact to determine RAM clear switch 1310f depressing operation portion is unmanipulated the payout control MPU633aa of based on et operation signal. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON (RAM clear switch mode 2 (the configuration of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included) “determination key modification (13)”. May be described).

  In the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. By performing the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and the determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet The right sensor 1008b is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633, and the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b from which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a is a case where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, and the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port On the basis of a detection signal from one of the right sensors 1008b, it can be determined that the determination key is ON when the out port 1008 collects the game ball, while the door frame 3 is located with respect to the main body frame 4. When the game is not opened (that is, closed) and / or based on the detection signals of the out mouth left sensor 1008a and the out mouth right sensor 1008b, the out mouth 1008 is not collecting the game ball. It can be determined that the determination key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in the range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the mode of the outlet switch (setting) The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (14)”. In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to set the determination key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b are input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, and from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. Rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise to return to the original position (that is, the rotational position of the notch 1311i that turns off the setting switch 1311a), and then rotate 60 degrees counterclockwise. By performing the second ON operation, the setting switch 1311a can be set to the enter key ON, and a signal of the enter key ON is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, instead of this, the outlet left sensor 1008a and the outlet The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signal from the sensor 1008b in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described later, creates a command, and executes the payout control part power-on process described later. The command created in the command transmission process may be transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command may determine whether the determination key is ON. As described above, the game balls launched into the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 are collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a. As described above, the game ball collected by the out port 1008 is detected by either the out port left sensor 1008a or the out port right sensor 1008b. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a collects a game ball by the out port 1008 based on detection signals from the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b in a frame command reception process in a main control timer interrupt process described later. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines and receives a command to that effect, it can be determined that the determination key is ON. On the other hand, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the game ball is not collected by the out port 1008 and When a command that informs the user is received, it can be determined that the enter key is not ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (out-port switch mode 2 ( The configuration of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included. In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and send the game ball B to the outlet 1008 in order to set the determination key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the full tank detection sensor 154, the ball-cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 The detection signal is input to the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, and the payout control base. The main control MPU 1310a branches at 633 and is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the determination key is ON or not. The payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 monitors the logic of the detection signal from the detection sensor 154, the ball cut detection sensor 574, or the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process, which will be described later. The created command is transmitted to the main control board 1310X, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X that has received this command determines whether or not the enter key is ON. May be. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (the mode of the dispensing unit (setting switch) 1311a ′ may also be included. ”May be described as“ decision key modification (16) ”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a receives the external signal based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. While the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the frame 2, it can be determined that the enter key is ON, It can be determined not determined key ON when the state that the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the frame 2 are maintained. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (an aspect of the body frame opening switch ( The configuration of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included. In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to close the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 in order to set the determination key to ON. Thus, it is necessary to open the main body frame 4 again, remove the setting key K1 from the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and close the main body frame 4 again with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the frame 4, it can be determined that the enter key is ON. It can be determined not determined key ON when the door frame 3 is maintained the state of being closed relative to the frame 4. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (an aspect of the door frame opening switch ( The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “decision key modification (17)” In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to open the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key to ON. The door frame 3 must be closed again, the setting key must be removed from the insertion port of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a, and the main body frame 4 needs to be closed with respect to the outer frame 2.

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position that is the original position from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13 is set to ON the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set to ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. However, the setting switch 1311a may be provided in the main control board 1310X (setting). The mode of the switch may be described as “determination key modification (18)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the initial position that is the original position from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key 13 is set to ON the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a can be set to ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise and turning OFF, and then rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to The determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The setting switch 1311a is provided in the main control board 1310X and the setting switch 1311a is set. Turn the key notch 1311i from the rotation position to the initial position. By operating and turning OFF, the setting switch 1311a can be turned OFF, and when this OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, the main control MPU 1310a receives an OFF signal. When it is determined that the determination key is ON, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON when no OFF signal is input. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (setting switch mode 2 (setting The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “decision key modification (19)”

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a determination key button having a pressing operation unit may be provided on the main control board 1310X. In this case, the pressing operation part of the determination key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 corresponding to the determination key button. A portion corresponding to the opening portion of the cover body 1301 and the pressing operation portion so that the main control board 1310X cannot be modified by entering a wire or the like from a “gap” formed in the corresponding opening portion. In addition, a foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 144K) is formed. When the pressing operation portion of the enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the determination key button pressing operation unit is pressed based on the detection signal from the determination key button, while the determination key button pressing operation unit When the pressing operation is not performed, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON.

  Note that the position where the determination key button is arranged on the main control board 1310X may be in the vicinity of the RAM clear switch 1310f. The cover of the main control board box 1320 is a sticker on which the name of each button is printed at a position corresponding to each of the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so that the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are not confused with each other. (The name of each button may be molded on the cover body instead of this seal). Also, a button with a cover that covers one of the pressing key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f so as not to confuse the pressing key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f (for pressing the pressing operation unit). The cover may need to be opened.), A different pressing operation unit color may be used, and the outer shape or pressing operation of the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used. Different types of switches may be employed, or other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit may be employed as the enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation unit as a determination key button include various types such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide unit, a rotary switch having a rotation operation unit, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. A switch can be mentioned. Further, when the determination key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310X, the wiring pattern to the determination key button and the wiring pattern to the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed to prevent unauthorized modification. The main control board 1310X is formed so as not to approach each other (separate from each other). When the determination key button is provided on the main control board 1310X, the setting switch 1311a can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. 1311a ′ (the determination key button mode 2 (including the setting switch 1311a ′ mode may be included) may be described as “determination key variation (20)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is moved back from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned on to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees clockwise and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined. As will be described later, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f) ), When performing a setting change in which the setting value can be changed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a has a predetermined area (RAM Be sure to clear all of the areas except for the specific area. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the RAM built in itself by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, so the RAM clear switch 1310f The main control MPU 1310a determines that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. On the other hand, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, it can be determined that the determination key is not ON. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the presence / absence of the determination key ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (RAM clear switch mode 3 ( The mode of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (21)”. The period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is sent to the payout control board 633 as described later. Since it is input to the payout control MPU 633aa, when the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to function as an error release switch 633d described later, the error release switch 633d is not required on the payout control board 633.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the gate sensor 2401 of the gate unit 2003 provided in the game board 5 and various winning mouths are provided. Various sensors (for example, second start port sensor 2402, big prize port sensor 2403, first receiving port sensor 2) 06, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first start opening sensor 3002), the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signals from the out opening left sensor 1008a and the out opening right sensor 1008b of the out opening 1008 are input are based on these detection signals. The presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (an aspect (setting of various sensors, etc.) The mode of the switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (22)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and sends the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 or various winnings in order to set the determination key ON. It is necessary to send the game ball B to the mouth or to send the game ball B to the out port 1008.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the main control MPU 1310a drives an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, and a solenoid. Control is performed to control the operation of movable bodies (functions), and optical sensors (photosensors, ranging, etc.) The main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the determination key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. You may judge. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (an aspect of the optical object sensor). (A configuration of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (23)”). In this case, the person who changes the setting value opens the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in order to set the determination key to ON, and the optical sensor is located at the original position of the movable body (the accessory). It is necessary to move the movable body (the accessory) so as to detect the operating position and the like.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). A signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism in the game area 5a is received. Based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the inputted main control MPU 1310a determines the key O The presence or absence of it may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (magnetic sensor mode (setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (24)”. In this case, the person who changes the setting value needs to bring the magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front of the game board 5 in order to set the determination key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). A signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated by shaking or hitting it. Various types of game boards 5 provided by changing the course of the game balls flowing down the game area 5a defined in the game board 5 When the game board 5 is provided with a vibration sensor 3006 (see FIGS. 241, 242, and 245) that detects an illegal act of entering a prize mouth or a gate part (gate), the main control MPU 1310 a The presence / absence of fraudulent activity may be determined based on the detection signal, and the presence / absence of the determination key ON may be determined based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3006. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (vibration sensor mode (setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “decision key modification (25)”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 in order to set the enter key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal was input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, but instead of this, various pamphlets provided on the game board 5 by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves. Detecting fraudulent acts that illegally acquire the game ball B by malfunctioning various sensors or various sensors provided in the payout device 580 When the game board 5 or the payout device 580 is provided with a radio wave sensor, the main control MPU 1310a determines the presence / absence of fraud based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor and determines the key based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. The presence or absence of ON may be determined. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON. 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (26)”). In this case, a person who changes the setting value needs to irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to set the enter key ON.

  In the above-described embodiment, the counterclockwise is set so that the setting switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the notch 1311i where the setting switch 1311a is turned off). The setting switch 1311a can be turned ON by performing a second ON operation (by rotating 60 degrees in the direction and then turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees in the counterclockwise direction). The signal is input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, a press detection sensor that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360. 381, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation button unit 360 is detected. Detection signals from the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched at the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not the enter key is ON. In this case, the setting switch 1311a may be a setting switch 1311a ′ that can be rotated only in a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the notch 1311i in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON (an aspect of the effect operation button unit ( The configuration of the setting switch 1311a ′ may be included.) May be described as “determination key modification (27)”.

  In the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are accommodated in the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320 configured by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. 1310Y may be accommodated in a separate setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. In the main control board box 1320, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of a crimping portion 1303. The crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism 1320z, and a plurality of crimping portions 1303 are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism 1320z, and then the main control board box 1320 is opened. Therefore, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism 1320z. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism 1320z is destroyed. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the notch 1311i of the setting switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through the openings formed in the cover body of the corresponding main control board box 1320, but the setting is not performed. In order to prevent the setting change board 1310Y from being changed by intruding a wire or the like from a “clearance” formed in the front surface of the notch 1311i of the switch 1311a and the pressing operation part of the determination key button and the corresponding opening, respectively. A foreign matter intrusion prevention portion similar to the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v (see FIG. 144L) is formed between the portion corresponding to the opening of the cover body and the pressing operation portion. Note that, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the structure of the setting change board box is different from that of the main control board box 1320 described above. A setting change board cover opening / closing switch that can detect opening of the cover body may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening / closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310X, or input to the main control board 1310X via the setting change board 1310Y (indirect). You may comprise. Based on the detection signal from the opening / closing switch for the setting change board cover body, the case where the cover body is opened from the base body can be included in the preset setting value change permission condition described above (setting change board box) May be described as “determination key modification (28)”).

  In the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y is connected to the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X, and the setting key of the setting switch 1311a is used to prevent unauthorized modification. The wiring pattern for transmitting the ON signal, the wiring pattern for transmitting the determination key ON signal for the setting switch 1311a, the wiring pattern for transmitting the OFF signal for the setting switch 1311a, and the signal from the setting switching button 1311b Are arranged so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (on the main control board 1310X) The connection to the terminal of the connector MSCN) is also separated Also on the main control board 1310X, a wiring pattern in which various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted (that is, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted). The wiring pattern to be transmitted and the wiring pattern to which the setting switch 1311a OFF signal is transmitted) and the wiring pattern to which the signal from the setting switching button 1311b is transmitted are not close to each other (separate from each other). 1) a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted and a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted. This is different from the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y. The connector may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310X (inter-board connection) separately from the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X via another connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y. The other connector provided on the setting change board 1310Y and the other connector provided on the main control board 1310X may be electrically connected via a harness (the wiring pattern routing mode is determined by the “decision key”). May be described as a modified example (29).

  Moreover, you may employ | adopt the aspect suitably selected among the modification (1)-(29) of the determination key mentioned above, and may employ | adopt the aspect of the selection combination of the modification ("determination key modification (30)"). ").

[5-5. Other forms of main control unit]
[5-4-2. The main control unit 1310 described in the “main control unit” is configured such that the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y are separated (hereinafter referred to as “divided board structure”), but both the control boards 1310X and 1310Y have one. A single substrate (hereinafter referred to as “single substrate structure”) may be used.
The main control unit 1300 shown in FIGS. 144D to 144G includes a main control unit 1310 having a single board structure having a main control MPU 1310a for controlling the progress of the game, and the main control unit 1310 is accommodated and attached to the substrate holder 1200. A main control board box 1320 as a container.
It should be noted that the components, members, and the like provided in the main control unit 1310 having the single board structure are provided on the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y having the divided board structure except for the structural features described below. Functions and operating methods are the same. Therefore, the function and operation method of each element are mainly described in [5-4. Main control unit] to [5-4-2-3. The description of setting switch, setting switching button, setting indicator] is incorporated.
Conversely, the structural features of the elements described below can also be applied to the main control unit 1310 having the divided substrate structure including the main control board 1310X and the setting change board 1310Y described above.

[5-5-1. Main control board box]
As shown in FIGS. 144D and 144E, the main control board box 1320 is generally composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302, and in an internal space 1320s formed by overlapping the cover body 1301 on the base body 1302. The main controller 1310 is accommodated.
The cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, polycarbonate), and thereby the state of the front side and the back side of the main control unit 1310 (whether unauthorized modification has been performed, or Can check from the outside of the main control board box 1320 whether or not an illegal IC chip is mounted.

[5-5-2. Main control unit]
In the divided board structure, the main control unit 1310 has a main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game, the payout of the game ball B, and the like, and the game setting related to the probability of the lottery and the allocation rate to the area advantageous to the player Can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values, for example, main control MPU 1310a, setting switch 1311a, setting switch button 1311b, setting display 1310g, etc. The elements are appropriately arranged on a single substrate.
For convenience of explanation, the main control unit 1310 is attached to the base body 1302 side of the main control board box 1320 in FIG. 144E, but is actually a female provided at an intermediate position between the four corners and the long side of the cover body 1301. The screw cylinder 1301n is screwed with a screw (not shown).

[5-5-3. Setting switch]
As shown in FIGS. 144E, 144F, and 144G, the setting switch 1311a includes a substantially cubic mounting portion 1311d that is mounted on the board of the main control portion 1310, and a circle that can be inscribed in the square top portion of the mounting portion 1311d. It is roughly composed of a smaller diameter cylindrical mounting portion 1311e.

[5-5-3-1. Mounting part]
The mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is roughly configured from a resin main body portion 1311f having an electrical function portion therein, and a mounting bracket 1311g that covers the upper surface and side surfaces of the resin main body portion 1311f. An insertion piece 1311h protruding from the bottom of 1311g is inserted into the board of the main control unit 1310 and fixedly mounted on the circuit.
The mounting bracket 1311g is provided with a notch 1311i at substantially the center of the four sides of the top portion. Therefore, the top of the mounting portion 1311d is flat around the mounting portion 1311e and the center of each side is uneven by the notch 1311i. It has become.

[5-5-3-2. Setting key cylinder]
The setting key cylinder 1311e of the setting switch 1311a has an operation portion 1311j at the top, and an insertion port for inserting the setting key K1 into the operation portion 1311j is opened. By inserting the key body K10 of the appropriate setting key K1 into the insertion port of the operation unit 1311j and twisting the key knob K11 in a predetermined direction, the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be confirmed as described above.

[5-5-4. Main control board box cover and setting switch]
In the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, as shown in the sectional view of FIG. 144F, an opening 1301h for opening the operation portion 1311j of the mounting portion 1311e of the setting switch 1311a to the outside is opened. A receiving tube portion 1301i is provided so as to project toward the internal space 1320s so as to surround the opening portion 1301h.
The receiving tube portion 1301i has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the mounting portion 1311e so that the mounting portion 1311e can be easily inserted and removed when the main control portion 1310 is attached to and detached from the cover body 1301 (for example, design) Accordingly, the fitting portion 1311e is loosely fitted by the gap t1 shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 144F.
The setting switch 1311a is shaped so that the position of the operation portion 1311j at the top is deeper than the outer surface of the cover body 1301 in the state shown in FIGS. 144F and 144G where the mounting portion 1311e is fitted in the receiving tube portion 1301i A concave recess 1301k is formed by the operation portion 1311j and the opening portion 1301h of the cover body 1301.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 144F, the interval t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i of the cover body 1301 and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is the receiving tube portion 1301i and the mounting portion 1311e. The length of the receiving tube portion 1301i is set to be equal to or less than the gap t1. In this way, the radial gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the mounting portion 1311e, and the axial interval t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a are t1 ≧ t2. By doing so, it is possible to effectively prevent unauthorized insertion of a foreign object such as a wire from the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the mounting portion 1311e.
This is because the radial gap t1 between the receiving cylinder part 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is normally set to the minimum width (clearance) necessary to pass the setting key cylinder 1311e through the receiving cylinder part 1301i. Since the foreign matter passing through here is limited to an extremely thin one, even if such a thin foreign matter passes through the gap t1, the direction is changed after it hits the top of the mounting portion, and in that state, the part of the interval t2 that is equal to or less than the gap t1 This is because it is not easy to break through, and even if it breaks through, it is extremely difficult to control the foreign object toward the target point (for example, the terminal portion of the main control MPU 1310a as an input electronic component).
The main control unit 1310, which is a support base of the setting switch 1311a, is a plate-like printed board, and can be bent when the setting switch 1311a is pushed. Accordingly, by pressing the setting switch 1311a strongly to bend the main control unit 1310, it is illegal to forcibly increase the interval t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a. Action can be considered. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting switch 1311a is attached in the vicinity of the above-described screwing portion (joint portion) of the main control unit 1310, thereby suppressing the deflection of the main control unit 1310 and forcibly expanding the interval t2. I can't do fraud. Moreover, suppressing the bending of the main control unit 1310 when the setting switch 1311a is operated is effective in preventing cracks and the like of the main control unit 1310 when used for a long period of time.

  Further, as described above, the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is notched by the notch 1311i due to the work of the mounting bracket 1311g. The cylindrical end portion 1301z of the portion 1301i is also uneven, and specifically, by projecting the convex portion 1301m to the cylindrical end portion 1301z corresponding to the notch 1311i of the mounting portion 1311d, the relationship of t1 ≧ t2 as a whole is obtained. Is to be maintained.

  As described above, the gap t1 between the receiving tube portion 1301i and the mounting portion 1311e, and the interval t2 between the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i and the top portion of the mounting portion 1311d of the setting switch 1311a is set to t1 ≧ t2. The foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v for preventing the intrusion of foreign matter such as a wire corresponds to an embodiment of the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v. The push button type switch member having a substantially stepped shaft shape provided with a pressing operation portion 1311p can be applied at a low cost without separately adding a cylindrical body 1301c such as the foreign matter intrusion prevention portion 1301v shown in FIG. 144K. .

  Moreover, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 144F, the tube end portion 1301z of the receiving tube portion 1301i has a thickness of the protruding portion 1301m smaller than that of the receiving tube portion 1301i so that the interval between the protruding portions 1301m facing each other is reduced. It is formed to be larger than the inner diameter of the receiving tube part 1301i. Further, a taper 1301j is provided at a boundary portion between the inner surface of the convex portion 1301m and the inner peripheral surface of the receiving tube portion 1301i, and the top portion of the setting key cylinder 1311e is captured and guided by the convex portion 1301m and the taper 1301j. , And can be smoothly fitted into the receiving tube portion 1301i. As described above, the clearance between the setting key cylinder 1311e and the receiving cylinder part 1301i is set to the minimum necessary for crime prevention. Therefore, it is difficult to directly insert the setting key cylinder 1311e into the receiving cylinder part 1301i, but the protrusions 1301m Is set to be wider than the inner diameter of the receiving tube portion 1301i, the workability can be remarkably improved. In addition, in the configuration in which the convex portion 1301m is used as an introduction guide for the setting key cylinder 1311e, the fitting of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i and the setting key cylinder 1311e is made as compared with the case where the inner periphery of the receiving cylinder portion 1301i is chamfered in a tapered shape. Since the length can be increased, the security performance against foreign object insertion can be increased.

[5-5-5. Main control unit and back cover of main unit frame]
The main control unit 1300 configured as described above is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 of the main body frame 4 as described above, and the rear surface of the main body frame 4 is as shown in FIG. The back cover 640 is covered together with the game board 5. In the embodiment, the back cover 640 of the main body 4 covers the opening 1301h of the main control unit 1300, so that it is not necessary to provide a security cover on the opening 1301h. Unauthorized access can be prevented. This eliminates the need to project an extra cover over the opening 1301h, so that it is easy to keep the depth dimension of the gaming machine within the specified range without squeezing other elements.
Moreover, as shown in the enlarged view of the imaginary line enclosure in FIG. 144F, a bulging portion 640b that can be fitted (freely fitted) into the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 may be provided on the inner surface of the back cover 640. . By doing so, when the recess 1301k of the cover body 1301 and the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 do not coincide with each other, the bulging portion 640b of the back cover 640 interferes and does not close normally. Inadequate installation of the main control unit 1300 can be prevented.

[5-5-6. Regarding Relationship with Claim 1]
As apparent from the above description, the above [5-5. ] To [5-5-5. The main control unit 1300 described in the above corresponds to an embodiment of claim 1 of the present invention. The main control unit 1300 further includes the following technical idea.
[Claim A1]
A gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A main control board box for accommodating the main control unit;
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a transparent cover body covering the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
On the other hand, the setting switch has a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key, and is formed such that an operation portion of the setting key cylinder faces the outside from an opening portion opened in the cover body.
Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting switch is configured such that a concave depression is formed by the operation portion and the opening portion so that the position of the operation portion is recessed from the outer surface of the cover body. A gaming machine characterized by
According to such a gaming machine, since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having a setting key, it is difficult for an unauthorized operation to be performed.
On the other hand, when changing the setting value with the setting key, the setting key that has failed to insert too quickly may slide on the operation part and protrude into the resin part of the cover body. There is a risk of streak scratches on the surface.
On the other hand, in the main control board box of the gaming machine of the present invention, since the concave depression is formed by the operation portion at the top of the setting key cylinder and the opening of the cover body, the setting key is temporarily not inserted. However, the setting key hits the edge of the opening and does not protrude from the surface of the cover body. Therefore, there is no possibility that the surface of the cover body will be damaged at the tip of the setting key, and a beautiful transparent state of the cover body can be maintained for a long time.
[Claim A2]
The gaming machine according to claim A1,
A back cover that can be opened and closed and a main control board box are attached to the rear side of the main body frame having a game board, and the main control board box is not provided with a cover for the opening, and the opening is disposed on the main body frame. It is characterized in that it can be covered with a back cover.
In such a gaming machine, the crime prevention performance of the setting key cylinder (preventing unauthorized access to the setting key cylinder by a matching key, etc.) can be achieved by the back cover of the main body frame, without providing a security cover at the opening of the main control board box. Since there is no protrusion of the setting key cylinder from the opening of the main control board box and no extra protrusion of the cover, the depth dimension of the gaming machine can be kept within the specification without pressing other elements. it can.
[Claim A3]
The gaming machine according to claim A2, wherein a bulging portion that can be fitted (freely fitted) into the recess of the cover body is provided on the inner surface of the back cover.
In such a gaming machine, when the dent of the cover body and the bulging part of the back cover do not match, the bulging part of the back cover interferes and does not close normally. The above deficiencies can be prevented.

[5-6. Game setting crime prevention structure]
As described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present invention includes game settings related to the player's profit as set values in a plurality of stages, and the set values are set by a setting switch 1311a, a setting switch button 1311b, a setting indicator 1310g, and the like. The change operation means can be changed, and a crime prevention structure is provided for preventing such illegal change of the setting value of the game setting. Below, the specific example of the crime prevention structure is demonstrated.

[5-6-1. Security structure of change operation means (1)]
The first crime prevention structure (1) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means is a specification for controlling the change operation means, particularly the start of setting change, as described above with respect to the embodiment of FIGS. 144A to 144G. The operation part is configured by a setting switch 1311a (having a key insertion part at the end surface part) that is turned on by the setting key K1. Thereby, the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person including the store manager of the game hall having the setting key K1 by the changing operation means.

  The change operation means is for changing a set value. In the embodiment, the change operation means includes a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switching button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g. Of these, the setting switch 1311a is the main switch. A specific operation unit that is provided in the control unit 1310 and controls setting change start, and a setting switching button 1311b is provided in the main control unit 1310 and is another operation unit that performs setting operations other than the setting change start. . No security measures other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v for preventing the entry of foreign matter such as a wire are taken for this separate operation unit. Therefore, an external input operation (pressing operation of the setting switch button 1311b) is not performed. The pressing operation of the unit 1311p) can be performed by anyone other than a specific person, but the “predetermined set value change permission condition” that the setting switch 1311a as the specific operation unit is set by the setting key K1 is satisfied. Since the input in the state where it is not active is invalid in terms of control, there is almost no problem in crime prevention.

  Note that the setting switch 1311a, which is the specific operation unit of the change operation means, has an axis line oriented in a direction orthogonal to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310 as illustrated, and in the forms of FIGS. 144A to 144C, Although the tip portion protrudes from the outer surface of the cover body 1301, the protrusion may be an obstacle depending on the depth of the island equipment of the game hall, and may also become an obstacle during storage.

  In such a case, as indicated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 144A and 144B, the axis of the change operation means operated by the setting key K1 (for example, the setting switch 1311a having the key insertion portion) is used as the substrate of the main control portion 1310. For example, it is possible to set the direction substantially parallel to the surface so that the tip surface (key insertion surface) faces the side surface of the main control board box 1320. Specifically, the change operation means is arranged so that the key insertion part protrudes from the left end (hinge part side) in front view of the board surface of the main control part 1310 (so as to protrude from the board end). A semicircular cutout formed in the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 that is a container so as to fit in the setting switch 1311a and a main control board. It can be exemplified that the protruding portion of the changing operation means is accommodated with the key insertion portion exposed to the outside by both the notch portion formed in the cover body 1301 of the box 1320. In order to project the key insertion part from the left end of the main surface of the main control unit 1310 when viewed from the front, the operation unit provided with the key insertion part may be substantially the same surface as the side surface part of the main control board box 1320. The surface portion on which the key insertion portion is provided may be protruded from the side surface portion of the main control board box 1320, but preferably the recess 1301k is formed as described above.

  As a result, the protrusion of the change operation means to the rear side of the main control board box 1320 (the back side of the pachinko machine 1) can be almost eliminated or reduced. Further, when performing the operation of placing the board of the main control unit 1310 on the base body 1302 or the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the key insertion part protruding from the board end is accommodated in the notch part, Positioning (positioning) of the substrate of the control unit 1310 can be facilitated, and the burden of assembling work of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

[5-6-2. Security structure of change operation means (2)]
As shown in FIGS. 144H to 144M, the second crime prevention structure (2) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means includes a change suppression means 1312 that covers at least a part of the change operation means, And a first state holding unit (hereinafter also referred to as a lock unit) 1313 that locks (holds) the change suppressing unit 1312.

  The change operation means for the security structure (2) is composed of a power switch 630a, a setting switch 1311a, a setting switch button 1311b, and a setting display 1310g, as in the security structure (1). The change operation means includes a setting switch 1311a (hereinafter also referred to as “specific operation unit 1311a”) and a setting switching button 1311b (hereinafter referred to as “separate operation”) excluding the power switch 630a provided in the power supply unit 620c. A setting display 1310g for displaying a set value. In this crime prevention structure (2), the setting switch 1311a as a specific operation part and the setting switching button 1311b as a separate operation part are both small push button switches that can be turned ON / OFF by pressing the pressing operation part 1311p. The device itself does not have a crime prevention structure other than the foreign matter intrusion prevention unit 1301v that prevents the entry of foreign matters such as wires.

The change prevention means 1312 of the crime prevention structure (2) covers at least a part of the change operation means so as to make it difficult to change the game settings. The specific configuration will be described later, but at least one of the change operation means will be described later. The first state that makes it difficult to change the game setting by covering the part, and the second state that allows the change operation means that is exposed by exposing the change operation means covered in the first state. obtain.
Here, at least a part of the change operation means means that not only the case where the change operation means is composed of a plurality of elements, but also one element related to the change operation essential for game setting in the plurality of elements may be used. To do. It also means that even if the element of the change operation means is not completely covered, there may be some gap if the change operation of the game setting is difficult. That is, the concept of covering at least a part of the change operation means includes both the above-described numerical items and the above-described qualitative items.

  The lock part (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (2) will be described in detail later, but locks (holds) the change suppressing means 1312 in the first state and specifies the lock (holding). The change suppression means 1312 switches between a change from the first state to the second state and a change from the second state to the first state.

[5-6-2-1. Change suppression means and lock portion (first state holding means)]
The concrete change prevention means 1312 and the lock part (first state holding means) 1313 of the crime prevention structure (2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 144H to 144M.
First, the change suppression means 1312 (D) in FIG. 144H has a flat plate shape that covers almost one half of the outer surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 (that is, a part of the container). The specific operation unit 1311a (setting switch 1311a) and the separate operation unit 1311b (setting switching button 1311b) of the provided change operation means and the RAM clear switch 1310f can be covered together. The change restraining means 1312 can be pivoted into a single-open door by attaching one end side thereof to the bearing portion 1301a of the cover body 1301, and, as shown by a solid line in FIG. 144H, the specific operation portion 1311a. The first state that makes it difficult to change the game setting by covering the game and the like, and the second state that makes it possible to change the game setting by exposing the specific operation unit 1311a and the like, as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. It can change (turn).

On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. 144H is a cylinder lock 1313a provided integrally on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (D), and the rotary lock of the cylinder lock 1313a. By engaging the lock member 1313c provided at the tip of the shaft 1313b with the lock receiving member 1301b protruding from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are engaged. And the change suppression means 1312 (D) is locked in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) rotates the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a using the unlock key K2, and thus the lock member 1301b of the cover body 1301 is locked to the lock member. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is released by a specific release operation of removing 1313c to enable the change to the second state, and further change from the second state to the first state The change suppression means 1312 (D) thus made can be locked (held) by the unlock key K2.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) in FIG. Since the change can only be made by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the change operation means itself does not have a crime prevention structure for changing the game setting, there is almost no problem in crime prevention as in the crime prevention structure (1). .

  Note that the change suppression means 1312 (D) is made of a synthetic resin having transparency (for example, transparency), and does not hinder the visibility of the change operation means even if the change operation means is covered in the first state. Each of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) has a management number or a predetermined description at a position that does not overlap each other when the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is in the first state and covers the cover body 1301. An information display unit 1314 describing a sentence is provided. As a result, the replacement of the cover body 1301 and the change suppressing means 1312 (D) performed for the purpose of fraudulent concealment (collection of components in good condition) can be easily found. Visual confirmation of fraudulent work against 1311a can be easily performed.

  In addition, the change suppressing unit 1312 (D) has a size and shape that covers a part of the cover body 1301, but for example, the change suppressing unit 1312 (D) has a size and shape that can cover the entire main control unit 1300. While being formed, the bearing member 1301a and the lock receiving member 1301b of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D) may be provided on the fixing member (for example, the substrate holder 1200) on the main body frame 4 side. By doing so, the safety | security of the main control unit 1300 whole can be improved.

  Further, the crime prevention performance of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) is as follows. As shown in FIG. 144H, the rotation center (bearing portion 1301a) is provided on the free end side of the main body frame 4, so that the lock portion (first state) Even if (holding means) 1313 (D) is destroyed, further crime prevention is possible. That is, as indicated by an imaginary line in the figure, the change suppression means 1312 (D) becomes a partition in the open state, and a wall near the left side of the change operation means (specific operation part 1311a, separate operation part 1311b). The change restraining means 1312 (D) is configured to open the act of performing an unauthorized change operation on the change operating means from the free end side of the main body frame 4. It can be blocked by itself. That is, by providing the rotation center of the change suppressing means 1312 (D) on the free end side of the main body frame 4 in this way, the change operating means can be protected in the first state, and the screen-like shape in the second state. Thus, an illegal change operation on the change operation means can be prevented. In order to enjoy such effects to the maximum extent, the change suppressing means 1312 (D) in FIG. 144H has a length (distance) that protrudes from the bearing portion 1301a toward the rear of the pachinko machine 1 when it is in the open state. ) Is configured to be larger than the length (distance) from the bearing portion 1301a to the place where the change operation means (specific operation portion 1311a, separate operation portion 1311b) is arranged, and the change suppression means 1312 in the open state ( The change operation means (the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b) is configured to be closest to the right side of D). Further, the place where the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation unit 1311b) is arranged is positioned close to the center of the vertical direction of the change suppression means 1312 (D), and the change operation means (specific operation unit 1311a, separate operation) Access from above and below the portion 1311b) is made difficult, and the rotation of the change restraining means 1312 (D) is stopped (fixed) in a state of standing upright in the form of a screen. In addition, although it can improve a crime prevention performance by having a part of these each structure, it is best to satisfy | fill all these most preferably.

  Conversely, the change suppression means 1312 (D) may be made smaller so that only the specific operation unit 1311a is covered, and the separate operation unit 1311b may not be covered in either the first state or the second state. In this way, by narrowing down the protection targets of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements (specific operation unit and separate operation unit) to those with high security importance, those with low security importance are opened to the outside. This makes it possible to improve the workability of setting changes.

  It should be noted that the axis of the change operation means described in the crime prevention structure (1) is set so as to be substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea that can be applied is also applicable to the cylinder lock 1313a of the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (D).

Next, the change suppression unit 1312 (E) in FIG. 144I is substantially the same as the change suppression unit 1312 (D) in FIG. 144H, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.
On the other hand, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) in FIG. 144I is provided on the perforated lock receiving member 1315 integrally provided on the free end side of the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and on the cover body 1301 side. It is a padlock 1313d that couples the projecting perforated lock receiving member 1316 with an inverted U-shaped lock member 1313c, and by engaging both perforated lock receiving members 1315 and 1316 with the lock member 1313c, The change suppression means 1312 (E) in one state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to lock (hold) the change suppression means 1312 (E) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses the unlock key K2 to change the lock member 1313c of the padlock 1313d in the unlocking direction, so that the change suppression means 1312 (E) is perforated. The lock restraining member 1312 (E) is unlocked in the first state by the specific releasing operation of removing the lock member 1313c from the lock receiving member 1315 and the perforated lock receiving member 1316 of the cover body 1301. The change suppression means 1312 (E) changed to the second state from the second state can be locked (held) with the padlock 1313d.

  The lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) uses a well-known padlock 1313d, and therefore is disengaged from both the change suppressing means 1312 (E) and the cover body 1301 in the unlocked state. . Therefore, the lock portion (first state holding means) (E) is detached from the cover body 1301 (housing body) in the unlocked state by being connected to the cover body 1301 by, for example, a wire-like or chain-like support portion 1317. It is supposed not to. Thereby, there is no possibility of dropping the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E) into the island facility in the unlocked state, and the removed lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (E). Forget about the place where you put it and look for it in the lock phase.

  Next, the change suppression means 1312 (F) in FIGS. 144J to H is made swingable by pivotally attaching a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan in a substantially horizontal fan shape to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. It can be changed to the first state covering the specific operation unit 1311a of the change operation means as shown in FIG. 144J and the second state exposing the specific operation unit 1311a to the outside as shown in FIG. 144L. Further, the change suppression unit 1312 (F) does not cover the separate operation unit 1311b when in the first state with respect to the specific operation unit 1311a. The operation unit 1311b is covered. Thus, by selectively covering the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b with the change suppression unit 1312 (F), an erroneous operation of operating the specific operation unit 1311a and the separate operation unit 1311b at the same time is unlikely to occur.

  The change suppression means 1312 (F) is always urged in a direction to cover the separate operation part 1311b by a not-shown winding spring provided at the center of oscillation, and a lock part (first state holding means) 1313 (described later). When the lock (holding) in the first state by F) is released, the second state is changed by the elasticity of the winding spring. By urging the change suppression unit 1312 (F) toward the second state in this manner, the change suppression unit 1312 (F) is not likely to stop at a halfway position, and operability is improved. The urging direction of the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) may be either the first state or the second state. Preferably, the urging direction toward the second state is preferably the change suppressing unit 1312 (F). When the lock (holding) is released, the special operation unit 1311a is automatically exposed to the outside, so that the procedure of the change operation is easy to understand.

144J to 144L, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) includes a mounting base portion 1301d protruding from the cover body 1301, a cylinder lock 1313a fixed to the mounting base portion 1301d, and The cam 1313e attached to the tip of the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, and the change restraining means by sliding the peripheral surface (cam surface) of the cam 1313e on the upper side of the change restraining means 1312 (F). 1312 is pushed down against the urging force of the winding spring to lock (hold) in the first state covering the specific operation portion 1311a.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) uses the unlock key K2 to rotate the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a, thereby changing the cam 1313e according to the change in the peripheral shape of the cam 1313e. The change suppression means 1312 (F) is unlocked (held) in the first state by a specific release operation of unlocking (holding) 1312 (F), and can be changed to the second state (embodiment). Since the change suppression means 1312 (F) is urged in the direction toward the second state by a winding spring (not shown), when the lock (holding) in the first state is released, the change suppression means 1312 (F) slides on the circumferential surface of the cam 1313e. It automatically changes to the second state while touching.) Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (F) changed from the second state to the first state can be locked (held) with the unlock key K2. .

  In the setting value changing operation, when the change suppressing unit 1312 (F) is in the second state and covers the separate operation unit 1311b, it is necessary to operate the separate operation unit 1311b. What is necessary is just to expose manually the other operation part 1311b, for example by putting a finger on the operation protrusion 1312m which protruded at 1312 (F).

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppression means 1312 (F) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (F) of FIGS. 144J and 144L is based on the change operation means. Since the setting value of the game setting can be changed only by a specific person having the unlock key K2, even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game setting, the crime prevention structure is the same as the security structure (1). There is almost no problem above.

  Next, the change suppression means 1312 (I) in FIG. 144M is of a form in which a portion corresponding to the setting change board 1310X of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is separated and made independent. By engaging the key-type hinge part 1312b with the key-type hinge part 1302a formed on one side of the base body 1302, the base body 1302 is rotatable and provided on the setting change board 1310Y. It can change to the 1st state which covers the specific operation part 1311a and the separate operation part 1311b which are in a batch, and the 2nd state which enables the change operation by exposing the specific operation part 1311a and the separate operation part 1311b. The cover body 1301 corresponding to the main control board 1310X is rotatably attached to a partition wall 1302b raised from the base body 1302 between the setting change board 1310Y and the main control board 1310X.

144M is a dial lock 1313f provided at the edge of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) on the cover body 1301 side, and the locking / unlocking shaft of the dial lock 1313f is shown in FIG. By engaging the tip of 1313g with a lock threader 1301f provided on the edge of the cover body 1301, the change suppressing means 1312 (I) in the first state and the cover body 1301 are coupled to each other, and the change suppressing means 1312 ( I) is locked (held) in the first state.
Further, the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) rotates the plurality of dials of the dial lock 1313f in accordance with the unlock number to retract the advance / retract shaft 1313g, and thus the lock shaft of the cover body 1301. The lock (holding) of the first state of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is released by a specific release operation of removing the advance / retract lock shaft 1313g from the thread 1301f, and the second state can be changed. The change suppressing means 1312 (I) changed from the first state to the first state can be locked (held) with the dial lock 1313f.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (2) of the change suppression means 1312 (I) and the lock portion (first state holding means) 1313 (I) in FIG. Since the change can only be made by a specific person who knows the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f, even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game settings, the same problem as in the security structure (1). There is almost no. The first state holding means 1313 exemplified in the crime prevention structure (2) employs a relatively high crime prevention performance such as a cylinder lock 1313a, a padlock 1313d, and a dial lock 1313f, but the crime prevention performance is lower than these. In any case, any configuration may be used as long as the change suppressing means 1312 held in the first state can be released by a specific release operation.
144M is independent of the cover body 1301, and therefore, even if the cover body 1301 needs to be replaced, the change suppression means 1312 (I) can be reused as it is. is there. Further, when the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is connected to the hinge part side of the cover body 1301, the cover body 1301 can be rotated only in the second state in which the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is rotated. Therefore, even if an unauthorized person breaks the sealing mechanism 1320z of the cover body 1301, the unauthorized operation cannot be performed unless the specific operation of the change suppressing means 1312 (I), that is, the unlocking number of the dial lock 1313f is known. Therefore, the change prevention means 1312 (I) can improve the fraud prevention function of the cover body 1301.

[5-6-2-2. Security structure of change operation means (3)]
In the third crime prevention structure (3) for preventing unauthorized operation of the change operation means, the crime prevention structure (2) exposes the change operation means to the outside with the change suppression means 1312 in the second state. However, the change control means 1312 is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the container (main control board box 1320) side, so that the change operation means can be changed by itself. While making it difficult, the change suppression means 1312 is made to perform the operation of the change operation means.
That is, the change prevention means 1312 (J) of the crime prevention structure (3) is on the cover body 1301 side that is the housing body and on the specific operation section 1311a (may be another operation section 1311b) as shown in FIG. 144N. A cylinder lock 1313a fixedly provided at a position to be covered, that is, a position of the first state covering the opening 1301h for exposing the specific operation unit 1311a, is provided, and is directly connected to the specific operation unit 1311a from the outside. Make the change operation difficult.
Further, the change suppressing means 1312 (J) is configured to push the rotation of the end face cam 1313i fixed to the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a so that a mediation operation of the switch input can be performed by a specific operation from the outside. A motion conversion mechanism is provided that makes the motion of the mover 1313h, that is, a motion that can be operated for switch input.
When the unlocking key K2 is inserted into the change suppressing means 1312 (J) and a specific operation for rotating the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is performed, the specific operation unit 1311a is caused by the above action of the motion conversion mechanism. The direct change operation from the outside to the switch is substituted by the pressing operation slider 1313h of the change suppression means 1312 (J). In other words, the direct change operation from the outside to the specific operation unit 1311a is changed by the change suppression means. It is executed through a pressing operation slider 1313h of 1312 (J).

According to this change suppression means 1312 (J), the change operation means externally changing the game setting by the change operation means is provided by the change suppression means fixedly provided at a position covering the change operation means with respect to the cover body 1301 side. Since it is in a difficult state, there is almost no possibility that the game settings will be changed illegally.
On the other hand, when the game setting is regularly changed by the change operation means, for example, an operation of inserting and unlocking the unlock key K2 from the outside is performed as a specific external operation for the change suppression means 1312 (J). Then, the operation for the change control unit 1312 (J) performs a change operation for the change operation unit directly (intermediation execution), and the game setting can be changed.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, the specific operation on the change suppression unit 1312 (J) is terminated, so that it is possible to return to a state in which a direct change operation from the outside to the change operation unit is difficult.

Note that the change suppressing means 1312 (J) is not limited to the case where the rotary lock shaft 1313b of the cylinder lock 1313a is rotated by the unlocking key K2, for example, the dial lock 1313f of the change suppressing means 1312 (I) is moved forward and backward. And the axis of the pressing operation unit 1311p of the specific operation unit 1311a are arranged so as to coincide with each other and the dial of the dial lock 1313f is aligned with the unlocking number, and the specific operation unit 1311a of the specific operation unit 1311a is moved through the advancing and retracting shaft 1313g The pressing operation unit 1311p may be configured to be pressed.
Further, when a shutter plate 1319 covering the separate operation portion 1311b is integrally projected on the end face cam 1313i of the change suppressing means 1312 (J) as shown in FIG. 144O, and the end face cam 1313i is rotated by a specific operation. The shutter plate 1319 may also be rotated to expose the separate operation unit 1311b. As a result, unauthorized operation of the separate operation unit 1311b can be prevented, and dust can be prevented from entering the internal space 1320s of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 provided with the crime prevention structure (3) of the change suppression means 1312 (J) of FIGS. 144N and 144O, the change of the game setting value by the change operation means has the unlock key K2. Or because it can only be done by a specific person who knows the unlock number, etc., even if the change operation means itself does not have a security structure for changing the game settings, the security problem is the same as the security structure (1). Almost no.

  Note that the axis of the change operation means described in the security structure (1) is set in a direction substantially parallel to the substrate surface of the main control unit 1310, and the tip of the change operation means faces the side surface of the container. The technical idea that can be applied is also applicable to the cylinder lock 1313a of the change suppressing means 1312 (J).

[5-6-2-3. Relationship between crime prevention structure and the present invention]
According to the present invention, the direct change operation from the outside to the change operation means is made difficult by the change suppression means, and the direct change operation to the change operation means is performed by a specific operation from the outside. It is characterized by a security structure that operates so that the change suppression means acts on its behalf, and thus the security structure (3) corresponds to an embodiment of the present invention.

[5-7. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 131 and 142 to 144A. Here, the function display unit 1400 attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a will be described first, and then the function display attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The unit 1400 will be described.

[5-7-1. When attached to the lower left corner of the front component outside the gaming area]
As shown in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X.

  As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 131, the function display unit 1400 displays a status indicator 1401 composed of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status and a normal lottery result that is drawn by passing the game ball B with respect to the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 composed of two LEDs, and a normal retention indicator 1403 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball B with respect to the gate unit 2003.

  In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display 1404 including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first start port 2002, and a first start port. A first special hold number display 1405 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving the game ball B in 2002, and a second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B in the second start port 2004 A second special symbol display 1406 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result, and a second special reserve number display 1407 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions related to the reception of the game ball B in the second starting port 2004. And.

  Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is a round consisting of five LEDs that display the number of times the open / close pattern of the big prize opening 2005 is repeated (number of rounds) when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like. A display 1408 is provided.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-7-2. When attached to the upper left corner of the front component outside the gaming area]
As shown in FIG. 142, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The arrangement of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is obtained by rotating the arrangement of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 131 by 90 degrees clockwise. The functions of the various displays are also shown in FIG. The functions of the various displays of the function display unit 1400 are the same.

  Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected to each other. A plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400 (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “wirings”) will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIGS. 143 and 144A, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connection connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the rear surface of the back box 3010 from the upper right corner of the game board 5. When drawn to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of 1100 or attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is. It is drawn down.

  When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the wiring FCBL is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is formed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X has a long wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and the back box The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. They are routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear side of the board holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100. Thus, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Will be placed.

  The gaming panel 1100 includes a panel decoration board on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110, a board cover that attaches the panel decoration board to the panel holder 1120, and The panel decoration board includes: an upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view; and a lower left panel decoration board disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view. Composed. The substrate cover includes an upper left substrate cover for attaching the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 to the panel holder 1120 and a lower left substrate cover for attaching the lower left panel decorative substrate to the panel holder 1120.

  Behind the function display unit 1400, an upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed. When the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back surface side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is bent to the upper rear side of the game panel 1100, the wiring UPCBL is connected to the front surface of the back box 3010. When the upper side is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vicinity (or in contact with) the wiring FCBL, the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 And are gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 and pulled down to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Turned. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the above-described path of the wiring FCBL, and is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the driving board unit 1700, along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed to above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, the upper right of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL routed from the corner to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the back side of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear side of the back box 3010, and is moved up and down along the right side of the rear side of the back box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the direction are collected and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700. In this manner, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 for paying out the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full sphere path unit 600 for guiding the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward; A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

  In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. Release. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  The main control board 1310X, which will be described in detail later, is a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor with a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like ( 151). The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The forced reset by the circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by the user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, so that it is built in the main control MPU 1310a. The contents of the stored RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, if the internal reset circuit is forcibly reset, the RAM is cleared when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

  In the present embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a are provided. The main control board 1310X protrudes from the soldering surface (surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  In this way, since the static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and the periphery thereof, if electromagnetic wave noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. The unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X may enter the wiring FCBL that electrically connects, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 are electrically connected. May intrude into the wiring UPCBL. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. Conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is assumed to be in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed in a straight line from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, the right side of the main control board box 1320 and about the upper side of the main control board box 1320). A portion having a length of 1/4, bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320), and the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310X Main control board box 132 at the stage past the upper side of the function display unit connector MFCN arranged closer In the case of being electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN after being bent toward the lower side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL Is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310X corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, When passing through the area (in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320), electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom board of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a is strongly affected by its built-in reset circuit under the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise. Reset and there is a consuming fear.

  In addition, instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, when the wiring accommodating groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the wiring FCBL is , Not the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is accommodated and routed along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a. When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310X (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. The main control MPU 1310a may intrude into the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a may be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is used as the main control board as a positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged with the function display unit connector MFCN below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X. By disposing the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310X.

  As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is connected to the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separating the MPU 1310a from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by disposing the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. In the space where the main display board 1310X or the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other in the main control board 1310X, electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310X by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. This is to prevent noise from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the first wiring separation distance from the wiring FCBL.

  The wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X is in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 as described above. On the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 without being routed (or accommodated along the wiring receiving groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). And then bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 and routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 13 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side of 0 and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter referred to as “second wiring separation distance dimension”) .) Can be secured greatly. The second wiring separation distance dimension is larger than the first wiring separation distance dimension. As a result, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a that protrudes from the wiring FCBL toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through the space having the second wiring separation distance. Can be prevented. Also in this respect, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element that can reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL described above (that is, a plurality of control signals transmitted from the main control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise for each wiring FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic wave noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic wave noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. When coils and beads are used, electric power is supplied to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  In addition, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5 and the special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5. A large winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and a magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start opening 2002 provided in the gaming board 5 are detected. Two wires from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and aggregated. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from various sensors, the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 are also electrically connected and integrated. Two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310X without going through the panel relay board 1710.

  The panel relay board 1710 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the connection connector 1710a, in addition to the two lines from various sensors, the line FCBL from the function display unit 1400. Therefore, in the case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is reduced or reduced on the panel relay board 1710. By providing an element that can be removed (that is, by providing an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise for a plurality of wirings FCBL that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310X to the function display unit 1400. ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

  Note that the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length as described above, and in particular, the game board. 5, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game panel 1100 to the rear side of the back box 3010 is bent downward to the rear side of the back box 3010 and is placed on the right side of the rear side of the back box 3010. The wiring UPCBL is routed in this way because the wiring processing pieces 3011 that are formed in a plurality of vertical directions along the upper and lower sides of the wiring board are routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. In the same area as the wiring FCBL described above, electromagnetic noise may enter. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500 and on the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed to a position above the predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, the panel drive board 1720 is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise caused by the wiring UPCBL reaches the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a fear.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, a detailed description thereof will be described later. Connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 148). Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL intersect or contact each other (arrangement), electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When entering into various wirings that are electrically connected, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed due to the influence of electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL (for example, a black screen or the like) Disturbance occurs).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Yes. As a result, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 does not intersect (contact) with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not contact in parallel with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Do not contact some of the various wires connected to the cable. In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310X cross or contact the wiring UPCBL. Arranged not to.

  In the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. As a positional relationship with the mounting position of a peripheral control IC 1510a (described later in FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, in this embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are Are arranged to be separated from each other.

  Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged separately from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Thus, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected, and the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other via the wiring UPCBL. Incoming electromagnetic noise can be attenuated. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 are electrically connected via a wiring (not shown), and this wiring and the wiring UPCBL cross or contact each other. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the panel drive board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 from the panel drive board 1720 through the wiring is used. It becomes extremely difficult to enter the area, and the influence of electromagnetic noise does not reach the peripheral control board 1510. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Note that in the panel drive substrate 1720, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated by the ground (solid ground), but it is preferable to provide an element that can further reduce or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise (that is, (It is preferable to provide each of the plurality of wirings UPCBL for transmitting a control signal from the panel driving board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 with an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise) . Thus, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL can be reliably attenuated or removed in the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic wave noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic wave noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, and the like, EMC countermeasure components (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can be cited as such elements. When using capacitors, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings UPCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  In the above-described embodiment, as the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720 are electrically connected. Among the wirings (not shown), the wiring UPCBL passes through the vicinity of the ball supply means (the vicinity of at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580). Of the lines forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL is connected to various decorative boards 184, 273, etc, etc. on the door frame side, excluding the upper left panel decorative board 1131. The wiring is formed so as not to intersect or contact the wiring forming the transmission path with the substrate 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can also be employed for various wirings that are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. For example, among various wirings that are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X, wiring that passes under an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and wiring other than this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310X) that can be operated by the high-frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit described above. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 (the transmission path for electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. Wiring UPCBL and the wiring connector (not shown) for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel drive board 1720, but a connector provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 The wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the 1131a, may be routed so as to be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the wiring UPCBL ′ is a wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decoration board 1131, as various other decoration means 184 on the door frame side. 273, etc, etc. and the peripheral control board 1510) are arranged so as not to cross or contact each other. As a result, the wiring that forms the transmission path between the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. Electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL ′ to jump out and form wirings that form other transmission paths that are electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (the transmission paths between the control means and other presentation means other than specific presentation means) It is possible to prevent intrusion into various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500, which are wirings to be formed. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back surface. When drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent downward toward the lower surface of the rear box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. It was gathered up, but when it was drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear box 3010, it was bent from the upper side to the left side, According to the wiring processing piece which is bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side, and is formed in plural in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100. When it is routed downward along the side, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. Then, it may be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  In this way, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to a distance dimension larger than the first wiring separation distance described above. Can be prevented from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ball frame 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 are disposed below. By being arranged, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the region where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. When electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because there is a case where it enters the wiring FCBL, which is disposed below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X.

  In the case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. Designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as described above. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back surface. When drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent downward toward the lower surface of the rear box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wirings FCBL collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Collected by a lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010 and attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 When bent around the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, it is drawn downward. , Bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. When connected, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 148) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. Various corresponding wirings are electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL cross or contact each other (arrangement), electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When entering the various wirings connected to the cable, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 is disturbed due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL (for example, the black screen or the like is disturbed). Occur).

  Therefore, the wiring FCBL crosses the wiring FCBL so as not to be routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500) (the wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9). It is preferable to configure such that the arrangement (contact arrangement) does not come into contact. For example, an illustration provided on the back surface side of the function display unit 1400 as a method of routing the wiring FCBL that does not have an arrangement in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL cross or contact each other (arrangement). The wiring FCBL that is electrically connected via the connector that is not connected is bent from the upper side to the left side when it is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear box 3010, On the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010, the game is again bent downward toward the lower side of the back side of the back box 3010 and collected together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed vertically along the left side of the back side of the back box 3010. The substrate holder 1200 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the panel 1100. When drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the 1200, the main control board box 1320 is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320. After being routed to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side, the function display unit connector MFCN may be electrically connected.

  In this way, the distance between the wiring FCBL and the package control left side of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the first wiring separation distance described above. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the package left side of the main control MPU 1310a. This is because, when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the ball frame 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 are disposed below. By being arranged, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the region where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached. When electromagnetic noise is released by electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 This is because there is a case where it enters the wiring FCBL, which is disposed below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X.

  In the case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310X are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the panel relay board 1710 is described above. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being affected by electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above. Designed to pass a signal having a waveform width.

  In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., as mentioned above, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as described above. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL, and when capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to the plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a more rapid attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor Circuits configured by combining these may be inserted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310X, but above the center line. The main control MPU 1310a is disposed at the same position, but the positional relationship is reversed, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is disposed above the center line. Thus, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be separated from each other on the main control board 1310X. Even with this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL is generated for the function display unit. It is possible to prevent the connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via a space separating the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the back surface. When drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent downward toward the lower surface of the rear box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 that is collected and attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100 It was routed downward along the line. Thus, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is the front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been placed in. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full path path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full ball path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been placed. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter, in addition to the routing of the wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 are provided. Are formed so as not to be routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (or on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). After being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the function display unit connector MFCN, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. May be connected to each other.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. In this area, instead of the function display unit 1400, a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided. A decorative board to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the decorative substrate are described with reference to FIG. 143, for example. To explain, when being drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downwardly on the rear surface of the back box 3010, A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a vertical direction along the right side are respectively bent and bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and a connector of the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). Can be mentioned as a wiring routing method of being electrically connected to this connector after being routed to the lower side of When it is drawn from the upper corner to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and below the rear side of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010. Are bent again toward the right side at the bottom of the peripheral control unit 1500 by being combined together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear side of the back box 3010. An example is a wiring routing method in which the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) is routed to a position below the connector and then electrically connected to the connector.

  The area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is a payout attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Since it is disposed in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (downward) of the ball tank 552, there is a possibility that electromagnetic wave noise may enter the wiring as described above.

  Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged with a connector below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510. By disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are arranged to be separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected. Therefore, electromagnetic noise entering the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be connected to the peripheral control board. It is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a through a space separated in 1510. Accordingly, it is possible to protect the peripheral control IC 1510a from the wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. Electromagnetic wave noise that enters through this wiring can be attenuated on the control board 1510 or in a space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other in the peripheral control board 1510. In this respect as well, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It can also be configured to be connected. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay substrate 1710 is provided with an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise that has entered the above-described wiring (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit control signals from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). On the other hand, it is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic noise. As a result, electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring can be prevented from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, it is possible to protect the peripheral control IC 1510a from the wiring through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such elements include resistors and filter circuits. From the observation result of the waveform of electromagnetic wave noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic wave noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition to resistors and filter circuits, EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.) can also be cited as such elements. Are inserted so as to be connected in series, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. In addition, when a steep attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of a plurality of wirings, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Each of the circuits configured in combination may be inserted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL is electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131. Is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010 when bent to the upper rear surface of the game panel 1100, and in the state of being close to (or in contact with) the wiring FCBL described above, When drawn to the upper side of the rear surface of the box 3010, the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent downward toward the lower surface of the rear box 3010 and vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although it was collected, it was drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear side of the back box 3010. And bent from the upper side toward the left side, bent again toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and vertically moved along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When the wiring processing pieces are formed to be gathered and drawn to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and bent toward the right side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the drive board unit After being routed along the upper side of 1700 and routed above the predetermined connector of the panel drive substrate 1720 in the drive substrate unit 1700, it may be electrically connected to the predetermined connector. In this case, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 (see FIG. 148) of the peripheral control unit 1500 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby driving the drive board. The unit 1700 is separated from the upper side. As a result, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect (contact) with the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, peripheral control of the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive substrate unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship with the mounting position of the IC 1510a (see FIG. 151), the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. Thus, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged away from the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 and mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 through the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL through which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal map variable display game, a special map variable display game, a game state display, etc. is arranged on the surface of the game board has been proposed (for example, a special game Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0014], paragraph [0070], FIG. 2 and FIG. 21)). This display device (display unit) is display-controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic noise enters a wiring that electrically connects the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device is connected via this wire. There was a risk of impact.

[5-8. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of back box 3010 of back unit 3000. Peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 151) that controls the presentation presented to the player based on a control signal from main control board 1310X. Yes. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image. ing.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310X, the rendering operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (a peripheral data ROM board and a liquid crystal output board described later). ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-9. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center member 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 12-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two left fixed pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface when viewed from the front, and a right fixed piece 1602 projecting outward from the right side surface when viewed from the front. This effect display device 1600 has two fixed grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface in front view in a frame-like liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 to be described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 obliquely from the back of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is inserted. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding downward.

[5-10. Table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The front unit 2000 is attached to the base panel 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110, and a part of the rear end passes through the through-hole 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel 1110.

  As described above, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center in the left-right direction in the third game area 5a3 of the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2002 and one general winning opening 2001. A side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 in the vicinity of an intermediate area between the first game area 5a1 and the third game area 5a3 and has two general winning ports 2001, and a second game area 5a2. And an attacker unit 2400 that is attached near the middle area of the third game area and has a large winning opening 2005, one general winning opening 2001 (second receiving opening), a gate portion 2003, and a second starting opening 2004. (Second entrance), which has an unfavorable first entrance 2006 and is slightly above the center in front of the game area 5a (the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2). A frame-shaped center member 2500 attached to the third game area 5a3 in a state surrounded on both sides and the lower three sides), and a table effect unit 2600 attached to the center member 2500. I have.

[5-10-1. Center member]
The center member 2500 of the front unit 2000 includes a gate sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a second start port sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004, and a first A first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006, and the attacker unit 2400 detects the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005. 2403 (also referred to as a count sensor) (see FIG. 126). In addition, the center member 2500 includes a start port solenoid 2404 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 in accordance with a normal lottery result lottered by the passage of the game ball B of the gate unit 2003, and the attacker unit 2400 includes There is provided an attacker solenoid 2405 for opening and closing the grand prize winning opening 2005 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result lottered by receiving the game ball B into the start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004.

  In the game area 5a, the center member 2500 is disposed above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 and at a position slightly above the center of the front view. 830 is attached. The center member 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 and the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 can be viewed from the front through the frame. .

  The frame-shaped center member 2500 has a surrounding frame 832 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the base panel 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 except for the lower side, and is driven into the gaming area 5 a by the surrounding frame 832. The game ball B cannot enter the frame.

  The center member 2500 includes a warp inlet 2501 that allows the game ball B in the first game area 5a1 to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the enclosure frame 832 when viewed from the front, and a game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501. A warp outlet 2502 that can be released and opened in the frame, and a stage shelf 2503 that can be released to the third game area 5a3 after rolling the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction, I have.

  The stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is recessed, and corresponds to a position corresponding to the position immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center member 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110). ), The substantially central position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape that is slightly higher than the left and right sides. The stage shelf 2503 has a portion (top) that is slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction, and a portion (valley) that is the lowest on both sides of the stage shelf 2503 that is lowered toward the front. The game balls B are inclined, and the game balls B can be discharged from these parts to the third game area 5a3.

  In the state where the center member 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the portion (top) which is higher at the center in the left-right direction of the stage shelf 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thus, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it is accepted into the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

  The center member 2500 has an extended region forming portion 2504 located on the front side of the second game region 5a2 that protrudes on the right side in front view. , A gate portion 2003, a first receiving port 2006, a general winning port 2001 (second receiving port), and a second starting port 2004 (second receiving port) with an opening / closing piece 850 are provided in the second game area 5a2. It is mounted on the formed mounting opening from the front. Further, in the area forming portion 2504, the obstacle nail 2007 is implanted in the base panel 1110 in the same manner as in the first game area 5a1. In the present embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are integrally provided. However, as another embodiment, the center member 2500 and the region forming portion 2504 are provided separately. May be. In addition, when the area of the second game area 5a2 is small, a ball flow lower surface part and an obstacle projection part are formed in the area forming part 2504, and the area forming part 2504 is equivalent to the second game area 5a2 described above. You may make it have a function.

  The center member 2500 is assembled with the game board 5 between the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832 (specifically, the upper surface on the right side from the substantially horizontal center) and the outer rail 1001 surrounding the upper side of the game area 5a. The game ball B is attached so as to form a gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (11 mm in the present embodiment) (a gap having a width slightly larger than that of one game ball; 13 mm in the present embodiment). This gap is the communication passage portion 5a4 that connects the first game area 5a1 and the second game area 5a2 above.

  131 is provided at the intersection of the outer rail 1001 and the right rail 1005 described above from the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a at the center of the upper surface of the surrounding frame 832. In the embodiment shown in FIG. It has a lateral passage portion extending in the left-right direction reaching 1006 and a longitudinal passage portion located downstream of the lateral passage portion and extending in the vertical direction. The lateral passage portion is a substantially straight gap, and extends substantially tangential to the apex of the arc along the outer rail 1001 drawn by the launched game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B launched with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1) rides on the upper surface of the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 or It rolls while contacting the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and can move to the back of the lateral passage portion (near the entrance of the longitudinal passage portion).

  As shown in FIG. 132 in which the main part of FIG. 131 is enlarged, the vertical passage portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 is a vertical hook-like discharge that opens downward and communicates downwardly with the stop portion 1006. A partition having a predetermined width between a portion 848a and a vertical hook-shaped discharge portion 848b that opens downwardly and communicates downwardly with respect to the direction in which the game ball B is struck by an opening 848bH approximately one game ball from the discharge portion 848a. It is provided in a form partitioned by a portion 848e. The partition portion 848e plays a role of partitioning the opening portion 848aH and the opening portion 848bH, and the top portion (uppermost surface) is inclined so that the game ball flows down to the right. In addition, the partition portion 848e includes a reinforcing member (reinforcing resin 848e1) formed with a predetermined width in the left-right direction in consideration of game ball collision, and an accommodating portion 848e2 that accommodates the reinforcing member. . In addition, a left and right partition wall 848e3 that divides the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b in the left-right direction is formed downward from the surrounding wall portion that forms the housing portion 848e2, and the game ball B that flows down the discharge portion 848a, and the discharge portion The game ball B flowing down 848b is prevented from being mixed in the middle of the flow. Further, in the embodiment of FIG. 132, the top (uppermost surface) of the partition portion 848e between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH is virtually the bottom of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500). It is formed with the height which becomes substantially the same surface as the extension line at the time of extending. As a result, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong firing force (a firing force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the bottom surface of the connecting passage portion 5a4 is moved at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e. The rolling game ball B enters the opening 848bH in front of the partition 848e. In addition, among the game balls B launched with a specific strong launch force (a launch force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the top of the partition portion 848e is exceeded while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force. The game ball B (the game ball B that has floated from the bottom of the communication passage portion 5a4 and has passed the top of the partition portion 848e) collides with the stop portion 1006 and enters the opening portion 848aH. Further, the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b are arranged side by side at the top of the second game area 5a2, that is, the portions 5a2a and 5a2b (the exit portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 or the second portion) entering the second game area 5a2. The game area 5a2 is connected in a different state. As described above, in the present embodiment, while having the gaming property of launching the game ball B with a specific strong firing force (a launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1), the specific strong firing force In consideration of the strength of the steering wheel adjustment within the range, the game ball after the first game area 5a1 is jumped over has a new game characteristic that makes the whereabouts of the game diversified.

  As described above, the second game area 5a2 receives or passes the game ball B to give a predetermined privilege to the player, such as the general winning port 2001 (second receiving port), the second starting port 2004 ( The second receiving port), the gate portion 2003, and the like, and the first receiving port 2006 (incoming embodiment = out in the embodiment) in which the handling (results by entering the ball) from the second receiving port is disadvantageous. The probability of entering the ball is appropriately set depending on the type of the outlet of the communication passage portion 5a4 and the arrangement of the obstacle nails 2007.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 132, the game ball B that enters (falls) into the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2a corresponding to the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a directly below the stop portion 1006 through the communication passage portion 5a4 is The probability of entering the first entrance 2006 is set to be greater than the probability of entering the second entrance and the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003.

  On the other hand, the game ball B that enters the second game area 5a2 from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 and relatively becomes the second receiving port. The probability of entering the ball and the probability of passing through the gate unit 2003 are set to be large.

  Therefore, when the player types in the second game area 5a2, the player collides with the stop portion 1006 in order to aim at the discharge portion 848b that leads to the left route that it is easy to enter the second receiving port and difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006. Therefore, the batting force of the handle 182 is carefully adjusted so that the game ball B can be launched at such a speed that the game ball B can roll on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 at a speed that does not jump over the partition portion 848e.

  The discharge portions 848a and 848b are provided with speed reduction means such as obstacle protrusions 849 and bent portions 849s in the middle of the flow path, and the game ball B passes through the discharge portions 848a and 848b by the speed reduction means. A time for allowing the player to recognize whether or not the game has been confirmed is secured. This is because which release portion 848a, 848b through which the game ball B passes greatly affects the player's profit. Note that the speed reduction means in the middle of the flow path is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and the obstacle protrusions 849 are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, or the bent portions 849s are provided on both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b. It can also be realized by providing a transparent cover body having a width enough to cover the front of both of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, and providing an obstruction ridge on the back side of the transparent cover body. Good.

  In addition, the effect display device 1600 is enlarged so that an image of the effect display device 1600 is displayed at a position corresponding to the back side of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, and the passage surfaces of the discharge portions 848a and 848b are formed transparently. The image of the effect display device 1600 may be visually recognized through the transparent passage surface, and the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be decorated with the image of the effect display device 1600. For example, in a gaming state that requires the use of the second gaming area 5a2 (eg, a short-time gaming state), a specific image (eg, a flame image) is displayed behind the emitting unit 848b, and the emitting unit 848a In comparison, the player may be informed that the discharge portion 848b is advantageous.

  Further, prior to the start of a gaming state (for example, a short-time gaming state) that requires the use of the second gaming area 5a2, an announcement is made in advance to inform the player that the discharging unit 848b is advantageous over the discharging unit 848a. An image (for example, a message image such as “Please aim right at the left passage!”) Is displayed in a predetermined display area, or “Right-handed here” is displayed behind the discharge portion 848b. The message image of “Please!” May be displayed, and in order to prevent the player from being confused at the start of the short-time state, a more detailed explanation effect regarding “right-handed” may be executed.

  Further, in these cases, it is preferable that an effect sensor (release type detecting means) for detecting the game ball B is provided in, for example, the openings 848aH and 848bH of the discharge portions 848a and 848b, respectively, and the discharge portion through which the game ball B has passed. Depending on which of 848a and 848b is used, a predetermined notification using sound or image display, or light emission of a light emitting body provided in the emission units 848a and 848b may be performed. For example, the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a and the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848b are counted by each effect sensor, and the notification type (notification pattern) is determined according to the status of these count values. Can be exemplified. Specifically, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the release unit 848a in the short-time gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), a voice notification “Good luck!” Or a specific image display a, Congratulations when all or part of the light emission in the specific light emission pattern a is performed, or when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through the emission part 848b in the short-time game state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10). The voice notification “!”, The specific image display b, and all or part of the light emission by the specific light emission pattern b can be exemplified. Further, when the count value of the number of game balls that have passed through only the discharge part 848a without passing through the discharge part 848b reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), "Careful!" A game in which all or a part of the light notification, the specific image display c, and the light emission with the specific light emission pattern c are performed, or only the discharge part 848b passes without the game ball passing through the discharge part 848a. When the count value of the number of spheres reaches a predetermined number (for example, three), all or part of light emission with a voice notification “delicious!”, A specific image display d, and a specific light emission pattern d is performed. It is possible to give a player a sense of satisfaction and achievement.

  133 to 139 show other forms of the communication passage portion 5a4, the discharge portions 848a and 848b, or the second game area 5a2.

  In FIG. 133, the width of the communication passage portion 5a4 in the height direction is expanded to about two game balls, and the partition between the opening 848bH and the opening 848aH is made using this height. The top of the portion 848e is slightly higher than the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 (the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500). As a result, the game ball B rolling on the bottom surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 hits the left side of the top of the partition portion 848e and enters the opening 848bH, so that the game ball B can be further divided by adjusting the handle to the discharge portion 848a. Can be easily.

Further, since the communication passage portion 5a4 has a wide width in the height direction and the height of the game ball B that has been launched can be seen at a glance, it can be predicted at an early stage which discharge portion 848a, 848b will enter. Therefore, the firing force can be adjusted in a short time.
Further, even if a common “twist” is performed to fire a plurality of game balls B together, as shown in FIG. 133, if a plurality of game balls move up and down, The game ball B hits the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848b, and the upper game ball B jumps over the partition portion 848e and flows to the discharge portion 848a.

  By the way, in the form as shown in FIG. 133, as described above, the game ball B that has been launched repeatedly collides with the partition portion 848e, and the game ball B that bounces off the hitting portion 1006 also collides. For example, it is preferable to reinforce such as forming a rib or inserting a metal plate. Further, since the game balls B are repeatedly contacted, it is preferable to cover the surface of the partition portion 848e with a wear-resistant material such as a metal plate.

  Further, what is shown in FIG. 134 is an embodiment in which a branch portion 848c is extended upstream of the reinforcing resin 848e1, unlike FIG. 132 and FIG. Specifically, in FIG. 134, the communication passage portion 5a4 has a vertical partition extending in the left-right direction separating the passages so that a plurality of ball passages are formed in the vertical direction upstream of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. A branch portion 848c having a wall 848c1 is provided, and the first spherical passage 5a4a among the plurality of spherical passages formed by the branch portion 848c is a discharge portion 848a (first portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. The second spherical passage 5a4b of the plurality of spherical passages formed by the branch portion 848c communicates with the discharge portion 848b (second discharge portion) of the plurality of discharge portions 848a and 848b. It is comprised so that it may do.

  The branch portion 848c is provided with a metal buffer pin 848d at the tip thereof, and the buffer pin 848d receives the impact of the game ball B and prevents the branch portion 848c from being damaged. Of course, if the tip of the upper and lower partition walls 848c1 of the branch portion 848c is covered with a metal cover or the like to be reinforced, the buffer pin 848d may be omitted.

  In this case as well, the player aims at either the first ball passage 5a4a or the second ball passage 5a4b by adjusting the firing force of the game ball B with the handle 182, but the first ball is in a stage where the momentum of the hit ball is strong. Since it is necessary to distinguish between the passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b, the degree of difficulty in adjusting the handle 182 is high, and a difference in technique by the player is easily reflected. Therefore, a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction when the intended result is obtained increases.

  In FIG. 134, a space portion is formed on the left side of the housing portion 848e2 of the reinforcing resin 848e1, but the reinforcing resin 848e1 is inserted into the space portion or the reinforcing resin 848e1 is inserted. It may be possible to further improve the strength by attaching another reinforcing member different from the above. Also, in consideration of the appearance when the space portion is enlarged, a predetermined decoration may be applied to the surface side of the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member attached to the space portion, or the reinforcing resin or the reinforcing member Some effect devices (for example, a 4th symbol display device or a sub liquid crystal) may be provided instead of the members so as to have both effects of the reinforcing surface and the effect surface.

  135 (a) and 135 (b) are provided with a drop port 5a4c for connecting the first ball passage 5a4a and the second ball passage 5a4b to a part of the branch portion 848c of the communication passage portion 5a4 in FIG. A part of the game ball flowing through the one ball passage 5a4a can fall into the second ball passage 5a4b and fall from the second discharge portion 848b to a specific location 5a2b in the second game area 5a2. In this case, a variation of the adjustment of the handle 182 that separates the discharge portions 848a and 848b (for example, as shown in FIG. 135 (b), the game ball B is hit against the buffer pin 848d of the branch portion 848c to change the traveling direction upward, The game ball B hits the outer rail 1001 so that it bounces back into the drop opening 5a4c.), And the interest of the game increases.

  In the configuration shown in FIG. 136, the tip of the branch portion 848c shown in FIG. 134 is set in the vicinity of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, so that the tip of the branch portion 848c is hit. Since the game ball B is easily rebounded to the first game area 5a1, the difficulty of striking the first ball passages 5a4a and 5a4b is further improved. Incidentally, in the examples of FIGS. 134, 135A and 135B, the bounce space 832c is provided between the tip of the branch portion 848c and the step portion 832a of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500, so that the branch is made. Most of the game balls B that bounce off the part 848c enter the second ball passage 5a4b while rolling on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832.

  FIG. 137 and FIG. 138 show examples in which the discharge portions 848a and 848b of FIG. 132 are lengthened and the second game area 5a2 is shortened in the vertical direction. In this case, the discharge portions 848a and 848b are passed. Since the residence time of the game ball B can be lengthened, there is an effect that the visibility of the game ball B passing through the discharge portions 848a and 848b can be improved.

  Also, what is shown in FIGS. 137 and 138 is an example in which the risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 is increased by arranging the first receiving port 2006 above and below the gate unit 2003. By doing so, the gate unit Since the thrill of aiming for 2003 can be increased, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be increased.

  As described above, in the example of FIGS. 131 to 138, there is an advantageous / disadvantageous profit difference in the subsequent falling path between the places 5 a 2 a and 5 a 2 b entering the second game area 5 a 2, and thus the always advantageous place 5 a 2 b is provided. I tried to aim, but at the places 5a2a and 5a2b that I entered, I would provide different types of profits for the subsequent fall route, so that either one of the places 5a2a and 5a2b was appropriately selected according to the gaming state May be.

  In other words, in the example of FIG. 139, a game ball B that enters from the location 5 a 2 a corresponding to the opening 848 a H of the discharge portion 848 a directly below the stop portion 1006 through the communication passage portion 5 a 4 enters the first receiving port 2006. Is greater than the probability of entering the second entrance, but is set to possibly pass through the gate portion 2003.

  On the other hand, the game ball B entering from the location 5a2b corresponding to the opening 848bH of the adjacent discharge portion 848b has a very low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006, and has a high probability of entering the second receiving port. Is set to

  Therefore, when the player types in the second game area 5a2, even if there is a risk of entering the first receiving port 2006 depending on the game state, the player aims at the gate part 2003 and collides with the stop part 1006, and thus the discharge part. Aiming at 848a, for example, aiming at a discharge portion 848b that is difficult to enter the first receiving port 2006 and easily enters the second receiving port, and easily reaches the big winning port 2005 at a low risk in a big hit state. Force adjustment will be performed.

  Although not shown in the drawing, the above-described center member 2500 is divided into parts common to different models, for example, a part corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of the center member 2500 and other parts. It is also possible to divide the parts to be changed into a plurality of blocks (at least two) and combine the blocks so that one center member 2500 is formed. By doing so, it becomes possible to mass-produce a portion common to each model, so that the cost of the center member 2500 can be suppressed.

  Further, the member between the discharge portion 848a and the discharge portion 848b may be movable so that the interval between the openings 848aH or 848bH of one discharge portion 848a or 848b may be increased when a specific condition is satisfied.

  Further, a speed reduction means such as an obstructed protrusion ridge 849 provided on the discharge portions 848a and 848b may be provided on the inner surface of the communication passage portion 5a4 so as to make adjustments to facilitate technical entry into the discharge portion 848b.

  In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then to the lower substrate holder 1200. Discharged.

  Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the rear unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 and detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Is done.

  Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005 is detected by the big prize opening sensor 2403, then sent to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100, and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first receiving port 2006 is detected by the first receiving port sensor 2406 and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

  The first start port sensor 3002 includes a first start port sensor main side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first start port sensor slave side (hereinafter referred to as “first start port sensor”). Mouth sensor slave side 3002b "), and the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are at least a false detection prevention distance dimension (14 mm in this embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm). Since the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port If the sensor slave side 3002b is disposed in a state where the distance from the sensor detection side 3002b is equal to or smaller than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a is moved together with the first start port sensor main side 3002a to the first start port. The game ball B that may be detected by the sensor slave side 3002b and that passes through the first starter port slave side 3002b is detected by the first starter sensor slave side 3002b together with the first starter sensor main side 3002a. Because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b are spaced apart by a dimensional distance (43 mm in this embodiment) that is larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. As a result, when the first start port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Thus, even though the game ball B has not yet passed through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, the physical detection that the first start port sensor slave side 3002b erroneously detects it. When the first start port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B that passes through the first start port sensor slave side 3002b, When the electrical influence by the knowledge reaches the first start port sensor main side 3002a, the game ball B is already passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, but the first start It is possible to prevent the mouth sensor main side 3002a from erroneously detecting the physical structure. Thus, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is first detected by the first start port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a, and then the first start port sensor subordinate. After passing through the side 3002b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200 after being detected by the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 including the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor subordinate side 3002b (double sensor) is employed, so that the first start The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. A detailed description of the fraud detection process that can detect and notify a fraudulent act caused by radio wave irradiation using a first start port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) will be described later.

[5-10-2. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 is not shown in detail, but according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn by accepting the game balls B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies that move and emit light are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The front effect unit 2600 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame-shaped center member 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center member 2500, and is decorated with light emission by making light incident from the upper surface of the light guide plate and a transparent flat light guide plate that closes the frame of the center member 2500. A plurality of LEDs for a first pattern on which a plurality of LEDs for a first pattern are mounted, and a plurality of LEDs for a second pattern to be decorated by emitting light from the right side of the light guide plate. A second decorative substrate for the second pattern, a plurality of diffusion lenses that are provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern, and diffuse the light from the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern; It is equipped with. The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern are full-color LEDs.

  The light guide plate has a first pattern formed by an infinite number of concave and convex upper reflection portions that reflect only light from the upper direction forward, and an infinite number of concave and convex shapes that reflect only light from the right direction forward. And a second pattern formed by the reflecting portion. In other words, the front effect unit 2600 can display the first pattern by emitting light when the LED of the first pattern decoration board emits light, and emits the second pattern by emitting light from the LED of the second pattern decoration board. Can be displayed.

  The light guide plate has fine irregularities in the countless upper reflective part that forms the first picture and the countless right reflective part that forms the second picture. In the state where the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern on the substrate and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern on the decorative substrate for second pattern are not lit, it looks transparent and the rear unit 3000 arranged on the rear side Various decorative objects and effect images displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be viewed in a good state.

  The plurality of upper reflective portions forming the first pattern and the right reflective portion forming the second pattern are the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of second patterns for the second pattern, respectively. It has a flat surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the LED and inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are recessed in a pent roof-like triangle. The upper reflection part and the right reflection part are substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate, and the light incident from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern Reflect in the direction. On the other hand, light incident from the plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that are not supported is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding plurality of LEDs for the first pattern and the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern can reach the player who is positioned in front of the light guide plate.

  The plurality of LEDs for the first pattern mounted on the lower surface of the decorative substrate for the first pattern are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LED The LEDd is divided into four groups. The first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are arranged so as to make a predetermined number (three in this case) from the left.

  The first pattern is a pattern composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles with the extended lines of the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern as boundaries. The first pattern consists of six large triangles that are approximately the same size as the regular triangle that is formed by collecting four regular triangles in the decoration pattern, and one regular triangle in the decoration pattern. It is composed of a plurality of small triangle patterns that fit in size. The six large triangular patterns are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so that the whole is a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangular patterns surround the six large triangular patterns. Has been placed.

  The large triangle pattern of the first pattern is such that a plurality of regular triangles of different sizes are superposed such that the sizes become smaller in order with the eccentricity toward the apex side near the center of the game area 5a. It is formed in a picture. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern is formed into a pattern in which equilateral triangle outlines are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern includes a first pattern unit configured by a plurality of upper reflection units corresponding to the first LEDa, a second pattern unit configured by a plurality of upper reflection units corresponding to the second LEDb, It is comprised from the 3rd pattern part comprised by the some upper reflection part corresponding to 3 LEDc, and the 4th pattern part comprised by the some upper reflection part corresponding to 4th LEDd.

  The first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern, so that the large triangle pattern in which multiple regular triangles of different sizes in the first pattern are superimposed The part, the first picture part, the second picture part, and the third picture part are decentered and superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. In addition, the small triangular pattern consisting of the contours of a plurality of equilateral triangles in the first pattern, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, Are arranged concentrically in the order of.

  The second pattern is a pattern having a guide (message) for the player consisting of the characters “CHANCE!”.

  Next, a light emission effect by the front effect unit 2600 will be briefly described. When the first LEDa of the first pattern decorative substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the first pattern portion, and the remaining second pattern portion, third pattern portion, and fourth pattern portion. Since the part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the first pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, when the second LEDb of the first pattern decorative substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the second pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, third pattern portion, Since the four-pattern part and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern part appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, when the third LEDc of the first pattern decorative substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the third pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, Since the four pattern parts and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the third pattern part appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED d of the first pattern decorative substrate is caused to emit light, the light incident in the light guide plate is reflected to the front by the fourth pattern portion, and the remaining first pattern portion, second pattern portion, Since the third pattern portion and the second pattern are reflected to other than the front, only the fourth pattern portion appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  And in the first pattern, in the part of the large triangular pattern, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, the fourth pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, Are decentered and superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a. In the small triangular pattern part, the first pattern part, the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern part are arranged concentrically in this order. Since the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are emitted in this order, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, Light is emitted in the order of the fourth pattern portion, and a light-emitting effect such as an animation with movement that moves from the outside toward the center can be performed.

  On the other hand, when the fourth LEDd, the third LEDc, the second LEDb, and the first LEDa are caused to emit light in this order, the fourth pattern portion, the third pattern portion, the second pattern portion, and the first pattern portion are emitted in this order. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect such as an animation that moves from the center side toward the outside.

  Furthermore, when the first LEDa, the second LEDb, the third LEDc, and the fourth LEDd are made to emit light in different colors, the first pattern portion, the second pattern portion, the third pattern portion, and the fourth pattern portion are displayed in different colors. Can emit light.

  In addition, when the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern on the second pattern decorative substrate are caused to emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate is reflected to the front in the second pattern, and the remaining first pattern portion, Since the second pattern part, the third pattern part, and the fourth pattern part are reflected to other than the front, only the second pattern appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern composed of the characters “CHANCE!” Can be caused to emit light by the plurality of LEDs for the second pattern.

  As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (first pattern part, second pattern part, third pattern part, fourth pattern part) by one light guide plate. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each picture in order to display an animation, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, since it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the light guide plate, it is possible to arrange other effect units in the space, and to increase the appealing power to the player. It can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light guide plate makes it possible to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation with the semi-transparent first pattern floating in front of the rear unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600. It can have a strong impact on players who are familiar with the production, can amaze and entertain the player, and can make the player think there is something good, It is possible to increase a player's expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the first design and the second design, the inside of the frame of the center member 2500 and the outside of the frame are continuous by making the design related to the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the base panel board 1110 in the gaming panel 1100. A decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  Moreover, since only the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the first pattern and the second pattern by the light guide plate well, from other players away from the front, The light-emitting display of the first pattern and the second pattern becomes difficult to see, making it difficult for other players to notice that the light guide plate is being used, and other players pay attention In addition to being able to suppress playing, it is possible to play a game without bothering other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-11. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 131 to 141. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning port sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning port 2001 of the front unit 2000 and a first start port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002. 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first start port 2002 (see FIG. 151).

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and the back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a rectangular opening 3010a2 on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600, a drive board unit 1700 attached below the opening 3010a2 on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a back effect attached in the back box 3010. A unit 3100.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape in which the front is open and has an opening 3010a2 that penetrates the rear wall squarely, and a flat frame shape that protrudes rearward from the periphery of the opening 3010a2. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is inserted outwardly from the inside of the frame on the right side in the rear view of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and the liquid crystal mounting A notch 3010d to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached by being cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the center in the up-down direction on the left side of the portion 3010b in the back view.

  Opening 3010a2 of back box 3010 is formed slightly smaller than the display screen of effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal attachment portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted in the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the rear left side of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be slidable up and down.

  The back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixed piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100. The back box 3010 is formed with bosses, mounting holes, and the like at appropriate positions for mounting the back effect unit 3100 and the like.

  The back effect unit 3100 moves or emits light according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. A plurality of effect decoration bodies are provided, and a movable effect and a light emission effect can be performed. The back effect unit 3100 can perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, and the like by appropriately using a plurality of effect decoration bodies, and can present various pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining them. In addition, it is possible to make the player hard to get bored, to entertain the player with various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from being reduced.

  Here, an example of an effect decoration body capable of performing a movable effect and a light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 145 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the effect decoration body. A back upper left movable decorative body 3310 which is a production decorative body is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a2 in the back box 3010.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape with the tip directed rightward, and is moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction by a drive motor (not shown) via a mechanism (not shown). Can be done. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has an outer shape of an equilateral triangle when viewed from the front. Further, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 having a triangular pyramid shape is inclined such that the tip thereof is positioned forward with respect to the left-right direction.

  The back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is attached to a trapezoidal base stage decoration part 3311 whose front view is narrowed to the right, and to the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311 so that the tip is directed to the right. Triangular pyramid-shaped front decoration part 3312, a back upper left rotation drive motor for rotating the front decoration part 3312 attached to the inside of the base decoration part 3311, and an attachment inside the base decoration part 3311 A back upper left base stage decoration board for decorating the base stage decoration part 3311 with light emission, and a back upper left front stage for attaching the front stage decoration part 3312 with light emission decoration, which is attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311. And a decorative substrate 3311a. The base stage decoration part 3311 and the front stage decoration part 3312 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which the back upper base decoration board is attached are mounted on the upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left surface side of the front-stage decoration portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left front-stage decoration board 3311a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the upper left rotation drive motor is caused by the main gear (not shown) attached and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the upper left rotation drive motor, and the rotation shaft of the front decoration portion 3312. The front decoration part 3312 is rotated through a back upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a slave gear (not shown) that is attached and fixed. A magnet 3312a having a small columnar shape is disposed and fixed on the left side surface of the front decoration portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base decoration portion 3311 in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312 and is arranged on the left side surface of the front decoration part 3312 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the front decoration part 3312. The left side surface is accommodated in the inner space of the front stage decoration portion 3312 so that the left side surface does not protrude from the left side surface of the front stage decoration portion 3312 toward the right side surface of the base stage decoration portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312. This is because the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 is resonated by the rotation of the front decoration portion 3312 by the upper left rotation drive motor. It is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation shaft of the front decoration portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper left rotation drive motor is performed through the back left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the first decoration unit 3312 starts to rotate by being transmitted to the rotation axis of the decoration unit 3312, the locus becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has a hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (opposite the magnetized surface of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape), and A back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab configured with a peripheral circuit and capable of detecting a magnetic pole change is mounted. This back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a circuit used for setting the original position by specifying the rotational position of the front decoration part 3312 by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the front decoration part 3312. A detailed description thereof will be described later. As the original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the front decoration unit 3312, for example, the vertexes of the respective triangles of the base decoration unit 3311 and the front decoration unit 3312 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid. The state which has formed can be mentioned.

  In the above-described embodiment, the shape of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a regular triangle, but is not limited thereto. For example, “rectangle”, “hexagon”, It may be “octagon”, “fan”, “star”, and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body is formed by using a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decoration unit 3312. Adopted as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of a certain pre-decoration unit 3312, and detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3312 of the pre-decoration unit 3312 to identify the rotational position of the pre-decoration unit 3312 and thereby the standby position Although (original position) was set, it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by a magnet goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) called a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is intermittently inserted into the magnet 3312 of the front decoration portion 3312 in a situation where the front decoration portion 3312 is continuously rotated. This is because magnetism should be detected, but when magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an unauthorized magnet can be detected as a magnet goto.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the various drive motors included in the various effect units are stepping motors, but a motor (servo motor) including a rotation detector such as an encoder may be used. In this case, the rotation angle of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the servo motor is detected by a rotation detector, and the drive pulse is controlled by feedback control. Thereby, the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the servo motor can be set to a predetermined rotational speed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. Game balls received in the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the first receiving port 2006, and the big winning port 2005, which are the receiving ports provided in the gaming area 5a defined as 5 The game board 5 includes a ball collection device having a collection port for collecting together with the collected game balls at an out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5, and the games collected by the ball collection device A ball transport device that transports the ball toward the ball launcher 540 is provided, and the hitting ball launcher 5 is supplied without supplying the game balls to the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200. 0, a game area 5a partitioned by the game board 5, a ball collection device, and a ball transport path by a ball transport device are formed to circulate a predetermined number of game balls in a closed manner. It is also possible to perform.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The overall configuration will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 146 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 147 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 148 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 149 is an XX line in FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 150, and FIG. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. Peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of presentation based on commands from main control board 1310X of unit 1300, peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral board, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 that can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic wave noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530; , A conductive material attached (adhered) to a predetermined location on a metal shield plate 1540 An elastic member 1545, and a transparent base 1502 closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position together with a metal shield board 1540, whereby the shield board 1540 is provided. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is configured by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510, in various boards attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There is a ROM substrate 1520 and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed in the upper right portion of the cover body 1501 because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape in the remaining one-third area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected, and the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper, left, lower and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. Side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the air cooling fan FAN at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, which is slightly in the center and the upper right side when viewed from the front. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. In addition, the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa have predetermined cylindrical shapes inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square air-cooling fan FAN. Guide protrusions 1501aa1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. In addition, by forming the arc-shaped slit hole 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent an illegal act of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like included in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air cooling fan FAN is installed by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal-headed pan head screw (not shown) having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer that is the seat portion of the pan head screw with the seat comes into contact with the front surface of the air cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

  The cover flat plate 1501a is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a along its lower side when viewed from the front, and the positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are 1 The connector recess 1501ac is formed as two closed, substantially oblong rectangular regions (to be precise, a convex region with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as the upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as the lower part) of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. It is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). Yes. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies the lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. For this reason, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction at positions that do not interfere with the hole 1501ac8 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are connected to connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are exposed. At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. The volume adjustment switch 1510d is lower than the heights of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, some metallic powder or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a closed horizontally long rectangular region at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ad is opened at a position lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. . At this time, when plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height becomes lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, even if plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted on the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac by the protruding wall called the cover flat plate 1501a, the plug is hidden. The cover flat plate 1501a cannot protrude from the surface. Thereby, even if dust adhering to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a, powder having some metallicity, or the like falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It is like that.

  Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring lead opening 1501ae and can block the wiring lead opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a short distance compared to the distance from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted through the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). And a mounting hole 1501afb1 at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring lead opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of non-conductive resin and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed which protrude in the upper and lower sides at predetermined intervals in the center in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c. At the same time, a hinge hook 1501cc arranged above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd arranged below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are formed. Chamfering is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 of the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged close to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. In the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively peripheral control boards. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A through hole 1540c2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is aligned with a mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed as the through holes 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L-shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to match the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. The cover boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 are arranged so as to match with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are respectively contacted. In addition to being in contact, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Furthermore, the shaft (screw part) of the metal pan-screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is obtained. 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board are connected. 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed are the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 when viewed from the back so that the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are diagonally projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, solder copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520; Solder copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, respectively, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are respectively A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with the attachment boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwing them toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the land 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3, the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 are respectively abutted. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are in contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 becomes the peripheral data. It is connected to the ground (GND) of the ROM substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630.

  When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged on the inner side of the end surface on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surfaces on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed at positions so as to protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having circular shapes are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, respectively, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively liquid crystal output substrates. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It arrange | positions so that it may match with boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. In addition, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. In addition, the lands 1530 rb 1 to 1530 rb 4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan-screw are brought into contact with each other. Further, the metal pan head screw shaft (screw portion) is screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. It will be connected to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate are connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control substrate 1510. 1520 is connected to the ground (GND). Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630 by being connected to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan screws inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the openings of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Is arranged on the inner side of the side end face (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the peripheral control IC 1510a and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the gap having the predetermined distance dimension described above is fixed. (In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the peripheral control is performed by ejecting the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. By taking in air from the outside of the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 A gap is formed, and a gap is formed in the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are provided. A gap is formed. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. In addition to taking in air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the described ventilation hole 1501az, the above-described gaps (seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven formed on the cover body 1501) Gaps formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, a volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 with And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  Each of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa plus the area (total area) is the area in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501; The volume adjustment switch 1510d provided in the gaps and the peripheral control board 1510 formed in the gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501). And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, the gap formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. For this reason, when the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. A plurality of air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 are formed in the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When taking in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently formed, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base plate 1502a when viewed from the front. Base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Thus, in a state where the cover body 1501 is covered with the base body 1502 and the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are placed inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e. Will be in a state of being inscribed (surface contact).

  The base flat plate 1502a is wired to these connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined interval along the lower side when viewed from the front. The disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed in the vertical direction to prevent the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being warped by a force when inserting a connector for connection. The force when inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 at the position where it does not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the force when operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the peripheral control board 15 Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  In addition, the base flat plate 1502a is on the right side when viewed from the front, and at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is longer than the back surface of the connection piece 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engagement portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab, and the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are described above. L-shaped flange portions 1501 cca and 1501 cda of hinged portions 1501 cc and 1501 cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. In addition, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In addition, a base side sealing portion 1502ea protruding outward is formed at a position corresponding to the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 at the center of the right base side wall 1502e. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
A metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield as viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent backward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) on the upper left side of the flat plate 1540a (thickness: 1.2 mm) and the lower central side of the left side. Are formed respectively.

  Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, on the upper right side and lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) Between the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has notches formed around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring lead concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a, and The wiring lead recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane, The L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 are formed so that the back surface of the shield plate 1540a and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, and 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2, through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one attachment boss hole of a pair of attachment boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above manner. As described above, the mounting boss hole 1501am1 protrudes from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one mounting boss hole of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  In the L-shaped attachment pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the attachment boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 extend from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. These are two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height (the present embodiment) between the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  These two spaces are distance dimensions of a first predetermined height between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. (In this embodiment, the second space between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a thickness of 12 mm) and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC not shown, backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply generation circuit not shown, Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 to be described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 to be described later), various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, etc. (peripheral data ROM 1520a to be described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, A special connector SCN3 (to be described later) and various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, special connectors SCN4 to be described later) are accommodated. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components in the first space 1505a by not containing the etc. is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  The shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540 is provided with vent holes 1540az having the same shape at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular vent holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a horizontal pitch width of 6.5 mm, and a vertical pitch width of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. Yes. When the wing portion of the air cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotates, the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 is expelled toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the wing portion by this rotation. Thus, air is taken in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 via the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the inner space of the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and a conductive covering portion 1545a, It is comprised from the foam 1545b which has a rectangular shape as a core material coat | covered with the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a, and the electroconductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck on the electroconductive coating | coated part 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal film of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, and those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be listed. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive cover 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape with a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape with a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. Peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs that can control the progress and demonstration of the game presentation (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) and the progress of the presentation Various control information (peripheral data) stored in the control ROM 1510b for preliminarily storing various schedule data to be defined and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be transferred and stored. DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic
Random Access Memory (SDRAM) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power source that can supply power even when the power is turned off to a real-time clock IC (not shown). 1510e, a power generation circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510. The IC pin interval is reduced, and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control substrate 1510 are provided. ~ CN7, pin spacing of special connectors SCN1, SCN2 is narrowed, the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, the distance between connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the distance between connector CN7 and special connector SCN2 is also narrowed ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os, various parallel I / Os, and the like. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

  In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310X (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side. In some cases, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data (communication via a corresponding connector among connector CN3, connector CN6, and connector CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electrical drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various rendering units, communicate via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button lift drive motor 367 provided in the rendering operation unit 300), and communicates via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units and communicated via the connector CN6). Signals received from the camera as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300). , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the control target and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or control signals for the control target (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are output from the GPIO (connector CN6). Or a signal is output from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In this embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process that occurs every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from GPIO based on this clock signal. Serial data can be created. By using such GPIO to function as serial communication, for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side in predetermined interrupt processing (for example, interrupt processing generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)) The light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board-side serial systems and a plurality of LEDs (communication via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. Light emission data can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is allocated to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are allocated to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is allocated as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The data can be transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Access Memory), and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  Peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from special connector SCN2 using a plurality of types of video signals. As the plurality of types of video signal systems, for example, there are a plurality of types such as the RGB system, the LVDS system, the MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface) system, the eDP (Embedded Display Port) system, and the clockless system. In this case, four systems (four systems in total) are employed, one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system and second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. Peripheral control board adopting eDP method, for example, instead of MIPI method, 1 system for RGB system, 2 systems for LVDS system (first LVDS system, 2nd LVDS system), and 1 system for eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. LEDML1 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 5V is being supplied. LEDML2 is for confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which DC + 12V is supplied. LEDML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 35V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state in which DC + 35V is supplied. LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a thus formed can be illuminated brightly by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 being lit.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are completely different in structure. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the vertical direction with respect to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. When the sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 are fitted, there is no amount of movement in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are viewed from the front.

  Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively. Special connector SCN3 provided on peripheral data ROM board 1520 and special connector SCN4 provided on liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1 and the front side) when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. It is a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range in the direction of Note that the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even when the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. In addition, a gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into and inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 so that the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is viewed in the front-rear direction when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). It has a structure provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving a predetermined distance range toward). The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved as much as possible within the above-mentioned predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the special front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 is not contacted with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of connector SCN4 and the back surface of cover flat plate 1501a of cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted as the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a peripheral data ROM 1520a capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) that are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Various control information (peripheral data) includes image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and game board 5 The drive data etc. for drive-controlling the various movable production bodies with which it is provided can be mentioned.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory, is cheaper than a NOR flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the cost can be reduced and the power consumption can be suppressed, and various stored data can be read out at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is susceptible to noise due to its low operating voltage. In addition, various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a need to be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are not connected. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. Thus, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control substrate 1510. Prevent damage to the surroundings The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during the operation, the connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is established. It can be reliably formed.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, thereby causing the effect display device 1600 to progress the effect (for example, for the player). An image that tells you that an advantageous big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, an image that tells you that no big hit gaming state will occur, and a state where a big hit gaming state will occur compared to the normal state, although no big hit gaming state will occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image or the like indicating that it is approaching as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not used without adopting a configuration in which the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which 1510 is electrically connected to the inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  Although the procedure for attaching various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Since the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism is adopted. Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is pushed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  Further, since the cover body 1501 is made of non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimension distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 together with the peripheral control substrate 1510 is fixed to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at the time, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket are prevented from being damaged, and the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably established. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case where the three-dimensional arrangement is performed, for example, a large effect unit (movable effector is operated on the game board 5). Electric drive source and drive mechanism that can be used, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

[6-6. Peripheral control unit assembly method]
Here, a method for assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is replaced with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is formed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Placed to match hole 1501ah2, made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Accordingly, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is The cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are sandwiched.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted so as to be aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are held between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield board 1540 is covered. The body 1501 and the various substrates are sandwiched and fixed.

  Thus, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, thereby restraining movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restrained by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has a mounting boss for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restriction is applied to the peripheral control substrate 1510. When fixing to the back surface side of 1501a, absorption is performed by respective dimensional tolerances in through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed in the back surface side of cover flat plate 1501a. Can be done.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are The base body 1502 is inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are attached to the base body. Inserted into U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502 cae and 1502 caf of hinge receiving portions 1502 cac and 1502 cad formed in the engaging portion 1502 ca of 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped flange portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped bag-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is wrapped around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540 d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through-hole 1502 ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert a metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 Te. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet spreads outward at the base-side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. The base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed is in a sealed state.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and inscribed (surface contact). In the sealed state, the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 has to be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the opening and closing traces, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 constituted by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and deterring power against illegal actions on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been increased.

  Subsequently, the air cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wiring lead recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. From the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the rear, respectively, a lead screw with a metal seat (not shown) having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated is screwed into the drawer and mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2.

  Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out openings 1501ae formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The connector is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. By inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered with the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is formed on the back surface of the L-shaped circuit connection piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1545 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to an attachment portion formed on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600 on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into a mounting groove that constitutes a mounting portion formed in the outer peripheral control unit 1500 and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It fixes by screwing in toward the attachment hole which comprises the attachment part formed in the back surface side.

  As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A frame-shaped metal frame accommodates a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of itself, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500. Are connected to the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit connection piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back side of the base body 1502 1540d passes through a not-shown through-hole formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and is applied to the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 as shown in FIG. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are in an electrically and reliably connected state, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to be the same ground (GND), an environment strong against electromagnetic noise is constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can do.

  In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, the through-hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540, The through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to match the formed mounting boss hole 1501ag4, and the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Of the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side). And the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the predetermined position described above. It can also be fixed to the left side.) Even in such a procedure for attaching various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, it is possible to absorb the error in the front-and-rear direction caused by the pushing-in, so that the plug and socket It is possible to prevent breakage of a plurality of connection terminals formed on the substrate, and to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, and to connect the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the peripheral A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards attached to the pachinko machines having different game specifications. In this embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common without depending on the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game board game specification. The peripheral data corresponding to is stored as a board that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and that does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (recycled). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily exchanged according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems that are input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types of systems are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced in accordance with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal system input to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 matched to the video signal system (LVDS system) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and a peripheral control board is provided in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, whereby the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. Connected. For this reason, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is guided to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the metal shield plate 1540 and removed. Can be done. Thereby, it is not necessary to provide each type of substrate (including the power supply substrate 630) with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can do.

  Here, the arrangement of the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Will be described. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming whether or not there is fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 148, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, IC orientation, part number In other words, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multi-directional angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. . Further, the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 5V from the power supply substrate 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, so that the direct current + 5V is supplied. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of being controlled, it also has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the control ROM 1510b, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the area is larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, , Connector pin count, IC Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are silk-printed on each. The contents are distributed so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Accordingly, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 In addition, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where the direct current + 35V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special data SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Furthermore, the surface data of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the IC pin state is improved, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. And improving the visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. And an area larger than the shape of the board-to-board connector (the shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the 1530 are respectively distributed and arranged. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 In addition to the correspondence relationship, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in the lighting state when the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN4 on the special connector SCN2 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Improved visibility of the contents silk-printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  The plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are part numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c1, respectively. The state of the IC pins of 1510c2 and the contents (for example, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that they can be confirmed from multi-directional angles. Has been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence relationship between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. Can do. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in the lighting state in a state where the direct current + 12V is supplied from the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620. The surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is originally provided with a function of confirming (monitoring) a state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but also having a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the SDRAM 1510c. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

  Further, among a plurality of blades constituting the blades of the air cooling fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades and the blades when the inspector rotates the blade of the air cooling fan FAN) The product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. Thereby, it can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the periphery control IC 1510a.

  In the present embodiment, as LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a surface mount type and a wide angle of about 120 degrees are employed, and a type with weak directivity is employed. It is also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield board 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat board 1501a, whereby the shield board 1540 is covered with the cover body 1501. In the state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surfaces of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and a metal shield plate 1540 is disposed in this space, so that two spaces are formed. As described above, the two spaces have a first predetermined height between the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. 2 and a second space 1505b (see FIG. 149) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic parts provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic parts provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be illuminated brightly by turning on the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 that is also suitable for use as illumination.

  Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has gloss, and the area on the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 that faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. And the surroundings also have a function as a reflection part that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and direct the light toward the peripheral control board 1510 again. You may comprise so that the coloring paint which has glossiness may be further apply | coated to these reflection parts.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached, and paid out to the side of the game board 5. Since the unit 560 is arranged, the game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path constituted by these units, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are formed by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Further, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. The metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration in which the same ground (GND) is used by electrically connecting to the (GND) line is adopted.

  Accordingly, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided to the ground (GND) of various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 through the metal shield plate 1540 and removed. Can do. In other words, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be guided and removed to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) through the metal shield plate 1540.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 near the game board 5 to which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached. In a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data provided on the peripheral control board 1510 The board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN3 provided on the ROM board 1520, and the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. By placing it away from the tank rail 553 It has become possible way. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. By disposing the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, the board-to-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The inter-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). 148, as shown in FIG. 148, since it can be arranged long in the vertical direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adhere can be minimized. In addition, when the above-mentioned board-to-board connector is arranged long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, some metallic powder, etc. adheres will be extremely increased. On the other hand, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are long in the left-right direction as shown in FIG. However, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is formed by a protruding wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The dust adhering to the surface, some metallic powder, etc. are covered with the cover side wall 1501. It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. In this way, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is disposed, and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are disposed so that dust, powder having some metallicity, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electrical terminal, Is selected.

  In the embodiment described above, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, you may arrange | position so that the direction through which information and a signal flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information and signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information and signals can be a socket (or plug). For example, in the embodiment described above, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a included in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a special connector (or plug and plug) is provided. A special connector). In the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signal systems are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmission side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the reception side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket), and correspondingly, when the socket is provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, it becomes a special connector (or plug). A special connector).

  In the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin. However, a conductive material containing carbon in polycarbonate is used. It may be configured by being molded in opaque black as a resin, or if it is made of conductive resin, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are molded in a translucent color. May be. Even in this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is provided on the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). Various substrates such as 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are fixed by metal pan-head screws so as to be connected to the ground (GND) of these various substrates as described above. be able to. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be caused to flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates, and noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, a predetermined amount is provided between the surfaces of the various substrates (the surface opposite to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space, and this 2 The two spaces are the surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a distance of a first predetermined height (12 mm in this embodiment) between the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of 540, and the surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; And a second space 1505b having a distance of a second predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. This is a case where a large-scale production unit (an electrical drive source or drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body and various sensors for detecting an origin position or an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5 in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as a distance dimension of the same predetermined height, The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take countermeasures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components that emit light, heat generated from the various electronic components in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b through the metal shield plate 1540.

  In the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the peripheral control board 1510 And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. Also, the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, (Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. However, the control ROM 1510b, SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, peripheral data ROM 1520a, and peripheral data ROM 1520a are made of metal. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery can be seen. . Also, the shape of the board-to-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be checked so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area, or the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the board-to-board connector (a shape constituted by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the board-to-board connector with 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining one or a combination of them except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of 1501e. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover flat plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. . Even if configured in this way, the foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to foreign matter falling on the various substrates of the peripheral control board box 1505. Therefore, an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter falling from the tank rail 553 can be prevented. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is passed through the ventilation hole 1501az. The foreign matter generated by the game ball B toward the inside (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) drops and enters, so that the electrical due to the fallen foreign matter on the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505 This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1501b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, respectively. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. By doing so, it is possible to contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505 by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501az provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is interposed via the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B) falls and enters the peripheral control board box 1505, the peripheral control board box 1505 drops onto various boards. This is because there is a high probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign object will occur.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there is a gaming machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board mounted with a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, and the like. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems inputted to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the production control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to reduce the cost of the production control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM for storing image data such as symbols, various background images, characters, characters, etc., an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, etc. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2006-116667 (FIG. 2)) is proposed. By the way, the game balls supplied to the gaming machine from the island equipment of the game hall are charged with static electricity by the game balls rubbing each other when circulating between the island equipment and the gaming machine of the game hall. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 151 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310X and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. Has been. The main control board 1310X is capable of controlling a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the production based on the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310X and the various commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. Is. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a for controlling the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b for controlling the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310X that can control the progress of the game controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and controls a game operation that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor incorporating a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and a main control input circuit 1310b to which detection signals from various sensors are input. A main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, etc., a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, and monitoring for signs of power outages or momentary power interruptions of a predetermined voltage. Stored in the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e and the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. The information is collected by a RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing information, a setting display 1310g for displaying a set value and displaying an error, and an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a formed in the game board 5. A base monitor 1310h for displaying the number of game balls. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high-frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310X.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 4100a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also includes a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as “built-in reset circuit”). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a and forces the main control MPU 1310a to be affected by electrical noise when the register changes to an inconsistent content. It is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and again executes the main control-side power-on process described later. Will be. In this case, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Will be cleared). Note that even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the payout control board 633, so the main control board 1310X (main control board 1310X) Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the activated state.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. "Random number circuit"). The main random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 to 65535 as a minimum value is set in advance as a minimum value), and generates an initial value. The circuit configuration is such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the hard random number circuit with built-in main control first sets a clock signal (main control) to the main control MPU 1310a with an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed on the basis of a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, and within a predetermined numerical range. Once all the values in are extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value in the predetermined numerical range is quickly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, since the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the main control system reset, the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information is provided, and a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on the information by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. In contrast, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  First start port sensor 3002 (first start port sensor main side 3002a and first start port sensor slave side 3002b described above) that detects game ball B received in first start port 2002, second start port 2004 A second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, a general winning port sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general game port 2001, and a gate for detecting the game ball B that has passed through the gate unit 2003. A sensor 2401, a first entrance sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received in the first entrance 2006, a big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big prize opening 2005, and the game area 5a Collected by a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting illegal magnetism, and an out port 1008 provided in a game area 5a defined in the game board 5. Respective detection signals from the out-port left sensor 1008a and the out-port right sensor 1008b, which detect the game ball B, are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered.

  The detection signals from the setting key 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are sent via the payout control board 633 (in other words, a payout control input circuit 633ab and payout control described later). When input to the main control board 1310X without passing through the output circuit 633ac, the signals are input to the input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The detection signals from the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are input to the main control board 1310X without passing through another board, that is, through the main control input circuit 1310b. Via the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2401, the first receiving port sensor 2406, the large winning opening sensor 2403, the magnetic sensor 3003, the out opening left sensor 1008a, and the out opening right sensor 1008b. Is input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca, so that the main control solenoid with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, the respective drive signals are output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the start port solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, the status display 1401 and the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 from the main control output circuit with the reset function. Normal hold indicator 1403, No. The special signal indicator 1404, the first special reserved number indicator 1405, the second special symbol indicator 1406, the second special reserved number indicator 1407, and the round indicator 1408 are supplied with respective drive signals via other substrates. No, that is, output directly.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on these detection signals, thereby setting the main control output circuit with reset function. A drive signal is output to the setting change permission lamp 1311c of the change board 1310Y.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with reset function. Main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to games to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port A fire that outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output circuit to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, or tells the main control output circuit with a reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port that the game ball B is permitted to be fired. By outputting a permission signal, a game is sent from the main control output circuit with a reset function to the payout control board 633. And it outputs a firing permission signal to convey that to allow the firing of B.

  In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002 (the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b), the second start port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2401, and the big prize port sensor. 2403, the non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b, whereas the general winning port sensor 3001 has a contact type ON / OFF operation. A mechanical switch of the type is used. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2402 are used. And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2401 also frequently occurs. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2401.

  In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the big prize opening sensor 2403 is played. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life is also used for the big prize opening sensor 2403. In addition, since the game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in a large amount by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a formed in the game board 5, the detection of the game ball B by the out-port left sensor 1008a. , And the detection of the game ball B by the out mouth right sensor 1008b frequently occurs. For this reason, the proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the out port left sensor 1008a and the out port right sensor 1008b. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving port sensor 2406 does not frequently occur in the general winning opening 2001 and the first receiving port sensor 2406 where the game balls B do not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 3001 and the first receiving port sensor 2406 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than the proximity switch. Note that a proximity switch having a high durability and a long life may be used regardless of whether or not the game ball B frequently enters the general winning opening 2001 or the first receiving port sensor 2406.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, so that the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. Send various commands as serial data. When the payout control board 633 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310X as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310X. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Also, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). A signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with a reset function to the payout control board 633.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands related to control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without a reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit without the reset function.

  Various voltages (DC + 35V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310X via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310X is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. (It is described.) BC0 (see FIG. 160, etc.) is provided. With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and triggered by this, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the main control built-in RAM. Yes. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors these DC + 12V and DC + 35V signs of power failure or instantaneous power failure. When the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power failure or instantaneous power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V, it outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning, and the power failure warning signal is output from a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition to being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310X (output via the main control output circuit 1310c) and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110 Is input. The power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310X. In addition, you may comprise so that a power failure warning signal may be each input into the board | substrate etc. with which the door frame 3 is mounted | worn.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power supply lines: a power supply line (+ 12V power supply line) supplied with DC + 12V and a power supply line (+ 35V power supply line) supplied with DC + 35V. By monitoring each voltage, it is possible to grasp the sign of power failure such as power outage or instantaneous power failure more accurately than when monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line or + 35V power line. Can be done.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, the payout control board 633 for performing the launch control and the ball transport control of the game ball B performs the discharge control by the payout control unit 633a for performing various controls relating to payout and the launch solenoid 542. , A launch control unit 633b that performs ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c that displays the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error that is displayed on the error LED display 633c And an error release switch 633d having a pressing operation portion.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
A payout control unit 633a that performs various controls relating to payout on the payout control board 633 controls a power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and performs a game medium payout operation that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various processing programs including a payout control program to be controlled, a payout control MPU633aa which is a microprocessor incorporating a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, and detection signals from various sensors relating to payout are input. A payout control input circuit 633ab, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate, a payout motor drive circuit 633ad for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580, It has.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer for monitoring the system) (hereinafter referred to as “WDT with built-in payout control”) and a function for preventing fraud are also incorporated.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab does not have a reset function because a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information in which detection signals from various sensors are input to the various input terminals is not provided. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured so that the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the various signals based on the information are output from the various output terminals. It is configured as an output circuit.

  The payout control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, and It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control output circuit with a reset function is a signal based on information obtained by resetting the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the payout control system reset. Is configured as a circuit that does not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 4120cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is not input. That is, the payout control output circuit without the reset function is such that the information for outputting the various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the payout control system reset, so that the signal based on the information is not reset. The circuit is configured to be output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580 A detection signal from the sensor 591, a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X, and an error cancellation signal from the error release switch 633d are sent to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Is input to the input terminal.

  Further, as described above, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 is transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, the payout control input circuit 633ab, Then, it is input to the main control board 1310X without passing through the payout control output circuit 633ac. Further, as described above, the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is input to the main control board 1310X via (via) the payout control board 633. ing.

  Further, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310X are received by the serial data method at the input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. Further, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310X is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When the payout control MPU 633aa completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310X as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to that effect (payer ACK signal). By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310X.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit without reset function as serial data, thereby providing a payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the circuit to the main control board 1310X. When the main control board 1310X completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 633 as serial data, the main control board 1310X outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The payout control MPU 633aa is driven from the payout control output circuit with a reset function by outputting a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633d is a segment display and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310X). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is notified, and when the numeral “1” is displayed, it is “out of ball” (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it is notified that there is no game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570, and when the number “2” is displayed, it indicates that it is “ball gummy” (specifically Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B mesh with each other, and it is difficult to rotate the payout blade 589, and the number “3” is displayed. When the count switch "Error" (specifically, a failure has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, "Retry" “Error” (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full” ( Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the game ball B in which the lower tray 202 is stored is informed that the game ball B is full), and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” "Not connected" (indicating that the electrical connection has been cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the number "9" If it is displayed Is informed that it is “in stock (award ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ing.

  Also, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control with a reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls is output from the output circuit to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  Also, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310X to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls B and various information (game information, error contents related to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1). The external terminal board 558 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 and the hall computer. The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and the main control board 1310X that can advance the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 can control the payout, etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can be controlled and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the production, so that malfunction or failure does not occur. The hall computer grasps the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as a prize ball, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, so that the payout information of the game ball B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called so-called , Pitching information) and the player's game.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is sent from the payout control MPU 633aaa through a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining level to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball lending display section of the lending operation unit 220.

  Note that various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 633 has the capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 160, etc.) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310X for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. See). The capacitor BC0 allows the payout control MPU 633aa to store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is turned off, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a. Various types of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control input circuit when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab, and triggered by this, the payout control MPU 633aa is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b is based on a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to launch are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference A ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the pulse. Based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, the firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 gaming balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. Then, a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. A detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194 that detects whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the launch control input circuit and input to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310X that informs permission to launch the game ball B is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing timing control circuit satisfies launch condition 1 in which a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 based on a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, and the CR unit, the CR unit connection terminal plate, If the launch condition 2 is established, the launch of the game ball B is permitted based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

  Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182. In response to the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 triggered by the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, whereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the tray unit 200 are stored. When one ball is received in the ball feeding unit 140 and the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the game ball B received by stopping the output of the constant current is sent to the ball launcher 540 side. send. Thus, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

  In this embodiment, the discharge control board 633 includes the launch control unit 633b that performs the launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and the ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. It may be configured. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310X may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, as illustrated. The power may be input to the power supply board 630 through a relay board that is not.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of effects based on various commands from the main control board 1310X, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface and the like are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b that stores in advance various programs and various schedule data that define the progress of production, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are stored. SDRAM 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d capable of adjusting the volume, and a real (not shown) And it includes a backup power supply 1510e which can also supply power to the time clock IC during power failure, and a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs various kinds of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one process of the initial setting process when the power is turned on (including when power is restored from a power failure). Data) is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as background images, character images, and design images for rendering various effect images on the effect display device 1600, the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data for defining light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, light extinction, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games This is drive data for driving and controlling various movable effects provided in the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or delete the information. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the activation of its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred from the main control board 1310X to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands, and performs the presentation. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310X, it reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. Various effects are advanced by performing control so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates drawing data for reading the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing the image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Then, control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is performed. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state where it can accept screen data that defines the screen configuration, it outputs a V blank signal to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided in the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 or the like by reading out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and generating and outputting them based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like are controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow. When a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, this volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker Audio signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) are output to 464 and the bass frame speaker 622 for the bass frame 4 By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310X, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands and reads the read schedule data. In accordance with the above, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is output from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or driven to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5. The game board side drive data for outputting the signal is the SDRA. 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720, and are driven to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button lift drive motor 367, and the like. Door side drive data for outputting signals, and door side for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals or gradation lighting signals to full color LEDs or single color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 The door side drive light emission data composed of the light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. The panel drive board 1720 is provided in the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, a command) upon receiving game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a). In addition, a drive motor control circuit (not shown) that can output drive signals to various drive motors included in the various rendering units is provided.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), combined positions) provided in various production units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are a panel drive board 1720, and It is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. In addition, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the rendering operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348. Are received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Further, signals from the air cooling fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power generation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Kinds are made and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running away.

[7-4. Panel drive board]
Here, the panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. Here, the relationship with each decorative board of the game board 5 will be described, and then the relationship with various drive motors of various rendering units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-4-1. Relationship with each decorative board of game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. The game board-side light emission data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from the various serial I / O ports to the decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits capable of causing a predetermined constant current to flow through the LEDs.

  As each decoration board of the game board 5, for example, a first pattern decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs for a first pattern that is decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600 is mounted. And a second pattern decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs for the second pattern that is decorated by emitting light from the right side surface of the light guide plate in the front effect unit 2600 is mounted.

  Further, as each decoration board of the game board 5, for example, a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are arranged in the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel board 1110 are mounted. An upper left panel decorative substrate 1131, a lower left panel decorative substrate that is disposed in the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front and on which a plurality of panel decorative LEDs that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110 are mounted; There is.

  Further, as each decorative board of the game board 5, for example, a back upper left front stage on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for illuminating and decorating the front stage decorative part 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is mounted. There is a decorative substrate 3311a and the like.

[7-4-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads from the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5. Are transmitted as commands to the panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports. As described above, when the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by the drive motor control circuit (not shown), the drive motor control circuit (not shown) Based on the board-side drive data (that is, command), a drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various presentation units provided in the game board 5.

  Examples of the various drive motors included in the various effect units include a back upper left rotation drive motor that rotates the front decoration portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310.

[7-4-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]
As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), combined position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are panel drive. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the substrate 1720 and the peripheral control substrate 1510.

  As various detection sensors for detecting positions (standby position (original position), combined position) provided in various effect units, for example, a standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front decoration portion 3312 of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is provided. And a magnetic back left top magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back left top front decorative substrate 3311a.

  Note that the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 is based on a detection signal from a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back upper front stage decoration board 3311a. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[8. Ground wire system]
The frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 is capable of once collecting the electromagnetic noise generated at various places and grounding it to the island facility of the game hall (ground earth). Here, a system of ground wires by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 152 is a diagram showing a configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 152 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. FIG. 15C is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 152D is a table showing the explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 152 (a), the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface facing downward (that is, a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and attached inside a substrate housing portion 551aa formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 152 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The earth terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be described briefly. As shown in FIG. 152 (d), the earth terminal ECN1 is an earth provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected via the ground connection terminal and the island facility ground wire in the island facility of the game hall as the island facility ground. The earth terminal ECN3 is illustrated as a sphere tank ground on the sphere tank 552 shown in FIG. 102B (specifically, on the outside of the side wall of the sphere tank 552 near the substrate housing portion 551aa). One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw that is not The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 serves as a body frame metal ground, which is a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 shown in FIG. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 (specifically, the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected). The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG.

  In the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serves as a power source ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. In addition, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 as a power source ground, a ground terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN3 is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall through the ground terminal ECN2 and island facility ground wire as the island facility ground and removed, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the metal frame metal ground. The electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire is guided to the earth ground of the island equipment in the game hall and removed, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is Via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, the island equipment ground wire It is guided to the earth ground of the island capital of the gaming hall is adapted to be removed.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are ground in the island facility of the game hall or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1 to be charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game ball B can stay are attached.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the discharge unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate, and the ball tank 552 which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise as a result of the static electricity being easily accumulated. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the body frame metal are disposed in the vicinity of the unit 560 and the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4. The earth terminal ECN4 as ground is gradually attenuated by passing electromagnetic noise through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, to suppress high voltage instantaneous discharge, and the island equipment from the earth terminal ECN2 as island equipment ground It became possible to lead to the earth ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the ground wire That. In other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 that is likely to accumulate static electricity from the frame ground substrate 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 as a frame ground called a frame ground. By guiding to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are regions that are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. The ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground is used for the electromagnetic wave noise flowing into the frame ground board 559 as described above. A large earth terminal is used because it is guided to the earth ground of the island facility and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 adopting these large-sized ground terminals are squares having a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (earth terminals ECN2 to ECN2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height is 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 described above, and the current is small. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are small-sized ground terminals. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting this small-sized ground terminal are squares having a cross section of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 22), rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and has a height of 7 mm as shown in FIG. 152 (a) (with ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5) When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Compared to each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire), the current caused by electromagnetic noise is large, so each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 The thickness of the ground wire (main body frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1, ECN5. In the present embodiment, 1.6 mm is adopted as the plate thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 as shown in FIG. 152 (a).

  In this way, electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once aggregated on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall, so that it can be removed. The earth substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static eliminating action.

  Further, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in each place is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall from the frame ground substrate 559, the pachinko machine 1 The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side of the pachinko machine 1 is routed to the power supply substrate 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and electromagnetic noise is temporarily aggregated on the power supply substrate 630 to make island facilities in the game hall Compared with the configuration in which it is guided to the earth ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) can be routed extremely easily.

  Further, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the substrate housing portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 are provided. Terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, 10 external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a row from the left side to the right side when the payout base unit 550 is viewed from the back) are provided. ) And a hall computer provided in the game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island equipment ground in the frame ground board 559, and an earth connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall , Can be performed as a series of operations by electrically connecting the island equipment ground wires (wiring). Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  In addition, since the frame ground substrate 559 can be disposed in the substrate accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310X of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game, and the effects) provided on the game board 5 with the island equipment earth wires (wiring) for electrically connecting the earth connection terminals provided. The peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc. Adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) and the like included in the device can be eliminated.

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 is made of a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. The length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) is made extremely short, and electromagnetic wave noise is guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. be able to.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the ball tank 552 which tends to accumulate static electricity and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static eliminating action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the main body frame metal ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the frame ground substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action, and the power source. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the substrate 630 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 and the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a discharging action. It can be configured to be the shortest in comparison with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  In addition, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, the main body frame 4 is close to the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which are strongly influenced by electromagnetic noise. The main body frame base unit 500 includes a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530, and a frame ground substrate 559 includes a ground terminal ECN3 as a sphere tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected, and the island facility from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground substrate 559 Lead to earth ground of the game hall island facility through the ground wire and remove it It is possible.

  By the way, to make it easier to supply the AC power supply of the CR unit, the grounding is once concentrated on the power supply board located on the CR unit side at the bottom of the body frame, and connected to the earth ground of the island facility via the power supply board. Then, a gaming machine to be grounded has been proposed (for example, JP 2012-120593 A (paragraph [0335], FIG. 84, FIG. 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged below in gaming machines. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground in the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device or the like of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By drawing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic wave noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way, which may have an unexpected effect. Also, since the ground wires are concentrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs in the power supply board, it may affect the ground, or conversely, current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. Also, when the grounding point of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to connect the ground wires gathered by the power supply board again from below to connect them.

[9. Conductor floating against the ground]
Next, members provided in the game board as handling of a conductor floating with respect to the ground will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 153 is a schematic view of handling of a floating conductor with respect to the ground included in various effect units included in the game board.

  As described above, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are disposed above the game board 5 and the payout unit 560 is disposed on the side of the game board 5 in the vicinity of the game board 5. The game balls are rubbed against each other in the ball path, and are charged and electrostatically discharged to become a noise source. For this reason, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. Pachinko machines 1 are lined up opposite the island facilities in the game hall. Thus, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise.

  In the game board 5, various effect units are provided in the back unit 3000. Various production units include structures used for improving rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including casings of electrical parts), conductive plating applied to decorative structures, and A plurality of conductors such as a structure molded by a conductive resin (including a decorative structure) is used. The game board 5 is provided with various substrates, and these various substrates are arranged close to various effect units. In addition, the influence of these conductors on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge is performed depends on the size of the surface area. When the surface area of the conductor is small, the amount of charge that can be stored is so small that the influence on the electric circuit due to electrostatic discharge is negligible, and it is not necessary to remove electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge. On the other hand, if the surface area of the conductor is large, the amount of charge that can be stored is large, and the influence of the electrostatic discharge on the electric circuit cannot be ignored, and it is necessary to safely remove the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge. .

  In a state where these conductors are floating with respect to the ground, the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to the above-described electromagnetic noise, and thus electrostatic induction occurs in the conductors under the influence of electromagnetic noise. If it does so, when the electrostatic discharge is carried out from the conductor which floated with respect to the ground, there exists a possibility that the various board | substrate with which the game board 5 is equipped may be damaged.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, at least among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge affects the various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunctions. A structure that does not float against the ground is adopted for things that may be damaged or that may be damaged.

[9-1. Example of production unit conductors (Part 1)]
Among the various effect units, one effect unit is provided with a metal reinforcing plate (not shown) so as to cover the back side in order to increase its rigidity, and among both ends in the left and right direction of this reinforcing plate, One arranged near the drive motor 3151 is attached to a metal slide rail 3151ns that can be slid by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction, and the other not arranged near the drive motor 3151 is made of metal (not shown). A sliding part (not shown) that slides along the cylindrical rod (moves while sliding the surface of the metallic cylindrical rod along the longitudinal direction of the cylindrical rod) (may be molded with conductive resin, It may be molded from non-conductive resin).

  In the present embodiment, among at least a plurality of conductors provided in various production units, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a risk of causing malfunction or damage to various boards provided in the game board 5. As a certain condition, the surface area of a single conductor is larger than the predetermined surface area, but it is selected as an object that does not float on the ground, and is in a state where it is fixed and connected with each other structurally. It is said. For example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail 3151 ns are attached and brought into structural contact with each other to be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (a), the metal back rail 3151ns for the rear moving arm, which is slidable by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction and is arranged in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151, is made of metal. Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, the mounting hole 3151n closer to the slide rail 3151ns is connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc. In addition to being electrically connected, the mounting hole 3151f far from the slide rail 3151ns and the panel drive board 1720 are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc.

  The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc has wiring terminals crimped at both ends thereof, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are fixed by being screwed to the metal casing of the slide rail 3151ns, and at the other end wiring. The terminal is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the attachment hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof, a connector provided at the other end, and a mounting hole 3151f provided at the other end of the wiring terminal at a metal housing of the drive motor 3151f. The other end connector is inserted into the corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 and fixed. At this time, the metal casing of the drive motor 3151 forming the attachment hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the panel drive substrate 1720, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs0. The ground (GND) line of the panel drive board 1720 is a ground of various boards such as a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310X, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards, and various decoration boards. It is electrically connected to the (GND) line.

  A plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and are inserted into corresponding connectors on the panel drive board 1720 different from the connectors into which the connectors of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc are inserted.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various performance units, at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a possibility that the various boards included in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned or damaged. For example, a conductor single body has a surface area larger than a predetermined surface area, and each conductor is structurally contacted and fixed to be in a conductive state, for example, a metal reinforcing plate and a metal slide rail. 3151 ns are attached and structurally brought into contact and electrically connected, and these conductors are the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, the second conductor It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720.

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various performance units, at least if they are electrostatically discharged, they may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and may malfunction or be damaged. As the conductor surface area is larger than the predetermined surface area, these conductors are configured not to float from the ground. However, the invading electromagnetic wave noise can be safely removed by guiding it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs0 of the panel drive substrate 1720. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various boards provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters into these conductors, the electric circuit part in various boards provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure even if electromagnetic noise enters the conductor. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact of electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation Player discomfort such as disappearance can be prevented.

[9-2. Example of production unit conductors (Part 2)]
Various effect units are different from other effect units in that one of the upper and lower ends of the movable arm base disposed near the drive motor 3151 is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction. The other one not attached in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151 is slid along a metal cylinder rod (not shown) (the surface of the metal cylinder rod slides along the longitudinal direction of the cylinder rod). A sliding portion (not shown) that may move while being moved (may be molded with a conductive resin or may be molded with a non-conductive resin) is attached.

  In the present embodiment, among at least a plurality of conductors provided in various production units, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a risk of causing malfunction or damage to various boards provided in the game board 5. As a certain thing, it selects as the object which does not become the state which floated with respect to the earth with respect to what the surface area of a conductor single-piece | unit becomes large compared with the predetermined surface area. For example, a metal slide rail 3151ns.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 153 (b), a metal casing of a metal slide rail 3151ns that is slidable by a predetermined distance in the left-right direction, which is disposed in the vicinity of the drive motor 3151, and the drive Of the pair of mounting holes 3151n and 3151f provided in the metal casing of the motor 3151, the mounting hole 3151n (3452n) closer to the slide rail 3151ns is electrically connected via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc. And the connecting hole 3151f farther from the slide rail 3151ns and the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit are electrically connected via the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc.

  The first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc has wiring terminals crimped at both ends thereof, and the wiring terminals at one end thereof are fixed by being screwed to the metal casing of the slide rail 3151ns, and at the other end wiring. The terminal is screwed and fixed to a mounting hole 3151n provided in the metal casing of the drive motor 3151. At this time, the metal housing of the drive motor 3151 forming the attachment hole 3151n is fixed to the effect unit.

  The second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc has a wiring terminal crimped at one end thereof, a connector provided at the other end, and a mounting hole 3151f provided at the other end of the wiring terminal at a metal housing of the drive motor 3151f. The other end connector is inserted into and fixed to the corresponding connector on the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit. At this time, the metal casing of the drive motor 3151 forming the attachment hole 3151f is fixed to the effect unit. When the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is electrically connected to the ground (GND) via the resistor Rs2. The ground (GND) line of the relay board 3151a provided in the production unit includes a panel drive board 1720, a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310X, a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, a liquid crystal output board 1530, various relay boards and It is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of various substrates such as various decorative substrates.

  A plurality of electrical wirings (harnesses) for driving the drive motor 3151 are provided with connectors, and corresponding connectors on the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit different from the connector into which the connector of the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc is inserted. Inserted. The relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit is electrically connected to the panel drive board 1720 via electrical wiring (harness). The electrical wiring (harness) is provided with a connector at both ends thereof, and is inserted into a corresponding connector on the panel drive board 1720 and fixed.

  As described above, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various performance units, at least when electrostatic discharge is performed, there is a possibility that the various boards included in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned or damaged. For example, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151 ns has a first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc and a metal housing of the drive motor 3151, whereas the conductor alone has a larger surface area than the predetermined surface area. And the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc and the resistor Rs2 of the relay board 3151a provided in the effect unit are electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As a result, among the plurality of conductors provided in the various performance units, at least if they are electrostatically discharged, they may affect various substrates provided in the game board 5 and may malfunction or be damaged. As the conductor surface area is larger than the predetermined surface area, these conductors are configured not to float from the ground. However, the invading electromagnetic wave noise can be safely removed by introducing it to the circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) via the resistor Rs2 of the relay substrate 3151a provided in the rendering unit. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions and damages of various boards provided in the game board 5 due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise).

  In addition, as described above, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters into these conductors, the electric circuit part in various boards provided in the game board 5 is not affected by malfunction or failure even if electromagnetic noise enters the conductor. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can continue to operate normally, and the impact of electrostatic discharge, the disappearance of the occurrence of the big hit gaming state, and the occurrence state of the probability variation Player discomfort such as disappearance can be prevented.

  In addition, as described above, electromagnetic noise generated in various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is once aggregated on the frame ground substrate 559 and guided from the frame ground substrate 559 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall to be removed. Therefore, the frame ground substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action. That is, a path for safely removing electromagnetic noise generated at various places in the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall is formed. On the other hand, at least among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least electrostatic discharge may affect various boards provided in the game board 5 and malfunction. It can be safely removed by introducing it to the circuit ground (grounds (GND) of various substrates) so that it does not float on the ground with respect to some that may be damaged or that may be damaged. That is, among the plurality of conductors in the various effect units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, at least when electrostatic discharge occurs, the various boards provided in the game board 5 may be affected and malfunctioned. In addition, there is a path that can be safely removed by introducing electromagnetic noise to a circuit ground (ground (GND) of various substrates) for those that may be damaged. As described above, independent paths for removing electromagnetic noise that are independent of each other are formed in the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 and are not affected by each other. Therefore, also in this respect, malfunction and damage due to electrostatic discharge (electromagnetic wave noise) can be prevented.

  As described above, the influence of the conductor on the electric circuit when electrostatic discharge is performed depends on the size of the surface area. Further, the ease of electrostatic discharge varies depending on the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit. Therefore, in this embodiment, taking into account the size of the surface area of the conductor and the distance between the conductor and the electric circuit, the electromagnetic noise of the plurality of conductors is guided to the earth ground of the island facility of the game hall for safety. The conductors that need to be removed are individually selected (whether or not they are conductors that are dropped to earth ground) and electromagnetic noise is guided to the circuit ground (ground of various boards (GND)). The conductors that need to be removed safely are selected individually.

  In the above-described embodiment, if at least electrostatic discharge is performed among a plurality of conductors in various rendering units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5, the various boards provided in the game board 5 are affected and erroneous. For those that may operate or damage the surface area of a single conductor as compared to a predetermined surface area, each of them is structurally contacted, fixed, and in a conductive state, for example, In addition, the metal reinforcing plate and the metal slide rail 3151ns are attached and structurally brought into contact and electrically connected, and these conductors are connected to the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc and the drive. Via the metal housing of the motor 3151, the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 fc, and the resistance Rs 0 of the panel drive board 1720 The path is electrically connected to the land (GND). Instead of the metal housing of the drive motor 3151, a metal screw is provided and the metal screw is used alone. Alternatively, a lug plate (a metal lug terminal fixed to the insulating substrate) may be provided and the lug plate may be used. That is, these conductors are connected to the ground (GND) via the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151nc, the metal screw (or lug plate), the second conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151fc, and the resistance Rs0 of the panel drive board 1720. It is good also as a path | route electrically connected to. A plurality of conductors in various production units provided in the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 can be similarly configured.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the conductor of the metal slide rail 3151 ns is electrically connected to the metal casing of the drive motor 3151 via a transition wire called the first conductor potential fluctuation preventing wiring 3151 nc. , Conductors of metal slide rails 3151ns and other conductive members (for example, structures used to improve rigidity, mechanical parts of drive mechanisms, electrical parts (including housings of electrical parts), and decorations. Conductive plating applied to the structure of 1), and a plurality of conductors such as structures (including decorative structures) molded by a conductive resin, and other crossover wiring May be electrically connected. That is, it is good also as a structure electrically connected by two or more steps of crossover wiring. In this case, a plurality of conductors may be electrically connected in a daisy chain with crossover wires, or a plurality of conductors may be connected in series and in parallel with crossover wires, and metal screws may be provided. In addition, the transition wiring that electrically connects one conductor and another conductor may be relayed through the metal screw alone, or the lug plate (the metal lug terminal may be connected to the insulating substrate). May be provided via the lug plate. It is preferable that the length of each of the plurality of crossover wirings is shortened.

[10. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 154 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 155 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 156 is a view taken along arrow B in FIG. 155, and FIG. FIG. 158 is a silk print (No. 2) of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board, and FIG. 159 is an electronic component that is discontinued. It is a perspective view explaining the outline | summary. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape, fuse fusing confirmation, capacitor capacity, and measures for discontinuing manufacturing electronic components.

  As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which reduces the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V gaming machine power supply voltage. When a power cord plug (not shown) is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in an island facility of the game hall, AC24V is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc.) from the AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[10-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 154, the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a power destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm). (The support terminals at both ends are made of metal) and are input to the input side terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a through the B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the line 24 of AC24V (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V1” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “L side”)) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. An AC 24V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC24V2” (hereinafter also referred to as “N side”)) is input to the input side terminal 1 of 630a. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates to turn on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 is started to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the power switch 630a to turn OFF, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. While the supply is cut off, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thereby, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In the state where the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is turned on, a staff member such as a game hall clerk operates the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. There are cases where the power is turned on all at once, and there are cases where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off simultaneously by turning off the breakers of the game hall.

[10-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1, and is output from the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. Capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. Electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the earth connection terminal DCN5 as the frame ground FG2. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 152 via a power supply ground line (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in the AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to the AC 24V2 via the power switch 630a.

  The AC24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24VA. The AC24V2 output from the output side terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 through the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to the CR unit that is not connected, and AC24VA and AC24V are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[10-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and Zener diodes.

  The AC24V1 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2 2 and output respectively. The package types of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type, and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 155). ing. The heat dissipating fins HS1 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6 in addition to the rectifier circuit 630c, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. Are respectively input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified direct currents respectively output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d through the choke coil L2.

[10-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes, and inductors.

  The direct current with the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. A gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input to the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current from which the common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is controlled by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to suppress the generation of higher harmonics, the power factor is improved, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Are output respectively. Note that the package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 155). The radiating fins HS2 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[10-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The plurality of electrolytic capacitors have their negative terminals grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, respectively, and their positive terminals are input with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment) In the form, it is the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, through a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals on both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing stipulated by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) Then, DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. The power supply line supplied via the fuse FUSE3 becomes the + 35V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-5. Power generation circuit]
When the direct current from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power supply generation circuit 630f generates direct current + 12V and direct current + 5V from the input direct current. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated direct current + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the generated direct current + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the direct current + 12V from the power supply board 630. 1 is supplied to each substrate inside. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is + 5V of each board in the pachinko machine 1. Power line.

  The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor correction circuit 630d by performing control to output the power factor correction gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a power destruction circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC + 35V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  The power generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value: this embodiment) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. In this case, the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal can be output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g is in the short mode, when the power supply switch 630a is turned on, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing toward the CGND terminal of the creating circuit 630f at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 to which the GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each substrate in the pachinko machine 1.

[10-1-6. Power destruction circuit]
The power supply breakdown circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as “FET”) Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 that is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When the power destruction circuit gate signal is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and the source terminal is connected to the source terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become an overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, thereby maintaining a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive. Is done. The FET Q5 is the same package type (TO-220F described above) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4, unlike Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions where they are not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is disposed while the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 are disposed, and is not fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 155 and 156). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 through heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, the FET Q5 is short due to heat generation when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent). This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24 V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24 V, the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When inserted, the power generation circuit 630f has a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the power supply breakdown circuit gate signal is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FETQ5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conducted is maintained, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the ON operation state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 passes through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal all at once, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are melted, so that only the power supply board 630 is destroyed and the plug of the power supply cord is commercial. A which is power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. In the state where the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is destroyed, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones that are not blown, and the power cord plug is AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the game hall island facility. Even if it is inserted into the power outlet, the FET Q5 of the power destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so that the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c And power supply destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode state, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will melt again. In other words, if the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has not been destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord is connected to the island facility in the game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines, the game cannot be started.

[10-1-7. Backup power circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to the capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main power line serving as a backup power supply line from the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 is a circuit in which a wiring pattern for taking out VBB and a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 is formed. Yes.

  That is, the minus (−) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). Main VBB that serves as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310X from between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the payout control The payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 has a circuit divided into two systems: a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f (that is, the + 5V power line) is a Schottky barrier diode D20. To the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0 and supply the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a included in the main control board 1310X as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. The payout control board 633a of the payout control board 633 provides the payout control MPU 633aa with the payout control built-in RAM and stores various information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

  On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off (including when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers in the game hall), or a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. Then, the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge is provided on the main control board 1310X as the main VBB, while the Schottky barrier diode D20 prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM by being supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is held, and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  In other words, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. Then, even if the direct current + 5V from the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply line) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0, the capacitor BC0 discharges to the main control board 1310X as the main VBB. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided is held and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[10-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 of the power factor correction circuit 630d and the Schottky. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FETQ5 of the power supply breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, long Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different types of electronic components, but FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FETQ5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the only electronic components among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 that are mounted on the power supply substrate 630 and have the same shape. In order to make it easy to identify the components, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has a different characteristic from the others.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are electronic components that are not destroyed, as shown in FIG. Lines and white thick lines indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed as silk prints on the silk print TSLK1 to 4 on the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10, and on the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4. TSLK5-8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The white thick line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 155, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be disposed adjacent to each other to fix the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the white outline silk print on which the HS2 is arranged and the white thick line portions of the silk prints TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 157 (b), for the FETQ5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals within the outline are shown. Silk printing TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, with ad1 and a white thick line indicating the direction in which the electronic component is arranged as silk printing. That is, the white diagonal line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 By visually observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among TSLK1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is compared with other electronic components. The electronic component can be identified. Thereby, it is possible to very easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that is destroyed among different types of electronic components having the same shape.

  In addition, when a person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to a staff such as a game hall clerk by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search, the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can accurately grasp the position of the FETQ5, so that the person in charge of the service center and the staff of the game hall clerk and the like can easily communicate with each other. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the game hall clerk by telephone, the staff such as the game hall clerk will follow the instructions of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, it is possible to identify the FET Q5 to be noted. Therefore, the notable FET Q5 among the plurality of electronic components can be identified from the other electronic components FET Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V higher than the AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. Is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of the power supply, as described above, the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Blows out. In other words, as a trace that the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, one or both of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are destroyed. Yes. Therefore, in this embodiment, printing is performed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so that the electronic components to be destroyed among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 can be easily identified as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630. The silk printing that has different characteristics from others is adopted.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 158 (a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even if the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is white. Are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing.

  On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as evidence that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 158 (b). In this way, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are printed as silk, and the silk prints FSLK2 and 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to a power supply board 630, a support fitting (not shown) is soldered to the power supply board 630. The area ad2 can be visually observed, and the area ad2 which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is transparent inside the white outline. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color expressed as a characteristic pattern among the silk prints FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630. By visually observing the solid-coated area ad2, it is possible to identify which electronic component of the same type of electronic component having the same shape is an electronic component to be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, among the same types of electronic components having the same shape, it is very easy to determine which electronic component is an electronic component that shows a trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  In addition, when the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the phone to a staff member of a game hall clerk or the like, a solid white area shown as a characteristic pattern By instructing to search for silk-printed FSLK2,3 with ad2, the staff of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, so the person in charge at the service center and the game hall This makes it easier to communicate with staff such as store staff.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 points the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 over the telephone to the staff of the game hall, etc., the staff of the game hall, for example, As described above, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to be noted can be identified. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component among the plurality of electronic components.

[10-3. Fuse blow check]
Next, fusing confirmation of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes are disconnected, and the transparent glass tubes Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, as described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show the trace that the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will melt. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk prints FSLK 2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk prints for the fuses FUSE 1 and FUSE 2 so that the state of the fused fuse line can be easily confirmed. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 corresponds to a transparent glass tube except for both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, because the white area solidly ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. The presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wires accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube.

  Thereby, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall or an operator who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) plugs the power cord for supplying the power voltage to the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply voltage for the game machine is AC24V. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 by mistakenly inserting it into an AC100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power supply, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 Among them, the fuse wire accommodated in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks, and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into a power outlet, it cannot be turned on, so it may be an initial failure. Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green is used as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. In the present embodiment, a green resist is solidly applied to the region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. In the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid this area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is because the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is visually observed through the transparent glass tube, so that the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. The visibility of this state can be improved and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse wire can be confirmed.

  Also, in the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, the transparent state of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as when the wiring pattern is not laid out at all even when the wiring pattern is completely laid out. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved by making the solid green tube region corresponding to the transparent glass tube visible through the transparent glass tube. Thus, it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

  As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected to the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 115, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1 and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function as a means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function as a means for relaying various signals. The interface board 635 has a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), B-type fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). The silk printing shown in FIG. 158 (a) for the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 is printed on the mounting surface. The area of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with green resist. In the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), no wiring pattern is laid out (that is, the solid coating corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region). This is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE by visually observing the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) through the transparent glass tube. The visibility of the state of the fuse wire is improved, and it can be confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is broken. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be provided on one of the AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided on both. You can also.

  Also, in the solid green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even when the wiring pattern is completely laid out, it is not shown in the same manner as when the wiring pattern is not laid out at all. The state of the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is made by visually observing the region of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE through the transparent glass tube. Visibility can be improved and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

[10-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with a power line (that is, a + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. Line), DC + 5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 via Schottky barrier diode D20, so that charging can be performed, while pachinko machine 1 is powered off (breaker of game hall) Including turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once.) When a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power generation circuit 630f In response to the fact that + 5V DC is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned off all at once by turning off the breakers of the game hall), a power failure or the like. In a state where a momentary power failure has occurred, a backup power source is supplied as the main VBB to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained. In addition, as the payout VBB, the backup power supply is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, thereby holding various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is like that.

  When the game hall is closed, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall turns off the breakers of the game hall to simultaneously shut off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. When the next business operation is started (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a staff member such as a game hall clerk will be in charge of the game hall breaker. By turning on the power, the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are turned on all at once. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharge of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business operation of the game hall to the start of the next business operation, thereby providing the main control board 1310X. Various information in the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa included in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. As a result, when starting sales, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the game hall breaker to turn on the pachinko machines installed in the game hall all at once, and the RAM clear switch Regardless of whether or not it has been operated, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on process and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification to notify that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines will sound in the game hall. In this case, in all pachinko machines, the payout control MPU provided on the payout control board determines the checksum (sum value) error of the payout control built-in RAM during the power-on process, and the contents of the payout control built-in RAM are completely displayed. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not executed even when the business of the game hall is ended and the next business is started. Specifically, as the capacity of the capacitor BC0, to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the game hall is closed. Various information that is supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held, and is also supplied as a payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. A capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM is selected. This capacity is selected based on the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X. In comparison with the power consumption of the payment VBB supplied to the power supply, there is a case where the power consumption may be about 10 times larger. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Compared to the power consumption.

[10-5. Discontinued electronic component measures]
Next, countermeasures for discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for a board to be treated as a main board such as a power supply board, a main control board, and a payout control board, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, It is necessary to solder with the soldering surface which is the side. However, while lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of pachinko machines, slots, fusion gaming machines, and other gaming machines, other general electrical equipment manufacturers are able to reduce the size of the surface-mount type ( The so-called SMD type) is used. For this reason, the production may be stopped due to a decrease in the number of lead-type electronic components produced. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued, and there is a high probability that other electronic component manufacturers will also discontinue manufacturing. The lead-type electronic component is used with a time limit, and it becomes difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a lead-type electronic component capable of configuring an SMD-type electronic component as a lead-type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 159 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 has positions on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a corresponding to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb that are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged, and the SMD land pattern D20da is formed. , D20db and lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb are electrically connected to wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are disposed and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb which are terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode side D20ca, the cathode side D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da, D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea, D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by wrapping with epoxy resin to form an electronic component body D20h that covers one end of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and leads D20ea and D20eb, The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. A symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or back surface of the electronic component body D20h, as shown in FIG. Further, although not shown, the name of the manufacturer of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  In this way, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even if it becomes difficult to obtain due to the discontinuation of production due to a decrease in the number of lead type electronic components produced, This can be dealt with by using SMD type electronic components used by electrical manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can also be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Alternatively, a plurality of identical SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array to form a lead-type electronic component.

  Next, commercial power supply voltage countermeasures are taken when the plug of the power cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (AC100V). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 160 shows a configuration for measures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 160, members having the same functions as those in the embodiment shown in FIG. 154 (hereinafter, described as “commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Contrast between the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the power destruction circuit 630g is composed of the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power destruction from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 is activated and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are excessively connected). As a result, the FET Q5 is destroyed, so that a short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 are conductive is maintained.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, which is a common mode noise countermeasure circuit, and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit. The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC and the choke coil L1 are configured. The output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. Yes.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, AC24V1 and AC24V2 in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, in addition to the diode D5. The signal is input to the anode terminal of D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the AC-DET terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, as described above, when AC24V from the game hall island facility is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown), the fuse FUSE1. , FUSE2 to input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a. For the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. It is printed on the surface. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, respectively. However, in the region between the white outline inside and the periphery of the support bracket, white is provided. The solid area ad2 can be visually observed, and is an area inside the white outline, which is a solid white area corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. ad2 can be reliably visually observed through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, AC24V from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input side terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a as it is. Is done. For the fuse FUSE1, as described above, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solid white are printed as silk, and the silk print FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the white area solid ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630. However, the white region is filled with white in the region between the inner side of the white outline and the periphery of the support bracket. The region ad2 that has been solid-colored in white corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1 is transparent. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility in the game hall omits the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, the AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is connected to both the power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side (fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2). This is because no problem occurred even if one side (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in the test conducted by the applicant. Thereby, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, one side of AC24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost is reduced by inputting the data as it is.

  Further, the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment employs the same power switch 630a as the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure configuration according to the first embodiment. This will be briefly described because the power switch 630a needs to be surely disconnected / connected on both the L side and the N side of the AC 24V from the island equipment of the game hall. As a result, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both L side and N side can be disconnected / connected simultaneously.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the N side (AC24V2) of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall and the input side terminal 1 of the power switch 630a In between, it is electrically connected to one of the microgap type arresters AL1. The other of the microgap arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The microgap type arrester AL1 surges when a high voltage (referred to as “surge voltage”) enters the AC 24V from the island equipment in the game hall due to lightning, and surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing it as a current so that no surge voltage is applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning the power switch 630a ON / OFF is applied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing the frame ground FG2 as a surge current so that the surge voltage is not applied to the power switch 630a. In addition, the microgap type arrester AL1 is used by an operator when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. And the ground connection terminal in the island facility of the game hall are electrically connected to the ground connection terminal via the island facility ground wire, as a security, electromagnetic noise is transmitted from the island facility of the game hall to the N side of AC24V (AC24V2 ), The noise resistance can be increased.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against common mode noise, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasure against normal mode noise, and a choke coil In addition to L1, a surge absorber SA1 that constitutes a power destruction circuit 630g ′, the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, power destruction circuit 630g ′ and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has a faster reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end of which is electrically connected to the L side of AC24V (AC24V1) via the power switch 630a, and the other end is connected to the N side (24V AC24 via the power switch 630a). When a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and is destroyed, and a short circuit is established.

  A varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, but here, a silicon surge absorber (also referred to as a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used. The silicon surge absorber can absorb a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes the avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a silicon pn junction. This silicon surge absorber has features such that the response to a surge is very fast, the control voltage characteristics are very good, and the leakage current is very small. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47V, which is about twice the input voltage, may be selected.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is electrically connected to the second (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to one end. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor correction circuit 630d. The four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to the ground (GND), and the first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. Thereby, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1. The thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. As its characteristics, when the vertical axis indicates the allowable capacitor capacity and the horizontal axis indicates the AC voltage, the value of the AC voltage increases. Thus, a capacitor that has a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor capacity becomes small and is not destroyed even when AC 100 V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, is applied is selected.

  The direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power supply generation circuit 630f, and input to the relay drive circuit 630i. When the direct current from smoothing circuit 630e is input, relay drive circuit 630 creates an operating voltage (+ 24V) that can operate the coil of relay RL1, and supplies it to the first terminal of relay RL1.

  The rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is caused by a shortage of power from the relay drive circuit 630i when the power switch 630a is turned on (relay drive circuit 630i). Relay RL1 cannot be turned on because the coil of relay RL1 is not operating due to insufficient power supply from + 630V from 630i (that is, relay RL1 remains off). The relay RL1 is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 while the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are in a non-conductive state. The As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c flows toward only the thermistor TH1, and at the time when the direct current begins to flow to the thermistor TH1, the resistance value However, when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly, and the subsequent value of the thermistor TH1 is reduced. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned ON and the coil of the relay RL1 is switched from the non-operating state to the operating state by the electric power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by the power supply by + 24V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 Is turned on, the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are respectively supplied. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is diverted between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts) of the relay RL1 and passes to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is between the terminals of the second (COM) and third terminals of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases and the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, and the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type whose resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c is the thermistor. When flowing through TH1, the current to the subsequent load of the thermistor TH1 increases as the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. If this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the game hall, and the power supply of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for gaming machines. If the thermistor TH1 rises in temperature when it is mistakenly inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 will greatly exceed the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) and surge will occur due to a large current flowing through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed and the short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is turned on, a large current flows to the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short circuit mode in the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned on. Fusing will occur. In addition, when the fuse FUSE1 is melted while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, the surge absorber SA1 is scattered and the surge absorber SA1 does not continue to flow a large current through the surge absorber SA1. It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the plug of the power supply cord is accidentally inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be surely prevented.

  In the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Since it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the circuit configuration is not complicated.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall, and is accidentally inserted into the power outlet of AC100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC24V, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ is destroyed, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with an unfused one, and the power cord plug is replaced with the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility of the gaming hall Since the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power destruction circuit 630g ′ has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained even if it is plugged into the AC 24V power outlet, the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and the fuse FUSE1 is restored. So that the blown. That is, unless the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is already destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g ′ is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into a power outlet of AC24V, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines in the island facilities of the gaming hall, the game cannot be started.

  In the above-described embodiment, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, and the power breakdown circuit 630g are provided on one board called the power supply board 630. Although various electronic components and the like have been provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuits of the second power supply substrate 630B include the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. The fuse FUSE3 and the wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, the input is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, the output is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power supply generation circuit 630f. It will be. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Further, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 160 can be divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the microgap type arrester AL1, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. Connector A is mainly configured, and the circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, a relay drive circuit 630i, a relay RL1, as shown in FIG. The thermistor TH1, choke coil L2, fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B are mainly configured. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via the power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output side terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a in the first power supply board 630A are wired in the second power supply board 630B via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Various DC voltages, such as DC + 35V, DC + 12V, DC + 5V, etc., created in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 excluding the first power supply board 630A. The

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the drive power supply lines (for example, the + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or the + 12V power supply line from the power supply board 630) to various drive motors included in the various presentation units of the game board 5 are various. In a board (for example, the panel drive board 1720 shown in FIG. 153 (a) and the relay board 3151a shown in FIG. 153 (b)) to which wiring from the drive motor is directly connected, a fuse (chip fuse may be used). ) Or a resettable fuse or a polyswitch may be provided, or a power supply board 630 supplied as a drive power supply line (for example, a + 35V power supply line from the power supply board 630 or a power supply board 630) + 12V power line) and fuse (may be chip fuse) or reset It may be provided polyswitches as Fuses.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine having power supply means capable of creating various power sources necessary for a gaming device based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2014-008221). When the person in charge at the service center of the manufacturer of the gaming machine indicates a specific part of the power supply means over the phone to a person in charge of the shop clerk or the like of the game hall, according to the instruction from the person in charge at the service center. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to identify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including power supply means for generating various power supplies based on the power supply from the amusement island equipment and supplying them to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The amusement island facility converts commercial AC power (AC 100 V) to gaming AC power (AC 24 V) that has been stepped down. However, when the power cord for supplying power from the island facility to the gaming machine is plugged into the commercial AC power outlet instead of the gaming AC power outlet, the commercial AC power is supplied from the gaming AC power outlet. Since it has a high voltage, an abnormal power supply is output from the power supply means, and various boards inside the gaming machine may be destroyed.

[11. Main control board circuit, withdrawal control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 162. 161 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 162 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control board, and FIG. 163 is a perspective view explaining an outline of wiring to the board treated as the main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the main control board 1310X will be described, and the power supply and input signal in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[11-1. Power supply and input signal in main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310X, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with + 5V direct current from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is also supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied as the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 161, DC + 5V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, a direct current + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The DC + 5V from which the noise component is removed is output from the third terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Is removed and smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected to each other to further smooth the ripple. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the game hall is interrupted, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. Thereby, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310X, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, and a detection signal from the first entrance sensor 2406 Detection signal, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from out port left sensor 1008a, detection signal from out port right sensor 1008b, etc. The detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the substrate 1710 without passing through the panel relay substrate 1710. , Input to the main control input circuit 1310b, and the door frame opening switch 4 And the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b are sent via the payout control board 633 (as is, without going through the payout control input circuit 633ab and the payout control output circuit 633ac). The signal from the setting switch 1311a and the signal from the setting switch button 1311b are respectively input from the setting change board 1310Y to the main control input circuit 1310b.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the first receiving sensor 2406 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. This empty input terminal PA7 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) as a free terminal process.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first start port sensor 3002 includes two sensors (double sensors), that is, the first start port sensor main side 3002a and the first start port sensor slave side 3002b. Yes. The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the first start port sensor The detection signal from the slave 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected). The detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first start port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Further, although a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is not shown, it is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are respectively input to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. Input terminals that are respectively input to predetermined input terminals and become empty terminals are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, like the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

  Also, a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a detection signal from the out port left sensor 1008a, a detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b, a signal from the setting switch 1311a, and Although not shown, signals from the setting switch button 1311b are respectively input to predetermined input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

[11-2. Power supply and input signal in payout control board circuit]
Among the power sources in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power source of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with + 5V direct current from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, and is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied as a payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

  As shown in FIG. 162, DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, a direct current + 5V from the power generation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply substrate 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The DC + 5V from which the noise component is removed is output from the third terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). ) Is removed and smoothed.

  DC + 5V output from the third terminal is the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected to each other to further smooth the ripple. The smoothed direct current + 5V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, when an instantaneous interruption occurs and the power from the game hall is cut off, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is changed after the instantaneous interruption occurs. It is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310X is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Therefore, the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310X (capacitance: 470 microfarad (μF) in this embodiment) is the capacity of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, the larger one is selected as compared with the capacitance: 180 microfarad (μF). As a result, the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310X and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V over a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the instantaneous power failure.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. ing. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 that is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0. As a result, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591. The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310X are respectively input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  Detection signal from full tank detection sensor 154, detection signal from ball cutting detection sensor 194, detection signal from blade rotation detection sensor 590, detection signal from payout detection sensor 591, RAM clear signal from main control board 1310X, error The error release signals from the release switch 633d are respectively input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are vacant terminals. These empty terminals, input terminals PA6 and PA7, are electrically connected to the ground (GND) as empty terminal processing.

  The power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310X is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB (not shown) via the payout control input circuit 633ab, and detection signals from other sensors are also received. The input terminals that are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become empty terminals are grounded as empty terminal processing as in the case of the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA. GND).

[11-3. Wiring to the board treated as the main board]
Examples of the substrate handled as the main substrate include a power supply substrate 630, a main control substrate 1310X, a payout control substrate 633, and the like. If a fraudulent act that illegally modifies the wiring to the board treated as the main board is performed, a large amount of game balls are paid out as prize balls, anxious about the operation of the board treated as the main board, and illegal game balls are illegal Since there is a possibility of being acquired by an actor, when the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to discover the modified wiring at an early stage.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 163 (a), the wiring to the power supply board 630 has a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG has a manufacturer name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers on the covering portion of each wiring connected to ()). Specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from the first pin to the 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturing company name: XXX as the illegal identifier SLAB on the coating portion of the wiring SCBL2, and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog). Is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the power supply substrate 630 is at least the covering portion of the wiring so that the manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white and has a color (e.g., black) that is easy to visually recognize the color of the covering portion, and the manufacturer name: XXX, and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray), or a plurality (For example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easy to see with respect to the color of the covering (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), The manufacturer name: XXX, and the product number: ABC123 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier SLAB.

  As for the wiring to the main control board 1310X, as shown in FIG. 163 (b), it is connected to the connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has the manufacturer name and product number (the number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY as an unauthorized identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturer ID: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier MLAB on the cover of the wiring MCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310X is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. The illegal identifier MLAB has a length that is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, black) as an unauthorized identifier MLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray) Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As shown in FIG. 163 (b), the wiring to the payout control board 633 is connected to a connector HHG (not shown, but the connector HHG has a manufacturer name and product number (a number listed in the catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as illegal identifiers. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from the first pin to the 30th pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And product number: DEFXYZ-1 (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has a manufacturing company name: YYYYY and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) as an illegal identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2. Number) is printed repeatedly. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 is at least wiring so that the manufacturer's name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB in the covering portion of the wiring The illegal identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice on the covering portion.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is easily visible (for example, black) with respect to the color of the covering portion as an illegal identifier HLAB, manufacturing company name: YYYYY, and product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the coating portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be other colors different from white (for example, red or gray) Alternatively, a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and colors that are easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) The manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the illegal identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is tampered with, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to early detection of a modified wiring. Note that wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in the catalog as wiring to the substrate treated as the main substrate.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second start port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 provided in the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via a connector (not shown). Direct electrical connection to 1310X. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 is provided in the game board 5. A gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, a big prize port sensor 2403 that detects a game ball B received in the big prize port 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general prize provided in the game board 5 A general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2001, a first entrance sensor 2406 for detecting the game ball B received in the first entrance 2006 provided in the game board 5, and the game board 5 Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first start port 2002 provided are connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated are electrically connected in Le relay board 1710 via one connector, it is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 are erroneously connected to the main control board 1310X. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002, one is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portions of each wire are wired as illegal identifiers. The manufacturer's name and product number (numbers listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed. As the colors of the covering portions of the two wirings from the second starter sensor 2402, one is white and the other is black, and each wiring covering portion has a wiring manufacturer name and product number as a fraudulent identifier. Number printed on each page) is printed repeatedly. As a result, the manufacturer can identify the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 at the manufacturer. In addition, in the game hall, a staff member of the game hall, such as a store clerk, identifies the two wires from the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 respectively. Can be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X. And a connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X. As a result, the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 correspond to themselves. Since it can be a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the operator of the line is the first start port sensor main side constituting the first start port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, it is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 3002a and the two wirings from the second starter sensor 2402. In the case of checking the presence or absence of fraud, a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original position, the first start port sensor 3002 It is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion) between the two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 to be configured. be able to.

  In the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 2001, but a plurality of general winning port sensors are individually or divided into a plurality of groups with respect to these general winning ports 2001. It can also be configured to use. In this case, connectors having the same shape are selected as the connectors for electrically connecting the two wirings from the general winning opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710. Although there are a plurality of general winning ports 2001, no matter which general winning port 2001 a game ball enters, only a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a winning ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in performance. In addition, even if the configuration in which the two wirings from the general prize opening sensor are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310X without using the panel relay board 1710 is adopted, The connectors that electrically connect the two wires to the main control board 1310X are selected to have the same shape. As described above, although there are a plurality of general winning openings 2001, no matter which general winning opening 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as winning balls. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change in performance.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, so that the lower substrate holder 1200. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 configured by two sensors (double sensors), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) To detect and notify illegal acts caused by radio wave irradiation in a fraud detection process in the main control side timer interruption process described later, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall can detect the radio wave irradiation at an early stage. Can contribute to being discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is first detected by the second start port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second start port sensor slave side. After being detected by the second starter sensor slave side 2402b by passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Further, the detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second start start sensor The detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first start port sensor slave side 3002b that constitutes one start port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and a grand prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general prize opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and a first reception provided in the game board 5. A first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the entrance 2006, and a magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are detected. Two wirings from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and aggregated through respective connectors and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X through one connector. ing.

  Further, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second start port sensor slave side is connected. A connector having a pitch of 2.0 mm is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay substrate 1710. As a result, the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturer, the line operator can connect the two wires from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b and the second starter sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. In addition to being able to reliably prevent work mistakes (wiring mistakes of incorrect insertion) between the two wires from 2402b, a staff member such as a store clerk at the game hall can check whether there is any fraud. When confirming, in the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning openings 2001. However, the general winning opening sensors may be separately used for the general winning openings 2001. it can. In this case, the shape of the connector that electrically connects each of the two wires from the general prize opening sensor to the panel relay board 1710 may be selected to be different. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game or the change in performance as the balls enter each general winning opening 2001, the shapes of the two wiring connectors from the respective general winning opening sensors 3001 are made different from each other. May be. In this way, since it can be a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself, in the manufacturer, In the manufacturing process, the line operator can surely prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called incorrect insertion) of the two wirings from each general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 and in the game hall. In the case of a staff member such as a game hall clerk confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed and restored by maintenance, an error in each of the two wirings from each of the general prize port sensors 3001 is detected. Wiring mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented. In addition, when adopting a configuration in which each of the two wires from each of the general prize opening sensors 3001 is directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310X without using the panel relay board 1710, the shape of the connector is used. Different ones are selected. As described above, this can be a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each of the general prize opening sensors 3001 can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. In the manufacturer, the line operator can reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall confirms the presence of fraud, temporarily removes the wiring by maintenance, and returns it to the original position. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2401, but, like the first start port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2401 a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2401 b May be composed of two sensors (double sensors) that are arranged in a state of being separated by at least the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, by adopting the gate sensor 2401 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor slave side 2401b, the gate unit 2003 The game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) To detect and notify illegal acts caused by radio wave irradiation in a fraud detection process in the main control side timer interruption process described later, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall can detect the radio wave irradiation at an early stage. Can contribute to being discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2401a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2401a, and then detected by the gate sensor secondary side 2401b by passing through the gate sensor secondary side 2401b. Will be. The detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). Have been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor sub side 2401b is the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to the input terminal PC0 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2401b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X through the same panel relay board 1710. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a to the panel relay board 1710, and two from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the wiring to the panel relay board 1710. Thus, the physical structure in which the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2401b can be electrically connected to the one corresponding to itself. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator makes a mistake in wiring between the two wires from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2401b in the manufacturing process. In the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as store staff, can temporarily remove the wiring during maintenance when checking for the presence of fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, there is an error between the two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2401a and the two wirings from the gate sensor subordinate side 2401b. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a 2.5 mm pitch is provided as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the second start port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310X. The four wires, which are the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, one connector constituted by these four wires may be configured to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310X, and 2 from the second start port sensor 2402 Since the connector that electrically connects the two wirings to the main control board 1310X can be made as a single connector composed of four wirings without being separated, the manufacturer can In the manufacturing process, the line operator has two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor 2402. In addition, it is possible to reliably prevent mis-wiring work mistakes (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). When confirming, in the case of temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to the original state, two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are used. Thus, it is possible to reliably prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of erroneous wiring between the two wirings.

  Further, this embodiment is adopted, and the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is detected by the second start port sensor 2402, and then sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100, so that the lower substrate holder 1200 is placed. However, like the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are arranged in a state separated by at least a false detection prevention distance dimension. You may be comprised from two sensors (double sensor). In this way, similarly to the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2402 configured by two sensors (double sensors), the second start port sensor main side 2402a and the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. By adopting, it is possible to reliably detect the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004. It should be noted that an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as it or a synthetic resin ball having approximately the same diameter as it) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) is attached. ) To detect and notify illegal acts caused by radio wave irradiation in a fraud detection process in the main control side timer interruption process described later, so that a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall can detect the radio wave irradiation at an early stage. Can contribute to being discovered.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is first detected by the second start port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second start port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second start port sensor slave side. After being detected by the second starter sensor slave side 2402b by passing through 2402b, it is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Also, two wires from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second start port sensor main side 2402a constituting the second start port sensor 2402 Are configured as one connector, and one connector composed of the four wirings is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X. The detection signal from the second starter sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X (that is, directly connected electrically), whereas the second starter sensor The detection signal from the slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly connected electrically). A detection signal from the second start port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and a detection signal from the second start port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  This panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 as described above, in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first start port sensor slave side 3002b that constitutes one start port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B that has passed through a gate portion 2003 provided in the game board 5, and a grand prize opening 2005 provided in the game board 5 A big prize opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general prize opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and a first reception provided in the game board 5. A first receiving port sensor 2406 that detects the game ball B received in the entrance 2006, and a magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are detected. Two wirings from various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3003 are electrically connected and aggregated through respective connectors and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X through one connector. ing.

  Further, by adopting this mode, the detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b are connected to the main control board 1310X via the same panel relay board 1710. Since the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are combined, four wires are combined. The connector may be configured as one connector, and one connector including the four wires may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this way, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second start port sensor 2402 are configured. Physically forming a connector that electrically connects the two wires from the second starter sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 and a single connector constituted by four wires without being separately provided. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line has two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b. It is possible to reliably prevent mistakes in wiring between the book and wiring (wiring mistakes that are mistakenly inserted). When confirming the presence or absence of fraud, when removing the wiring temporarily for maintenance and returning it to the original state, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of erroneous wiring of these two wirings.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of general winning ports 2001. However, the general winning port sensors may be separately used for the general winning ports 2001. it can. In this case, each of the two wires from the general prize opening sensor can be configured as one connector (single connector) as a connector for electrically connecting to the panel relay board 1710. For example, in the case of contributing to the progress of the game or the change in performance as a result of entering the general winning a prize port 2001, one wiring obtained by combining the two wirings from each general winning award port sensor 3001 into one. It may be configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector configured by wiring integrated into one connector may be electrically connected to the panel relay substrate 1710. By doing so, it is possible to have a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from each general winning a prize opening sensor 3001 is not a separate existence but a single connector composed of a single wiring. In the manufacturer, the line operator can surely prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from each general winning opening sensor 3001 in the manufacturing process. At the same time, in the game hall, a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall confirms whether there is fraud, or temporarily removes the wiring for maintenance and restores it to the original position. It is possible to surely prevent an operation mistake (wiring mistake called insertion mistake) such as miswiring of books. In addition, the wiring integrated into one is configured as one connector (single connector), and one connector configured from the wiring integrated into one is directly connected to the main control board without the panel relay board 1710. A configuration of electrically connecting to 1310X may be employed. Even if configured in this way, as described above, the physical form of one connector configured by combining the two wirings from each of the general winning a prize opening sensors 3001 into one without being separately present. Therefore, in the manufacturer, the line operator can make a mistake in wiring of the two wires from each of the general prize port sensors 3001 in the manufacturing process (wiring mistake of incorrect insertion). ) Can be surely prevented, and in the game hall, the staff of the game hall, such as a store clerk, confirms whether there is any fraud, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance, It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring mistake called insertion error) of incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the winning prize sensor 3001.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which various entrances are provided in the advantageous area of the game board, and each sensor (detection means) for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in each entrance ( For example, JP, 2006-154676, A (paragraph [0014]-paragraph [0016], Drawing 2-Drawing 4)). However, if the wiring from the detecting means that passes through the entrance with similar application is mistakenly electrically connected, there is no problem with the electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the entrance detection signal is received incorrectly. Will affect the progress of the game. However, since the applications are particularly similar, there is a problem that in some cases, there is a possibility that an erroneous connection may not be noticed immediately.

[12. Each decorative board for the door frame]
Next, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 164 to 168. FIG. 164 is a block diagram for explaining the electrical connection of each decorative board provided in the door frame, FIG. 165 is a block diagram showing an example of the decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board | substrate provided with two constant current drive circuits, FIG. 167 is a schematic diagram of the arrangement | positioning method of LED constant current drive circuit, FIG. 168 is from LED non-mounting surface in the D section of FIG. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub-relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board provided with the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current A method for arranging the drive circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a so that the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, A side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, a door frame right side decoration body 419, and a door frame top decoration body 453 are disposed, and the dish upper left decoration body 271, dish upper right decoration body 276, and dish A dish lower left decorative body 281, a dish lower right decorative body 286, and a dish center lower decorative body 312 b are respectively disposed below the center upper decorative body 312 a.

  The dish upper left decorative body 271 is provided with a dish upper left decorative board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a plurality of dish upper left decorative boards 271 are mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 is provided with a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a plurality of the dish upper right decorative body 276 are mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (five in this embodiment). The dish center upper decorative body 312a has a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 314 are decorated for light emission.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending up and down along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a is mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. 5 and 10 on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). The side window decoration portions 410b are arranged in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window decoration members 412 and are formed on the rear side in the form of elongated strips extending vertically along the side window decoration members 412. The interior decoration part decoration board 413 in a window is arrange | positioned and light emission decoration is carried out by full color LED (this embodiment 12 pieces) mounted in the side window interior decoration part decoration board 413. FIG. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed at the rear thereof in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. A full-color LED (in this embodiment, the right side upper decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the right side lower decorative substrate 418b. 4 and 10 on the right side lower decorative board 418b).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 has a door frame top central decorative substrate 455 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is disposed, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. Further, a door frame top right decorative substrate 457 formed in the shape of an elongated strip is disposed and mounted on the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (11 in the present embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative substrate 457) It is.

  The dish lower left decorative body 281 is provided with a dish lower left decorative board 283 formed in an elongated strip shape extending in the left and right directions along the dish lower left decorative body 281, and a plurality of dishes are mounted on the dish lower left decorative board 283. Are illuminated and decorated with full-color LEDs (six in this embodiment). The dish lower right decorative body 286 is provided with a dish lower right decorative board 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. A plurality of full color LEDs (six in this embodiment) are mounted on the light. The dish center lower decorative body 312b has a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative body 312b. A plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on 316 are decorated for light emission.

  In addition, the production operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided in the dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the production operation ring decoration board 352 formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, as described above. The production operation ring decoration board 352 includes a front decoration board 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear decoration board 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semicircular arc shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the front decorative board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the rear decorative board 352b ( In this embodiment, the light emission is decorated by 9).

  Thus, each decoration board with which the door frame 3 is provided is formed in the shape of an elongate strip. Thereby, by increasing the vertical and horizontal distance dimensions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, etc. can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, and the like can also be provided.

[12-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub-relay board]
The dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the left side upper decorative board 402a, the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the side, which are arranged in various decorative bodies and decorative parts provided in the door frame 3. Window interior decoration part decoration board 413, right side upper decoration board 418a, right side lower decoration board 418b, door frame top center decoration board 455, door frame top left decoration board 456, door frame top right decoration board 457, dish left bottom decoration board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, a dish center lower decorative board 316, a front decorative board 352a, a rear decorative board 352b, and other door frame side decorative boards, and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1 which are serially output from the door frame side, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2 which are the door frame side second serial system are respectively input independently. Yes. Further, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 shown in FIG. 154 via the interface board 635 and DC + 12V is inputted, and the ground ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

[12-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are relayed to the dish unit 200 shown in FIG. In addition to being input to the substrate 214, it is input to the handle decoration substrate 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish unit relay board 214 are a dish lower left decorative board 283, a dish lower right decorative board 288, And it is each input to the operation part relay board | substrate 392 of the production | presentation operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283, are input to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively. That is, the dish lower left decorative board 283 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish left upper decorative board 273, so The decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273 are in a state where they are electrically connected to each other. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board, respectively. Input connector is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper left decorative board 273, respectively (not shown) An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative board 273 is electrically connected to the lower left decorative board 283 (that is, the latter left stage and the final stage of the lower left decorative board 283). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is output. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 are input to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. That is, the dish lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the dish upper right decorative board 278. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input to the dish lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board, respectively. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. An output connector is provided. In contrast, the dish upper right decorative board 278 electrically connected to the dish lower right decorative board 288 (that is, the latter stage and the last stage of the dish lower right decorative board 288) includes a dish lower right decorative board. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively output from the output connector (not shown) 288 is provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the production operation unit 300 are the upper decorative board 314, the dish center They are respectively input to the lower central decorative board 316 and the front decorative board 352a of the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are respectively input to the rear decorative board 352b. That is, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the back decoration board 352b are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The front decorative board 352a serving as a bridging board includes a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300, respectively. An input connector (not shown) to be input is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decorative board 352b, respectively. An output connector (not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decoration board 352a is connected to the front decoration board 352a electrically connected to the front decoration board 352a (that is, a rear stage and the last stage of the front decoration board 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input is provided.

  Here, for example, the dish frame lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. Then, the dish lower left decoration board 283 is provided with LED constant current drive circuit 283a, heat distribution circuit 283c, and sdLED1-sdLED6 which are six full color LEDs. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current that flows to sdLED1 to sdLED6. Circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish unit relay board 214. Since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 283c, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed.

  Further, for example, a description will be briefly given of the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the lower left decorative board 283. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current driving circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (suction) type constant current driving circuit 273x capable of flowing a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y capable of setting a maximum current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x performs control to flow a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the dish lower left decorative board 283. Since the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 273x can be distributed.

[12-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. In addition to the input to the substrate 402b, the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the right side lower decoration substrate 418b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top central decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative board 457 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative board 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. An input connector (not shown) for inputting (GND) is provided, and the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are arranged at the center of the door frame top. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative substrate 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). There are provided input connectors (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are respectively input, which are respectively output from the output connectors that are not connected. In addition, an output connector (not shown) is provided for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative board 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative board 456, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are electrically connected in a rosary manner. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 (that is, the rear stage and the final stage of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455) includes a door. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only a connector is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is input. The left side lower decorative board 402b will be briefly described. The left side lower decorative board 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish left upper decorative board 273, and allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Take control.

  The LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current driving circuit 273a of the dish upper left decorative board 273, and the hdLED 9, A sink (suction) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx capable of flowing a constant current to the hdLED 10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a, the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the left It is mainly composed of a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the huLED1 to huLED5 of the side upper decorative substrate 402a. Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted on the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which it is mounted. Control is performed so that a constant current flows through the hdLED 9, the hdLED 10, and the huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the huLED1 to huLED8. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the hdLED9, the hdLED10, and the huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is handled by the heat distribution circuit 402bc, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed. Further, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decoration board 402a. ing.

  In this way, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be distributed only by the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (left side lower decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the substrate on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the left side lower decorative substrate 402b). Heat generation from the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left side decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to flow a constant current through the huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate (left side lower decorative substrate 402b) on which it is mounted. Has been. For this reason, the operation | work which electrically connects between the board | substrate of the left side lower decoration board | substrate 402b and the left side upper decoration board | substrate 402a is necessarily accompanied. The worker who performs this work is the finger of the connector of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the connector of the left side upper decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b, or the heat of the left side upper decorative board 402a. In order to touch the dispersion circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left side upper decorative substrate 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative substrate 402a have the function of distributing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent damage to electronic components due to.

  In addition, as described above, the upper left side decorative board 402a is supplied with + 12V DC and ground (GND) from the lower left side decorative board 402b, and is fixed to five full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Each line through which current flows is input. As described above, the left side upper decorative substrate 402a includes a heat distribution circuit 402ac in addition to the huLED1 to huLED5 which are five full-color LEDs. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of distributing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

[12-1-3. Flash data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating the light emission mode. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits included in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

[12-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In this embodiment, since the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decoration board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided in the dish lower left decoration board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit 283a sets a sink (suction) type constant current driving circuit 283x that can flow a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 and a maximum current that flows to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. The maximum current setting circuit 283y capable of generating

[12-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels and can output current for each channel. In the present embodiment, the output channel LR is configured for an LED element that emits red (R), an LED element that emits green (G), and an LED element that emits blue (B). , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. Can be done.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current drive unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[12-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of generating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V in the present embodiment) to be used in the constant current drive circuit 283x when DC + 12V from the + 12V power supply line is input. The internal power supply Vreg created by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. The internal power supply Verg supplies the reset unit 283xb, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Is able to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 154, and independently creates + DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Yes. This is because if the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power supply line is used by routing the electrical wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power supply line for supplying DC + 5V becomes longer and noise is generated. It becomes easy to invade. Then, when external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and + 5V DC is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED flickers due to the influence of the external noise. Therefore, in this embodiment, by eliminating the need for the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the noise resistance is extremely high compared to the + 5V power supply line, and the + 12V power supply line has a constant current drive circuit 283x. The linear power supply 283xa employs a configuration in which DC +5 V is uniquely created as the internal power supply Vreg.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only from the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. Thereby, stabilization of internal power supply Vreg can contribute to prevention of flickering of sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs due to external noise. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. In addition, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not necessary, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb creates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the internal reset signal RST to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. A so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current drive unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are started.

  For example, the constant current drive circuit 283x does not receive the reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 146, and independently creates the reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. Yes. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line is used by routing electrical wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes long, and noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, the constant current drive circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently creates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current drive circuit 283x. By using it, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. As a result, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turn-off and flickering of LED elements constituting full-color LEDs corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise. Further, the input electrical wiring and the external transmission electrical wiring for the reset signal transmission line are not required, which can contribute to the miniaturization of the connector.

[12-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc transmits serial data (herein, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter referred to as “data line”). Is a circuit that can shape the waveform of a signal that transmits serial data and output the serial data to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd is a line for transmitting a clock signal from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) (hereinafter referred to as “clock line”). Is a circuit that can shape the clock signal and output it to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of the data line and the clock line are both increased, and noise easily enters. Therefore, in this embodiment, the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd are provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x. The logic line is shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd so as not to be transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. Thereby, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it can be made strong against external noise.

[12-2-1d. Address setting section]
Based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, the address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify the individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x by three ID resistors (not shown). Be able to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, an ID that can identify an individual constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). However, it is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[12-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg includes serial data from the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x shaped in the data line buffer 283xc (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) and the clock line buffer 283xd. A clock signal from the outside of the shaped constant current drive circuit 283x (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) based on the address that is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation level in the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so as to become the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, if the ID information of the serial data (the light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in this serial data is not captured and is set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current contents.

[12-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can perform gradation control of the brightness (gradation degree) of the LED in each output channel in a total of 128 steps from gradation zero (zero) to gradation degree 127 from turning off to lighting (maximum luminance). Therefore, gradation control is performed for one output channel by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown). That is, the PWM unit 283xh includes the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 individually (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When these gradation levels are set, the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 control the constant current driving unit 283xi so as to flow a current having the set gradation level.

[12-2-1 g. Constant current drive unit]
The constant current drive unit 283xi includes one constant (not shown) for one output channel so as to have the gradation set in the PWM gradation control unit 1 to the PWM gradation control unit 24 included in the PWM unit 283xh. A constant current is passed through the LED elements constituting the full color LED by a current driver. That is, the constant current driving unit 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to constant current drivers 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation control units 1 to PWM gradation control unit 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 have one end of a resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LR1 to LR8. The resistor Rr is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 have one end of a resistor Rg that sets the maximum current that flows through the green (G) LED elements that constitute the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Each of the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 has one end of a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows to the blue (B) LED element that constitutes the full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8. The resistor Rb is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED element anode terminal, and the blue (B) LED element constituting full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 24. The anode terminal is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and receives DC + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current driver) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 1 to the constant current driver 8) are electrically connected to each other so that the constant current flowing through the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 side, respectively. It has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current driver via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors). 9 to the constant current driver 16), and the constant current flowing through the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat distribution resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), and the constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the red (R) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, thereby red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively absorb the constant currents flowing in the green (G) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 suck the constant currents flowing in the blue (B) LED elements constituting the individually set full color LEDs, respectively, thereby the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LED. Can emit light.

  In this way, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting light with 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with individually set constant currents. Thus, it is possible to turn off, turn on with one gradation, blink with one gradation, and the like.

[12-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the resistor Rr that sets the maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits red (R) in the eight color output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG1. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current to flow through the green (G) LED element constituting the full color LED in the eight output channels up to LG8, and a full color LED in the eight output channels from the output channels LB1 to LB8 And a resistor Rb that sets a maximum current that flows through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 included in the constant current drive unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 included in the constant current driving unit 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). Yes.

[12-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 165 and 166. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. In addition, the LED constant current drive circuit mentioned above provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, in FIG. 165 and FIG. 166, the above-described output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 are denoted by the same reference numerals for convenience of explanation.

[12-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, a dish lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current driving circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200. This is input via the dish unit relay board 214. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a and the anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full color LEDs, Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full-color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the sdLED1 to sdLED6 which are full color LEDs are respectively connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat distribution resistors sdRb1 to sdRb6 (the constant current described above). The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a uses the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID. Gradation information is taken in, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to become the fetched gradation information.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat distribution circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above). In addition to being input to the substrate 273, DC +12 V and ground (GND) are input to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 via the dish lower left decorative substrate 283. As a result, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the constant current drive circuit 283x described above) is not transmitted to the dish upper left decorative substrate 273, which is a subsequent substrate. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a can shape the waveform (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd included in the constant current drive circuit 283x described above).

  The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and the red (R) LED element anode terminal, the green (G) LED anode terminal constituting the suLED1 to suLED6 which are full color LEDs, and Each is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. The driver 1 to the constant current driver 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 (the constant current described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. The driver 9 to the constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat distribution resistors suRb1 to suRb6 (the constant current described above). The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, and LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from the light emission data SDAT1 when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID. Gradation information is captured, and the suLED1 to suLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled so that the captured gradation information is obtained.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking the constant current flowing through the suLED1 to suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is handled by the heat distribution resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6 constituting the heat distribution circuit 273c. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) can be dispersed.

  In addition to the dish lower left decorative board 283 and the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish lower right decorative board 288, the dish upper right decorative board 278, and the door frame top left decorative board 456 are used as a decorative board having one LED constant current driving circuit. , And a door frame top right decorative substrate 457.

[12-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board having two LED constant current driving circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 166, the left side lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1. -HdLED10 and heat dispersion circuit 402bc are provided.

  As described above, the door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4. The light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. Further, as described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 so that + 12V DC is input, and the ground of the power supply board 630 ( (GND) line is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub-relay board 105. Yes. The direct current + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb and the anode terminals of the red (R) LED elements and the green (G) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. , And blue (B) LED elements are also input to the anode terminal.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 with respect to a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current driving circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the 10 full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight constant-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the remaining two For the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a which is a subsequent board across the board on which the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb is mounted (that is, the left side lower decorative board 402b). The light emission mode of the huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 with respect to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are respectively Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, the output channels LR1 to LR8 (constant current driver 1 to constant current driver 8 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba are electrically connected, and the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 described above) via the heat distribution resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED1 to hdLED8, which are full color LEDs, are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. The above-described constant current driver 17 to constant current driver 24) are electrically connected.

  Among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are the red (R) LED element cathode terminals constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10, respectively. Through the heat distribution resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10, the output channels LR1 and LR2 (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are electrically connected, and the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are connected. The cathode terminal of the green (G) LED element is connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 (the constant current driver 9 and the constant current driver 1 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb through the heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ) And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the hdLED9 and hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. They are electrically connected to LB1 and LB2 (constant current driver 17 and constant current driver 18 described above).

  Further, for the huLED1 to huLED5 which are the five full color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a which is the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color (huLED1 to huLED5 which is a full color LED) The cathode terminals of the LED elements R) are respectively connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current driver 3 to the constant current driver 7 described above) and constitute the full color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5, respectively, Upper left side decoration Through the heat distribution resistors huRg1b to huRg5b in the plate 402a and the heat distribution resistors huRg1a to huRg5a in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current drivers 11 to constant current described above). The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and constitute the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 are the heat distribution resistors huRb1b to huRb5b on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, and left Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the constant current driver 19 to the constant current driver 23 described above) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat distribution resistors huRb1a to huRb5a on the side lower decorative substrate 402b. To have. Note that the output channels LR8, LG8, and LB8 of the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb are not connected.

  Based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts from the light emission data SDAT2 when its ID is included in the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is taken in, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled to be dimmed so as to become the fetched gradation information. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. On the basis of SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), when the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID, the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the obtained gradation information becomes 10 Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and dimly lit, and the left side serving as the substrate subsequent to the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Upper decorative board 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (suction) type as described above, heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. To do. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is handled by the heat distribution resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Thus, the heat generation of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  Since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current flowing through the two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is sucked to the left. Heat is generated by sucking constant currents flowing through the huLED1 to huLED5, which are five full-color LEDs mounted on the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five heat resistances hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, and hdRb10 constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc, and five mounted on the left side upper decorative board 402a that is the board following the left side lower decorative board 402b. For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full color LEDs, the heat distribution resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, and huRb1a to huRb5a constituting the heat distribution circuit 402bc on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is configured by the heat distribution resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b that constitute the heat distribution circuit 402ac on the decorative substrate 402a. Heat generation can be dispersed.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the left side upper decorative board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dissipating the heat generated, the function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity is also provided.

  In addition to the left side lower decoration board 402b, the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish center lower decoration board 316, the side window decoration part decoration board 413, the right side as a decoration board having two LED constant current drive circuits. There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left side upper decorative substrate 402a, there is a right side upper decorative substrate 418a as a decorative substrate that does not include any LED constant current drive circuit.

[12-4. Arrangement method of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a method for arranging the LED constant current driving circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 167 and 168. In this embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, the constant current drive circuit constituting the LED constant current drive circuit will be described as an electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current driving circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm) is used. And so-called VQFN. Of the four edges of the constant current drive circuit, one edge is the input side, and the remaining three edges are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. Note that in FIG. 168, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, the left side formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided here with two LED constant current drive circuits. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the upper middle decorative plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[12-4-1. Left side lower decorative board]
As shown in FIG. 167 (a), the lower left side decorative board 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are It is mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the left side upper decorative board 402a and the electrical wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and the LED of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not mounted. A connector LDLCN for connecting the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 and the electrical wiring is mounted on the lower end side of the surface 402by.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is applied by the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is not formed as a blank character with a white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is reduced by the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b from being lowered due to the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs.

  Also, the door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, but is a game seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404 In the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs and the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged. The full color LE has no relation to the game for the player because the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Accordingly, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for a player to visually recognize a region indicating a position where certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, which has no relation to the game for the player.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a board management number of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the letter without the foil is formed by a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is not the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the non-LED mounting face 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil is removed, and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed. Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground as will be described later. For this reason, the board management number of the lower left side decorative board 402b is a letter without a foil (that is, a letter is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and the solid surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx and the solid surface of the non-LED mounting surface 402by are formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both surfaces. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating the positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk prints near these areas. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 168 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (refer to FIG. 168 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of the area LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. A region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 168 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 168 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. Yes.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, areas corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are yellow lines as silk printing. (Or black chain lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 168 (a), only hdLED4 and hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs, and corresponding to the chain lines LSLK4 and LSLK5, respectively) are printed and these areas. Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and above or below (FIG. 168 (a) shows LED4 and LED4 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full color LEDs). Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a yellow chain line (not shown) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b is arranged as silk printing (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are LEDs that emit light of the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, it was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all, but the LED mounting surface is a region corresponding to the member disposed in the front among the LED mounting surfaces due to light emission of the full color LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as so-called solid earths that ground an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  As described above, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, so that the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The width dimension from the left end side 402 beg 1 to the right end side 402 beg 2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402 bax and 402 bbx. For this reason, if the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the land of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx Since the distance between the pattern edge and the left edge 402beg1 or right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Adopted the configuration.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the right lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The terminal on the input side is the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. 166 by disposing it near the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b so as to be the terminal on the left side. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. 3 and the output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged as a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged as being inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402 beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval between the wiring patterns. Even all the wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be disposed between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 to the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. It is possible to increase the efficiency of wiring pattern placement and routing in the work.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current driving circuit 402bax is connected to the center portion in the vertical direction of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED in FIG. 167 (a)). The constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged closer to the lower side than the arrangement portion), and the constant current driving circuit 402bbx is arranged in the vertical center portion on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b (FIG. 167 (a)). It can be arranged above the hdLED 8, which is a full-color LED that is configured in the group 2 that is controlled to emit light by the constant current drive circuit 402 bax. . As a result, an area for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and from the constant current driving circuit 402bbx. Two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 166 are provided with wiring pattern routing areas to the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. 402b can be secured.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape, and is 0805 in a so-called EIA format (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the size of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction on the left end side of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the left end side 402 beg 1 and the right end side 402 beg 2 of the left side lower decorative board 402 b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end side of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx arranged such that the end side of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged on each decorative board of the door frame 3 so that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is 45 with respect to the left and right edges of the decorative board. The door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are arranged in a tilted state. Unlike the other decorative boards of the frame 3, the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453. Since the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side is large, the end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is arranged on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in this embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit is not parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. Is mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top central decorative board 455 includes, in addition to 11 full-color LEDs provided therein, another central decorative board on which five full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted. LED constant current drive circuit (first LED constant current drive circuit (first constant current drive circuit, first maximum current setting circuit), second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, The second maximum current setting circuit)) is illustrated by one LED constant current drive circuit (here, the second LED constant current drive circuit (second constant current drive circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Two heat distribution circuits provided in itself (the first constant current drive circuit is the first heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance), the second constant current drive circuit is the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) Direct lighting control via the door frame top The left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided in itself, another LED decorative current drive circuit (constant constant) provided in the left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted. The light emission control is directly performed through one heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistor) provided in itself (current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit), and the door frame top right decorative board 457 includes six full-color LEDs provided in itself. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is attached to itself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided in itself (not shown). The light emission is directly controlled through one heat dispersion circuit (heat dispersion resistor) provided. The other central decorative board is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right so as to follow the central part of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative board is a left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative board is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other central decorative board, the other left decorative board, and the other right decorative board need to be provided with heat distribution circuits (heat distribution resistors), respectively. As described above, the heat distribution circuit (here, the second heat distribution circuit (heat distribution resistance)) provided on the door frame top central decorative board 455 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other central decorative board are the door frame top. In addition to the function of distributing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the central decorative board 455 itself, it prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has functions that can be done. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other left decorative board include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit). Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit of the other right decorative substrate include an LED constant current driving circuit (accurately provided in the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 itself). Has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity in addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit).

  Further, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and 10 full-color LEDs are provided. When the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, they are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. L on lower left side decorative board 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (suction) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, even in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be hardly affected by the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are ten full-color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current drive circuit 402bax, 402bbx has land patterns whose end sides are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative board 402b, thereby providing a constant current drive circuit. Arranged so that the edges of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate is one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the game board 5. FIG.

[12-4-2. Plate on the upper center of the dish]
As shown in FIG. 167 (b), the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. The ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 on the upward direction of the effect operation unit 300, whereas the LED constant current driving circuit 314a. , 314 b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314 y of the upper central decorative plate 314 on the side of the rendering operation unit 300 facing upward. When the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (ie, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a. The connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted on the right side along the upper end side 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314x on the dish center.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. In the present embodiment, the white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish moves forward by the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the rendering operation unit 300). The reflectance of can be increased.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which is the full color LED are arranged are printed as silk printing at all. It has not been. Further, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as a blank character with white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314 in the dish center due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is reduced by the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs are arranged and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs. To prevent that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance at the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314x of the dish center due to the light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, from decreasing.

  Moreover, although the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in translucent milky white as described above, the front of the pachinko machine 1 When the player sitting on the head moves the head (face), the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face), and the LED on the dish center upper decorative board 314 provided in the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 Even if the player can visually recognize the mounting surface 314x, in the first place, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full color LED, and a full color LED. Since the area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, it is completely related to the game for the player It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, the numbers identifying the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10) and the auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 (that is, full-color LEDs) It is possible to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged.

  Note that the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has no part number corresponding to the connector HCN and a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged printed as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has nothing to do with the game for the player, and the region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in this embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foil-extracted character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). A letter is formed by making a letter with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-drawn letter is formed by a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish center. Covered. The wiring pattern that forms the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, but the foil removal character (that is, the wiring pattern) on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In the layer (copper plane) in which the character is formed, the character may be formed as a character formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil and the surrounding copper foil is removed, or the decorative plate 314 at the upper center of the dish Foil-free characters (that is, a wiring pattern made of copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Each of them may be formed as a cut character formed by removing the copper foil. Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a solid ground as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish is a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Without being formed as a blank character), and is formed as a blank character with characters removed on one or both of the solid ground of the LED mounting surface 314x and the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 314y. It may be.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish has constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersions. Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silk marks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314, yellow areas (not shown as silk printing) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. Are printed in the chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, and in the vicinity of these regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are not illustrated as silk printing yellow (or , Black).

  In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a yellow chain line (not shown as silk printing) is an area indicating a position where the connector HCN mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged. (Or a black chain line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  Further, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, This is performed for each LED element, which constitutes one full-color LED, with respect to the LED element emitting red (R), the LED element emitting green (G), and the LED element emitting blue (B). A plurality of check pins (not shown) that can be formed are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are formed as a so-called solid ground that grounds an area excluding land patterns and wiring patterns such as electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 and the solid ground formed on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). Yes.

  In the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and reflectance that decreases in reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are due to light emission of the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, it was not mounted at all on the LED mounting surface, but the area corresponding to the member disposed in the front of the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED is LED mounted. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is arranged is printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) (not shown) as silk print, and an electron is located in the vicinity of this region. A part number corresponding to a part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, since the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, a state where the dish center upper decorative board 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a), the upper end side 314eg1 to the lower end side 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are shown. The width dimension extending up to about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx. For this reason, when the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is arranged. Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center is extremely short, the wiring pattern should be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the minimum distance dimension is limited in the width of the wiring pattern and the interval between adjacent wiring patterns, it is difficult to draw out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the edges of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314. Adopted the configuration.

  In this embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, the left lower end side of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. The terminal on the input side is the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. 164 by disposing it near the upper end 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 so as to become the terminal on the side. ), DC + 12V, ground (GND), and resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left side, the upper right side, and the lower right side are mainly terminals on the output side 1 to the output side. The output side 1 terminal to the output side 3 terminal are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. The terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which a ground (GND) is input. Yes.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two end sides of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish upper central decorative board 314. While being able to arrange | position as a state, the remaining 2 edge sides can be arrange | positioned as the state which inclined 45 degree | times with respect to the lower end edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. FIG. As a result, the minimum distance dimension is limited from the respective lead pads of the land pattern arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx to the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the adjacent interval of the wiring pattern. Even all the wiring patterns can be pulled out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region from which the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx in the dish central decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape.

  Moreover, by adopting such an arrangement, among the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, the group 1 is composed of four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hLED5 to the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length The thickness can be formed evenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of the wiring pattern leading to the group 1 and the group 2 from being unduly lengthened or shortened to either one of the group 1 or the group 2. Wiring pattern placement and routing efficiency can be increased in the work.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, when the dish center upper decorative board 314 shown in FIG. 167 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decorative board 314 is located on the dish center upper). The constant current drive circuit 314ax is a semi-circular arc central portion (not shown in FIG. 167 (b)) in the central portion of the plate non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the plate center. The constant current drive circuit 314bx can be arranged on the right side as compared with the hLED6 arrangement portion, and the semicircular arc-shaped central portion (FIG. 167 (b) in FIG. ) In the left side compared with the portion where the hdLED 6, which is a full color LED, is disposed, and the light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314 ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Accordingly, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and from the constant current driving circuit 314bx. An area for routing the wiring pattern to the hLED9 and hLED10, which are two full-color LEDs, can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. Resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and a capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) whose rectangular shape is a rectangular shape, and is 0805 in a so-called EIA format (named 2012, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length) S: 1.25 mm). That is, the size of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) is larger than the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Very small. For this reason, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one end side in the longitudinal direction at the upper end side of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is arranged so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2, and one end side in the longitudinal direction thereof is perpendicular to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the end of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314, and the resistance Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end side in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 and ten full-color LEDs. HLED1 to hLED10 as viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and in a semicircular arc shape of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the upper central decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. A configuration is adopted in which the plate is arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (suction) type, as described above, like the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, and by sucking the constant current flowing through each LED element. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper central decorative board 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, by separating the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx from the 10 full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be hardly affected by the hLED1 to hLED10 which are ten full color LEDs.

  Further, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so that the end sides of the land pattern are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the upper central decorative board 314. 314ax, 314bx land pattern end edges are arranged in parallel to the left and right edges of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative Compared to the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the one in which the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left and right end sides of the decorative substrate is the decorative substrate. The width dimension from the left end side to the right end side can be made shorter. Thereby, since it can contribute to enlarging the distance dimension of the left-right direction of the production | presentation operation unit 300 and the distance dimension of the front-back direction, while being able to equip the door frame 3 with the large-scale production operation unit 300, the production operation unit The light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[12-4-3. Genus pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit
As described above, the constant current driving circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish central upper decorative board 314 may be planar as described above. It is a surface mount type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as “EPad”) is formed. This IC package can be improved in heat dissipation and bondability by being soldered to a substrate.

  The land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is provided with an EPad land pattern EP having a square shape in addition to each lead pad. The EPad land pattern EP is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a grid pattern. With these thermal vias TV, the EPad land pattern EP and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out a wiring pattern from each lead pad in the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transferred from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, heat can be radiated from the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction region where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP is constant current. The number of thermal vias TV and the size of the diameter are selected so as to be 50% or more with respect to the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. As a result, the bonding area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the EPad land pattern EP are soldered is prevented from becoming too large, and the generation of voids is prevented, and the bonding area is not too small and stable. The joining strength can be obtained. Note that the EPad land pattern EP can also be formed in a grid pattern, but in this case as well, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current drive circuit The EPad (metal pad FP) must be bonded to the EPad land pattern EP by 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the end sides of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged. When the edge side of the land pattern is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge side 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect for the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly left. When arranging the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx so as to be arranged in parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the side lower decorative substrate 402b and inclined by 45 degrees The EPad land pattern EP is also arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees. When the EPad land pattern EP edge is arranged in parallel with the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP edge and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. The distance between the left end side 402 beg1 or the right end side 402 beg 2 of the circuit board becomes shorter and the distance to the substrate end side becomes shorter. In other words, there is less room for heat dissipation on the substrate. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when the end side EP of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in a state inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance between the right edge 402beg2 and the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is a portion where the distance between the edge of the EPad and the substrate edge becomes shorter, but the two edges in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the edge of the substrate. Since the room for heat radiation on the substrate is wide, it can be said that the heat radiation effect is higher than the case where the EPad land pattern EP edge and the substrate edge are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and includes one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In this embodiment, as described above, as described above, for example, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically is provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, and a semicircle The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape, respectively, and the LED by light emission of the full color LED by the region indicating the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the position where the full color LED is arranged The part number corresponding to the full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from being lowered and has nothing to do with the game for the player. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, FIGS. 169 to 169 illustrate another configuration of the present invention in which measures such as a reduction in reflectance are taken (hereinafter referred to as “a configuration of measures such as a reduction in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”). This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, FIG. 170 shows a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 170 is an enlarged view of the portion D ″ in FIG. 170 viewed from the LED non-mounting surface, FIG. 172 is a configuration for measures such as a reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating D ′ ″ in FIG. It is the enlarged view seen from the LED non-mounting surface in a part. FIGS. 169 to 173 show the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 167 and 168 (hereinafter referred to as a configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment). Are denoted by the same reference numerals. In FIG. 171, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for easy viewing of the drawing. Further, in FIG. 173, various electronic components are omitted for easy viewing of the drawing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 and the region indicating the position where the hdLED 1 to the hdLED 10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b with yellow solid lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs on the left or above in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, are yellow as silk printing on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b, an area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow solid line (not shown), and the area near the area corresponds to the connector LDLCN. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspections of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are individually performed (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 171 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. Corresponding part numbers and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are respectively printed as silk printing. Specifically, the regions indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative plate 314 of the dish center with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10 as silk prints. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs on the right side in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, are printed in yellow as silk prints on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, respectively. Has been.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk line with a solid yellow line (not shown), and the area near the area corresponds to the connector HCN. The part number to be printed is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. Thus, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is yellow not shown as silk printing in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is printed with. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The parts number (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are LEDs and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs are arranged are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish, there are part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. An area (yellow solid line) indicating a position to be arranged is different from that in that each area is printed as silk printing.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Accordingly, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player, and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Unlike black, by printing in light yellow, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) ) Or a number identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, which is different from black and yellow. By printing with, it is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to light emission of the full color LED.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number that identifies the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the auxiliary line that indicates the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region that indicates the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from being lowered.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, unlike black, and light color. When printing in yellow), the polarity mark of the full color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full color LED.

  Further, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, an area indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is arranged is printed with a yellow solid line (not shown) as silk print, and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is adjacent to this area. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is a foil cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 170 (c), the foil LED 7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED 7 which is a full-color LED.)), And regions indicating positions where the hdLED 1 to hdLED 10 which are full-color LEDs are arranged are shown. Foil-extracted regions excluding terminals (not shown) and wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, wiring patterns are formed) In the (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, in the region formed by removing the copper foil (FIG. 170 (c)), only the foil removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full color LED. .)), And the foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted characters are covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are formed as the foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b in the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left or above, respectively. The foil removal region and the foil removal character are respectively covered with a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is disposed is a foil-extracted region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). In the layer (copper plane), the area where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is indicated in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, the wiring pattern is a copper foil. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, as shown in FIG. 171, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating positions where electronic parts such as Rg and various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing. Specifically, for example, the region indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 171 (a)) as silk printing, and the lower left side decorative board IC1 (see FIG. 171 (a)), which is printed on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of 402b, and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax in the vicinity of this region LSLKa, is silk-printed. As a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative board 402b. And the area | region which shows the position which arrange | positions resistance Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum electric current setting circuit 402bay is a yellow solid line (or black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, LSLKd (refer FIG. 171 (a)) as silk printing. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and in the vicinity of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd, and to the right, the resistances Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 171 (a)) corresponding to the above are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b, respectively. Yes.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. Corresponding part numbers are formed as foil-extracted characters (that is, extracted characters formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and then removing the surrounding copper foil) In addition, regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are not shown in the respective terminals and foil-extracted regions excluding a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, each terminal in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed) And an area formed by removing the copper foil, except for the wiring pattern) WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, areas indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper decorative board 314 as foil extraction areas HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs in the vicinity of the regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 on the right side are respectively formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish upper central decorative substrate 314 as a letter, The foil-extracted region and the foil-extracted character are respectively covered with a white resist that is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the central upper decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern for forming the foil-extracted character is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative board 314 in the dish center, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is disposed is formed with a foil removal region (that is, a wiring pattern) (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). In this layer (copper plane), a region where the copper foil is removed except for each terminal and wiring pattern is formed, and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown in the vicinity of this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. In this way, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test for the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is indicated in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, characters are made with the wiring pattern that is copper foil and its surroundings. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the plate has a constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. The area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a yellow solid line (or black solid line) not shown, and the part number corresponding to the electronic component is shown as a silk print near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314 have no white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( In 314bx), the package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the white color resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, but in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 LEDs are the letters without foil (that is, the letters formed with the wiring patterns that are copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring patterns are formed, and the surrounding copper foil is removed. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding terminals (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which the wiring pattern is formed) In the (copper plane), a white resist is formed as a solid region on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and wiring pattern. Covers the foil cutting area and the foil cutting letters, and further decorates the center of the dish. On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, the part numbers corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are indicated by foil-extracted characters (that is, the characters are indicated by the wiring pattern which is copper foil in the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed). The area where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, and the area where the hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged is a foil-extracted area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (In other words, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, the region formed by removing the copper foil except for each terminal and the wiring pattern), the LED mounting on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 The foil removal region and the foil removal letter are respectively formed by a white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. It is different in that it is covered.

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. A wiring pattern of the LED, a foil removal region indicating a mounting position of the full color LED (that is, a region indicating a position where the full color LED is disposed), a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED), Is made of copper foil and the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By covering with the dies, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) is found, or a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, a full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all for the player is formed as a foil-letter character, and the game is completely at the same time for the player. A full color LED is formed by forming a region indicating a position where a full color LED having no relation is arranged as a foil removal region, and covering the foil removal character and the foil removal region with a white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface. It can prevent that the reflectance in the LED mounting surface by LED light emission falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number for identifying the full color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full color LED) and the foil removal region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed). In addition, the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, since a process called silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface, the board cost can be reduced by reducing the printing cost of silk printing and the number of manufacturing processes of the board. Manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectivity according to the third embodiment, in the foil extraction region indicating the mounting position of the full color LED (that is, when forming the region indicating the position where the full color LED is disposed as the foil extraction region). Alternatively, a full-color LED polarity mark may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, areas indicating positions where electronic components and connectors are arranged are not shown terminals (not shown) and foil-extracted areas (not shown) except for wiring patterns (not shown) (that is, layers on which wiring patterns are formed (copper planes ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by removing the copper foil), and a component number corresponding to an electronic component or connector is not shown in the vicinity of this region. That is, it is formed as a letter formed by making a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Contrast between the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment and the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color. The area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b has the constant current driving circuit 402bax that constitutes the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various distributed resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are silks near these areas. Each print is printed in yellow (or black). Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as described above, regions corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) as prints, and part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk prints in the vicinity of these regions, respectively. Has been.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central dish 314 has a component number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The area indicating the position where hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative board 314 on the plate center. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are arranged are printed as silk prints by yellow solid lines (or black solid lines) not shown, and part numbers corresponding to the electronic parts are located in the vicinity of these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black), not shown, as silk printing. In addition, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, as described above, regions corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are silk. Printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 not shown as prints, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are silk printed in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (a), the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has hdLED1 which is a full color LED. The white resist-extracted characters using the white resist whose part number corresponding to the hdLED 10 is painted twice (FIG. 172 (c) shows only the white resist-excluded characters as the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED 7 which is a full color LED. ) And a region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged is a white resist removal region using a white resist painted twice (in FIG. 172 (c), hdLED7 which is a full color LED). As a corresponding area, only the white resist removal area LSLK7 is shown.) It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is an area (position of a predetermined pin number) indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged for the second time among the white resists coated twice. 172 (c), the white resist removal area LSLK7 corresponding to the full-color LED hdLED7 shown in Fig. 172 (c) has the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hdLED7 being the full-color LED. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark to be designated.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and to the left Or, hdLED1 to hd that are full color LEDs above In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs are formed as white resist removed characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. As a result, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the second layer white resist passes through the second layer white resist to form the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. When the base (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears light. That is, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is disposed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. As a result, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. Accordingly, when the background of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist extracted characters and the white resist extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). Mounted are hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist which is entirely covered (solid-coated). Thus, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a lighting inspection is individually performed on the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 173, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, A region indicating the position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged is formed as a white resist removal region using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed in the vicinity of these areas as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist that is painted twice in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered (that is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, an area indicating the position where the constant current driving circuit 402bax is to be disposed (second pin arrangement) as the second of the white resists coated twice. The white resist removal region LSLKa as a region corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in Fig. 173 includes a first pin and a 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the notch mark for instructing the arrangement. IC1 (see FIG. 173 (a)) which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, two white resists are formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, as with the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The whole area is covered with the white resist and the whole area is covered except for the area masked with the white resist of the second layer, so that the masked area is recessed as a concave portion, and corresponds to the constant current driving circuit 402bax. A white resist removal region LSLKa is formed as a region to be processed, and IC1 which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is a white resist (not shown) indicating a region where electronic components such as resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this region, white resist-extracted characters R1, R2, not shown are part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. A part number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor (not shown) formed as R3 is formed as a white resist-excluded letter (not shown). In addition, the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b is formed as a white resist removal area (not shown) indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged, and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is formed in the vicinity of this area. It is formed as a white resist removal character (not shown).

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same in the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist are shaded, and the LED non-mounting surface of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is passed through the second layer white resist. When the base of 402 by (a copper foil portion and a region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter) is seen, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters formed in the first layer of white resist are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is coated with white resist twice, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN has a housing made of a resin having a color of black, brown, or blue. In this way, resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance due to light emission from full-color LEDs. Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Thereby, the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is increased by the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b. Be able to.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 includes hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are arranged uses a white resist painted twice It is formed as a white resist removal region. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is the first of the two-colored white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 is made of white resist. (That is, the white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the white resists applied twice). Then, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 on the dish is the second area of the white resist that is painted twice, and is an area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged (arrangement of predetermined pin numbers). For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED, a notch mark that instructs the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED 7 that is a full-color LED is included. Are cut out as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full color LED in the vicinity of these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10. LED which is the part number corresponding to hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the whole is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the second layer of white resist is covered. By covering the whole area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are white resist removed areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10 which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs are formed as white resist-extracted characters.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. As a result, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded, and the second layer of white resist passes through the second layer of white resist to form the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. When the base is viewed, the white resist of the first layer looks pale. That is, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-extracted characters in the first layer of white resist. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314, a region indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided in the vicinity of this region. Numbers are formed as white resist-extracted characters (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer are the same. When the white resist of the second layer and the white resist of the second layer are shaded, and the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second white resist, the first layer The white resist of the eyes will appear pale. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removal region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. It has become.

  In addition, since the white color resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center, the white resist-extracted characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of the white resist, The light refractive index of the white resist layer changes. As a result, when the background of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed regions in the first layer of white resist are identified. Be able to.

  Further, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is covered with a white resist. The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are made of resin in which each package is white (a color that is recognized to be the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color). Color), which is recognized to be the same color as color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color that is recognized as the same color) as the white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, and the connector HCN having a housing of the same color as the white resist that is covered (solid-coated) (color that is recognized as the same color) are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white and connectors that do not have white are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 at all. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is individually subjected to a lighting test on the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish central upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1 One full color LED, which can be performed for each LED element, for LED elements emitting red (R), LEDs emitting green (G), and LEDs emitting blue (B) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is shown in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The plurality of check pins are not coated with white resist. As a result, an operator who performs an inspection brings a probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, whereby the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other to conduct various tests. Note that some check pins can confirm the contents of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax and the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314, constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors not shown The areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are arranged are formed as white resist removal areas using a white resist coated twice like the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314. In the vicinity, the part number corresponding to the electronic part is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a white resist painted twice, like the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer in the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish are the same. Therefore, the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist are shaded, and the second layer of white resist passes through the second layer of white resist and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish When the substrate of 314y is seen, the white resist of the first layer appears light. As a result, when the base of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters formed on the white resist of the first layer are identified. And a white resist removal region can be identified.

  In addition, since the non-LED mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 is coated with white resist twice, the white resist-extracted characters and white resist-extracted regions in the first layer of white resist, The light refractive index of the second layer of white resist will change. As a result, when the background of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper decorative substrate 314 of the dish center is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the white resist removed characters and the white resist removed region in the first layer of white resist are identified. Can be done.

  In addition, the resistors and capacitors mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the dish do not have white, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white color are mounted on the non-LED mounting surface because the reflectance due to light emission of the full color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper central decorative board 314. As a result, the white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 is reflected forward by the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs (that is, toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs, and a full color LED. The regions indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full-color LEDs. The number and the area indicating the position where the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, whereas in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the left The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b -The part numbers corresponding to the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are formed as white resist-extracted characters using a white resist painted twice, and the region indicating the position where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is twice It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper decorative substrate 314 in the dish center is painted twice with the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. Are formed as white resist-extracted characters using white resists, and regions indicating positions where hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged are formed as white resist-extracted regions using twice-painted white resists. Is different in that .

  The white resist solidly coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can increase the reflectance to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) due to light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full color LEDs. It is like that. In addition, the white resist solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper central decorative board 314 has a reflectance to the front (that is, the direction toward the upper side of the effect operation unit 300) due to light emission of the hLED1 to hLED10 that are full color LEDs. Can be increased. For this reason, in the case where the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are printed in black as silk printing, the LED by light emission of the full color LED is printed by black printing. The reflectance on the mounting surface is lowered, and there arises a problem that the light emission of the full color LED is not used efficiently. Also, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although it is formed in milky white with translucency, the line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face) when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the head (face), so the door frame 3 In some cases, the player can visually recognize the LED mounting surfaces of the various decorative boards provided in the various decorative bodies provided in the player. Then, there is a problem that the player can visually recognize the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED that does not have any relation to the game for the player and the corresponding part number. In addition, the area where the full color LED having no relation to the game is arranged is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist that is painted twice, so that the mounting position of the full color LED is formed. It is difficult to find a white resist removal region (that is, a region indicating a position where a full color LED is arranged) indicating a color, or a number that identifies a full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can do.

  Further, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-extracted character using a white resist that is painted twice with a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all for the player and the corresponding part number. By forming the area indicating the position where the full color LED, which has no relation to the game at all for the player, is formed as a white resist removal area using a white resist painted twice, the light emission of the full color LED It can prevent that the reflectance in a LED mounting surface falls.

  In the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the same operational effects as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment can be achieved. That is, a white resist removal area (that is, a position where the full color LED is arranged) using a number for identifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED) and a white resist that is painted twice indicating a mounting position of the full color LED. Can be made difficult for the player to see, and the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from decreasing.

  In addition, in the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a step of silk printing can be omitted for the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively, so that the printing cost for silk printing and the manufacture of the substrate Reduction of the number of processes can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  Note that in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, which have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission from the full color LED, and connectors that do not have white light are emitted from the full color LED. Since the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted at all. However, among the LED mounting surfaces due to the light emission of the full color LED, the region corresponding to the member disposed in front is the LED. When it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, regions indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are arranged are formed as terminals (not shown) and white resist removal regions (not shown), and in the vicinity of these regions. In addition, part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) and connectors mounted on the LED mounting surface are formed as white resist-excluded letters (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist. By covering the whole area except the area masked by the second layer of white resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and an area indicating the position where the full-color LED and connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area. In addition, the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and connectors are formed as white resist-extracted characters, but other methods may be used to form white resist-extracted regions and white resist-extracted characters. . For example, an area indicating the position where a full color LED or connector is placed before the white resist is dried after the white resist is solid-coated once or a plurality of times on the LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate A white resist removal region by pressing the plate, and a method of forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate showing a part number corresponding to a full color LED or connector, the LED mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and After the white resist is solidly applied to the non-LED mounting surface once or a plurality of times, the white resist is dried, and then the region indicating the position where the full color LED or connector is arranged is set as a white resist removal region by laser irradiation. The part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit is arranged in substantially the same manner on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the end of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is set as shown in FIG. The left side lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into group 1 and group 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the configuration can also be applied to an elongated plate-like decorative substrate provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated board-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 include a decorative board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current driving circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by supplying a constant current to the eight full color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green, and other single color LEDs may be used. A monochromatic LED can also be used. In this case, light emission control of a maximum of 24 single color LEDs can be performed with one LED constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the direct current +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, but the constant current drive circuit of the LED constant current drive circuit is used. The internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply provided (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 165) is used for LED lighting within the current allowable range of the linear power supply. It may be used as a voltage. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current drive circuit described above, a maximum of one single-color LED (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When an LED other than the red LED) is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single color LED and the single color LED The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the constant current driving circuit described above, a maximum of two single-color LEDs (for example, within the current allowable range of the linear power supply for one output channel (for example, When the red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5V) created by the linear power supply is inputted to the anode terminal of the first stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last stage LED is It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Further, in the embodiment described above, DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit. ˜LG8, LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element constituting one full color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion resistor circuit described above. However, a plurality of full color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is 2 to 3. If it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, DC +35 V from the power supply board 630 is used as the LED lighting voltage instead of DC +12 V from the power supply board 630. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 include the door frame top central decorative substrate 455, the door. Since the frame top left decorative substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper end side to the lower end side of the decorative substrate is large. The edge of the land pattern is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper edge and the lower edge of the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, and door frame top right decorative board 457. Any one of the frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457, and any two decorative substrates The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, for example, by the LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame, in addition to the full-color LED provided in the door frame. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may be directly connected to, for example, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted in addition to the full-color LED provided therein by an LED constant current driving circuit provided in the door frame top left decorative board 456. You may control light emission.

  In the above-described embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the LED non-mounting surface 314y are provided on the door frame 3. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative boards provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after printing the entire LED mounting surface and non-LED mounting surface of various decorative boards with white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged are set as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, various decorative boards included in each decorative body provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b and the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are provided. On the LED non-mounting surface, the area corresponding to the full-color LED mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards was printed with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as silk printing, but the mounting position of the full-color LED Auxiliary line indicating the position of the full color LED (i.e., when printing with a yellow chain line (or black chain line) as an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) You may comprise so that mounting direction may be specified.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes various substrates that are supplied from a power source from a power supply substrate and that can control electrical decoration (for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (FIG. 8)). By the way, inside the gaming machine, lines that transmit power to various boards and lines that transmit control signals are routed, and the length of the lines increases, which may cause various boards to malfunction due to the effects of external noise. was there.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed that includes a front frame configured to cover a window that opens back and forth with a fluoroscopic protective plate on the game board (see, for example, JP-A-2006-199298 (paragraph [0014]). And FIG. 1)). By the way, by increasing the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a band plate shape. Further, by providing the display device and the movable body in the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided in the game board also has a band plate shape. However, in the case where the light emission control means for controlling the light emission means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure a region for drawing the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emission means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine that is arranged waiting in front of the display screen of an effect display device and includes a movable accessory device that operates at the time of the effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Publication (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9)). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate is mounted on which light emitting means facing the back surface of the light emitting portion (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a possibility that the player can visually recognize the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board that has no relation to the game for the player, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. through the light emitting portion.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting means is mounted has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). The player is provided with a variety of effects using the light emission effects by the light emitting means. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the reflectance decreases due to the number for identifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative substrate, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, etc. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[13. Each decorative board in the game board]
Next, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, in particular, a decorative board on which a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative board provided with a magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, as the decorative board provided with the magnetic magnetic pole change detection circuit, as described above, the front decoration part of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back unit 3000 is used. There is a back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a on which a magnetic back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of the rotational position of 3312 is mounted.

  The back upper left front decoration board 3311a receives the light emission data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1 which are serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720 and the door frame side serial system. ing. Further, the back upper left front decoration board 3311a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 via the panel drive board 1720 and DC + 12V is inputted, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. ) It is electrically connected to the line. Note that the back upper left front decoration board 3311a may be configured to be directly connected to the + 12V power line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. You may comprise so that it may be electrically connected directly with a ground (GND) line.

  The back upper left front decoration board 3311a includes a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab can detect a change in magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311ab, a Hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. It is configured as an open drain output.

  The linear power source 3311aba is a circuit that generates and supplies an internal power source that is used in the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab when DC + 12V is input from the + 12V power source line. This internal power supply is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, respectively, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to the ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311abb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplifier circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abb and outputs it to the Schmitt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd prepares the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs it to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf which is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal in accordance with the signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311abe.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged so that the Hall element 3311abb is located immediately below the trajectory of the magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the front decoration portion 3312 shown in FIG. Has been.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and the type of the IC package is a rectangular shape (horizontal length: 2). This is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a height of .9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, which is a so-called SOT. Since the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back left upper front stage decoration board 3311a (that is, the back left upper side) of the front stage decoration part 3312 attached to the right side surface of the base stage decoration part 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension (this distance dimension (clearance) between the front surface of the IC package of the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab) and the left surface side of the front decoration part 3312 that is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid front decoration part 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, it is about 1.5 mm.)) Can be reduced.

  Further, since the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is a small movable decorative body, for example, it is arranged as a sensor that detects the front decoration portion 3312 that is a movable body using a large optical sensor such as a photocoupler. It has become structurally difficult to do.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is used as a sensor that detects the standby position (original position) of the front decoration part 3312 that is a movable body. Although this magnetic sensor has a large variation in detection compared to the above-described optical sensor, in this embodiment, a variation occurs in the standby position (original position) of the first-stage decoration portion 3312 that is a movable body. Even if the discrepancy occurs, the discrepancy is small and the probability of giving the player a sense of incongruity is low.

  As described above, the upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves in the left-right direction, moves in the vertical direction, and the front stage decorative portion 3312 rotates. In some cases, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface of the back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab from multiple directions.

  Therefore, when the above-described optical sensor is mounted on the LED mounting surface of the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided in the game board 5 is disturbed by light ( There is a risk of false detection.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the above-described magnetic sensor is also used for this reason. Therefore, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the front decoration unit 3312 due to light emitted from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided in the game board 5.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensor provided in the various effect units described above is configured such that light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light). Therefore, there is no possibility of erroneous detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. A sink type constant current drive circuit 3311acx and a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac capable of setting a maximum current flowing in the full color LED 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1), control is performed so that a constant current flows through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Since the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type as described above, the constant current drive circuit 3311ac generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, a part of the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is handled by the heat distribution circuit 3311ad, so that the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 3311ac can be distributed. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated from among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the dish lower left decorative substrate 283 shown in FIG. 165, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8), a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the like mounted on the LED mounting surface. The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The upper left front decorative substrate 3311a is configured as described above, such as the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the configuration of countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, and the reflectance according to the third embodiment. Any of a configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction and a configuration of countermeasures such as a reduction in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back left upper base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative part 3311 to which the back upper base decorative board is attached. 3311a was mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the front decoration portion 3312. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left base decoration substrate are of the side view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back left upper front decorative board 3311a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be selected on the view type and mounted on the back upper left front decorative substrate 3311a 3311aa may be selected as a top view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decoration board are selected as a top view type and mounted on the back upper left front decoration board 3311a. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on a back upper-left base decoration board are selected as a top-view type and the upper left-front step A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3311a may be selected as a side view type.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine in which the presentation operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by an effect control device (control means) has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [ FIG. 3 and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. Due to the structure of the game board, the environment that is affected by electromagnetic noise among various wiring connected to the production control device (control means). When electromagnetic noise enters other wiring via the routed wiring, there is a possibility that the production control device (control means) malfunctions due to the influence of electromagnetic noise from the other wiring.

  Conventionally, a gaming machine having a movable body on a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIG. 18 and FIG. 19)). The movable body has a protruding detection piece, and the detection piece is detected by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body, thereby specifying the position of the movable body. By the way, when the movable body is provided with an optical detection switch to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is emitted by a plurality of light emitters provided on the game board while the movable body is in operation. There was a possibility that the ambient light would be incident on the optical detection switch and the detection switch could be erroneously detected.

[14. Brightness settings for indirect and direct light]
The light guide plate in the base panel plate 1110 and the front effect unit 2600 includes a plurality of LEDs arranged in a line from the end face (a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that emit light toward the peripheral surface of the base panel plate 1110, A plurality of LEDs for the first pattern decorated by emitting light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601, and a plurality of LEDs for second pattern decorated by emitting light from the right side of the light guide plate In the following, the light of “LED used as indirect light” is input, and the indirect light is irradiated from the inner surface of the light guide plate.

  Various operation LEDs 300 provided in various door frame side units such as the production operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 of FIG. Other LEDs that are various types of LEDs that are not used in the light guide plate (hereinafter may be referred to as “LEDs used as direct light”) are irradiated as direct light. For this reason, if the brightness | luminance of LED used as indirect light and the brightness | luminance of LED used as direct light are made the same, the indirect light by a light-guide plate will become dark compared with direct light. The player wants to adjust darkly when the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is too bright, and adjust brightly if the current brightness is not too dark.

  By the way, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current driving circuits are mounted. As described above, the LED constant current driving circuit controls the brightness (gradation level) of the LED in 128 steps from gradation level 0 (zero) to gradation level 127 from turn-off to lighting (maximum brightness). Is something that can be done.

  Further, as described above, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode, and are composed of ID information and gradation information. Yes. The ID information is information indicating which of the LED constant current drive circuits included in each decorative board of the door frame 3 is to be designated. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  Further, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 as described above. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating the light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which LED constant current drive circuit is designated from among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation degree is designated from the gradation degree 0 (zero) to the gradation degree 127.

  The gradation specified in the gradation information described above is determined in the rendering operation unit monitoring process in the peripheral control part steady process of the peripheral control part power-on process described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the lamp palette setting process in the reception command analysis process. Is set. In this lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the specified brightness value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. Thus, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) or during the production ( For example, the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated by executing lamp palette setting processing (within a predetermined period in a specific effect).

  Here, the brightness designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the specified brightness value, one specified brightness value can be set in a 32-step range from the 0th (zero) specified brightness value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the 31st luminance that becomes the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. One luminance designation value can be set up to the designated value.

  For example, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in the clockwise direction, and the current luminance is temporarily set to the minimum luminance (lights off). When the first luminance designated value is set to the next highest luminance level after the value, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear) from the first luminance designated value toward the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance is set. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light change along the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), while the rotation operation unit 302 is turned off. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness when rotating clockwise, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, from the 31st brightness specified value, which is the maximum brightness) toward the first brightness specified value (for example, Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In this embodiment, a case where a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall) can set the brightness during a demonstration (demonstration performed while waiting for the player) or during the production is prepared in advance. At this time, a player (or an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. In addition, when a player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or the effect, the first luminance designated value to the first luminance value. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 brightness specified value, it is visually indicated as an image how much the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) has a desired brightness. Be able to. In the present embodiment, the 14th luminance designated value is set as the initial value (default).

  The normal palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. is there. As the normal pallet value, one of the 17 levels is selected in steps of 5% from the minimum pallet value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum pallet value (100%), which is the maximum value. A mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve) in which a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is predetermined in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is a designated value. , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is the maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance designation in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value, which is the luminance designated value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for other palette values, the value (%) described in parentheses is the 0th (zero) luminance designated value that is the luminance designated value described above. Of the 32-step range up to the 31st luminance designation value, the value corresponds to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation.

  In this embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is selected in advance as the normal pallet value for various decorative boards provided on the game board side irradiated as direct light and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side. Among various decorative boards that are set as the above-described gradation information and are provided on the game board side that is irradiated as direct light, a palette for a specific decorative board (LED that feels dazzling to the player) (not shown) A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

  In the special palette value, the luminance of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the gradation information described above. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32-level ranges from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value to the 31st luminance specified value, which are the luminance specified values described above. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the gradation information described above along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is the same as that of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance (lights off) is obtained. The lowest possible brightness is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation value is set along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve).

  As described above, in the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the luminance designation value, the normal palette value, and the special palette value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. While being set along the normal palette value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) rotates the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set along the special palette value corresponding to the brightness designated value by the operation 303. As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and the player operates and sets the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, as direct light, The brightness of the LED to be used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value at the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value at which the minimum brightness (off) is set) Thus, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest luminance (that is, the first luminance designated value at the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value at which the minimum luminance is turned off). However, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designated value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  Moreover, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually sets the brightness of various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side with respect to the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of production is set, and the flow of production by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative board that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can exert a more effect), and other By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable operation operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance from the first luminance specified value to the 31st luminance. Even if one luminance designation value is set over the luminance designation value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the one luminance designation value is set for a specific decorative board. For other decorative boards, one specified brightness value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set, so the relationship between the light emission modes set to each other (bright or dark) The luminance adjustment can be performed very easily without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although indirect light from the light guide plate is difficult to adjust the brightness compared to direct light, the special pallet value that is different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value) for LEDs used as indirect light. Thus, the brightness can be set. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually managed by the palette value, so that the LED used as indirect light And the brightness of an LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which an effect member provided on a game board is provided with a light emitting means, and the light of the light emitting means can be used as a direct light to perform light emission decoration (for example, JP-A-2006-154676). Publication (paragraph [0021], FIG. 2 and FIG. 5)). However, when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as indirect light, the light emitted from the light emitting means provided on the effect member is darker than when the light of the light emitting means provided on the effect member is used as direct light. There is a problem that it is difficult to adjust the luminance between the light emitting means used as the direct light and the light emitting means.

[15. Game contents]
The game content by the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 described above, the player rotates the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 disposed in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 and inputs the batting force adjustment, so that the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 The stored game ball B is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the launch passage portion 1012 of the launch rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5, and the game by the game ball B is played. Be started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a is either the first game area 5a1 on the left side of the center member 2500 or the right side of the center member 2500 through the communication passage portion 5a4 depending on the strength of the game. One of the second game areas 5a2 flows down. Note that the driving strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182. The game ball B can be driven harder as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously per minute. That is, the game ball B can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the first to third game areas 5a1, 5a2, 5a3 of the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (base panel 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. When the game ball B abuts against the obstacle nail 2007, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed and various movements are given to the game ball B. In addition to the obstacle nail 2007, a windmill 2008 that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at an appropriate position in the game area 5a.

[15-1. Driving into the first game area]
A game ball B that has been launched to the upper portion of the center member 2500 with a predetermined launch force (a launch force with a strength that the game ball B jumps over the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and does not reach the communication passage portion 5a4) The left side of the step 832a of the surrounding frame 832 rolls down and flows down from the first game area 5a1 to the third game area 5a3 while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails 2007. When the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500, the game ball B is supplied to the stage shelf 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage shelf 2503 rolls on the stage shelf 2503 and moves back and forth from either the top of the center in the left-right direction or the troughs on the left and right sides of the top. Released forward. When the game ball B is released into the third game area 5a3 from the top at the center of the stage shelf 2503, since the top is located immediately above the first start port 2002, the first start port 2002 has a high probability. Accepted. When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  When the game ball B rolling on the stage shelf 2503 is released into the third game area 5a3 from the valleys on both the left and right sides of the top, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball B released from the stage shelf 2503 of the center member 2500 into the third game area 5a3 may be received in the first start port 2002, the general winning port 2001, or the like.

  Further, when the game ball B flowing down the first game area 5a1 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, the side unit 2200 draws the game ball B toward the center in the left-right direction. The unit 2100 may be accepted into the first start opening 2002, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Is done.

[15-2. Winning the first starting gate, lottery of special lottery results]
When the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 (the same applies to the second start port 2004), the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has an advantageous game state (for example, “ A lottery of a special lottery result that generates “big hit”, “medium hit”, “small hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “per time reduction (shorter time)” is performed. The result is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special variation time) Note that a special lottery is drawn when the game ball B is received at the first start port 2002. The results are: “Lost”, “Small hit”, “2R big hit”, “5R big hit”, “15R big hit”, “per probability change (probability change)”, “shorter per hour (time reduction)”, “shorter per probable time” ”,“ Short-term per chance ”, etc. .

  If the special lottery result (the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B at the first starting port 2002 is a special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state, After the elapse, the special winning opening 2005 is in a state in which the game ball B can be received in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. In order to enter the game ball B into the big prize opening 2005, it is essential to drive the game ball B into the second game area 5a2, and therefore, at this stage, driving into the second game area 5a2 (so-called “right-handed”). ) Are guided by voice announcements or images, etc. In this embodiment, which discharge part 848a, 848b should be aimed right-handed is, for example, "right-handed left route" or "right-handed right route" To be specifically guided. This is because the probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 and the second receiving port differs depending on from which discharge portion 848a, 848b the game ball B is discharged to the second game region 5a2. The driving into the second game area 5a2 will be described later.

  When the game ball B is received in the big prize opening 2005 when the big prize opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, ten or thirteen) from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the winning ball opening 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the winning ball opening 2005 to receive the game ball B, it is possible to pay out a lot of the game balls B, and to entertain the player. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the big prize opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the big winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or to the big winning opening 2005. An open / close pattern that closes the game ball B in an unacceptable state when one of the conditions for accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied (a single open / close pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated by repeating two rounds for “2R big hit”, five rounds for “5R big hit”, and 15 rounds for “15R big hit”.

  In “Big Bonus”, after the big hit game ends, the probability that a special lottery result such as “Big Bonus” will be drawn is changed (“probable hit”), or the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result is changed. ("Short-time hit") or "hit".

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are received from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and until the second lottery result is suggested. When the game ball B is received at the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started, so the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result drawn earlier is completed Is done. The number of reserved special lottery results to be held is up to four for each of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the first start port 2002 and the second start port Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not put on hold and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, a special lottery result is suggested under direct control by the main control board 1310X. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result based on the combination of the LEDs that are lit, after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on / off and blinked for a predetermined time.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is a state where the image sequence is changed and displayed in a state where three image sequences composed of a plurality of designs are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Are stopped and displayed, and each of the pattern rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed symbols are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than “losing”, after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is selected. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  It should be noted that the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern string fluctuates and the confirmed image is changed). The time until the display) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, or inhibit the rotation operation. The press operation unit 303 can be raised and made conspicuous by 367, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the effect operation unit 301.

  In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 appropriately uses each decoration board provided in the door frame 3, each decoration board provided in the game board 5, the front effect unit 2600, the back effect unit 3100, and the like. It is possible to perform a moving effect or the like, it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, when the player should perform an operation that should be mistaken or not, the correct operation is performed. To that effect to the player. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, when the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operating unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

[15-3. Driving into the second game area (right-handed)]
A game ball B that is launched to the upper part of the center member 2500 with a specific firing force stronger than a predetermined firing force (a launching force that jumps over the first game area 5a1) is a tapered corner of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832. It rides on the upper surface behind the part 832b or rolls in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and moves to the back of the communication passage part 5a4. When the game ball B rides on the upper surface behind the tapered corner portion 832b of the step portion 832a of the enclosure frame 832, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 and enters the opening portion 848bH of the discharge portion 848b. Alternatively, even when the game ball B rolling while being in contact with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 stalls and falls before the opening 848bH of the discharge portion 848b, it rolls on the upper surface of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500 as it is. Enter the opening 848bH of 848b. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848bH of the discharge part 848b is released into the left part 5a2b of the second game area 5a2 through the discharge part 848b. As described above, the game ball B released to the left portion 5a2b has a low probability of entering the first receiving port 2006, and has a higher probability of entering the second receiving port and passing through the gate portion 2003. Thus, it is relatively easy to win a prize-winning opening 2005.

  On the other hand, most of the game balls B that roll while colliding with the inner surface of the outer rail 1001 by centrifugal force and collide with the stopper 1006 enter the opening 848aH of the discharge portion 848a. As shown in FIG. 132, the game ball B that has entered the opening 848aH of the release portion 848a is released to the right side 5a2a of the second game area 5a2 through the release portion 848a. As described above, the game ball B released to the right portion 5a2a has a larger probability of entering the first receiving port 2006 than the probability of entering the second receiving port or the probability of passing through the gate portion 2003. It is set and can enter the first receiving port 2006 at an early stage and be processed in the same manner as an out ball.

  Therefore, in the gauge configuration of FIGS. 131 and 132, the handle 182 is adjusted to be slightly weaker than the strongest level so that the game ball B tries to enter the discharge portion 848b from the communication passage portion 5a4, and thus the second game region 5a2. The winning prize opening 2005 can be efficiently and safely reached through the left side portion 5a2b.

  When the right-handed game ball B passes the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310X. If the lottery normal lottery result is “normal hit”, the second start opening that is closed 2004 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game ball B is received at the second start port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633. Paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is suggested (for example, 0. 0). 01-60 seconds, also called normal variation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed. The shorter the normal variation time, the more the game balls B that have been drawn “normal hit” in the gate unit 2003 are received in the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, since the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 after the game ball B passes the gate part 2003 until the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is put on hold until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result ends. In addition, the number of hold of the normal lottery result is up to 4 and the upper limit is discarded without being held even if the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating the hold.

[16. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 175 is a flowchart showing an example of main control-side power-on processing, FIG. 176 is a flowchart showing continuation of main-control-side power-on processing in FIG. 175, and FIG. 177 is an example of main control-side timer interrupt processing. 178 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, FIG. 179 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process, and FIG. 180 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process. First, various random numbers used for game control will be explained, followed by the behavior of the initial value update type counter, main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation The display process will be described.

[16-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and whether or not to generate a reach (reach out) when no big hit gaming state is generated Reach determination random number to be used for determination, and variable display to be used for determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for jackpot symbols to be used for determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed by the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 when generating the jackpot gaming state And the jackpot symbol initial value determining random number for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit game state Random number for small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display unit 1404 and the second special symbol display unit 1406 of the function display unit 1400, Random numbers for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol to be used for determining the initial value are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for normal symbol determination for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece that can accept the game ball of the second starting port 2004, and determination for this normal symbol per unit For determining the initial value of the normal symbol for use in determining the initial value of the normal random number and the variable display pattern of the normal symbol variably displayed on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 Random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns are prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the jackpot determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main random number built-in main random number circuit incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed in advance based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract other values within the specified numerical range one after another, and once all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value within the predetermined numerical range and Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeats such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a uses the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as the random number for determining the big hit It is supposed to be set as.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and a range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by one. This counter counts up from the normal value for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol is updated. Such a counter updating method is referred to as an “initial value updating type counter”. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 14 when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated when the power is turned on or in the main control side power-on process described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the memory as a numerical value is the checksum value stored in the main control power-off process (at power-off) When clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, such as when they do not match (sum value), the main control MPU 1310a has built-in random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbols. The fixed numerical range of the counter that takes out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and updates the random number for normal symbol determination based on the taken out ID code Et always performs initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the random value for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal per symbol is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. If the ID code is stored in the first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used, and initial value derivation processing is performed when clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. It is prevented from being analyzed by taking a two-stage security measure by executing and a second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

  Here, an advantage will be described in which an ID code is extracted from the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the extracted ID code is used as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. For example, a person who intends to illegally acquire a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method, disassembles it, and uses an ID code stored in advance in a nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if the counter value that is obtained illegally and the counter value for updating the determination random number per normal symbol and the determination value per normal symbol match can be grasped, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the reference numerals are given, the ID codes are completely different from the ID codes stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a ′ included in the other game board 5 ′. In other words, in the other game boards 5 ′, the timing at which the counter value for updating the random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value is also completely different from that of the acquired game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in other game boards 5 ', that is, other pachinko machines 1'. Even if an instantaneous power failure is generated at every predetermined interval and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at every predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed to open the game ball to the second starting port 2004. A gaming state that can be accepted cannot be generated.

[16-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to. This indicates the address accumulated on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under control by the main control MPU 1310a, as shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, main control side power-on processing is performed. When the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets the RAM access permission (step S10). The main control built-in RAM can be updated by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clear process (step S12). In this power failure clear process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input. The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated (step S14). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. It should be noted that since this is a very short time within the period from the start of the main control-side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14, in practice, the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed. An operator operates the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) This is a flag indicating whether or not various information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing various information and a value of 0 when not erasing various information. . Note that the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S16A and step S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not there is an operation of opening the main body frame 4 and turning on the setting key (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts a setting key into a detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and a setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a. The setting switch 1311a is set by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a) to the first ON position. The key is turned on, and the setting key is turned on from the setting switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the main body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, and the setting key 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied, it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. By determining and / or determining that the setting switch 1311a is not turned ON by a setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that a predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S18 that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S20B). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area described later)). This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the first ON operation is performed, and to change the setting value setting. The value is set to 1 when permission is permitted, and is set to 0 when permission to change the setting value is not permitted. Note that the value of the setting change permission flag CS-FLG set in step S20A and step S20B is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 can receive various commands from the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510. ) Can receive various commands.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning voltage when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that the power failure warning signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to the determination in step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description will be given later on that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S25). The setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 when permitting the setting change of the setting value and to a value of 0 when not permitting the setting change of the setting value.

  In step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value 0 when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG has a value 0, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is not permitted. Is determined (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when various information is erased and to a value of 0 when various information is not erased. In step S26, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete various information (step S28). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a uses the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later as the calculated checksum value (sum value). It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). In step S30, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores game information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off process described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not terminated normally. In the inspection process of the production line of the main control board 1310X, when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum is calculated in step S28 and the determination is made in step S30. A detailed description will be given later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S30, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When it is (value 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally, an error display process is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state where the error display processing has been completed is maintained, and the game cannot proceed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the power is turned on again. The error display process will be described in detail later. However, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM based on the checksum, or the main control side power-off process ends normally when the power is turned off. If it is determined that there is no error, an error message indicating that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) is displayed. In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it is determined that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in main control at power recovery. A RAM work area is set (step S34). In this setting, power recovery time information is read from a ROM (that is, main control internal ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Note that “power recovery” refers to a state in which power is turned on from a power-off state, a state in which power is subsequently recovered from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, and unauthorized means (for example, an unauthorized person is placed on the skirt of his arm). The main control board 1310X is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset, and the state after that is also included.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum value (sum value), and the like are changed by performing various processes thereafter. Therefore, the main control-side power-off process described later is terminated normally and the backup flag BK- If a value of 1 is not set in FLG, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process when the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (ie, 1), that is, when it is permitted to change the setting value. This is performed (step S37). In this setting change process, which will be described in detail later, the pressing operation unit of the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y is pressed based on a detection signal from the setting change button 1311b of the setting change board 1310Y. Each time, the set value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is generated when the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is operated from the first ON operation to the second ON operation. Based on the above, the changed set value is determined and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a.

  In the process of step S37 or the determination in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if it is determined to delete various information, the main control built-in RAM Are cleared except for the specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 in the main control built-in RAM. In the present embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when it is determined that various types of information are to be erased, the main control built-in RAM is always terminated when the setting change process ends. Clear all areas except for specific areas. Here, the “specific area” is a count of the number of game balls collected by the set value dedicated area in which the set value is stored and the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5 a formed in the game board 5. And an out-sphere counting dedicated area in which results (total number) are stored. The set value exclusive area stores a set value that is changed in a setting change process described later, and the out ball count exclusive area is a game ball collected by the out port 1008 that is counted in a ball count process described later. The count result (total number) of numbers is stored.

  The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs the RAM clear, and when various information is erased, the sum values do not match, or the main control side When the power-off process is not normally terminated, a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and a random number for normal symbol determination is updated based on the taken out ID code. An initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and this fixed value is used to determine the initial value of the above-mentioned normal symbol per-determining random number. Set to a random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main winning ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to the initial value 0.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT for monitoring whether or not the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as “the main control MPU 1310a”). The timer setting value is set in the “WDT control register”), the main control built-in WDT is started, and time measurement is started until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and the watch dock timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in “WDT clear register”), the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and timing is started, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time measured reaches the time set by the timer setting value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the process of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and starting the time measurement again. It can be monitored whether or not.

  Subsequent to step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 633) and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the peripheral control board 1510 are incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. ) Corresponding to the transmission serial port prescaler, the transmission speed is set and the parity is set, and the transmission serial port control register is set to initialize the transmission circuit and set transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various types of inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the testing institution of the gaming machine.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main random number circuit with built-in main control (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit gaming state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating by hardware. In addition to setting to acquire a random number by latching it, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at a high speed one after another based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and determined in advance. When all the values in the numerical range have been extracted, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the predetermined numerical range is determined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The other values are extracted one after another without overlapping. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is acquired from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a jackpot determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting for a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, the power is turned on to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. The transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information by creating a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command To remember. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various commands are read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored. is there. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later. A detailed description will be given later of reservation setting of a command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning voltage as described above. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S54 that the main control MPU 1310a has not received the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs non-winning random number update processing (step S56). In the non-winning random number update process, the above-described reach determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big hit symbol initial value determining random number, small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If there is no power failure warning signal input, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step S56. Step S54 to Step S56 are repeated. The processes in steps S54 to S56 are referred to as “main control side main process”.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of various information including game information and other information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process that started outputting the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process in step S12 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signal output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, storage of game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access prohibition (step S68). Since the RAM access prohibition setting prevents access to the main control built-in RAM, it is possible to prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. When the control cannot be performed, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a performs this main control side power-on process again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcedly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and again executes the main control-side power-on process. . That is, since the main control side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored by executing the main control side power-off process at the time of power-off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when a forced reset is applied by the built-in reset circuit. The value (sum value) cannot match, and a check sum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and in the process of step S38, a specific area is excluded from all areas of the main control built-in RAM. It will be completely erased (cleared).

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Subsequently, in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the game backup information is stored by an illegal act.

  When the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in the determination in step S25, that is, when the setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process in step S37 is performed. In the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (cleared) except for the specific area. In the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1). In other words, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, in the process of step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is completely erased (except for the specific area). In this way, when the pressing operation unit is operated at the time of power recovery (more precisely, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f), the set value is determined to be changed. When a setting change that can be performed is performed (when the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is because when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, probability fluctuation (probability change)). In the case of a winning state, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information described above until the next business start, so a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can use the RAM clear switch 1310f. It is necessary to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 by pressing the pressing operation portion. In addition, when the setting value is determined to be changed, if the setting changing process is performed (as a result, even if the current setting value is maintained, the setting value obtained by the setting value before the setting changing process is obtained). It is necessary to delete (clear) the game backup information including various information such as game information etc. from the main control built-in RAM. Since this key is an important key that allows confirmation of the set value, etc., only a limited number of persons including the store manager of the game hall are permitted and limited to 2 to 3. In this embodiment, the set value Even if the change is not determined, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a specific person, a fire clerk such as a store clerk in the game hall presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f to Power supply for machine 1 By performing the input, so that can be erased from the main control chip RAM game backup information (clear).

  Here, the point where the presence / absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence / absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is not determined, that is, after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 and the subsequent processing is promoted. The problems in will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. The charged electric charge is applied as +5 V DC for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or instantaneous interruption. That is, even when the power supply from the island facility in the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC + 5V, so that the island in the game hall The main control side power-off process can be completed within a period from when the power supply to the facility is cut off until a time of about 7 ms elapses. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process described later is being performed, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the island facilities of the game hall In the case where the power supply from is cut off, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots) in the wait time standby process in step S22 at the time of power recovery. If a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs immediately before the standby time is reached, a hardware called electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Although the electric charge charged to is applied as DC +5 V, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42 within the period of about 7 ms, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52, whereby the main control side described later Even if timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, the main control side power It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control side power-on process is started again at the time of power recovery without storing the calculated value of the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control side power-on process is started at the time of the current power recovery, and the wait time waiting process in step S22 is completed without causing an instantaneous power failure or a power failure. Thereafter, in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the value calculated in the checksum based on the contents of the checksum is compared with the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum value should match. In step S38, all of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area. In other words, even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk at the time of power recovery and there is no indication by the staff such as a game hall clerk such as RAM clear, it is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM. There is a problem that the game backup information described above is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in this embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. This prevents the game from progressing. Although the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24. If the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the game cannot proceed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter). Can be prevented from being updated, and the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. Thereby, when restarting, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X determines that the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation value stored in step S64. Therefore, the game information that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when a power failure warning signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X is proceeding with the game (when it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the pachinko machine Even if the power to 1 is cut off, the game information by the progress of this game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) are supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by supplying the power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2. Backup information for storing various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X can complete the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X, which is configured by steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop. When the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 matches the checksum calculation result in the backup process (that is, the checksum calculation value stored in step S64). Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure that is stored in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310X can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, thereby allowing the contents of the main control built-in RAM to be reset. The main control side power-off process can be started again without updating the process at all. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, As a result, it is possible to reliably complete the main control side power-off process within the “instantaneous power failure or power failure securing period” of about 7 ms. That is, in this embodiment, when the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery, a power failure from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to an instantaneous power failure or a power failure, and the main control side The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as a direct current + 5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power outage or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22. In step S24, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input. If a power failure warning signal is input, the determination in step S24 is performed. Returning again, as long as the remain input power failure warning signal, by repeating the determination of the step S24, so as not be able to perform the progress of a game in.

  By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the step after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is performed in step S52. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) are determined by preventing the progress to the control flow of setting and starting main control timer interruption processing described later. The system adopts a mechanism that can avoid updating various information) including information indicating the value of the counter for use. Thus, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment in the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output determination) The various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for the counter), etc.) is completely covered by software so that the main control side power-off process is reliably completed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and By configuring it in two parts, such as various pieces of information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter), etc., so that it is not changed at all. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and other information (for example, various information including the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter)) are reliably prevented from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, a description will be given of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50. In step S50, as described above, the fact that the power has been turned on (recovered) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. In order to communicate, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and main control is built in as transmission information Store in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information for instructing the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405. Here, first, a problem in the case where the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, A problem will be described in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in the power-on main control return destination command is not performed in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls display of a big hit game state screen (for example, a big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310X drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs when the special prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member and then power is restored, the main control board 1310X performs main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or power failure is restored, so that the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the special winning opening 2005 opens and closes. It will transfer from the state closed by the member to the open state.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310X and returns when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power restoration and the short-time state. However, when the main control board 1310X is generating a big hit gaming state as a gaming state, if an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is in the main control board 1310X when power is restored. Even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned according to the probability and the short time state based on the probability and the short time state indicated by the power-on state command received from It is not possible to indicate at all which round of the That is, for example, a main winning board 1 count display command that indicates the number of game balls that have been entered into the big winning opening 2005 and detected by the big winning opening sensor 2403 when the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the main control board. Even if 1310X transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the short time state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display which round of the big hit gaming state (that is, how many rounds).

  In such a situation, for example, when the main control board 1310X finishes four rounds (fourth round) of the big hit gaming state, the driving of the attacker solenoid 2405 is stopped and the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. The main prize winning port 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the existing state to the closed state (that is, the closing start of the round winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2100) from the main control board 1310X to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310X starts the fifth round of the big hit gaming state (the fifth round), the attack solenoid 2405 starts to be driven and the big winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member. (In other words, the fifth round of the big prize opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the command from the main control board 1310X to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen of the start of the five rounds of the big hit gaming state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time reduction state, and displays it on the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, for example, a screen (for example, a player indicating that the movable piece is open) that indicates that the game ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. When the peripheral control board 1510 performs display control on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310X drives the start opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece, and the second start opening is displayed. When an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs while 2004 is open, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310X sets the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the driving state of the start port solenoid 2404 is started by restoring the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. And thus the transition to the state for closing the second start hole 2004 by closing operation.

  However, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310X and returns when power is restored. Thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310X is in a gaming state and is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second start port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, a momentary power failure or power failure occurs. When the power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time-short state based on the probability and the time-short state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and returned, the gaming state is such that the gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmission screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player who sits in front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power recovery, the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In some cases, it is forgotten that the gaming state is enabled. In such a case, the gaming state is restored to the second starting port 2004 as a gaming state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the game is not displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 at the time of power recovery (that is, the game instruction screen for entering the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed. There was also a problem that the player would not know what kind of game he played.

  As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power failure or power outage, and then recovers after power failure, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310X is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the power-on state command And the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on A main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310X. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the attacker solenoid 2405 starts to be driven as the return destination of the main control board 1310X, and the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening / closing member. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be informed of the transition to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 has a screen that specifies that it is the fourth round of the big hit gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds it is) Can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit gaming state and the attack A screen indicating that the winning prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member by starting the driving of 2405 (for example, “It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. A game ball is inserted into the big winning opening. The screen that tells the player the message “Please play the game to play a ball” is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine will receive the big prize opening 2005 In the above example, for example, a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 becomes advantageous to the player. If a power failure occurs after a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, driving of the start port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece as a return destination of the main control board 1310X. A screen that informs you that the second starting port 2004 is open (for example, “The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the second starting port can enter the game ball. Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine returns power to the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. Can be instructed to play a game.

  Thereby, when an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 can be finely instructed on the main control board 1310X side. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player who sits in front of a pachinko machine mistakes for a momentary power outage or power failure, and then recovers after power recovery, and the pachinko machine system appears to be in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. This can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310X, when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 Calculation and determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310X is turned on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board is configured by the above-described processes of steps S58 to S68, which are backup processes, and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot be matched, and are always cleared in step S38 except for the specific area in the entire area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command classified as power-on, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, a power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball Only three commands, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In these main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, first, a power-on state command is transmitted, followed by a power-on main control return destination command, followed by a power-on main prize ball number. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By using this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the power-on state command is sent from the main control board 1310X as the first command. It is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). When RAM is to be cleared, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), Information indicating which state (probability and time-short state) to return from among the low-probability time-short state, high-probability time-short state, low-probability non-time-short state, and high-probability non-time-short state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And information to be displayed. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310X), What kind of game specifications (for example, when the probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next jackpot gaming state occurs, in addition to the number of special symbol variations (for example, 30 times or 70 times) It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine or the like) in which the probability variation occurs in the state of

  In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control board 1310X, the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed. Then, the worker on the production line is responsible for the copyright of which work among the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). In order to manufacture the control board 1310X, the main control board 1310X is lost to the production line, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among a plurality of types of works. Despite the fact that the main control board 1310X is flowing on the production line to manufacture 1310X, the main control board 1310X is used to manufacture the main control board 1310X for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work of comic F). There is also a misunderstanding and misunderstanding that it is flowing in the production line.

  For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310X in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, an operator of the manufacturing line can It is impossible to confirm which copyright of the work the main control board 1310X is manufactured, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is also not possible to confirm what type of game it is and what type of game it is (a game specification or ST machine that will continue until the next jackpot gaming state occurs when probability changes occur).

  As a result, when the main control board 1310X is manufactured in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of kinds of works is mixed, the main control board for the copyrights of the plurality of kinds of works is mixed. With 1310X mixed, the game board 5 is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310X. For this reason, an operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310X, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 decreases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310X is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on state command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for main prize ball number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a main control timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, an operator of the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310X in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection apparatus causes the main control board 1310X. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described max type indicating the model type, middle type, And a series code for specifying which of the types is a sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, when probability change occurs, the next jackpot game state is In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, the probability change with a limited number of special symbol variations By checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine, etc.) that causes It is possible to determine whether it is a product, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, or sweet digital type) and what kind of game It is also possible to determine whether the specifications (game specifications or ST machines that will continue until the next big hit gaming state occurs when probability fluctuations occur).

  Thereby, when manufacturing the main control board 1310X in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310X for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line The operator can accurately discriminate the model type of the main control board 1310X, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by visually checking the inspection monitor. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310X corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered due to the work of attaching 1310X to the game board 5. Therefore, it can contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[16-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS. 175 and 176.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 177 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks each composed of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank. In the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the process of saving each register to the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the first special symbol display 1404 and the second special symbol display 1406 of the function display unit 1400 are turned on in accordance with a variable display pattern determined in a special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the normal symbol and normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the normal electric accessory control process described later, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the various commands transmitted by the client is input, a time such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition thereof Perform management. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, a detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002. Signal, a detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first start port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403, a first receiving port sensor Detection signal from 2406, detection signal from magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from door frame opening switch 4a, detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, setting switch A signal from 1311a, a signal from the setting switch button 1311b, and the outlet left sensor 100 A payout ACK from the payout control board 633 that indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the detection signal from the a, the detection signal from the out mouth right sensor 1008b, and a prize ball command transmitted in a prize ball control process described later. Each signal is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, when the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402 are read, the start port winning command classified into the other corresponding to this is transmitted as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, the corresponding start opening winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input process is started in a state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal process). First, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, each is read again as the second time. Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that do not match the result are treated as having no incoming game balls or being ignored.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those subjected to the empty terminal processing) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading to be compared and the twice reading to be compared for the second time to the fourth time, it is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering or noise. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first start port sensor 3002, the first A detection signal from the first start port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the start port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2402, Detection signal from the sensor 2403, detection signal from the first receiving sensor 2406, detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), detection signal from the door frame opening switch 4a, Detection signal from main body frame opening switch 4b, signal from setting switch 1311a, signal from setting switch button 1311b, detection signal from out port left sensor 1008a, detection signal from out port right sensor 1008b, prize ball control described later It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command transmitted in the process.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal failure monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal trouble monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the empty terminal process is performed based on the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information acquired in the switch input process in step S104 whether or not the logical state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal process among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to the empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is classified into a notification display that indicates that a failure has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number described above are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number that is updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is also updated. The random value for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby improving the randomness. . On the other hand, since the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol determination is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value. To the maximum value, the value is incremented by adding 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the random number for determining the initial value for determination per normal symbol is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the random number for normal symbol determination, the random number for initial value determination for big hit determination is updated by this winning random number update processing. The random value for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for drawing one value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol. .

  In the present embodiment, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number and the small hit symbol initial value determining random number are set in step S56 in the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in FIG. The winning random number update process and the winning random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively. However, each time an interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-winning random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, a random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol Also, a mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol only in the non-winning random number update process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball count process (step S107). In this ball count processing, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the out-port left sensor 1008a is input and a game area 5a that is partitioned into the game board 5 is formed. When the out-port left sensor 1008a detects a game ball collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the out-port 1008, the value 1 is set to the value of the collected-ball counter that counts the number of game balls collected through the out-port 1008. In addition to performing an addition (incrementing) operation, a game signal collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned by the detection signal from the out port right sensor 1008b and formed in the game board 5 is output. When the right sensor 1008b detects, the count of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is counted. The value of the recovered ball counter adds the value 1 (increments) performs computation. That is, in the ball count processing, when the out mouth left sensor 1008a detects a game ball collected by the out mouth 1008 and the out mouth right sensor 1008b detects a game ball collected by the out mouth 1008, Then, the value 2 is added to the value of the collection ball counter. The main control MPU 1310a sets the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 in the out ball counting dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to storing, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. Further, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball collection command to notify that when the value of the collected ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10. And stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The main control MPU 1310a, when the value of the collection ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value 65535), and further adds (increments) the value 1 to the value of the collection ball counter. The counter value overflows to a value of 0, and an operation of adding from this value 0 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created based on this input information, or the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 Or create a self-check command to check the connection state between the boards. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main award ball number information output signal is set in order to convey the fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area, and the award ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the award ball When a payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 is issued. Created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10 based on this input information. In order to notify that, a main prize ball number information output command classified into others is created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is obtained by reading the input information from the input information storage area described above and based on this input information, that is, the general winning port 2001 and the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Based on the game balls that have entered the various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as “various winning ports provided on the game board 5”) such as the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005, etc. The number of game balls to be released is counted, and is stored and updated in the award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. The input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball is added based on this input information, and the value indicating the added number is 10 When the number of game balls is over (that is, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to inform the fact, and as transmission information The award ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM described above is stored in the output information storage area, and the value indicating the number of balls exceeding the value is used as the main prize ball number information output determination counter value. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command reception process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information that informs the payout control board 633 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU 1310a reformats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16 bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error canceling navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor main side 3002a is compared with the logic of the detection signal from the first starter sensor slave side 3002b, If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball having approximately the same diameter or a ball having approximately the same diameter) with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, piano wire, wire or catheter) attached. It is judged that fraudulent acts (hereinafter referred to as “radio wave irradiation goto”) by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter are added, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment) To do. The value of this radio wave counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave exposure is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on the interrupt period of 4 ms in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) ), A radio wave irradiation gossip command that is classified into a notification display indicating that radio wave got is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goat will be briefly described. An illegal ball (a game ball or a metal having almost the same diameter as it) attached with a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire or a catheter). A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first start port 2002, and the first start Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in a region where the game ball passing through the mouth sensor is detected (the ball passage detection region of the first start port sensor). Thus, when radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor (that is, when radio wave irradiation is turned on), the logic of the detection signal from the first start port sensor is While the logic is that the game ball is not detected, when the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first start sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected. . In other words, in the state where the game ball is stopped in the ball passage detection area of the first start port sensor, the ball passage detection of the first start port sensor is repeated by repeatedly performing radio wave irradiation ON or radio wave irradiation OFF. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be created in a pseudo manner and output from the first start port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starter sensor main side 3002a and the first starter sensor slave side 3002b are larger than the false detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation spot can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball with a flexible string-like operation line attached is struck into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 into the game area 5a and enters the first starting port 2002. An area for detecting a game ball passing through the first start port sensor main side 3002a (a ball pass detection area of the first start port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing through the first start port sensor sub side 3002b Even if a stopped state can be formed in the area where the movement is detected (the ball passage detection area of the first starter sensor slave side 3002b), the player who performs the fraudulent action turns on the radio wave irradiation or the radio wave irradiation. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002b are always different by turning OFF or repeating the operation. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is classified into a notification display informing that radio wave irradiation got is performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation got by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall can find the radio wave got at an early stage. It is like that.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 is input, the fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as “magnet goto”). And the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by 1 (incremented). The value of the magnet goto counter is incremented every time it is determined that radio wave irradiation got is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. The value 0 (zero) is set as the value. When the value of the magnet goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection process is performed by the main control timer interrupt process) .), A magnet goto notification command classified into a notification display for indicating that radio wave irradiation is being performed is created and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. In the present embodiment, it is possible to contribute to the fact that an attendant such as a clerk of a game hall can find a magnet goto at an early stage by reliably detecting and notifying the magnet goto by such a mechanism. It has become.

  Further, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, when input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a detection signal from the big prize opening sensor 2403 is input when not in the big hit gaming state (big prize opening) In the case of occurrence of an abnormal prize winning such as when a game ball enters in 2005), a prize abnormality display command that is classified into an alarm display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the radio wave irradiation goat and / or the magnet goto is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 1 as the fraud detection, while the radio wave irradiation goto and the magnet are detected. When the goto is not detected, the fraudulent act detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as the fraudulent act is not detected. The fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, a value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. In addition, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning a prize opening, a value 1 may be set in the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a firing permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted is set. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a determines, based on the value of the above-described cheating detection flag FD-FLG, that the cheating detection flag FD-FLG is 0, that is, that cheating is not detected. Sometimes it is set to the firing permission logic as the logic of the firing permission signal and stored in the output information storage area described above as output information, while when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, fraud When it is determined that this is the detection, the firing permission logic is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) inverted as the logic of the launch permission signal, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

  Subsequent to step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, a latch signal is output to the main random number circuit with built-in main control, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main random number circuit with built-in main control when the latch signal is input Obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, the obtained random number value is set as a jackpot determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. (Determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state (referred to as “special lottery”)) or taking out the value of a counter for updating the big hit symbol random number and determining the probability variation hit stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM It is determined whether or not it matches the value (determination of whether or not probability fluctuation is generated).

  Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of probability change) set higher than that at the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set for the low probability as the range of the big hit determination value (the jackpot determination range), which is read from the normal determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value for the high probability. 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored jackpot determination value matches, the jackpot determination random number (that is, the random value acquired from the hard random number latch register incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the jackpot determination range. Depending on whether or not.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first start port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are the second start port sensor 2402. If it is based on the above, a variety of commands related to special figure 2 tuning effects are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. The first special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 or the second special symbol display 1404 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. Set the output of the lighting signal to the two special symbol display 1406, and store it in the output information storage area described above as output information That. Also, depending on the gaming state to be generated, for example, when a big hit gaming state is entered, various commands classified as jackpot related (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 closing display command, a large winning combination, A winning opening 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2405 is operated to open / close the opening / closing member. When the output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the special winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state is two times, the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 Points to the 2 round indicator lamp to light the 2 round indicator lamp The signal output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp of the round display 1408 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The lighting signal is output to the status indicator 1401 of the function display unit 1400 so that the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or the presence / absence of the probability variation is lit in a predetermined color. Is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the counter value or the like for updating the above-described normal symbol determination random number is extracted and gate information of the main control built-in RAM is used as gate information Store in the information storage area.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third gate information storage. Store in the parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal holding display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on with the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the gate information described above, the output of the lighting signal of the normal hold indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened / closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result of the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that a gaming state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 is obtained, and a gaming state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-mentioned random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern, and various commands classified as related to the general pattern synchronization effect are created, and the transmission information storage described above as transmission information And setting the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 to light the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol. The output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the random number for judgment per ordinary symbol taken out matches the judgment value per ordinary symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect production are created and transmitted. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2404 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above, while the extracted normal When the random number for determination per symbol does not match the determination value per normal symbol stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the normal symbol variation display pattern random number described above. , Create various commands that are classified as related to the usual figure synchronization production, and store it in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern. Store in the storage area.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a set value confirmation display process (step S117). In this setting value confirmation display process, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 is detected. The detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b and the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is in the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by turning it 60 degrees clockwise from the clockwise direction, and the setting key 13 is turned on. The setting key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a causes the outer frame 2 to be turned on. When the setting switch 1311a determines that the main body frame 4 is open and the setting key ON signal is received, the setting key O When it is determined that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is satisfied, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. If it is determined that the setting switch 1311a is not turned ON by a setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied. In the set value confirmation display processing, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, a lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Is output and stored as output information in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the set value display permission condition is satisfied, the process ends and returns to this routine.

  Subsequent to step S117, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a, for example, outputs a main payout ACK signal when the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2405 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the winning prize opening 2005 or a starting opening solenoid 2404 that opens and closes a movable piece. 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output signal, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals related to games such as information output signals are sent to the payout control board 633. Output a firing permission signal set in the firing permission logic or the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, or the counting result of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 ( The display signal is output to the base monitor 1310h for displaying the total number), or the lighting signal for displaying the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. Or

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, and classified as related to the jackpot. Various commands to be executed (for example, a winning prize 1 count display command corresponding to a winning prize count command based on a detection signal from the winning prize sensor 2403 when a game ball having entered the winning prize opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power-on, various commands categorized as related to ordinary drawing effects, various commands categorized as related to ordinary electric character effects, various commands categorized as notification displays, various types categorized as status displays Commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as other (for example, the main control board 1310X is provided in the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings, the main prize ball number information output signal is sent to the outside as the main prize ball number information. The main prize ball number information output command for instructing transmission to the hall computer via the terminal board 558 and various commands classified into specific histories (for example, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008) A ball collection command that reports that every time 10 balls are reached, a setting change command that reports that the setting value has been changed, or something that is abnormal (or cannot be trusted) stored in the main control built-in RAM An error display command to notify that the setting value is to be confirmed, and a setting key to confirm the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area (to be described later) in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. ON operation command, etc.) are stored. The main serial data consists of 3 bytes per packet. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a production variation having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum with the mode regarded as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, various commands are configured as main peripheral serial data, and are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. The main peripheral serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers at least the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission as main peripheral serial data from the transmission shift register. Can be done. When the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure after the power is turned on, this is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. In order to notify that power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as the main peripheral serial data, the power-on state command is configured in the order of status, mode, and sum value. The status, mode, and sum value that are sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and then constitute the main control return destination command when the power is turned on Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read out from the game backup information and the various information is Various commands may be stored. In such a case, first after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information among various information, then power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  When the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 reaches 10 each time a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ball collection command. For each ball collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, the out port 1008 at the out port 1008) is stored and stored in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). The total number of game balls to be collected) and the updated date / time are updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is turned off after the game hall business hours have ended without receiving the ball collection command, the last counted value (that is, the game ball collected at the outlet 1008) Sphere collection information in which the total number of spheres) is associated with the updated date and time is stored and held in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall is opened, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 stores the ball collection information stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball collection information is created again from the start date, and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as the ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as the ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from the value 0 (zero) on that day, or from the value 0 (zero) on that day. You may use both the counted value and the sum total of the counted value so far.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. Thereby, the time count by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the timing by the main control built-in WDT is started again, so that the main control MPU 1310a is not forcedly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

  As described above, the main control board 1310X performs the above-described backup for storing game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be completed by executing the process. At the time of power recovery, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information on which the backup process was executed as a return destination of the game progress by the main control board 1310X. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing the driving state of the start-up solenoid 2404 and the attacker solenoid 2405, which are electrical drive sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine. Be able to. That is, in the main control board 1310X, the main control built-in RAM of step S34 in the same process shown in FIG. 175 in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power on in step S50 in the main control side power on process shown in FIG. In the setting of the work area, a power-on state command classified as power-on in order to notify that the power was turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, configure the power-on status command as the main peripheral serial data Send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then send to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, constituting the main control return destination command at power-on, Subsequently, the main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command upon power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and thumb value.

  For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X at the time of power recovery based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310X. It is possible to display effects. As a result, when a player is playing a game, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, and when power is restored thereafter, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure is restored immediately after power recovery. In addition, the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X can be displayed and notified in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is clumped, that is, in a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the player has failed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed by quickly returning to the gaming state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power recovery.

  Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process for the production line of the main control board 1310X, when the main control board 1310X is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the main-control-side power-on process shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the process shown in FIG. 176, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on state When the power is turned on, a main control return destination command at power-on and a main notification ball count information output judgment counter notification command at power-on are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM: a status command, a main control return destination command when the power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball information when the power is turned on In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As peripheral serial data, configure the power-on status command, send it to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, then configure the power-on main control return destination command, Status, mode, and sum value are sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process, followed by the main notification ball number information output judgment counter notification command when the power is turned on. Status, mode, and sum value In order, it transmits to the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process. The inspection apparatus for the main control board inspection process configures information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310X, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The above-mentioned series type for specifying the model type, max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying the type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specification (For example, in addition to a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, a game specification in which a probability change occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (ST Detailed machine information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process based on the game specification code for identifying the machine) It has become the jar.

[16-4. Setting change process]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current installation value as shown in FIG. 178 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum calculates various values stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculates the sum. The checksum is performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. This is the same process as the calculation of.

  Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU 1310a stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control-side power-off process (at the time of power-off) in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). In step S204, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determination in step S204 and the determination in step S206 are the same as the determination in step S30 and the determination in step S32 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG has game control information such as various information, a checksum value (sum value), and a backup flag BK-FLG. This flag indicates whether or not the data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control-side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process is not normally completed Is done.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204, or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When the value is 0, that is, when it is determined that the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the “normal range” is a value whose setting value can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value are set. Values up to 6 are preset. When the flowchart proceeds to the determination of step S208, it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM based on the checksum, or the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated when the power is turned off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or cannot be trusted). Therefore, in the determination in step S208, the main control MPU 1310a obtains the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200, and the set value 1 to the set value 6 It is determined whether or not any of the values is within the range, and when it is determined that the value is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S208 that the main control MPU 1310a is not within the normal range, the main control MPU 1310a sets a setting value 1 that is an initial value with respect to the setting value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination in step S208, any one of the set values 1 to 6 in which the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 is the normal range. However, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination in step S204 without performing the determination in step S208. In the determination at step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, the main control side power-off process has not been terminated normally. In some cases, the process proceeds to step S210, and setting value 1 which is an initial value is set for the setting value acquired in step S200. It may be.

  In the determination in step S206, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has ended normally, or in the determination in step S208. When it is determined that the MPU 1310a is in the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c to turn on the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S212).

  Subsequent to step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the set value on the setting display 1310g to the setting display 1310g and displays the set value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

  Subsequent to step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the setting switch button 1311b is operated (step S216). In this determination, the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is read, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is input. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b is being operated when the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is input, while the setting switch button when the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is not input. It is determined that 1311b has not been operated.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, the main control MPU 1310a performs an operation of adding (incrementing) the value 1 to the setting value and updating it (step S218).

  Subsequent to step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and updates the setting indicator 1310g. Is displayed (step S220).

  Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination in step S216, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button 1311b has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the enter key has been operated (step). S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a, and sets the setting key cylinder counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned on. Is rotated 120 degrees (that is, from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is set to ON) to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder in which the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting switch 1311a is turned on when the second ON operation is performed (by rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return and turning OFF, and further rotating 60 degrees counterclockwise). Based on the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a When the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the determination key is operated. On the other hand, when the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, the determination key is operated. Judge that there is no.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has not been operated, the process returns to step S216 to determine whether the setting switch button 1311b has been operated. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button 1311b has been operated, the processing in step S218 and step S220 is performed again, the determination in step S222 is performed, and the enter key is operated. If it is determined that there is not, the process returns to the determination in step S216 again, and when the setting switch button 1311b is operated until the determination key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one and updated every time the setting switch button 1311b is operated. If the setting switching button 1311b is not operated, the setting switching button 1311b is operated immediately before and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored until it is determined in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure is maintained in the main control. Since it is not stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the built-in RAM, it is discarded and the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is not changed.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the enter key has been operated, the updated set value is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). After completion of the processing in step S224, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and power is restored, the set value updated when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occurs is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Are stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area.

  Subsequent to step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is a setting key OFF operation (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a inserts the setting key into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a. When the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise so as to return to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder to be turned OFF, and the OFF operation is performed, the setting switch 1311a is turned OFF, and an OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a When the OFF signal is input from the setting switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. On the other hand, when the OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a is not input, the setting key is turned OFF. Judge that it is not.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key is not turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a returns to step S226 again and repeats the determination in step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

  On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, the main control MPU 1310a stops outputting the lighting signal for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g. Then, the updated setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

  Subsequent to step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1311c and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1311c (step S230).

  Subsequent to step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG (step S232). As described above, the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is set in the current setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a is operated in the first ON operation). This is a flag indicating whether or not to permit the setting change of the setting value 1 to the setting value 6 at the time when the setting value is changed. 1. When the setting change of the set value is not permitted, the value is set to 0. In the process of step S232, by setting the value 0 to the setting change permission flag CS-FLG, it is not permitted to change the setting value thereafter.

  Subsequent to step S232, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets transmission information (step S236), and then sets in step S236. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (setting change command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S238), and this routine is terminated. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 is shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control timer interruption processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initial setting in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is performed before the serial communication initial setting in step S44. The peripheral serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral serial data. This is prioritized before the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. This is to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by a setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the setting value whose setting has been changed and the completion of setting value storage. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information in which the setting value is associated with the date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). To do.

[16-5. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is a process performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

  When the error display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 179 (step S300). As described above, the launch permission signal notifies the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that launch of the game ball B is permitted. Can be informed that the launch is permitted, while if the logic is set to the launch stop logic (the launch non-permission logic) that is the reverse of the launch permission logic, the launch can be stopped (not permitted). .

  When the error display process which is this routine is started, the main control MPU 1310a cannot perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 176, and therefore the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The control-side timer interrupt process cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting process in step S113 in the process cannot be performed. The firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the fire permission logic.

  In step S300, the main control MPU 1310a uses the logic of the launch permission signal to reliably prevent the game ball B from being fired even after the error display process, which is this routine, is started after power is restored. Is set to the firing stop logic (launch non-permission logic), and is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with a reset function.

  Subsequent to step S300, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S302).

  Subsequent to step S302, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S304). In step S304, a lighting signal for lighting all the various displays of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

  Subsequent to step S304, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial setting (step S306), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S308), and then sets in step S306. Peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing for transmitting the transmission information (error display command) as main peripheral serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 is performed (step S310), and this routine is terminated.

  The serial communication initial setting in step S306 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S310 is the same as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 178 and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120. When the error display process is completed, as described above, an infinite loop is entered, and the state where the error display process is completed is maintained by this infinite loop, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step 306, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S308 in the peripheral control substrate transmission command transmission processing in step S310 is used as the peripheral serial board as the peripheral control board. 1510.

  The error display command is a command for notifying that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays error display history information stored in a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time). ).

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the message image of white characters “Error has occurred” in the blue background image in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Is displayed, and an announcement that “an error has occurred” is set to the maximum volume, and control is performed from various speakers (vibration speaker 354, top center speaker 462, top side speaker 464, main body frame speaker 622, etc.). I do.

[16-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This set value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S117 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 180 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in the setting value exclusive area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When the value is not confirmed, the value is set to 0.

  In the determination in step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is 0, that is, when the setting value is not confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not there is an operation of opening the body frame 4 and turning on the setting key. Is determined (step S352). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, detects from the body frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The setting key is inserted into the signal and the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting switch 1311a). The setting switch 1311a is turned on by the turning operation and the first ON operation is performed, and the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the setting key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a. And the setting switch 1311a is determined to be ON by the setting key ON signal. Accordingly, it is determined that a predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied, while it is determined that the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b. And / or by determining that the setting switch 1311a is not turned ON by a setting key ON signal, it is determined that a predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined set value display permission condition is not satisfied, the present routine is terminated, while the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. Is set to the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S354), and then the current installation value is acquired (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S356, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g to the setting indicator 1310g and displays the setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. (Step S358).

  Subsequent to step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360). ), This routine is terminated. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The ON operation command of the setting key indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been started (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is confirmed). It is a command to convey.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, it confirms the setting key ON operation history information (set value is stored in the internal RAM of the real time clock IC (not shown)). Information in which the effect and date / time are associated with each other).

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key ON operation command, the above-described ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information are described above. Thus, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition that allows specific display history information to be permitted to be displayed is established. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 allows a person who confirms the specific history information in a state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 and press the pressing operation unit 303. By performing the above, the display is switched from the previously displayed image to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information, and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not the value 0 (value 1), that is, when the setting value is confirmed and displayed, the main control MPU 1310a has the setting key OFF operation performed. It is determined whether or not (step S362). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads the input information from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting switch 1311a to determine the setting switch 1311a. The setting key cylinder is turned 60 degrees clockwise to return to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting switch 1311a is turned off) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder which is turned on. By operating, the setting switch 1311a is turned off, and it is determined by an OFF signal from the setting switch 1311a. When an OFF signal is input from the setting switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF, while the setting switch 1311a. OFF signal from It determines that the setting key when not been a force not being OFF operation.

  If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU 1310a ends this routine as it is. A value 0 is set in the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG (step S364), and then the output of the lighting signal for displaying the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting indicator 1310g is stopped. Then, the obtained setting value is not displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S366), and then a setting key OFF operation command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The setting key OFF operation command is set (step S368), and this routine is executed. To the end. This setting key OFF operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. The setting key OFF operation command indicates that the setting value confirmation display process, which is this routine, has been completed (that is, the confirmation of the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been completed). It is a command that tells.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the predetermined specific history information display permission condition described above is not satisfied. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 performs control to display the above-described specific history information display image in the display area of the effect display device 1600, immediately before switching to the specific history information display image. The display is switched to the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 until it is restored.

[17. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 181 to 184. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing an example of the process when the payout control unit is turned on, FIG. 182 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the process when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 181, and FIG. FIG. 184 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described.

[17-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
First, when power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit 633a performs the payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. 181 to 183 under the control of the payout control unit 633a of the payout control unit 633a. . When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs the wait timer process 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X. The Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, the wait timer process 1 is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310X is operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f and does not instruct to perform the RAM clear when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI. It is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. On the other hand, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM clear is instructed. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 1 (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa does not operate the RAM clear switch 1310f, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0 (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, a prize ball information storage area) The logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. This is a flag indicating whether or not the payout information related to payout of the PRDY signal output setting information etc.) is to be erased, and is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs setting for permitting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined not to delete the payout information (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (at power-off) described later. (Step S526). In step S526, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that they match, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG determines whether or not the value is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  In the determination of step S528, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed, the payout control built-in RAM is set as the power recovery. Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU 633aa (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” includes not only a state in which the power is turned off from a state in which the power is turned off but also a state in which the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be erased, or in the determination in step S526. When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination in step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), that is, When it is determined that the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X as a power failure warning. Entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  In the determination in step S540, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a value 1 when determining that there is no input of a power failure notice signal (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 0, that is, 2 ms has not elapsed, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives a power failure notice signal. It is determined whether or not it has been done.

  On the other hand, in the determination in step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 2 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when it is determined that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310X have been normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, prize ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and payout is based on this output information. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310X are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310X, or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584 Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as the award ball number information output signal. Te and outputs to the external terminal board 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball number information is provided. The number of game balls that have been paid out by the payout motor 584 is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later. Is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the payout.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process in step S550 described later, and the stored value is updated.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball number information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the value of the read prize ball number information output determination counter exceeds the value 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 has reached 10 balls, the award ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls exceeding the number is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM described above as the value of the award ball number information output determination counter), and a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal, a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310X that informs that the main control board 1310X has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later, respectively, as input information Store in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, a ball bite determination time set as a determination condition when determining whether or not a ball bite state caused by the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, The skip determination time set when the fixed position determination of the payout vane 589 is not performed, and the determination condition is set when determining whether or not the game ball in which the lower tray 202 is stored is full. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number based on a detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual number It is determined whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not the game balls that are not consistent with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 are repeatedly paid out. At this time, time management of the judgment condition and the mismatch counter reset judgment time set is performed. For example, when the ball scratch determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball scratch determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the subtraction result is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gummy judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information used for various processes is set on the basis of payout information relating to payout (PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set).

  By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is being executed, even if the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the payout operation can be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit, while paying out the game ball to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the payout of the game ball cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery By restoring the values to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc., which are stored as the payout backup information and immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before stopping or power failure It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

  Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set in the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball play operation determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication processing, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before an instantaneous stop, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is impossible can be output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is supplied to the CR unit. It can be notified that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, when the port connection process in step S550 reads the CR connection signal from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, in order to inform that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is possible, PRDY When the logic state of the signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the game ball in which the above-mentioned lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 The number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 described above based on the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It is determined whether or not. For example, whether or not the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full is determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms, and the full tank and the ball shortage check process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank and ball shortage check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, the full tank information for notifying that the game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is full is stored in the state information storage area. To do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information that indicates that the lower tray 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number is also determined by using the timer interruption period 2 ms. When the detection signal from the ball break switch is turned ON, and when the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (2 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is When the transition is made from OFF to ON, the above-described ball breakage determination time is started in the timer update process in step S552. When the ball break determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball break determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball break detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and ball break check process. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball-cut detection sensor 574 is ON, the ball break is transmitted to indicate that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is greater than or equal to a predetermined number. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number. The ball breakage information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310X are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310X and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs main operation setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball play are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of winning ball stock) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-described ball break information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this ball break information Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number “1”)) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays based on the various information are created. To the main control board 1310X. For example, when the ball break information is read from the state information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not greater than a predetermined number based on the ball break information, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310X.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Following step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, and the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input in step S540, and this power failure warning If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, step S544 is performed. In step S546, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. In step S5 4 performs a CR communication process, performs a full tank and out of ball check process in step S556, performs a command reception process in step S558, performs a command analysis process in step S560, performs a main operation setting process in step S562, In step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S566, command transmission processing is performed. In step S568, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The contents of the main process of the payout control unit vary depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310X. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310X a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310X have been normally received in the port output processing of step S548. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa has received a power failure notice signal, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). The checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting for prohibiting access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in this order in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. For this reason, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and then the payout control unit power-on process is performed again. Note that the processing in step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and a payout control unit power-on process is performed by power recovery thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step S528, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process is normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[17-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 181 to 183.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 184 (step S590). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time this payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[18. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) illustrated in FIG. 151 will be described with reference to FIGS. 185 to 189. FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing an example of processing at power-on of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 187 shows an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 188 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and FIG. 189 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process. . In the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set as the highest priority as the interrupt processing priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit The order of V blank interrupt processing is set.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like integrated on a single semiconductor chip.

[18-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral controller power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 185 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting processing, processing for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, determination processing for hot start / cold start, processing for setting a wait timer after reset, processing for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a very short time. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is in a state in which interrupt permission is set. For example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, a command related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310X. And various commands such as commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition processing, calendar information specifying date and time and time information specifying hour, minute and second are acquired from a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current control information is acquired in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Set calendar information and current time information.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing this current time information acquisition process so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a peripheral control unit steady process to be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is set to 0 when not executing. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to notify that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the CPU returns to step S1006 again to check whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the process waits until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and then outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, the peripheral control unit steady process is to be executed, first, the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady process flag SP-FLG. Value 1 is set (step S1008). The steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer starting process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process to be described later is started, and the number of times that the 1 ms interrupt timer is started and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a rendering operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, and a press detection provided in the effect operation unit 300. Based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382, the rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 and Various information obtained by operating the press operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and the press operation) Based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to which the operation history information of the unit 303 is set). Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  Note that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. During demonstrations (demonstrations performed in a player waiting state) and productions, a lamp palette setting process is executed, and a player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation). When the one specified brightness value ranging from the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value that is the maximum brightness is set by operating the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), the set brightness The above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so that the specified value is obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates it on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing that exceeds the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is performed, outputting the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. Yes. This can prevent a delay in processing time, but a so-called frame drop occurs. However, a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a main body frame by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can give priority to effects such as music, sound effects, etc. according to various effects from various speakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter referred to as “various speakers”). Further, in this display data output process, the light emission data indicated by the pointer in the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is applied to the door frame 3. The data is output to various decorative boards provided and various decorative boards (including the panel drive board 1720) provided on the game board 5.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, in the sound data creation process described later, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs to the various speakers from the set output channel. Output. Thereby, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to indicate what screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. The pointer is updated.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is used to indicate the number of light emission data to be output from the head light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects and sound command data indicating the sound data of notification sound and notification sound arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The pointer is updated in order to instruct what sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, the number of the drive data from the head drive data is output. The pointer is updated to indicate whether to do so. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data is a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the process. In the motor and solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated every time its own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data to be performed, it is forcibly updated so as to instruct the drive data that should be instructed originally in the scheduler update processing.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310X are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this received command analysis process, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extract) Set in RAM of peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described brightness specification value, normal palette value, and special palette value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310X, and reads (extracts) light emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes lamp palette setting processing. Then, the player (or an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302, the pressing operation unit 303), and the first luminance specified value becomes the maximum luminance. When one luminance designation value up to 31 luminance designation values is set, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to become the set luminance designation value. It is like that.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a indicates that the command from the main control board 1310X received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start opening prize command for instructing the start opening start winning effect, a normal symbol Normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), symbol tuning effect start command for instructing the start of symbol tuning effect, symbol memory command output when the number of start pending changes, big prize opening It is analyzed whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command that is output every time a game ball is received in 2005, and it is recognized which game state is currently in effect.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310X are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis process, they are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes various commands. The various commands include various commands classified as related to Special Figure 1 tuned effects, various commands classified as related to Special Figure 2 tuned effects, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, Various commands categorized as related to the synchronized performance, various commands categorized as related to the regular electric role effect, various commands categorized as notification displays, various commands categorized as status displays, various commands categorized as related to tests, There are various commands classified into others and various commands classified into specific histories.

  It should be noted that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this received command analysis process, and includes various commands classified into specific histories, not shown. The specific history information is updated in the built-in RAM of the real time clock IC. Specifically, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a in this received command analysis process, and the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is ten. When a sphere collection command is included to notify that every time it is reached, the sphere collection information described above is updated and the sphere collection history information is stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) or the setting value is changed When the setting change command is transmitted, the setting value history information described above is updated and stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), or the content stored in the main control internal RAM is abnormal ( Or an error display command telling you that it is untrustworthy) A setting key for updating the error display history information and storing it in a built-in RAM of a real-time clock IC (not shown) or confirming a setting value stored in a setting value dedicated area (described later) in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM When the ON operation command is included, the above-described ON operation history information of the setting key is updated and stored in a built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

  In the received command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and includes the setting key ON operation command. Information, setting value history information, error display history information, and a specific history information display permission condition that allows specific history information such as setting key ON operation history information to be permitted to be displayed is established. In the state where the predetermined specific history information display permission condition is satisfied, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a allows the person who confirms the specific history information in the rendering operation unit monitoring process in step S1014 to rotate and press the rotation operation unit 302. Whether or not the pressing operation of the unit 303 is performed is monitored, and if it is operated, the display is switched from the image displayed so far to the specific history information display image for selectively displaying the specific history information. Screen generation schedule data to be displayed in the display area 1600 is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In this received command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and when a setting key OFF operation command is included, a specific history information display image is displayed in effect. If the image is displayed in the display area of the device 1600, the screen is switched to the screen generation schedule data for the image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 until immediately before switching to the specific history information display image, and is restored.

  In the received command analysis process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and includes an error display command. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, Screen generation schedule data for displaying a message image of white characters “An error has occurred” in the blue background image is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The sound generation schedule data to be played from various speakers is read from (extracted from) the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning processing, when various commands classified into notification display are included in the command analyzed in the received command analysis processing in step S1022, the abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electrical drive source schedule data, and the like are read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, the abnormality notification is performed in the order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notifications are automatically transitioned to. It is supposed to be. This allows you to monitor multiple anomalies at the same time without losing the information that an anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly after the occurrence of the anomaly but before resolving the anomaly Can do.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute and second, which is the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, is updated, and the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the updated time information. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process in step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data is obtained from the control ROM 1510b. Read (extract) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When the screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In the sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing in step S1020, and the sound command data pointed to by the pointer among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When the sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number defined in the sound command data. At the same time, set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, every time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d performs the sound volume adjustment operation signal based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and is set in this sound data creation process in the sound data output process of step S1018 Sound data is output to various speakers from the output channel. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects adapted to various effects flow from various speakers.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the volume from the mute to the maximum volume by the program. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a game hall clerk slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, although the production sound such as music and sound effects flowing from various speakers is reduced, the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction occurs in the player, or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the attendant such as the store clerk of the game hall from becoming aware of the occurrence of the malfunction or the player's fraud by the notification sound. Further, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or sound effect. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen (image) unfolded on the effect display device 1600 may be rendered more powerful, or may be shifted to a game state advantageous to the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the content stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the content stored in the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2 is copied to the SDRAM 1510c1, Copy and backup to the steady processing backup area provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as the completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and detects the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit steady processing”.

  In this peripheral control unit steady process, first, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1008, and the value 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer start process is started. , Step S1014,..., And step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process is completed, the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0. Become. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. A value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, which is executed in response to the input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[18-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be received is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 as shown in FIG. 186 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing in steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. It is set to a value of 0 when execution of the process is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, if the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1045 that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB. -A value 1 is set in FLG (step S1050), and this routine is terminated. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process. When the part steady process is not executed, the value is set to 0.

  In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. When completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled halfway and the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In step S1008 in the power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process), a value of 1 is set in the steady process flag SP-FLG to indicate that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. V blank signal interrupt processing, and at step S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady processing) in FIG. 185, the peripheral control unit steady processing is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine, and the steady processing flag SP-FLG is set in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is this routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not the execution of the peripheral control unit steady process has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a measure for the case where the peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed before the next V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady process, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, the next determination is made in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185. It is in a state of waiting until the V blank signal is input. That is, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped is about 66.6 ms. Normally, a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) in FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process. However, if there is a current peripheral control unit steady process that has been dropped as described above, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. No, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady process has failed, the consistency between the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the presentation progress state by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is timer interrupt control, is consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady process is lost, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the performance.

[18-3. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 185 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 as shown in FIG. 187 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the routine of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. It is a counter that counts the number of times a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33. .3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times before. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, then the second,... Will occur.

  In the determination in step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has started. When the determination is made, this routine is terminated as it is. In the present embodiment, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next generation of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is the peripheral control unit V as the priority of interrupt processing. Although set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs accidentally before the next V blank signal generation, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first 1 ms timer interrupt generation. ing.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. The number of times that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the pointer indicates the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. To do. Thereby, an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 or an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) ) Is driven according to electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5 are input, thereby history information (for example, original signals) of detection signals from the various sensors. Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided in the game board 5 The movable position is grasped by setting or acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a presentation operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, whereby history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, a rotation operation unit) 302 (rotation direction) history information, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of the operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up to the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are backed up. Copy and backup to a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set in different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1. , 1510c2 is set to a different area from the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided to SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process, various processes relating to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 185, various processes related to the effects in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed as the progress of effects within a period of about 33.3 ms. Yes. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to occur before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt. The start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, and after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is newly performed by the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress of the production.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is also generated in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that dominates the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt, A time shift due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed.

[18-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310X will be described. When the various control commands from the main control board 1310X are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a takes the main peripheral serial data as 1 byte (8 bits) from the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a. ) Is received in the reception buffer, and when this acquisition is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. The main circumference serial data is composed of 3 bytes per packet, the status is assigned as the first byte, the mode is assigned as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte and the total The sum value calculated is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 188 (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a receives 1 byte (8 bits) of information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that it is within the receivable period, 1-byte information received from the serial I / O port reception buffer of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and a value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (incremented). Step S1204). This reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When the value is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2. When the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode that is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC is not a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, is still in the second byte of the main circumference serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, when the reception counter SRXC has a value 3, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, at the second byte of the main peripheral serial data. When it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode that is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data from the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310X. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island equipment of the game hall. When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge is generated and noise is generated. The environment is susceptible.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. The sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310X. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data is changed to main peripheral serial data different from normal due to the influence of noise between the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the sum value that is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. Is determined, the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), This routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has 1 byte (8 bits) of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310X when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out. When it is determined that the period during which information can be received has been exceeded, or in the determination in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a obtains the sum value that is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 When it is determined that the sum calculated in step S1212 does not match, this routine is terminated.

[18-5. Peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interruption process executed when the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310X is input from the main control board 1310X will be described. When this peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1302). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, the routine ends as it is.

  On the other hand, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1302 that a power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not passed 2 macroseconds, the CPU returns to step S1302, determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and if a power failure warning signal is not input. When the determination is made, the routine is terminated as it is, while when it is determined that the power failure warning signal is input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds has elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, power saving processing is performed. This is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation of motors and solenoids provided in the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing the power, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive at least the period of 17 milliseconds so that the command being transmitted can be received. It is supposed to wait. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to the steady processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, returns to step S1312, and whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input. Determine whether. That is, it is determined indefinitely whether or not a power failure notice signal is input. By continuing to make an infinite determination in this way, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when determining that the power failure warning signal is not input in the determination of step S1312. While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312, that the power failure warning signal has been input, the CPU performs the WDT clear process in step S1314, and the peripheral control IC 1510a The CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 185 is started again.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure state is established by executing the WDT clear process in step S1314. It does not take. On the other hand, when the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted because the WDT clear process is not executed. It has become. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started erroneously due to noise or the like and the noise is generated beyond the period of 2 microseconds, the determination of step S1302 is passed. When the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed. It is possible to cope with such noise by automatically resetting and returning.

[19. Technical means, effects, etc.]
In addition, as described below, the above-described embodiment includes many technical means for solving the background art and the solution subject to Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-29741.

[19-1. Background art]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board having a gaming area in which a game is performed, and a door frame having a door window that closes the front side of the gaming board and makes the gaming area visible from the front. And playing the game in the game area visible through the door window so that the player can be entertained.

  As this type of gaming machine, a storage tray for storing game media for playing games is provided, and a bulging portion that bulges forward from below the door window on the front surface of the door frame, The thing provided with the decoration body attached to the upper surface is proposed (for example, prior patent document). According to the technique of this prior patent document, the appearance of the upper surface of the bulging portion can be improved by the decorative body.

  However, in the technique of the prior patent document, since the decorative body is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion, it is difficult to see the decorative body when the gaming machine is viewed from the front or the side. The decoration effect by the body was weak and the appealing power to the player was insufficient. In addition, when a player places his hand on the upper surface of the bulging part or places his hand on the storage tray, a part of the decorative body is hidden by the player's hand, for example, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. At this time, it is difficult for the player to notice the light-emitting decoration, and there is a risk that some players may feel lost because they are not aware of the light-emitting decoration, thereby reducing the interest in the game.

[19-2. Resolution issues]
In view of the above circumstances, there is provided a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player with the light-emitting decoration.

[19-3. Technical means for solving the problem]
Mean 1: In the gaming machine,
“A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front;
The front side of the main body frame is closed so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
The front end is attached to the bulging portion, forward of the front end of the storage tray, and forward from the front surface of the door frame base to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base. A protruding decorative body,
And a decorative body light emitting means for decorating the decorative body in accordance with a game state that changes as a game is played in the game area.

  Here, as “game”, “a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage is performed, and the game media to the specific entrance is placed. When a special lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific entrance for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by accepting the game media, so the game media is aimed at a specific entrance. `` Games to be struck '', `` Games to be struck by game media aiming at the entrance to which benefits including payout of game media are given '', `` Multiple games each with multiple designs provided with multiple games A game in which the rotation of each revolving body is stopped so that a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of game media is given after rotating the revolving body is given. Examples of the “game medium” include “sphere-shaped (game ball)”, “disc-shaped (medal)”, and the like.

  In addition, the “game area” in which the game is performed includes “a plurality of entrances to which a game medium is thrown in by a player's operation and a privilege including a payout of the game medium is given according to the reception of the game medium. `` Areas that are in play '', `` Each game is equipped with a plurality of symbols, each of which is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the insertion of the game medium, and the combination of symbols stopped by the player's stop operation '' The area | region where the some rotating body to which the privilege including payout | payout of a game medium is provided according to this is arrange | positioned "etc. are mentioned.

  In addition, the “main body frame” includes “a frame that can be opened and closed (rotatably hinged) with respect to a frame-like outer frame that is attached to an island facility of a game hall where a game machine is installed”, “a game machine Examples include those that are directly attached to the island facilities of the installed game halls, and those that are equipped with a game medium payout device for playing games.

  Furthermore, as the “bulging part”, in addition to the storage dish, “a thing equipped with an operation part operated by a player for playing a game”, “a storage dish for storing a game medium for playing a game” Equipped with "," equipped with a production operation unit that can accept a player's operation when a player participation type production is executed "," lending operation unit that lends game media for playing games " And the like ".

  In addition, examples of the “reservoir” include “a plurality of items that are separately provided in the vertical direction”, “a item that is provided with only one”, and the like.

  In addition, “decorative bodies” include “simulating a predetermined item according to the gaming machine concept”, “simulating a predetermined character according to the gaming machine concept”, “in accordance with the gaming machine concept” And the like imitating a predetermined scene ”. The reason why the distance from the front surface of the door frame base to the front end of the decorative body is within the range of 1/3 to 2/3 of the total width of the door frame base is that the distance is shorter than 1/3 of the total width. This is because the amount of protrusion to the front is the same as that of conventional gaming machines, and the appeal to the player cannot be sufficiently increased. If the distance is longer than 2/3 of the full width, the decorative body will protrude too far forward. This is because it may interfere with the player and may be difficult to select as a gaming machine to play.

  In addition, as “depending on the game state”, “games to the entrances arranged in the game area (for example, a general prize opening, a start opening, a big prize opening, an accessory prize opening, a V prize opening, etc.) “According to the acceptance of the medium”, “According to the fact that the game medium circulating in the game area has passed a specific area (eg, gate, warp passage, stage shelf, etc.)”, “Arranged in the game area “According to the result of special lottery drawn by accepting game media at the entrance (for example, start port)”, “Lottery by accepting game media at the entrance (eg, start port) arranged in the game area” Depending on the type of production (for example, reach production, jackpot production, lost production, etc.) for suggesting the special lottery result made, “multiple with multiple designs each triggered by the introduction of game media ”According to the rotation of the rotating body” In response to the combination of symbols of the stopped rotator after rotating a plurality of rotators each having a plurality of symbols each triggered by the input of the game medium, the game medium to be driven into the game area And “according to the length of the blank of the game medium to be driven into the game area”.

  In addition, as “decorative body light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold cathode tube”, etc. Can be mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine has a gaming board having a gaming area where the game is performed, a main body frame that holds the gaming board detachably from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base. A bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing games in the area, and attached to the bulging portion, in front of the front end of the storage tray and forward from the front surface of the door frame base A decorative body whose front end protrudes to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 with respect to the full width of the door frame base, and a light emitting decoration according to the gaming state that changes as the game is performed in the gaming area And a decorative body light emitting means.

  As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward in a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. In addition, the bulging portion includes a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. As a result, when this gaming machine is attached to the island facility of the gaming hall, the decorative body projects greatly forward under the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be seen, so that the decorative body is more conspicuous than other gaming machines. It is possible to increase the appeal of the player and to make it easier to select this gaming machine as a gaming machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward from below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage tray, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or places his / her hand on the storage tray, the portion hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body, When the decoration body light emitting means is used to make the light emission decoration, it is possible to make the player easily notice the light emission decoration of the decoration body, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game Can be made.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, if the decorative body is lit and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, the light will irradiate the player from below, and the player's line of sight is directed to the decorative body by the luminescent decoration of the decorative body In addition, by directing the player's line of sight toward the lower decorative body, it is possible to keep the inside of the game area away from the player's view and make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area. . Accordingly, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, winning prize winning opening, etc.) opens or closes. , Etc., by decorating the decorative body with the decorative body light emitting means, the player is focused on the decorative body below the game area, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area, By changing the production image, movable body, etc., it is possible to surprise the player and give a strong impact, to entertain the player, and to have something good for the player It can be thought that there is, and it can raise the expectation for a game and can suppress the fall of interest.

  Further, as described above, the decorative body can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decorative body light emitting decoration according to the gaming state and changing the effect in the game area. With the light-emitting decoration, the player can be informed of the arrival of an opportunity (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the decorative body decorates the luminous body. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly protruded forward, when the player tries to see the whole decorative body, the player sees the game machine away from the gaming machine. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  Note that the decorative body may be smoothly curved and protrude forward. Thereby, since the decorative body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, there is no possibility that the player will be damaged even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing causing injury, the player can select this gaming machine with peace of mind. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, it is desirable to attach a decorative body to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction. Thereby, the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the present gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to play with increasing appeal to the player. In addition, when the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward. Operation and handling of game media stored in the storage tray can be facilitated, and it is difficult for the player to be stressed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Moreover, you may make it equip a decoration body with the 1st decoration part extended in the semicircle shape so that it may bulge outward in the cross-sectional shape of a semicircular arc shape. As a result, the first decorative portion of the decorative body is shaped so that half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline of interest, and it is difficult to get injured even if the player touches at first glance. It can be recognized that the game is safe, and a reduction in interest in the game can be suppressed by reassuring the player. Further, in the case where the decorative body is provided with the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion, if the entire first decorative portion is illuminated with the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, it looks like an annular fluorescent lamp. It is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration, which can attract the player's attention strongly, and when performing light-emitting decoration, for example, if light-emitting decoration is performed so that light flows from one side, the inside of the donut Since the player can show the player a light-emitting effect as if the light is moving and rotating, it can surprise the player and think that there is something good, and raise the expectation of the game. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the decorative body is provided with a semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative part, the semi-circular cross section is arranged below the first decorative part so that the front end is located behind the first decorative part. You may make it further provide the 2nd decoration part extended in the semicircle shape so that it may bulge outward in the shape. Thereby, in the first decoration part and the second decoration part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage tray. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body appear larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that attracts the interest of the Further, in this case, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged above and below, the light emission is such that light is rotated by appropriately decorating each with the decorative body light emitting means. You can show the player a light-emitting effect that light moves up and down, entertain the player, and show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, and get bored of the player It can be made difficult to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the production | presentation operation part which can accept operation of a player according to a game state behind the front end in the upper surface of a decoration body. Thereby, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player operates the production operation unit, so that the player participation type The production can be enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed. At this time, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the rendering operation section is attached. When a participatory presentation is executed, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decoration body (production operation section) and the operation of the production operation section can be urged. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, when the production operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body or clothing from coming into contact with the production operation unit by the decoration body. Therefore, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the production operation unit, and to surely entertain the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when the production operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes largely forward, the production operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player. The progress of the game (for example, the game medium) so that the player participation type effect can be executed at an early stage by increasing the expectation for the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit. (Gaming operation of game balls), rotation start of the rotating body by inserting game media (medals), etc.) can be encouraged, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in games can be suppressed.

  In addition, when the production operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decorative body, the production operation unit includes an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and an inside of the rotation operation unit. It is desirable to provide a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player. As a result, a rotation operation unit that can be rotated as a production operation unit and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided, so that a rotation operation can be performed in a player-participation type production that allows the operation of the production operation unit to be accepted. And pressing operations can be appropriately combined to allow the player to operate, and can respond to effects requiring more complex inputs (player operations), so a wider variety of player-participation effects Can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less tired, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed. Further, in this case, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is displayed when the player participation type effect is executed. By illuminating, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the press operation unit), and the operation of the production operation unit can be urged, and the player can operate the production operation unit. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be accurately operated, and a player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, when an annular rotation operation unit and a pressing operation unit arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit are provided on the upper surface of the decorative body as an effect operation unit, the pressing operation is performed. The portion may be movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruded position that protrudes above the retracted position according to the gaming state. good. Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit protrudes upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Since it appears to bulge upward, it can make a large impact around the player by making the surroundings of the decoration larger, and make the decoration more conspicuous to increase appeal to the player than other gaming machines In addition to being able to attract the player's interest strongly to the pressing operation part by pushing the pressing operation part greatly upward, the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part is enhanced and the decrease in interest is suppressed. Can be made.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit in the ring of the rotation operating unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body is movable between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player operates the pressing operation unit at the protruding position. Cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that enables pressing operation, and a columnar center that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part and that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position You may make it comprise with a press operation part. Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operating part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the apparent impact can be increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type operation that operates each operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest Can do. Further, in this case, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the decorative body, and consequently, the rotation operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation is urged. It is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, when an effect operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, it is desirable to include an operation unit light emitting means for decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state. As a result, the effect operation unit can be illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means in accordance with the gaming state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, making the bulging part stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly, and the whole illuminating decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, in this case, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the effect operation unit by decorating the effect operation unit with the operation unit light emitting means, so that the player participation type effect for operating the effect operation unit is provided. When executed, the production operation unit can be illuminated and decorated to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit, and the player can be operated by operating the production operation unit. Entertaining and can suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, you may make it further equip the front surface of a door frame base with the peripheral decoration body which continues with the decoration body attached to the bulging part, and is extended so that the outer periphery of a door frame may be enclosed. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the gaming area can be decorated, the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. Further, in this case, it is desirable to include a peripheral decoration body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating the peripheral decoration body. Therefore, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the game area, and the player can enjoy the game in the game area and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Moreover, you may make it provide the effect display means which can display an effect image in the center in a game area | region in front view. Thereby, in addition to the game performed in a game area | region, a player can be enjoyed also by the effect image displayed on an effect display means, and the fall of a player's interest can be suppressed. In addition, during the display of the effect image by the effect display means, when switching the effect image, it is difficult to notice the change of the effect image by causing the decorative body to emit light and directing the player's line of sight toward the decorative body below the game area. can do. Then, when the player turns his gaze on the effect display means after the effect image is switched, the effect image can be surprised by the change of the effect image, and the effect image can be more enjoyed, and the effect can be produced in an instant. By switching the images, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 2: In the constitution of means 1,
"The decorative body is
It is smoothly curved and protrudes forward ".

  According to the configuration of the means 2, the decorative body is smoothly curved and protrudes forward.

  Thereby, since the decorative body that protrudes largely forward is smoothly curved, there is no possibility that the player will be damaged even if it comes into contact with the player. Therefore, since the player can recognize that the decorative body is not a dangerous thing causing injury, the player can select this gaming machine with peace of mind. It is possible to entertain the game with this gaming machine and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 3: In the constitution of means 1 or means 2,
"The decorative body is
It is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction ”.

  According to the structure of the means 3, the decorative body is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction.

  As a result, a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction. This gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine that plays with increased power. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward. ), Handling of game media stored in the storage tray, etc. can be facilitated, and it is difficult to give stress to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 3,
"The decorative body is
It includes a first decorative portion that extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape ”.

  According to the configuration of the means 4, the decorative body is provided with the first decorative portion extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape.

  As a result, since the first decorative portion of the decorative body extends in a semicircular shape so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section bulges outward, half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward. As a result, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player, allow the player to play in a calm mood, and concentrate the player on the game. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest, and to recognize that it is safe and hard to be injured even if the player touches it at first glance, and to make the player feel safe, Can be suppressed.

  In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion has a semi-doughnut shape, if the entire first decorative portion is illuminated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state, light emission like an annular fluorescent lamp The decoration can be shown to the player, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and you can raise the expectation of the game and suppress the decline of interest.

Means 5: In the constitution of means 4,
"The decorative body is
The front end is disposed below the first decorative portion so as to be located behind the first decorative portion, and extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape. It is further provided with a second decorative portion ”.

  According to the structure of the means 5, it arrange | positions under a 1st decoration part so that a front end may be located back rather than a 1st decoration part, and it may bulge outward in the cross-sectional shape of a semicircular arc shape on a decoration body. A second decorative portion extending in a semi-annular shape is further provided.

  Thereby, in the first decoration part and the second decoration part, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which half donuts are lined up and down, and to improve the appearance of the bulging part provided with the storage tray. In addition, since the tip of the second decorative portion is located behind the tip of the first decorative portion, the second decorative portion can emphasize the perspective and make the decorative body appear larger. It can be a highly appealing gaming machine that attracts the interest of the

  In addition, since the semi-doughnut-shaped first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are arranged up and down, by appropriately decorating each by the decorative light emitting means, a light emission effect such that light rotates, You can show the player a light-emitting effect in which light moves up and down, entertain the player, and show the player a variety of light-emitting effects, making it difficult for the player to get bored. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 5,
“It further includes an effect operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and that can accept the player's operation according to the gaming state”. To do.

  Here, as the “production operation unit”, “a rotation operation unit capable of rotating operation”, “a press operation unit capable of pressing operation”, “touch operation unit capable of touch operation”, “slide operation unit capable of slide operation” , “Stick operation unit capable of stick operation”, “composite operation unit capable of rotation operation and pressing operation”, and the like. Further, the “production operation unit” may be in contact with the upper surface of the decorative body, or may protrude from the upper surface of the decorative body.

  According to the configuration of the means 6, the game machine is further provided with an effect operation unit that is attached to the rear of the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and that can accept the player's operation according to the game state. is there.

  Thereby, since the production operation unit is provided on the upper surface of the decorative body, when the operation of the production operation unit can be accepted according to the game state (when the player participation type production is executed), the player However, by operating the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game. At this time, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, so that the player's interest can be attracted to the decorative body to which the rendering operation section is attached. When a participatory presentation is executed, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be directed to the decoration body (production operation section) and the operation of the production operation section can be urged. By operating the part, it is possible to entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the production operation unit is attached to the rear of the front end of the decorative body, it is possible to prevent a part of the player's body or clothing from coming into contact with the production operation unit by the decorative body, It is possible to reduce the erroneous operation of the production operation unit, and to surely enjoy the player participation type production that operates the production operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the production operation unit is attached to the upper surface of the decorative body that protrudes greatly forward, the production operation unit looks large and can give a strong impact to the player, and this gaming machine is selected as a gaming machine to play. The progress of the game (for example, a game medium (game ball) can be performed so that the player participation type effect is executed at an early stage by increasing the expectation for the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit. ), The start of rotation of the rotating body by insertion of a game medium (medal), etc.) can be encouraged, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit is provided behind the front end on the upper surface of the decoration body, the decoration body decorates the outside of the production operation unit, and thus the appearance of the production operation unit can be improved. Therefore, the production operation unit can be made conspicuous and a gaming machine that can attract the player's attention can be obtained.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
“The production operation section
An annular rotation control unit that the player can rotate;
And a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player in the ring of the rotation operation unit.

  Here, examples of the “rotation operation section” include “things that can be rotated not only by a player's rotation operation but also by driving a motor”, “rotations only by a player's rotation operation”, and the like.

  In addition, the “pressing operation unit” includes “a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation unit along the inner periphery of the rotation operation unit, and a columnar central pressing operation unit provided in the outer periphery pressing operation unit. ”,“ One columnar thing ”,“ one with a cross key or an arrow key ”, and the like. Further, examples of the “pressing operation unit” include “things that can be moved forward and backward between the retracted position and the protruding position”, “things that cannot be moved vertically”, and the like.

  According to the configuration of the means 7, the effect operation unit is provided with an annular rotation operation unit that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player within the ring of the rotation operation unit. It is a thing.

  As a result, a rotation operation unit that can be rotated as a production operation unit and a pressing operation unit that can be pressed are provided, so that a rotation operation can be performed in a player-participation type production that allows the operation of the production operation unit to be accepted. And pressing operations can be appropriately combined to allow the player to operate, and can respond to effects requiring more complex inputs (player operations), so a wider variety of player-participation effects Can be presented to the player, the player can be entertained, the player can be made less tired, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body having the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit attached to the upper surface can be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated when the player participation type effect is executed. Thus, the player's interest can be directed to the decorative body (the production operation unit such as the rotation operation unit and the press operation unit) to prompt the operation of the production operation unit, and the player can operate the production operation unit. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type production and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, it is possible to prompt the player to rotate the rotation operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit depending on the light emitting mode of the decorative body. The operation unit can be accurately operated, and a player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  In addition, it is desirable to make the diameter of a rotation operation part larger than the distance of the front-back direction of a storage tray. As a result, the front end side of the rotation operation part protrudes far forward from the storage tray, so that the rotation operation part can be made more conspicuous and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. It can be recognized that it is different from other gaming machines, and this gaming machine can be easily selected as a gaming machine to play. Further, when the diameter of the rotation operation unit is increased, the player can immediately recognize that the rotation operation unit is for the rotation operation, and the game is performed when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the effect, and to increase the expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, when the diameter (outer diameter) of the annular rotation operation part is increased, the inner diameter of the rotation operation part can be increased to enlarge the pressing operation part in the ring, so that the pressing operation part is operated. It can be made easier, and the depressing of the excitement can be suppressed by depressing the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit.

Means 8: In the constitution of means 7,
"The pressing operation part
According to the gaming state, it is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation portion and a protruded position that protrudes above the retracted position. '' It is characterized by being.

  Here, the “pressing operation part” that can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position includes “things that can be moved to the retracted position when the player performs a pressing operation at the protruding position”, “players at the protruding position” Can be moved to the retracted position even if the button is pressed.

  According to the configuration of the means 8, the pressing operation unit is arranged between a retreat position that protrudes slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation unit according to the gaming state and a protrusion position that protrudes above the retreat position. , So that it can be moved.

  Accordingly, when the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position according to the gaming state, the pressing operation unit protrudes upward from the rotation operation unit, so that the upper surface of the decorative body is enlarged together with the rotation operation unit. Since it appears to bulge upward, the surroundings of the decorative body can be shown large, giving a strong impact to the player, and the appealing power of the player is enhanced over other gaming machines by making the decorative body stand out. In addition to being able to attract the player's interest strongly because the pressing operation part protrudes greatly upwards, the expectation for the operation of the pressing operation part is enhanced and the decrease in interest is suppressed. be able to.

  In addition, since the pressing operation part can be moved between the retracted position and the protruding position, the player's interest can be directed to the rotating operation part at the retracted position, and the player's interest at the protruding position. Since the operation can be directed to the pressing operation unit, the operation unit that the player wants to operate can be urged by moving the pressing operation unit according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed. It is possible to entertain a player-participation-type production by accurately operating the rotation operation unit and the pressing operation unit.

Means 9: In the constitution of means 8,
"The pressing operation part
Cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that enables a player to perform pressing operation at the protruding position;
It is arranged in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part, and has a columnar central pressing operation part that can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. '' It is characterized by being.

  According to the configuration of the means 9, the pressing operation portion is arranged in a cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation portion that can be pressed by the player when in the protruding position, and in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation portion. And a columnar central pressing operation unit that can be pressed by the player at any position.

  Thereby, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation part and the rotation operating part are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation part, so that the apparent impact can be increased. It is possible to attract the player's interest strongly, and to increase the player's expectation for the player participation type operation that operates each operation unit, and to suppress the decrease in the player's interest Can do. Further, by decorating the decorative body with light emission, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the decorative body, and thus the rotation operation unit, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit, and the central pressing operation unit, and the operation can be promoted. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type production and suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit protrude above the rotation operating unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it can be used for various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer pressing unit can be seen, so that it is possible to make the player have the illusion that the outer pressing unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit is executed, even if an illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery press operation unit, the outer periphery press operation unit does not rotate. The player can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a sense of tension to the flow of production.

Means 10: In any one configuration from means 6 to means 9,
It is characterized by further comprising “operation unit light-emitting means for illuminating and decorating the effect operation unit according to the gaming state”.

  Here, as the “operation unit light emitting means”, “full color LED”, “single color LED”, “high brightness LED”, “organic EL”, “incandescent bulb”, “neon bulb”, “cold cathode tube”, etc. Is mentioned.

  According to the configuration of the means 10, the game machine is further provided with operation part light emitting means for causing the effect operation part to emit light according to the gaming state.

  As a result, the effect operation unit can be illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means in accordance with the gaming state. The whole bulging part bulging forward under the door window can be decorated with light emission, making the bulging part stand out and attracting the player's attention strongly, and the whole illuminating decoration By doing so, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the production operation unit by decorating the production operation unit with the operation unit light emitting means, a player participation type production for operating the production operation unit was executed. Occasionally, the production operation unit can be illuminated and decorated to direct the player's interest to the production operation unit, and the player can enter the production operation by operating the production operation unit. Can suppress a decrease in interest.

Mean 11: In the gaming machine,
“A game board having a game area where a game is played,
A body frame holding the game board detachably from the front;
The front side of the main body frame is closed so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front.
A bulging portion provided with a storage tray that bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base and that can store a game medium for playing a game in the game area; ,
The door frame is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the front end is forward of the front end of the storage tray. A first decorative part projecting from the front of the base forward to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base, and the front end positioned rearward of the first decorative part A decorative body including a second decorative portion disposed below the first decorative portion and extending in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward in a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape;
Decorative body light emitting means for causing the decorative body to emit light in accordance with a gaming state that is changed by playing a game in the gaming area;
An annular rotation operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the upper surface of the decorative body and can be rotated by the player, and an upper surface of the rotation operation unit in the ring of the rotation operation unit according to the gaming state A cylinder that is movable between a retracted position that protrudes slightly higher than the retracted position and a protruded position that protrudes upward from the retracted position. And a cylindrical central pressing operation unit that is arranged in the cylinder of the outer pressing operation unit and can be pressed by the player at any of the retracted position and the protruding position. A press operation unit, and an effect operation unit that can accept a player's operation according to the gaming state;
It comprises an operation unit light emitting means for lighting the decoration operation unit according to the gaming state.

  According to the structure of the means 11, the game machine has a game board having a game area where the game is performed, a main body frame holding the game board detachably from the front, and a front side of the main body frame can be opened and closed. The door frame base has a door window that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and bulges forward from a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base. A bulging part equipped with a storage tray capable of storing game media for playing games in the area, and attached to the center of the bulging part in the left-right direction, bulging outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape The front end of the storage pan extends forward from the front surface of the door frame base forward to a distance of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base. The first decoration so that one decorative part and the front end are located behind the first decorative part And a decorative body having a second decorative portion that extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward with a semicircular arc-shaped cross-sectional shape, and the decorative body is played in the game area. Decorative body light emitting means for illuminating and decorating according to the gaming state that is performed, an annular rotational operation unit that is attached behind the front end of the top surface of the decorative body and that can be rotated by the player, and rotational operation In the ring of the part, it is movable between a retracted position protruding slightly above the upper surface of the rotation operation part and a protruding position protruding upward from the retracted position according to the gaming state. , A cylindrical outer periphery pressing operation part that allows the player to perform a pressing operation at the protruding position, and a player can perform a pressing operation at any of the retracted position and the protruding position disposed in the cylinder of the outer periphery pressing operation part. A cylindrical center pressing operation part A production operation unit capable of accepting the player's operation according to the game state, and an operation unit light emitting means for causing the production operation unit to emit light according to the game state. It is a thing.

  As a result, a bulging portion having a storage tray capable of storing game media bulges forward in a portion below the door window on the front surface of the door frame base that closes the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed. In addition, the bulging portion includes a decorative body having a length of 1/3 to 2/3 of the full width of the door frame base and a front end protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base. The central pressing operation part, the outer periphery pressing operation part, and the rotation operation part which are arrange | positioned concentrically at the upper surface are provided. As a result, when this gaming machine is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall, the decoration body with the production operation unit attached to the upper surface projects greatly forward, below the door window where the inside of the gaming area can be visually confirmed. The decoration body can be made more conspicuous than other gaming machines, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and this gaming machine can be selected as a gaming machine to play. Can be made easier. In addition, since the front end of the decorative body protrudes greatly forward from below the door frame, the decorative body can be moved forward from the front end of the storage tray, and the length of the decorative body in the left-right direction is longer than before. Can be long. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the bulging portion or places his / her hand on the storage tray, the portion hidden by the player's hand can be reduced with respect to the entire decorative body, When the decoration body light emitting means is used to make the light emission decoration, it is possible to make the player easily notice the light emission decoration of the decoration body, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game Can be made.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly projected forward under the door window, when the player sits in front of the gaming machine, the front end of the decorative body is as close as possible to the player. Therefore, depending on the gaming state, if the decorative body is illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, or if the effect operation part is illuminated and decorated by the operation unit light emitting means, the light will irradiate the player from below, The player's line of sight can be directed to the lower decorative body and the production operation unit by the light emitting decoration of the decoration body and the production operation unit, and the player's line of sight is directed downward, so that the game provided forward It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the inside of the game area by keeping the area away from the player's view. Accordingly, in the game area, for example, when the scene of the production image changes, when the movable body moves, or when the variable winning opening (second start opening, big winning opening, winning prize winning opening, etc.) opens or closes. When the player turns the decoration body or the production operation unit to light up and decorates the game area, and then turns the player down the game area, and then returns the line of sight to the game area, the production image and the movable body By changing etc., it can surprise the player and give a strong impact, can entertain the player, and make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the decorative body can be surprised by changing the effect in the game area by making the decorative body light emitting decoration according to the gaming state and changing the effect in the game area. With the light-emitting decoration, the player can be informed of the arrival of an opportunity (for example, the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). As a result, a premium feeling can be imparted to the luminous decoration of the decorative body, so that the player can be thrilled and excited by whether or not the decorative body decorates the luminous body. The decrease can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the decorative body is greatly protruded forward, when the player tries to see the whole decorative body, the player sees the game machine away from the gaming machine. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, a decorative body that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center of the bulging portion in the left-right direction, so that the presence of the decorative body can be emphasized and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. This gaming machine can be made easy to select as a gaming machine that increases the game. In addition, since the decorative body protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to easily extend both hands of the player forward. ), Handling of game media stored in the storage tray, etc. can be facilitated, and it is difficult to give stress to the player, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion arranged above and below the decorative body are formed so that the semicircular arc-shaped cross section extends in a semicircular shape so as to bulge outward. Since the half of the tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player and make the player play in a calm mood It is possible to concentrate the player on the game and suppress the decrease in interest, and to recognize that it is safe and difficult to be injured even if the player touches at first glance, By reassuring the player, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by decorating the decorative body and the effect operating unit attached to the upper surface of the decorative body at the same time, the entire bulging portion bulging forward under the door window can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, it is possible to make the bulging part stand out and attract the player's interest strongly, and it is possible to make the player think that there is something good with the whole light emitting decoration, The player's interest can be directed to the production operation unit, and the operation can be promoted. By causing the player to operate the production operation unit, it is possible to entertain the player participation type production and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, as described above, since the first decorative portion and the second decorative portion have a semi-doughnut shape, if the entire first decorative portion and the second decorative portion are illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means according to the gaming state. It is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp, and to attract the player's attention strongly. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. You can be surprised and think that there is something good, and the direction of the rotation of the light of the first decorative part and the second decorative part on the rotation operation part attached to the upper surface of the decorative body The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction. Alternatively, the first decoration part and the second decoration part arranged above and below are alternately decorated to emit light so that the player can show a light-emitting effect in which the light moves up and down and up and down. The moving light can prompt the player to perform a pressing operation on the outer peripheral pressing operation unit or the central pressing operation unit. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to rotate the rotary operation unit or to press the pressing operation unit by appropriately decorating the first decorative unit and the second decorative unit with light emission. On the other hand, the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit can be accurately operated, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed and the decrease in the interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, on the upper surface of the decorative body projecting greatly forward, the outer peripheral pressing operation portion and the rotation operating portion are arranged concentrically around the central pressing operation portion, so that the visual impact can be increased. In addition to attracting the player's interest strongly, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the player-participation-type production that operates each operation unit, and to suppress a decrease in the player's interest it can.

  In addition, when the pressing operation unit inside the rotation operation unit is set to the retracted position, the center pressing operation unit, the outer periphery pressing operation unit, and the rotation operation unit have the same height as each other, and the rotation operation unit and the center pressing operation When the pressing operation unit is moved from the retracted position to the protruding position, the central pressing operation unit and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit protrude above the rotation operating unit, and the central pressing operation unit, The outer periphery pressing operation unit and the rotation operation unit can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the operation unit that can be operated by the player can be properly used, and it can be used for various productions, and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decrease in interest.

  In addition, in the state where the pressing operation unit is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be seen, so that it is possible to make an illusion that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit can be rotated. it can. As a result, when a player participation type effect that operates the rotation operation unit or the press operation unit is executed, even if an illusionary player tries to rotate the outer periphery press operation unit, the outer periphery press operation unit does not rotate. The player can be impatient, and the player can be entertained by giving a sense of tension to the flow of production.

Means 12: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
A plurality of receiving ports that are arranged in the gaming area and are capable of receiving gaming media;
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media in response to the reception of game media into the receiving port.

  Here, the “reception entrance” includes “a general prize opening that is always open in the game area”, “an open game opening that is always open in the game area, and an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by receiving game media "A start prize opening where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate" (start opening), "by receiving a game medium in a specific entrance (chucker) in the game area, in the game area, "Variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus prize opening, etc.) that can be accepted" "," Normal lottery that is drawn by passing game media through specific areas (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area Depending on the result, the game medium can be assigned to a variable prize opening (variable start opening, bonus game prize prize opening, etc.) that allows the game medium to be accepted, or a specific area (eg, gate, chucker, etc.) within the game area. Through Depending on the result of the normal lottery, the game medium can be accepted, and a variable lottery in which a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not an advantageous gaming state that would be advantageous to the player by receiving the game medium is generated. Mouth (variable starting port) ”,“ V winning port that generates an advantageous gaming state where the player has an advantage when the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed and received by the distributing means ”,“ Game As an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, there are, for example, a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern and can receive gaming media.

  In addition, the “pachinko machine” includes “a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the start port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means. The special symbol is variably displayed in accordance with the stop symbol, and the special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the special symbols that are stopped and displayed, and the special lottery result display means has an advantageous gaming state. And an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a special winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result to be generated is displayed (so-called digipachi machine), Distribution means for distributing game media received in the mouth, and when the game media distributed by the distribution means are received in the V prize opening, the prize winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player (so-called honey machine) "," a game medium having a big prize opening and an accessory prize opening, When the special winning lottery drawn by the acceptance of the game is opened or closed in a predetermined pattern according to the result of the special lottery, and the game medium received in the prize winning port is distributed to the V winning award, the prize winning port Or, a device having an advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player has an advantage by opening and closing the special winning opening in a predetermined pattern (so-called multi-function machine).

  According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a gaming area into which a gaming medium is driven by a player's operation, a plurality of gaming machines that are arranged in the gaming area and capable of receiving the gaming medium, and a game to the receiving hall This is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in response to receiving of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, the effect of any of the above-described means can be achieved.

  Note that it is desirable that the decoration light emission decoration of the decoration body by the decoration body light emitting means is executed when the game medium that has been driven into the game area is received in the reception port. As a result, when a game medium is received at the entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the decorative body is illuminated and decorated. Can be continued easily, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, when a special lottery is generated to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage by accepting a game medium at the starting port, and the result of the lottery is indicated to the player, the result is presented to the player. As one of the effects, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means. As a result, the decorative body is illuminated and decorated, so that it is possible to entertain the player with a strong impact by the above-described effects, so that the special lottery result drawn for the player It can be considered that an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous (for example, “big hit”) is generated, and a sense of expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state can be increased to suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since it is possible to show the player a movable effect with a higher effect by illuminating the decorative body, an effect to suggest the player the result of the lottery special lottery (for example, It can be used suitably for reach production), and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 13: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
Multiple swivel bodies each having multiple designs,
A start operation unit that rotates each of the plurality of revolving bodies by a player operating after inserting a game medium;
A plurality of stop operation portions for stopping rotation of the plurality of rotating bodies;
A slot machine comprising a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media in accordance with a combination of stop symbols by all the spinning bodies that have been rotated and stopped by a player operating each of the plurality of stop operation portions. It is characterized by being.

  Here, “slot machine” means “the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols depending on the number of game media (medals) used in one game”, An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of stop symbols and the lottery result of internal lottery is given. ”And the like. The “privileges” include “big bonus (BB)”, “regular bonus (RB)”, “cherry rush bonus (CRB)”, “replay”, “long replay time (LRT)”, “assist time ( AT) ", etc.

  According to the configuration of the means 13, the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of spinning bodies each having a plurality of symbols, and a start operation unit that rotates the plurality of spinning bodies by operating by the player after the game medium is inserted. And a plurality of stop operation parts for stopping rotation of each of the plurality of spinning bodies, and a combination of stop symbols by all of the spinning bodies stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation parts, respectively. A slot machine including a payout device for paying out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-described means can be obtained.

  It should be noted that the decorative light emitting decoration by the decorative light emitting means is used when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating on the effective line satisfies the winning combination (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, a plurality of decorative bodies by the driving means may be rotated. Thereby, the decoration body is illuminated and decorated, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. In addition, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the decorative body may be decorated with light emission, and this allows the player to have a strong impact by illuminating decoration, When stopped with a specific symbol combination, it can be assumed that an advantageous gaming state (for example, “BB”) is advantageous for the player, and the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state is increased. Can suppress a decrease in interest. In addition, as described above, since the player can be shown a movable effect with a higher effect by decorating the decorative body with light emission decoration, it is suitable for the effect for instructing the player of the lottery internal lottery. It can be used, and a player can be entertained and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Means 14: In any one configuration from means 1 to means 11,
The gaming machine is
It is a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

  Here, a “fusion machine” in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused together is a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols in accordance with the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are inserted. Is displayed in a variable manner, and thereafter, the change in the symbol sequence is stopped in accordance with the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out in accordance with the combination of the stop symbols, or a privilege advantageous to the player (for example, , An advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after a predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the symbol sequence may be stopped when the predetermined time has elapsed.

  According to the configuration of the means 14, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine which united the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine, the effect of either of the means mentioned above can be produced.

  It should be noted that the decorative light emitting decoration by the decorative light emitting means is used when the combination of symbols that have stopped rotating on the effective line satisfies the winning combination (so-called reach). In addition, as one of the effects presented to the player, the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated by the decorative body light emitting means, or the decorative body may be illuminated and decorated when the internal lottery result is the winning combination. However, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

[19-4. effect]
Thus, according to the above technical means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that has a high appealing power to the player and can suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game by using the light emitting decoration.

[20. Relationship between form and technical means]
The tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in the present embodiment are the storage tray of the present invention, and the rendering operation unit cover unit in the rendering operation unit 300 of the present embodiment. The unit lower cover 311 and the unit front cover 312 of 310 are the decorative body of the present invention, the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the present embodiment is the first decorative portion of the present invention, and the unit front cover 312 of the present embodiment. The plate center lower decorative body 312b is used as the second decorative portion of the present invention, and the plate center upper decorative substrate 314 and the plate central lower decorative substrate 316 are used as the decorative body light emitting means of the present invention. The board 352, the central button decoration board 376, and the outer button decoration board 377 correspond to the operation unit light emitting means of the present invention.

[21. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is placed on the lower side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3 that can be opened and closed. The tray unit 200 including the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 that can be stored bulges forward, and the front end of the tray unit 200 is approximately ½ the length of the entire width of the door frame base 101. A center pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit which are provided with an effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward from the front surface of the door frame base 101 and are concentrically arranged on the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310. 303b and a rotation operation unit 302 are provided. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the effect operation unit cover unit 310 having the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface is provided below the door window 101a where the inside of the game area 5a is visible. Since it protrudes greatly forward, the dish unit 200 (production operation unit cover unit 310) can be made more conspicuous than the other pachinko machines 1, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted and appealed to the player Power can be raised and it can be made easy to select this pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play. In addition, since the front end of the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is greatly protruded forward under the door frame 3, the production operation unit cover unit 310 is moved forward from the front end of the upper plate 201. In addition, the length of the production operation unit cover unit 310 in the left-right direction can be made longer than before. Therefore, even if the player places his / her hand on the upper surface of the plate unit 200 or places his / her hand on the upper plate 201, the portion hidden by the player's hand is reduced with respect to the entire production operation unit cover unit 310. Therefore, when the production operation unit cover unit 310 (unit front cover 312) is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316, the player has the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312. It is possible to make it easier to notice, and to prevent the player from feeling lost, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes greatly forward from below the door window 101a, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is displayed. Since the front end of the unit is as close as possible to the player, the unit front cover 312 is light-decorated with the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 according to the gaming state, and the presentation operation When the effect operation unit 301 is illuminated and decorated by the ring decoration substrate 352, the central button decoration substrate 376, and the outer button decoration substrate 377, the light irradiates the player from below, so that the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated. The player's line of sight is directed toward the unit front cover 312 and the direction operation unit 301 below by the light emitting decoration. It is possible to, by directing the line of sight of the player downwards, can be difficult away within the game area 5a provided in the front from the player's field of vision, it is visible within the game area 5a. Accordingly, in the game area 5a, for example, when the scene of the effect image by the effect display device 1600 changes, when the movable body moves, when the second start opening 2004 or the big prize opening 2005 opens and closes, etc. In addition, the unit front cover 312 and the effect operation unit 301 are illuminated to decorate the player so that the player is directed below the game area 5a, and then when the player returns his line of sight to the game area 5a, By changing the body, etc., the player can be surprised and given a strong impact, the player can be entertained, and the player may think that there is something good. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, the player can be surprised by making the unit front cover 312 illuminate and decorate according to the gaming state, and changing the effect in the gaming area 5a in the gap. Then, the light emission decoration of the unit front cover 312 can indicate to the player the arrival of an opportunity (for example, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state (“big hit game”) in which the player is advantageous). Thereby, since a premium feeling can be given to the light emitting decoration of the unit front cover 312, the player can be excited and excited by whether or not the unit front cover 312 is decorated with light emission. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the unit front cover 312 protrudes greatly forward, when the player tries to see the entire unit front cover 312, he / she will look away from the pachinko machine 1, so the entire gaming machine including the gaming area Becomes easier to see. Thereby, it can be made to feel like having put one tempo with respect to a player, a player can be relaxed and the fall of an interest can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the production operation unit cover unit 310 that protrudes greatly forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 200, the presence of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is emphasized to strongly attract the player's interest. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played with an increased appeal to the player. In addition, since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 protruding forward is attached to the center in the left-right direction, both the player's hands can be easily extended forward, so the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a. Therefore, the operation of the handle 182 and the handling of the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be facilitated, and it is difficult for the player to be stressed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, the semicircular arc shaped cross section of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b disposed above and below the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is expanded outward. Since it is made to extend in a semi-annular shape, the half of the cylindrical tube-shaped donut protrudes forward, so that it is possible to give a smooth and soft impression to the player. The player can play the game in a calm mood, and the player can concentrate on the game to suppress the decline of interest, and it is difficult to get injured even if the player touches at first glance. It can be recognized that the game is safe, and a reduction in interest in the game can be suppressed by reassuring the player.

  In addition, by simultaneously decorating the effect operation unit cover unit 310 and the effect operation unit 301 protruding from the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the dish unit 200 bulging forward and below the door window 101a. Since the whole can be decorated with light emission, the dish unit 200 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the whole light emission decoration does not have anything good for the player. The player's interest can be directed to the directing operation unit 301 and the operation can be urged, and the player can operate the directing operation unit 301 to entertain and entertain the player participation type effect. Can be suppressed.

  Further, as described above, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b are formed in a semi-doughnut shape, so that the dish center upper decorative board 314 and the dish center lower decorative board 316 are arranged on the center of the dish according to the gaming state. If the decoration body 312a and the whole dish lower center decoration body 312b are light-decorated, the player can show a light-emitting decoration such as an annular fluorescent lamp, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. When decorating the light, for example, if the light is decorated so that light flows from one side, the player can show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light moves and rotates inside the donut. Surprisingly, it can be thought that there is something good, and the rotation operation unit 302 attached to the upper surface of the production operation unit cover unit 310 is replaced with the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body. The player can be prompted to rotate in the same direction as the direction in which the light of 312b is rotating. Alternatively, the player can be shown a light-emitting effect in which the light moves up and down by alternately decorating the upper and lower central dish 312a and the lower central dish 312b. At the same time, the player can be prompted to press the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b or the center pressing operation portion 303a by the light that moves up and down. Therefore, the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302 or to press the pressing operation unit 303 by appropriately decorating the dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to accurately operate the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, and it is possible to entertain the player participatory effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 extends forward from the side (outside of the right side) of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. Side window in which three side window decoration portions 410b extending in a columnar shape in the front-rear direction of the side window interior decoration member 412 are arranged in the flat door frame right side unit 410 at intervals in the vertical direction. 410a is formed, and in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration part decoration board 413 for lighting decoration of the plurality of side window decoration parts 410b are turned off. The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the decoration portion 410b. Therefore, even if a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game does not move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily used. It can be found in the above, and a sense of expectation for a game in the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Thereafter, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 can be satisfactorily viewed through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. A game can be performed in the game area 5a, the game can be enjoyed by the player, and the current game state can be known by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600.

  At this time, in the door frame 3 in which the left side with respect to the main body frame 4 is hingedly rotated by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a. Since the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right outer side far from the hinge axis, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is included. Since it is possible to block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity, it is difficult for other players to see the entire game area 5a, as seen by other players. By making it difficult to receive the feeling, it is possible to play the game without hesitation of other players. Then, when the game progresses in the game area 5a and changes to a predetermined gaming state, the LEDs on the side window decoration part decoration substrate 413 cause the three side window decoration parts 410b to emit light, and the light causes the side window The visibility through the side window 410a is changed by dazzling the inside of 410a. At this time, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light can be emitted in a band shape and a radial shape, and the side window decoration portions 410b are dazzled, making it difficult to visually recognize the opposite side from the middle. In addition, the player's line of sight can be directed to the side window decoration part 410b by the light emission of the side window decoration part 410b, and the interest in the opposite side through the side window 410a is diminished. The visibility through 410a can be reduced, and it is possible to make it difficult for another player or the like to look into the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600.

  More specifically, as a gaming state, for example, in a gaming state (scene) that suggests the arrival of an opportunity for the player to be advantageous, the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light, and the side due to the glare Visibility through the window 410a is reduced. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as neighbors to recognize that a chance has arrived in the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a, so that other players pay attention to the pachinko machine 1. Because it is possible to avoid the problem, other players will be worried about it and will not be able to devote themselves to the game, so it will cause discomfort, or a mistake will be induced to make you feel lost Can be prevented, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed by making the game enjoyable. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, in the side window 410a, the three side window decoration portions 410b extending in the front-rear direction are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, so that the angle of viewing the side window 410a from the side changes. However, since the three side window decorations 410b do not appear to overlap, when the side window decorations 410b are not emitting light, the side windows 410a pass through the space between the three side window decorations 410b. A player who can visually recognize (in the game area 5a) and is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play, moves to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island facility. Even without this, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily found.

  In addition, since the three side window decoration portions 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, when the side window decoration portion 410b having a certain height is caused to emit light, a portion of the same height in the game area 5a Can be made difficult to see from other players through the side window 410a, so that by lighting a specific side window decoration part 410b of the three side window decoration parts 410b according to the gaming state, It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize a specific area (part) in the height direction in the game area 5a, and to make it difficult for other players to know the arrival of a chance. Accordingly, since it is possible to prevent another player from peeping into the game area 5a through the side window 410a in a gaming state such as the arrival of a chance, the player can be devoted to the game. You can entertain more and suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 410 extending forward is provided with side windows 410a penetrating left and right, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are turned off, and the side windows 410a are In the state of ensuring visibility, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 through the side window 410a. It is easy to find out that fraudulent acts are being carried out from the end of the game area 5a, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is extended forward from the right outer side that is farther from the left side that is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation, out of the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame 3. Therefore, the door frame 3 can be opened 90 degrees or more with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is opened and maintenance or game board 5 is exchanged, the door frame 3 can be made difficult to get in the way by opening the door frame 3 wide, thereby preventing deterioration of workability. can do.

  Further, since the three side window decorations 410b are caused to emit light according to the gaming state, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value, the side window interior decoration portion 410b may be caused to emit light or be extinguished. More specifically, for example, during the execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., when the expected value is low, the side window interior decoration portion 410b is made to emit light so that it is difficult for other players to look into it, thereby generating an advantageous gaming state When it is not done (when it is “losing”), it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere with other players, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the player's game. Alternatively, when the expected value is high, the side-window interior decoration portion 410b is not caused to emit light or is extinguished, so that an advantageous gaming state occurs even if it is easy for other players to look into (a “big hit”). ) So that it does not create an awkward atmosphere and can suppress the decline of interest, and it can also create an atmosphere that other players support, enhancing the player's interest in games. You can make the game more entertaining.

  Furthermore, since the three side window decorations 410b are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player occurs (so-called Depending on the expected value), the three side window decorations 410b may emit light sequentially (for example, from bottom to top, from top to bottom, from the center to the top and bottom sides, etc.) The specific side window decoration part 410b may emit light. Specifically, for example, during execution of reach production, reach development production, etc., the higher the expected value, the more the three side window decorations 410b emit light sequentially from the bottom or from the top. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to look into the game and to suggest an expected value, thereby increasing the player's sense of expectation for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition to light emission (lighting) and light extinction, the three side window interior decoration portions 410b have a light emission mode such as a flashing pattern, a difference in light emission color, and a change in light emission color (for example, from a cold blue to hot Change of feeling to red, change of blue, yellow, red, etc. imitating traffic signals), or change of brightness (luminance), etc. Thus, the decorative property of the door frame 3 can be further enhanced by the three side window interior decoration portions 410b, and the pachinko machine 1 having high appeal that can attract the player's interest can be obtained.

  Therefore, conversely, during the execution of the reach effect, the reach development effect, etc., the advantageous game state for the player depending on the light emission mode such as the presence or absence of light emission and the light emission pattern of the three side window decorations 410b. The possibility (expected value) of the possibility of occurrence of the game can be suggested, so that the player is excited depending on how the three side window decorations 410b emit light during the performance. -It can be throbbing, and it can increase the player's expectation and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, by operating the effect operation unit 301 of the effect operation unit 300 provided in the door frame 3, the three side window decorations 410b may be arbitrarily made to emit light or be turned off. . As a result, for example, when the possibility of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a “hit” game) that is advantageous to the player during a reach production or a reach development production is low (so-called expected value), the production operation is performed. By operating the part 301 to cause the side window interior decoration part 410b to emit light, it is possible to prevent other players from peeping, so when an advantageous gaming state does not occur (when "losing") In addition, it is possible to avoid an awkward atmosphere due to being seen by other players, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game. Alternatively, when the possibility (expected value) of occurrence of an advantageous gaming state is high (or when a hot effect is being executed), the effect operation unit 301 is not operated to prevent the side window decoration unit 410b from emitting light. By doing so (or by turning off the decoration part 410b in the side window), even if it is peeped by other players, an advantageous gaming state will be generated, so that it does not become an awkward atmosphere and the interest is lowered. In addition to being able to be suppressed, it is possible to create an atmosphere that other players are cheering on, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the player in the game and make the game more enjoyable.

  In addition, the operation timing of the three side window decorations 410b, the light emission mode, and the like may be set by operating the effect operation unit 301. As a result, in the default state set in advance, the timing specific to the player who does not want to be looked at by other players is not set. However, since it can be customized according to the player's preference by operating the production operation unit 301, the above-described effects can be reliably achieved, and the player's game can be enjoyed. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the dispensing device 580 of the dispensing unit 560 in the main body frame 4, the ball removal lever 593 is lowered (locked) to make the ball removal movable piece 592 unrotatable and the ball removal passage. Assuming that 580b is in a closed state (first state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream cannot be distributed to the ball extraction passage 580b by the ball extraction movable piece 592. It will continue to flow downstream of the payout passage 580a and can be sent to the payout vane 589 via the payout passage 580a. On the other hand, when the ball removal lever 593 is raised (unlocked) to turn the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state (second state), the game ball B that has flowed down the payout passage 580a from the upstream becomes the payout passage. Without flowing to the downstream side of 580a, it will flow over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b, and may be discharged outside the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility side via the ball removal passage 580b. it can. Since the payout vane 589 is provided on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, the ball pulling movable piece 592 is not rotatable (first state) by the ball pulling lever 593 in a normal state. On the upstream side of the payout vane 589, the game balls B are stopped in a continuous state like a daisy chain.

  When the payout blade 589 is rotationally driven in this normal state, the game ball B upstream from the payout blade 589 flows to the downstream side, and the game ball B is guided to the payout blade 589 side by the ball removal movable piece 592. Since the game balls B are paid out one by one at the payout blade 589, the flow speed of the game balls B upstream from the payout blade 589 is relatively slow. Since the force acting on the ball removal movable piece 592 due to the contact is relatively weak and the opposite side of the portion of the ball removal movable piece 592 that contacts the game ball B is near the center of the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 Is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B, and the ball removal movable piece 592 is not damaged. This can reduce the damage to the ball pulling movable piece 592 during the game, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the breakage of the ball pulling movable piece 592 and causing discomfort to the player. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a when the pachinko machine 1 (or the game board 5) is replaced or maintained, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to turn the ball removal movable piece 592. If it is in the state (second state), the game ball B that is in a state of being connected in a daisy chain on the upstream side of the ball removal movable piece 592 flows over the ball removal movable piece 592 to the ball removal passage 580b side. Become. At this time, since the ball extraction passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flows down straight to the ball discharge passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down as soon as possible. In this way, in a state where the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball removal passage 580b, so that the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B comes into contact with the lower end side of the ball, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it can move outward from the inner surface of the ball extraction passage 580b, the ball extraction movable piece 592 is moved to the outside of the ball extraction passage 580b by the abutment force. The game ball B is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, so that a strong force can be prevented from acting on the ball extraction movable piece 592. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed. For this reason, it is possible to make it difficult to damage the ball removal movable piece 592, so that more game balls B can be discharged earlier to the island facility side downstream of the ball removal passage 580 b. An increase in time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1 can be suppressed, and the burden on the game hall side can be reduced.

  Further, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a which are closer than the game ball B, and the ball removal passage 580b. Since the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b, the ball removal movable piece 592 is moved between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even when the game ball B moves together with the ball removal movable piece 592 to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a when moving outward through the gap, the distance from the game ball B is larger. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outwardly between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball removal movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movable movable piece 592 is moved by an inertial force, a strong force is not applied to the movable ball movable piece 592, and the movable ball movable piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the body side guide The game ball B does not jump out of the ball extraction passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated downstream of the ball extraction passage 580b.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be opened and closed around an axis extending vertically on the left side. The main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2 is closed so as to close the inside of the outer frame 2, and the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 (axial core) on the left side with respect to the main body frame 4. When the door frame 3 attached so as to be openable and closable (rotatable by hinges) is closed, the front surface of the main body frame 4 and the rear surface of the door frame 3 face each other and extend in parallel. Connection for connecting the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310X, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. on the frame 4 side and the ball feeding unit 140, the handle unit 180, the rendering operation unit 300, etc. on the door frame 3 side. cave 503 extends from the portion of the cable mounting recess 501h that is recessed rearward in the front surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main frame 4 to the axial center side, and is mounted in the cable mounting recess 501h. After being held by the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502 extending in parallel with the front surface and the rear surface of the door frame 3, the door frame extends further to the vicinity of the shaft core and then turns back and extends away from the shaft core. 3 is held by the cable holder 103a of the speaker duct 103 at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 and connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 on the door frame 3 side. Has been.

  Then, when the door frame 3 that closes (closes) the front side of the main body frame 4 is hinged about the left side axial center so as to open from the main body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 becomes the main body. Since the part extending from the door frame 3 in the connection cable 503 moves away from the main body frame 4 because it moves away from the front surface of the frame 4, the folded connection cable 503 is deformed to open, As the connection cable 503 is deformed, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates (rotates) around the attachment shaft 502c that is far from the axis so that the connection cable guide member 502 is inclined with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4. As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side close to the axial center of the connection cable guide member 502 projects into the space between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Since the connection cable 503 guided by the member 502 passes near the shaft core, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 are not easily disturbed.

  In other words, since the connection cable guide member 502 extends the distal end portion from the mounting shaft 502c that is rotatably attached to the shaft core side, the proximal end portion of the guide member is attached as in the conventional pachinko machine. Compared with the case of extending away from the shaft core, the folded portion of the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is the hinge pin 122 on the door frame for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the door frame. The position close to the lower hinge pin 126 and the part where the connection cable 503 is folded back can be set to a position that does not easily get in the way.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 that is open with respect to the main body frame 4 is closed, the rear surface of the door frame 3 moves closer to the front surface of the main body frame 4. Moves in the opposite direction, and the connection cable 503 is held (guided) by the connection cable guide member 502, so that the door frame 3 is not sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3. Can be closed. Accordingly, during maintenance such as opening and closing the door frame 3, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not interfere with the maintenance, the maintenance can be performed smoothly, and the maintenance is interrupted. An increase in the interruption time of the game being played can be reduced, and a decrease in the interest of the player in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, the connection cable 503 that extends from the front end of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the shaft core side and is folded back and extends away from the shaft core is positioned closer to the shaft core than the front end of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the cable holder 103a holds it on the door frame 3 side, the rotation angle of the connection cable guide member 502 with respect to the front surface of the main body frame 4 (cable mounting recess 501h) is a circle passing through the cable holder 103a about the axis. Since the tangent passing through the center of the attachment shaft 502c of the connection cable guide member 502 is equal to or less than the angle intersecting the rear surface of the door frame 3, the longitudinal axis of the connection cable guide member 502 is extended to the door frame 3 An angle close to a right angle with respect to the rear surface can be prevented. In addition, since the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the axial center than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 on the door frame 3 side, When 3 is closed, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be pulled toward the axial center side by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a.

  Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated so as to return to the original state, and the door frame 3 cannot be closed, or the connection cable guide It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a problem that the leading end of the member 502 comes into contact with the door frame 3 and the connection cable 503 is disconnected. Therefore, when a problem occurs that requires maintenance by opening and closing the door frame 3 during the game, the connection cable guide member 502 and the connection cable 503 do not hinder the maintenance work, and maintenance is performed. This can be performed smoothly, and an increase in the game interruption time can be reduced to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back by 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can attach a heel. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 due to folding is applied. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to its folding, and to connect the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502). The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be smoothly closed.

  Further, in the door frame 3 on the side opposite to the main body frame 4 to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed, the position is closer to the axis than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502 (the axis is more than the cable holder 103a). (A position near the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103) that can be pressed to the main body frame 4 side to which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached by contacting the connection cable 503. A portion protruding rearward on the side). Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the front end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503 in the closing direction. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed with the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, a tangent line that passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502 and passes through the pressing portion with the center axis (axial center) of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 as the center, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 The intersecting angle is configured to be 45 degrees or less. Accordingly, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Furthermore, since the frame piece 502b is provided on each of the two long sides of the guide body 502a in the connection cable guide member 502, the rigidity of the flat guide body 502a is increased and it is difficult to bend. The connection cable 503 can be guided in the longitudinal direction by the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described operational effects can be reliably realized.

  Further, as described above, since the rigidity of the connection cable guide member 502 is enhanced, even when the connection cable 503 is a heavy connection cable 503 made of many electric wires, the connection cable guide member 502 is bent and distorted. Therefore, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated around the mounting shaft 502c, the connection cable 503 can be guided in a good state, and more wires can be guided. Since it becomes possible, the electrical connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be concentrated in one place, and the structure concerning the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified.

  Further, the connection cable 503 is connected to the connection cable 503 through the binding bands 504 in the through holes 502d on both sides of the connection cable 503 in a state where the connection cable 503 is attached between the pair of frame pieces 502b in the guide body 502a of the connection cable guide member 502. Since the connection cable 503 can be held by the connection cable guide member 502 by winding the cable guide member 502 together with the binding band 504, the operation of holding the connection cable 503 by the connection cable guide member 502 is easily performed. be able to. Further, by holding the connection cable 503 by the binding band 504 that has passed through the through hole 502d of the connection cable guide member 502, the binding band 504 can be prevented from being detached from the guide member 502. The connection cable 503 can be securely held, and the connection cable 503 is sandwiched between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed by detaching the connection cable 503 from the connection cable guide member 502. Can be avoided, and the above-described operational effects can be reliably achieved.

  Furthermore, the space on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame 4 is below the outer frame constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 via the connection portion 621c and the connection cylinder portion 43a. Since the assembly 40 communicates with the space between the port member 47 and the connecting cylinder portion 43a (curtain plate internal space 40a), the space in the speaker unit 620a and the space on the outer frame 2 side define the main body frame speaker. Since the volume of the enclosure 622 of 622 can be sufficiently secured, a heavy bass can be output from the main body frame speaker 622, and the player can be entertained by the sound of the heavy bass to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Can do. Therefore, by providing the cable attachment recess 501h for attaching the connection cable guide member 502 to the main body frame 4, even if the volume in the speaker unit 620a is reduced, a heavy bass sound can be output from the main body frame speaker 622. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be provided with a cable mounting recess 501h recessed rearward below the main body frame speaker 622, and the connection cable guide member 502 having the above-described effects can be attached to the main body frame 4 side. Further, since the connection cable guide member 502 that holds a part of the connection cable 503 is attached to the inside of the cable attachment recess 501 h that is recessed rearward in the main body frame 4, the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. When closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h, so that protrusion from the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be suppressed as much as possible, and interference with the rear surface of the door frame 3 is prevented. The door frame 3 can be reliably closed by avoiding it.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame in the main body frame 4 is passed through the door window 101 a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame 3. The game area 5a of the game board 5 held in the game board insertion slot 501b of the base 501 can be viewed from the front (player side), and the lower side of the door window 101a constitutes the lower side of the outer frame 2. The front end of the port member 47 is opened near the right end in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction) on the front surface of the curtain plate front member 42 of the outer frame lower assembly 40, and the port member is formed at the lower portion of the front surface of the door frame 3. A speaker port 211b of the dish base unit 210 is opened in the vicinity of the left end opposite to 47 in the left-right direction. The speaker port 211b communicates with the front side of the main body frame speaker 622 attached below the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame 4 and covers the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622. The internal space of (the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623) communicates with the inside of the port member 47 through the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 and the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43. In this state, when the main body frame speaker 622 attached to the speaker unit 620a is driven, sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front are the speaker attachment portions of the speaker cover 621. It is radiated to the player side through the speaker port 211b of the door frame 3 and 621a. On the other hand, the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622 passes through the connecting portion 621c and the connecting cylinder portion 43a to the inside of the curtain plate inner space 40a constituted by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43. And is radiated from the port member 47 to the player side ahead. At this time, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (enclosure 624) is constituted by the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and the curtain plate internal space 40a of the outer frame lower assembly 40. The volume can be increased as much as possible, and a sound with extension in the low frequency range can be output from the main body frame speaker 622 to the front. Further, since the connecting tube portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame 2 is opened toward the center side (upward) in the frame, the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (speaker unit 620a) are provided in the enclosure 624. ) In the depth direction (front-rear direction) at the connecting portion to the connecting portion), the width in the front-rear direction of the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c is increased, and the interior of the speaker unit 620a is increased. It is possible to reduce the attenuation of sound from the space toward the curtain plate internal space 40a side of the outer frame 2 as much as possible. Further, since the port member 47 has a cylindrical shape on the outer frame 2 side, Helmholtz resonance occurs in the port member 47, so that the low frequency range can be amplified and the phase can be reversed, 47 can output a sound obtained by amplifying bass. Then, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are combined by interfering with each other in front of the pachinko machine 1, thereby increasing the volume. It is possible to make the player hear a richer bass sound, and to make the player enjoy sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, as described above, since the phase of the sound output backward from the main body frame speaker 622 is inverted in the port member 47 and radiated forward (forms a so-called bass reflex type speaker), the main body When the sound output forward from the frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 overlap, the phase of each other is the same, so the amplitude of the sound wave increases and the sound volume increases. Compared to the case of using a passive radiator, the sound output can be increased with a simple configuration.

  Further, since the speaker unit 620a and the outer frame lower assembly 40 are disposed below the game board insertion port 501b in which the game board 5 is held, their vertical dimensions can be increased, and the main body frame speaker 622 can be increased. The volume of the enclosure 624 can be increased. More specifically, generally, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the position (height) of the player's eyes is positioned above the center in the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the center of the game area 5a where the game is performed is positioned above the center of the pachinko machine 1. Accordingly, it is relatively easy to secure a space in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, so that the lower part of the outer frame lower assembly 40 constituting the lower side of the outer frame 2 and the game board insertion port 501 b in the main body frame 4 Since the vertical dimension on the side can be made relatively large, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the body frame speaker 622 can be increased by increasing the vertical dimension of the outer frame lower assembly 40 and the speaker unit 620a. In addition to being able to output a richer sound of bass, it is possible to entertain the sound to the player and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Moreover, since the connection cylinder part 43a and the connection part 621c are inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, the connection part 621c abuts against the connection cylinder part 43a only by closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. It can be connected, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained. Also, since sliding resistance does not occur between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c, the opening / closing operation of the main body frame 4 is heavy. In addition, a decrease in workability during maintenance or the like can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the space between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c is sealed by the sealing member 48, sound leakage in the enclosure 624 can be prevented between the connecting cylinder portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c. It can be set as the pachinko machine 1 which shows the effect mentioned above reliably.

  Further, since a part of the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 can be secured in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620a can be made smaller, so that the game board is relatively The insertion slot 501b can be enlarged to provide a game board 5 with a wider game area 5a. The wide game area 5a can make the player more entertaining, and the game area 5a can be widened through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. The pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous so that the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the lower part of the pachinko machine 1, the port member 47 is arranged near the right end in the left-right direction, and the speaker mounting part 621a of the speaker unit 620a, that is, the main body frame speaker 622 is arranged near the left end on the opposite side. Therefore, since the body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, the sound output forward from the body frame speaker 622 and the sound output forward from the port member 47 are 2 (pachinko machine 1) will interfere with each other at a position some distance forward, so that the sound can be amplified near the player sitting in front of pachinko machine 1, and as described above, On the other hand, you can hear a rich bass sound.

  Further, as described above, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 622 and the port member 47 is amplified by causing interference in the vicinity of the player. The player will receive an unamplified sound. As a result, when a sound that suggests the arrival of a chance is output, the player who is playing with this pachinko machine 1 will be able to hear a sound with a large volume and a rich low tone, thereby increasing the expectation of the game. Can be made. On the other hand, it is difficult for a player who is playing with another pachinko machine to hear that the sound from the pachinko machine 1 is heard, so that it is suggested that an opportunity or the like is suggested in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to reduce the number of other players looking into the pachinko machine 1, and the peeping makes the player playing with the pachinko machine 1 uncomfortable and lowers interest. Can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the position of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the outer frame 2 is the center in the longitudinal direction (left and right direction) of the outer frame lower assembly 40, the speaker unit 620a on the main body frame 4 side connected to the connecting cylinder portion 43a. Since the position of the connecting portion 621c is the center in the left-right direction, the length of the speaker unit 620a in the left-right direction can be from the vicinity of the left end where the speaker mounting portion 621a is formed to the center. 4, a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in between. Therefore, in the main body frame 4, another member is arranged in a space secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the center in the left-right direction therebetween, or the other member is enlarged so as to spread in the space. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines by other members, and the player's interest is strongly attracted.

  Further, as described above, since a space can be secured on the opposite side of the speaker unit 620a with the lower side of the lower side of the outer frame 2 in the middle, the game ball B is discharged to that space. And a ball launcher 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. A power supply board 630 for controlling the power supply in the pachinko machine 1, a payout control board 633 for controlling the payout of game media balls, and the like can be arranged, and the pachinko machine 1 provided with them can be obtained. .

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the central pressing operation portion 303a that protrudes upward from the upper surface to the dish unit 200 that bulges forward in front and below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and an annular rotation operation portion surrounding the outer periphery of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b. 302 is arranged in such a manner that the front end side of the upper surface is inclined so that the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is the head of the player who is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The (face) faces in a certain direction, and the central press operation unit 303a, the outer periphery press operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are made concentrically arranged so as to be easily visible. Large operation sections (press operation section 303 and rotation operation section 302) can be shown to the player, can have a strong impact on the player, and the operation section provided in the conventional pachinko machine, Can be recognized at a glance that there are clearly different types of operation units, and this pachinko machine 1 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines and attract the player's attention strongly. it can. In addition, since the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 are conspicuous, a game for operating the center pressing operation unit 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the rotation operation unit 302 with respect to the player. The expectation for the player participation type effect can be increased, and the game is advanced so that the game state in which the player participation type effect is executed (in this case, a large number of game balls B are driven into the game area 5a). In addition, the player participation type effect can be made easier to participate when the player participation type effect is executed, and the player participation type effect can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest.

  Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are slightly protruded from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 by the lifting mechanism including the operation button lifting drive motor 367 according to the game state (lowering position). ) And a protruding position (upward position) protruding upward from the retracted position, and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by the engaging portion 371c of the elevating cam member 371 at the retracted position. Since the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are in the retracted position, the player can clearly recognize that the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is not accepted. Therefore, the central pressing operation portion 303a can be surely pressed, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the interest can be reduced. It is possible to control.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b cannot be pressed in the retracted position, there is an outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b that does not move between the central pressing operation portion 303a and the rotation operation portion 302. Therefore, an erroneous operation such as pressing the central pressing operation portion 303a to the moment when the rotation operating portion 302 is rotated, or rotating the rotation operation portion 302 to the moment when the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed. Can be made less likely to occur, and the player participation type production can be surely enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  And by moving to a protrusion position, since the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b will protrude largely upwards on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, the center press operation part 303a and the outer periphery press operation part 303b can be conspicuous, it can give a strong impact to the player, and it can give a premium feeling to the pressing operation of the central pressing operation part 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation part 303b. It can make you think that it is, and can raise the expectation for the game. Therefore, it is possible to easily participate in the player participation type effect in which the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are pressed, and it is possible to entertain the player participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In this projecting position, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b can be newly pressed, and the central pressing operation portion 303a, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b, and the rotation operation portion 302 are arranged concentrically. When the central pressing operation portion 303a has to be pressed, the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed, or both the central pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed, or When the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b has to be pressed, the center pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, or both the center pressing operation portion 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b are pressed or rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated or the rotation operation unit 302 has to be rotated, the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Or accidentally pushes the section 303b, and an outer peripheral pressing portion 303b and the central pressing portion 303a can be induced to or accidentally pressed. Accordingly, when the player performs a pressing operation or a rotation operation, the player can perform the pressing operation or the rotation operation while paying attention to the pressing operation unit 303 to be pressed or the rotation operation unit 302 to be rotated. It is possible to give a sense of tension to the pressing operation and the rotation operation, to make the player hard to get tired, and to entertain the player participation type effect that performs the pressing operation and the rotation operation. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game of a person.

  In addition, notification means such as a vibration speaker 354 and an effect display device 1600 are provided, and in the player participation type effect, the player can perform a center pressing operation in a protruding position where the pressing operation of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is possible. If only the outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b is pressed by mistake when the portion 303a is to be pressed, the notification means notifies that the central pressing operation portion 303a is pressed, and the pressing operation is performed again. The center pressing operation portion 303a should be surely pressed, and the player can be entertained with the player participation type effect, and the mistake of the pressing operation is corrected. It is possible to avoid feeling and to entertain a player participation type production and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the player thinks that the player correctly performs the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the response (change) of the player participation type effect despite the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a. However, if the center pressing operation portion 303a is out of order, the player may have an illusion that the interest may be reduced. On the other hand, as described above, since the notification means notifies the mistake of the pressing operation, it is possible to correct the player's belief and correctly press the central pressing operation portion 303a to join the player. You can entertain the type production.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for bulging forward and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 where the game is performed are stored. An annular rotation operation unit 302 that is rotatable about an axis with the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface exposed to the outside and extending vertically. A pressing operation unit 303 including a central pressing operation unit 303a and an outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b is arranged, and the rotation operation unit 302 is changed according to a gaming state that is changed by playing a game in the gaming area 5a. A player participation type effect of rotating operation or pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is executed by the peripheral control board 1510. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302 in an appropriate direction or presses the pressing operation unit 303 according to the rotation operation or the pressing operation. Since the effect changes, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed. When the rotary operation unit 302 is rotated, the player touches any one of the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface that are exposed to the outside. Since the rotation operation can be performed by touching a distant position, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small force, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily performed. Further, when rotating by touching the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated at a high speed by operating the outer peripheral side surface in one direction by the player's hand. it can. Therefore, even when a player participation type effect that requires high-speed rotation to the rotation operation unit 302 is executed, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a high speed as described above. However, it is possible to entertain the production, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated with a relatively small (light) force, even if the rotation operation unit 302 is frequently rotated, it is possible to make the player difficult to get tired early and to rotate the rotation operation unit 302. The player participatory effect of rotating the operation unit 302 can be continuously enjoyed, and a decrease in the interest of the player with respect to the game can be suppressed. In addition, as described above, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated quickly or with a light force, in the player participation type effect, various rotation operations are requested from the player, It is possible to request different rotation operations in each, and it is possible to present more diverse and diverse player-participation-type effects to the player, making it difficult for the player to get bored and suppressing a decrease in interest Can do.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface of an operation cover (configured by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337) that is touched and rotated by the player is rotatably attached to the dish unit 200. Since it protrudes in an arc shape outward (in the direction opposite to the center of rotation) from the rotating base 332, the dish unit 200 does not get in the way even if it is rotated so as to rub the outer peripheral side surface. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be easily rotated and the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 is rounded, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated from a direction other than the side of the rotation operation unit 302 (perpendicular to the rotation axis). Since it becomes easy to touch the outer peripheral side surface, the player can operate the rotary operation unit 302 without worrying about the position and orientation of the outer peripheral side surface of the rotary operation unit 302. It can be, it is possible to enhance the operability of the rotation operating part 302. Accordingly, since the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while rubbing the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (operation cover), the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated at a higher speed in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is increased, it is easier to perform the rotation operation at a minute rotation angle than the rotation operation unit with a small diameter like a conventional pachinko machine, Since the player's movement at the time of the game can be increased, the player can more feel that the rotary operation unit 302 is being rotated. In the player participation type effect, the rotation operation unit can be realized. It is possible to entertain the rotation operation 302 and suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, since the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape, and the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface are exposed to the outside, when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, Can be rotated by touching a part according to the player's preference or situation such as the inner peripheral side, and the like, and thus the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be further improved, and the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated. It is possible to more entertain the participatory production and to suppress the decline of interest.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation. The operation unit 303 does not hinder the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 can be comfortably rotated, and both the rotation operation and the pressing operation can be sufficiently enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, the outer peripheral side surface, the upper surface, and the inner peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside so that the player can perform the rotation operation, and the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped by the player. The appearance of the section 302 can be made completely different from that of an automobile steering wheel, airplane control stick, or the like. Thereby, for example, when the rotation operation unit is configured like a steering wheel of an automobile, at the moment when the player sees the rotation operation unit, it is assumed that the player operates the rotation operation unit. The player can only perform operations such as handle handling, so when a player-participation-type production that requires a variety of rotation operations is performed, the player cannot perform a rotation operation different from the handle-type production. There is a risk that it will not be enjoyable and the interest in games will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, the external appearance of the rotary operation unit 302 is completely different from that of a steering wheel of an automobile, an airplane control stick, etc., so that the player has a preconception about how to operate the rotary operation unit 302. It is possible to wipe off, the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated as the player desires, the player participation type effect can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Even when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the protruding position, the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are exposed to the outside, so that the outer peripheral side surface and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 are rotated. Thus, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 does not get in the way, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated comfortably, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 that store the game balls B for bulging forward in the front and below the game area 5a where the game is played on the game board 5 are stored. The rotary unit 302 has an annular rotary operation unit whose vertical axis extends vertically, and a central pressing unit 303a and an outer peripheral pressing unit 303b in the ring of the rotary unit 302. When the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302 is orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302 via the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 rotates around the axis, and the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotated. For detecting the rotation by detecting a known piece 345b, it is possible to detect a rotating operation of the rotary operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345. Therefore, unlike the conventional rotation operation unit, it is not necessary to provide a detection piece for detecting the rotation on the entire lower side. In addition, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 is transmitted to the transmission detection gear member 345 via the ring gear 332a, a portion for transmitting the rotation from the ring gear 332a to the transmission detection gear member 345 (operation ring transmission gear 350). Part of the entire circumference of the rotary operation unit 302 is sufficient. Therefore, a space can be easily secured below the rotation operation unit 302, and a sufficient number of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape at a height between the rotation operation unit 302 and the transmission detection gear member 345. An operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be disposed. Then, in accordance with the gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area 5a and the rotation detection of the rotation operation unit 302 by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the effect operation ring decorative board By appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs 352, the entire ring outer upper cover 335, ring outer lower cover 336, and ring inner cover 337 constituting the rotation operation unit 302 are sufficiently (uniformly) illuminated. It is possible to make the rotation operation unit 302 stand out and attract the player's attention strongly.

  In addition, since the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction and rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 A plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 can be caused to emit light (turn on / off) sequentially at the same speed in the same direction. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates in a state in which specific portions of the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are illuminated and decorated, It is possible to make an illusion that the LED is provided inside the rotation operation unit 302, and the rotation (rotation operation) of the rotation operation unit 302 can be enjoyed to prevent a decrease in interest. Alternatively, when a player participation type effect requesting a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is executed according to the game state, a plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative board 352 are rotated. By sequentially emitting light in the direction to be operated, it is possible to prompt the player to perform a rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and it is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the rotation direction and the rotation speed (rpm) of the rotation operation unit 302, and are arranged in a ring shape on the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352. The plurality of LEDs can be turned on in order so that the rotation speed is the same as that of the rotation operation unit 302. As a result, the player rotates with the rotation operation unit 302 in a state where a certain part of the rotation operation unit 302 emits light even though the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, to give a premium feeling by the rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 and the light emitting decoration, and there may be something good for the player. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, since the plurality of LEDs arranged in a ring shape on the production operation ring decoration board 352 can be caused to emit light sequentially so that the player can show the light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates in the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, it is possible to immediately recognize that the circular rotation operation unit 302 is for the rotation operation, and to facilitate the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the execution of the player participation type effect, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, the transmission detection gear member 345 is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis orthogonal to the rotation axis of the rotation operation unit 302, and is rotated when viewed from the direction perpendicular to the rotation surface of the rotation operation unit 302. The transmission detection gear member 345 is disposed at a position as close as possible to the projection range of the unit 302, and the configuration relating to the rotation operation unit 302 (the effect operation unit 300 or the rotation drive unit 340) in the dish unit 200. Therefore, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 can be relatively increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous to attract the player's attention.

  Furthermore, an operation ring drive motor 342 that rotates the rotation operation unit 302 via the transmission detection gear member 345 according to the gaming state is provided, and as described above, the rotation that can be decorated with the effect operation ring decoration board 352. Since the operation unit 302 can be rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342 in addition to the player's rotation operation, the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 is rotated and light-emitting according to the gaming state. By decorating, the rotation operation unit 302 can be conspicuous below and in front of the game area 5a, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, since the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the rotation is performed when the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302. By rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the same direction as the operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be assisted, and the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be reduced. . Alternatively, by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation operation by the player, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302, and the operation feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 can be applied. Can be heavy. Furthermore, in response to the rotation operation by the player, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated by applying a rotational force to the rotation operation unit 302 in a direction in which the rotation is stopped by the operation ring drive motor 342 at every predetermined rotation angle. A feeling of clicking can be given. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be vibrated by rotating the rotation operation unit 302 back and forth within a predetermined angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342. As described above, since the operation ring drive motor 342 can give various operational feelings to the rotation operation unit 302, it is possible to deal with a wider variety of player participation type effects. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to get bored, and to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  Furthermore, since the production operation ring decoration board 352 is provided, when giving the operational feeling of the rotation operation unit 302 by the operation ring drive motor 342, the plurality of LEDs of the production operation ring decoration board 352 are the same as the rotation operation. By sequentially emitting light in the direction or sequentially emitting light in the direction opposite to the rotation operation, the operational feeling can be supported by light, so that the player can enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in games.

  In addition, since the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, a space below the rotation operation unit 302 is easily secured, and a larger number of LEDs are mounted. Since the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 can be arranged, the rotation operation unit 302 can be illuminated more uniformly and brightly, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a are each decorated with light emission in a favorable state by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352, the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377, and the central button decoration substrate 376. Therefore, by making them emit light appropriately, only the rotation operation unit 302 is decorated with light emission, only the pressing operation unit 303 is decorated with light emission, only the central pressing operation unit 303a is decorated with light emission, and the outer periphery pressing operation is performed. Only the portion 303b can be illuminated and decorated, making it easy for the player to recognize the operation portion that the player wants to operate and entertaining the player participation type effect.

  In addition, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, it is possible to perform a light-emitting effect that turns light by sequentially emitting light. It is possible to perform an effect in which an effect by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and an effect by the outer periphery button decoration substrate 377 in the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are associated with each other. Specifically, for example, when the player is prompted to rotate the rotation operation unit 302, both the LED on the effect operation ring decoration board 352 and the LED on the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 are caused to emit light sequentially. , Decorative decoration in which light is rotated in two rows. Alternatively, when the player is rotating the rotation operation unit 302, the LED (outer periphery pressing operation unit 303 b) of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 rotates the light in accordance with the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when it is desired to urge the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 in the reverse direction, the LED of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 performs light emission decoration that rotates light in the reverse direction. Thus, since the player can show various effects by light emission, the player can be entertained, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, a production operation ring decoration board 352, a peripheral button decoration board 377, and a central button decoration board 376 for lighting and decorating the rotation operation section 302, the outer periphery pressing operation section 303b, and the center pressing operation section 303a arranged concentrically are provided. Therefore, for example, the rotation operation unit 302 can emit light by emitting the LEDs in the order of the production operation ring decoration board 352, the outer peripheral button decoration board 377, and the central button decoration board 376, or in the reverse order. Can produce an effect of light that concentrates on the central pressing operation unit 303a from the center, and an effect of light that diffuses from the central pressing operation unit 303a to the rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible to show the player a variety of light-emitting decorations, entertain the player, and direct the player's interest to the central pressing operation unit 303a or to the rotation operation unit 302. It is possible to enter the player participation type effect by prompting the operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is performed is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed. On the door frame base 101 of the door frame 3 that is closed, a door window 101a that allows the game area 5a to be viewed from the front is formed, and a glass unit 160 that is provided with a transparent flat glass plate 162 is connected to the door window 101a. Are attached to the door frame 3 (the door frame base 101) so as to close the upper frame 201 and the lower plate 202 for storing the game balls B for playing games below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101. The provided dish unit 200 is attached.

  Then, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and a cylindrical shape coaxially arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 A pressing operation unit 303 including an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303 b and a columnar central pressing operation unit 303 a is attached, and a semicircular arc donut shape similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is provided below the rotation operation unit 302. The two upper central dish 312a and lower middle dish 312b are attached to be separated from each other vertically and are continuous with both ends of the upper middle dish 312a and the lower middle dish 312b. The door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 having the same shape, the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame door Door frame top decorative body 453 of Puyunitto 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Therefore, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two dish center upper decoration bodies 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have three donut-shaped members arranged in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation section 302, the outer peripheral press Since the operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be increased, the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous, and the player can operate them. The rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown large, and the player's interest is strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the dish unit 200. The decrease can be suppressed.

  Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b have a donut shape in which a similar columnar shape (tube) is formed in an annular shape, and are provided below the rotation operation unit 302. A semi-cylindrical door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body 453 surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a so as to be continuous with the upper central decorative body 312a. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a decoration that surrounds the outer periphery of the game area 5a with a cylindrical tube, and to give a sense of unity to the decoration on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1. The appearance can be improved and the player's interest is directed to the inside (the game area 5a and the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303) surrounded by the cylindrical tube. Determined force can be enhanced, it is possible to easily this pachinko machine 1 is selected let increase the expectation as a pachinko machine for a game on the game in the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending forward as it goes upward. Since it is inclined so as to be lowered, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the player rotates from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are easily understood, the player can easily recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotating, so that when the player participation type effect is executed, the player rotates immediately. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the player's participation type effect can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 to suppress the decrease in interest.

  Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the plate center upper decoration body 312 a and the plate center lower decoration body 312 b are made larger than those of the rotation operation unit 302. In the dish unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b protrudes more forward than the upper dish 201, and Since the decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation section 302, the rotation operation section 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312a, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b are made conspicuous. At the same time, it is possible to improve the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 by the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, attract the player's interest strongly, and appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

  Furthermore, since the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape in which the columnar shape is an annular shape, the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface, an outer side surface, an inner side surface, and the like compared to a flat disk shape. Since it becomes easy to apply fingers, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated as the player likes. Further, since the dish center upper decorative body 312 a and the dish center lower decorative body 312 b are formed larger than the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decoration body 312 a and the dish center lower decoration body 312 b are larger than the rotation operation unit 302. Since it protrudes outward, it is possible to place an arm or put a finger on the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and the player operates the rotary operation unit 302 in an easy posture. And the presence of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b projecting forward from the rotation operation unit 302 can prevent the player from coming too close to the rotation operation unit 302. Thus, it is possible to easily secure a space for the player to operate the arm and fingers to move around the rotation operation unit 302, and to improve the operability of the rotation operation unit 302. Can. As described above, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is easy to perform, the player can be made to think about the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 when the player participation type effect is executed. You can entertain the participatory production and suppress the decline of interest.

  In addition, the pressing operation unit 303 including the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a inside the rotation operation unit 302 can be moved between a retracted position (downward position) and a protruding position (upward position). Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is moved to the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes greatly upward from the rotation operation unit 302, so that the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be shown larger. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player, attract the player's interest strongly, and increase the expectation for the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to suppress the decrease in interest. Can be made.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lowered position, the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is relatively more conspicuous than the pressing operation unit 303, so that the player's interest is directed to the rotation operation unit 302. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the protruding pressing operation unit 303 is more conspicuous than the rotation operation unit 302, so that the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, according to the content of the player participation type effect to be executed, the player is prompted to perform the effect operation unit 301 that the player wants to operate by moving the pressing operation unit 303 between the lowered position and the raised position. It is possible to entertain the player-participation type effect by accurately operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the player.

  Further, when the pressing operation unit 303 inside the rotation operation unit 302 is set to the lowered position, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a have the same height as each other. When the pressing operation unit 303 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a protrude upward from the rotation operating unit 302. In addition, the rotation operation unit 302, the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b, and the center pressing operation unit 303a can be operated. Therefore, according to the contents of the player participation type production, the production operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player can be properly used, so that it can be used for various productions and the player can enjoy various operations. It is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the production operation ring decoration board 352, the dish center upper decoration board 314, the dish center lower decoration board 316, the door frame left side decoration board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410. Since the substrate 418, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are provided, the rotation operation unit 302 and the dish center upper decorative body 312a are provided. Further, the pachinko machine 1 as a whole is improved in appearance by lighting the lower center decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained by attracting the player's interest strongly. Further, the rotation operation unit 302, the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are appropriately light-emitting. By decorating, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight from within the game area 5a to the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302), or from the production operation unit 301 into the game area 5a. It is possible to cause the player to operate the production operation unit 301 or to play a game in the game area 5a according to the state, and to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first starting port of FIG. 131 is used as a receiving port provided with the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 as the launching means in the game area 5a. The main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 151 is provided as game control means capable of progressing the game based on entering the ball 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a setting switch button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A as selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A as determination means. 1311a. The setting switching button 1311b selects any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous to the player, and uses the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as a selection signal. One transmission path can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern or the like through which a signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided in the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A is transmitted. The setting switch 1311a determines the setting value selected by the setting switch button 1311b, and uses the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a as a determination signal as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. This can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern through which a signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300 is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a As a routing between the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) of the setting change board 1310Y is also formed apart, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a) A wiring pattern in which an ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switch button 1311b. The routing with the wiring pattern to be transmitted is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the routing with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is not close to each other. (Separated from each other).

  As described above, when any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) that is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting value is determined, the determined setting value is set. The game based on the set value can be provided to the player by the progress of the game based on the game. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Also, unauthorized modification can be prevented by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 has been described with a preferable form, but the pachinko machine 1 can be variously improved and changed in design.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine that is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. Even in this case, the same effects as described above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, even when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) is pressed to the descending end with the pressing operation unit 303 moved to the raised position, the pressing of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is detected. Although what is not shown was shown, it is not limited to this, You may enable it to detect the press of the outer periphery press operation part 303b. Thereby, even if the same pressing operation is performed, the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b are changed to different effects, or when the outer pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, the central pressing operation unit 303a is prompted to perform the pressing operation. It is possible to perform a variety of player-participation-type effects, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in the above-described form, when the pressing operation unit 303 (the center pressing operation unit 303a and the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b) is moved to the raised position, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 moves to the lowered position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed in the state of the raised position, the downward movement may be restricted after moving slightly downward from the raised position.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the upper surface of the dish unit 200 bulging forward is provided with the rotation operation unit 302. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation operation unit is arranged inside the dish unit. In addition, the outer peripheral side surface of the rotation operation unit may be exposed to the outside on the front surface of the dish unit. This also makes it possible for the player to enjoy the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit in the same manner as described above, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the speaker unit 620a communicated with the curtain plate internal space 40a (port member 47) via the connecting cylinder portion 43a is shown in the main body frame 4. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, the door frame 3 (dish unit 200) may be provided with a speaker unit whose inside communicates with the port member 47, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

The pachinko machine described so far includes the following technical ideas.
“A game board in which a game area in which a launched game ball can flow down is formed, and the game area includes a first game area in which a game ball fired with a predetermined launch force can flow down; In a gaming machine having a second game area in which a game ball launched with a specific firing force stronger than the firing force can flow down,
A communication passage portion through which a game ball fired with the specific launch force can pass prior to entering the second game area;
The communication passage part is provided with a plurality of discharge parts for discharging the passed game balls to the second game area so that the places where the passed game balls enter the second game area are different. A branch part is provided to separate the passages so that a plurality of spherical passages are formed in the vertical direction upstream of the plurality of discharge parts,
A first sphere passage of the plurality of sphere passages formed by the branch portion communicates with a first discharge portion of the plurality of discharge portions, and the plurality of sphere passages formed by the branch portion. The second ball passage is a gaming machine configured to communicate with a second discharge portion among the plurality of discharge portions. "

  Such a gaming machine is provided with a plurality of ball passages of the communication passage portion and a plurality of discharge portions communicating with each of the ball passages, and the entry point to the second game area differs depending on which ball passage is passed. The drop mode in the two game areas is different. If the fall mode in the second game area is different, the probability of entering the ball will also differ, so the player will be careful to handle the ball, and as a result of capturing the target ball path, If a game ball can be acquired, a sufficient sense of accomplishment and satisfaction can be obtained. Therefore, since the consciousness concentrates on launching a game ball toward the second game area, the interest of the game increases.

In the above gaming machine, a part of the game ball flowing through the first ball passage is provided with a drop opening connecting the first ball passage and the second ball passage in a part of the branch portion of the communication passage portion. It may fall so that it can fall to the specific location of the 2nd game field from the 2nd discharge part.
In order to aim at the 1st discharge | release part connected to a 1st bulb | ball path by carrying out like this, since it is necessary to satisfy | fill both a launch direction and launch force, it comes to handle operation by concentrating consciousness more carefully.

[22. Solutions other than claims, effects, etc.
In addition, as described below, the above-described embodiment includes many means for solving the problems to be solved by the present invention other than those described in the claims.

[22-1. Solution]
(Solution I)
A gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine and having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
A first operation that covers at least a part of the change operation means and makes the change operation of the game setting difficult, and the change operation means that is covered in the first state is exposed to perform the change operation of the game setting. A second state to enable, a change suppression means that can be changed to,
A game machine comprising: first state holding means that holds the change suppressing means in the first state and that can be released by a specific release operation.

According to such a gaming machine, the game setting change operation by the change operation means is difficult due to the change suppression means held (locked) in the first state. There is hardly any.
On the other hand, when the administrator or the like regularly performs a game setting change operation by the change operation means, the change is performed by releasing the holding (locking) of the first state holding means by, for example, unlocking with a key as a specific release operation. The control means is changed to the second state, and thereby the change operation means exposed to the outside is operated to change the game setting.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, the change suppression unit is returned to the first state and held (locked) by the first state holding unit, so that the game setting changing operation can be returned to a difficult state. .
In order to solve the same problem, it is possible to directly attach a key switch that can be turned ON / OFF with a dedicated key as a change operation means to the board of the main controller, but the current main controller is limited. Since electronic parts are arranged in a high density in the space, if the key switch is directly attached to the main control unit, the board configuration needs to be significantly changed. On the other hand, in the gaming machine of the solution means I, since the change operation means is blocked from unauthorized setting changes by the combination of the change suppression means and the first state holding means, the change operation means is formed by a small push button switch. Therefore, a large change in the board configuration of the main control unit is unnecessary.

(Solution II)
The gaming machine of the above solution I is
A container for housing the main control unit;
An opening provided in the housing for communicating the change operation means of the main control unit housed in the housing to the outside,
Furthermore, a foreign matter intrusion prevention unit for preventing foreign matter from entering from the opening may be provided between the container and the change operation means.
By doing so, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act in which a foreign object such as a wire enters from the opening and tries to perform an unauthorized work on the main control unit.

(Solution III)
Moreover, in the gaming machine of the above solution I or II,
The change operation means includes a specific operation unit that controls setting change start, and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppressing unit may cover the specific operation unit and change between the first state and the second state, but may not cover the separate operation unit.
In this way, by narrowing down the protection targets of the change operation means consisting of multiple elements to those with high security importance, the degree of freedom in design, such as making the change suppression means compact and reducing the range of motion associated therewith, etc. Therefore, more advanced countermeasures against fraud are possible. On the other hand, it is possible to improve the work of changing the settings by opening those with low security importance to the outside.

(Solution IV)
Moreover, in the gaming machine of the above solution I or II,
The change operation means includes a specific operation unit that controls setting change start, and another operation unit that performs other setting operations.
The change suppression means can change between the first state and the second state with respect to the specific operation unit, and can cover the separate operation unit when the specific operation unit changes to the second state. Further, it may be configured to bias toward either the first state or the second state in a state where the holding (locking) by the first state holding unit is released.
In such a gaming machine, an error operation that simultaneously operates the specific operation unit and the separate operation unit is less likely to occur by alternatively covering the specific operation unit and the separate operation unit with the change suppression unit. In addition, by urging the change suppression unit toward either the first state or the second state, the change suppression unit is not likely to stop at a halfway position, and operability is improved. Preferably, if the change suppressing unit is biased toward the second state, the special operation unit is automatically exposed to the outside when the change suppressing unit is held (locked) in the first state. Therefore, the procedure for the change operation is easy to understand.

(Solution V)
Moreover, in the gaming machine of any one of the above solutions I to IV,
The first state holding unit may lock the change suppression unit in the first state by coupling the change suppression unit in the first state and the container with a lock member.
As a result, the change suppressing means can be easily and reliably locked in the first state.

(Solution VI)
In the gaming machine of the above solution V,
The first state holding means may be prevented from being detached from the container in the unlocked state by being connected to the container by a support portion.
By doing so, since the first state holding means does not detach from the container even in the unlocked state, there is no risk of dropping the first state holding means into the island facility, and the removed first state holding means is placed. You can forget your time and waste your time looking for it in the lock phase.

(Solution VII)
In addition, the gaming machine of any one of the above solutions I to VI is
A housing for housing the main control unit;
The change suppressing means covers a part or all of the container when in the first state,
Each of the container and the change suppressing means has transparency, and each includes an information display unit in which a management number and a predetermined description are described.
Furthermore, each information display unit may be provided at a position that does not overlap each other when the change suppression unit is in the first state and does not hinder the visibility of the specific operation unit.
By doing so, it is possible to easily find the replacement of the container and the change suppression means (collection of parts in good condition) performed for the purpose of concealing fraud, and also visually confirm the illegal operation for the specific operation unit Can be done easily.

(Solution VIII)
In the above solution means I to VII, the change suppression means is set to the second state, the change operation means is exposed to the outside, and the change operation means is directly operated in this state. It may be provided at a position covering the means to make it difficult for the change operation means to be changed, while the change suppression means may be made to perform the operation of the change operation means.
That is, the gaming machine of the solving means VIII performs a lottery by the establishment of a predetermined condition, and gives a predetermined profit to the player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine and having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A housing for housing the main control unit;
A change operation means provided in the main control unit and capable of changing the game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
A change restraining means that is provided at a position covering the change operation means on the container side, and makes it difficult to perform a direct change operation from the outside to the change operation means,
The change suppression means is operable by a specific operation from the outside,
When the specific operation is performed on the change suppression unit, the change suppression unit operates so that the direct change operation on the change operation unit is performed.

According to such a gaming machine, the game setting change operation from the outside by the change operation means is difficult due to the change suppression means fixedly provided at a position covering the change operation means on the container side. There is almost no possibility that the game setting is illegally changed.
On the other hand, when the administrator or the like regularly changes the game setting by the change operation means, for example, an operation of inserting and unlocking the unlock key from the outside is performed as a specific operation from the outside to the change suppression means. Then, the change setting means can be changed by performing the change operation means on behalf of the change operation means.
Then, after the change of the game setting is completed, the specific operation on the change suppression unit is terminated, so that it is possible to return to a state in which a direct change operation from the outside to the change operation unit is difficult.
Since this solution means VIII is also designed to block the change operation means from unauthorized using the change suppression means provided on the container side, it is possible to form the change operation means with a small push button switch, and thus the main control unit This eliminates the need for significant changes in the board configuration.

[22-2. effect]
According to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it possible to change the probability of winning a lottery and that makes it difficult for the probability of winning to be changed illegally.

[23. Game machine management method]
Next, a gaming machine management method using the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 190 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine provided with a color code as viewed from the rear, and FIG. 191 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with a color code as separated from a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 192 is an enlarged right side view showing a part of a door frame provided with a color code in section, and FIG. 193 is a schematic block diagram for explaining a gaming machine management method using the color code.

[23-1. Color code]
As shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of color codes Cx (C1 to C5).
The color code Cx is a two-dimensional code having color arrangement (arrangement pattern) as information used for identification, and is fixed with a seal or adhesive or screws having an adhesive layer (not shown) on the back surface. As shown in FIG. 193, an arrangement pattern of a plurality of colors on the surface (for example, black on the base, cyan on 3 × 9 cells provided on the base (filled in FIG. 193) ), Magenta (displayed with diagonal lines in FIG. 193), and yellow (displayed with white outline in FIG. 193) are formed, and machine-specific machine-specific information is associated with the arrangement pattern. The color code Cx to be applied is well known as described in, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-33034, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.
The machine-specific information is, for example, a gaming machine ID made up of several digits, characters, symbols, etc., and an imaging device 6100 (for example, a wide-angle camera) that is an external device that can read the arrangement pattern of the color code Cx as shown in FIG. ) In which the arrangement pattern of one or a plurality of color codes Cx (Cx (A), Cx (B), and Cx (C) in the example of FIG. 193) is placed and photographed (imaging step), One or a plurality of the captured images (arrangement pattern of one or a plurality of color codes Cx) is recognized by the machine-specific information acquisition unit 6110 connected to the imaging device 6100, and is subjected to image analysis. The machine-specific information corresponding to the arrangement patterns of the plurality of color codes Cx is automatically acquired collectively (machine-specific information acquisition step). In the present embodiment, the gaming machine ID, which is the machine-specific information, is composed of an 8-digit number sequence, and the highest digit of the number sequence corresponds to “machine-specific information A indicating the same model”. In addition, the other digits of the numerical sequence are associated as “machine-specific information B (the management number of each gaming machine, etc.) within the same model”. For example, if there is a model “CR dynamite X”, a gaming machine ID “10000001” is associated with gaming machine A, a gaming machine ID “10000002” is associated with gaming machine B, and gaming machine C Is associated with a gaming machine ID of “10000003”. Then, “1” represented by the most significant digit common to each gaming machine ID indicates “CR dynamite X (model type)”, and the remaining digits (digits excluding the most significant digit) that are different for each gaming machine ID. The represented “0000001”, “0000002”, and “0000003” can indicate “machine-specific information B (the management number of each gaming machine, etc.) in the same model”.

[23-1-1. Color code and pachinko machine]
The color code Cx (C1 to C5) is provided in each of the color code arrangement portions M1 to M5 of the game board 5, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG.

[23-1-2. Game board color code]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 191, the color codes C1 and C2 of the game board 5 are arranged such that the upper surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game board 5 and the upper surface of the rear unit 3000 of the game board 5 are color code arrangement portions M1 and M2. The color code arrangement portions M1 and M2 are arranged so as to be photographed upward, that is, at an angle looking down from above. In addition, the color code arrangement portions M1 and M2 themselves and members within a predetermined area centering on the color code arrangement portions M1 and M2 do not obstruct the color code C1 and C2 color arrangement identification. , C2 is preferably colored in a color that is not used in the color arrangement (black or white in this embodiment).

  The game board 5 is supported in a state of being fitted into the main body frame 4 from the front side, and in the supported state, the color codes C1 and C2 are inside the main body frame 4 and are not exposed to the outside. When it is removed, it can be exposed and photographed. However, in the present embodiment, the entire ball tank 552 of the main body frame 4 is made of a transparent member, and the color code C2 on the game board 5 side at a position corresponding to the lower side of the ball tank 552 is a broken line in FIG. Thus, it is possible to take a picture at an angle looking down from above through the transparent ball tank 552. Of course, if a game ball enters the ball tank 552, the color code C2 is hidden behind the ball and cannot be seen, but since the ball tank 552 is empty from the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 until it is installed in the game hall, the color code C2 The code C2 can be fully utilized for gaming machine management. Rather, since there is no wiring or the like inside the ball tank 552, it is advantageous because there is little possibility that the photographing of the color code C2 is hindered by the wiring or the like. In addition, even if the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall and the game ball enters the ball tank 552, the color located below the ball tank 552 with the game board 5 removed from the main body frame 4 Since the code C2 is exposed to the outside, it can be continuously used for gaming machine management.

  In addition, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be grasped by making use of the color code C2 on the game board 5 side. For example, the color code C2 on the game board 5 side can be photographed at an angle looking down from above through the transparent ball tank 552. If the game ball in the ball tank 552 is reduced, the color code C2 is photographed by an external device. If it is recognized at the game hall side, for example, there is a suspicion that an abnormality has occurred in the ball breakage detection system of the ball tank 552 (if the ball breakage detection system is functioning normally, the game ball is replenished as appropriate. Therefore, it is possible to notify the game hall at an early stage that the color code C2 is normally not photographed).

[23-1-3. Body frame color code]
As shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, the color code C3 of the main body frame 4 has an area adjacent to the ball tank 552 of the main body frame 4 as the color code arrangement portion M3, and faces upward, that is, above the color code arrangement portion M3. It is provided in an arrangement that allows shooting at an angle looking down.
Further, the main body frame 4 is provided with a color code C4 in the color code arrangement portion M4, with the outer surface of the power supply board cover 631 on the lower side of the rear surface as a color code arrangement portion M4. This color code C4 is not suitable for photographing at an angle looking down from above with the main body frame 4 attached to the outer frame 2, but when the main body frame 4 is turned down in the process of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1, It is possible to shoot at an angle looking down from above. Therefore, in this embodiment, the color codes C3 and C4 of the main body frame 4 are the same.
As for the color code arrangement portions M3 and M4, the color code arrangement portions M3 and M4 themselves and members within a predetermined area centering on the color code arrangement portions M3 and M4 are arranged in the arrangement of the colors of the color codes C3 and C4. It is desirable that the color code C3 and C4 be colored with a color (black or white in this embodiment) that is not used in the color code C3 or C4 color arrangement.

[23-1-4. Door frame color code]
As shown in FIGS. 191 and 192, the color code C5 of the door frame 3 is a color code arrangement that is detachably attached to the upper reinforcing frame 113 on the upper rear surface of the door frame 3 as a unit part dedicated to the color code. The unit M5 is provided in an arrangement that allows photographing at an angle looking upward from above, that is, from above. As for the color code arrangement portion M5, the color code arrangement portion M5 itself and members within a predetermined area centered on the color code arrangement portion M5 do not hinder the identification of the color arrangement of the color code C5. It is desirable that the color code C5 be colored with a color (black or white in the present embodiment) that is not used in the color arrangement.

The specific color code arrangement portion M5 is detachably attached as a unit part to the upper reinforcing frame 113 at the upper rear surface of the door frame 3, and is shown in the flip-up state diagram and the storage state diagram of FIG. As described above, the arrangement portion main body 6130 that is rotatably and detachably attached to the upper reinforcing frame 113, and the storage lever portion 6140 that is rotatably attached to both sides of the distal end of the arrangement portion main body 6130. Thus, the color code C5 is provided on the upper surface of the arrangement portion main body 6130.
The arrangement portion main body 6130 of the color code arrangement portion M5 is urged by a spring (not shown) or the like toward the substantially horizontal mechanical end jumping position, as shown in FIG. The storage lever portion 6140 is urged by a spring (not shown) or the like toward the deployed posture of the mechanical end that forms an obtuse angle with respect to the arrangement portion main body 6130 as shown in the flip-up state diagram of FIG.
Since the color code arrangement portion M5 has the above-described configuration, when the door frame 3 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 2 and separated from the main body frame 4, the arrangement portion main body 6130 as shown in the flip-up state diagram of FIG. Springs up to a substantially horizontal position by the bias of the spring, and the storage lever portion 6140 maintains an obtuse angled posture with respect to the placement portion main body 6130 by the bias of the spring, with the color code C5 of the placement portion main body 6130 facing upward. It enables shooting at an angle looking down from above.
On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed and overlapped with the front surface of the main body frame 4, the color code arrangement portion M5 moves as the door frame 3 approaches the main body frame 4 as indicated by an imaginary line in the storage state diagram of FIG. The storage lever portion 6140 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body frame 4, and the storage lever portion 6140 rotates while pushing the tip of the placement portion main body 6130 downward by further approach of the door frame 3. It is housed in the upper reinforcing frame 113 next to the arrangement portion main body 6130. At this time, each spring of the placement portion main body 6130 and the storage lever portion 6140 accumulates a repulsive force that tries to return to the flip-up posture or the deployed posture, and therefore the placement portion is interlocked with the opening of the door frame 3 by the repulsive force. The main body 6130 jumps up automatically, and the storage lever portion 6140 is deployed.
Although not shown, the color code C5 of the door frame 3 may be provided on the upper surface of the door frame 3 (for example, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 570). Even in such a case, since the player cannot visually recognize the color code C5 in the game state, there is no possibility that the color of the color code C5 breaks the atmosphere of the pachinko machine design.

[23-1-5. Color code arrangement etc.]
As described above, the color codes C1 to C5 of the pachinko machine 1 are places where the player cannot visually recognize the state at the time of the game (the state where the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are closed in the island facility of the game hall), Therefore, it is provided in a place that is not reflected in the wide-angle camera provided at the height of the game hall. Since the color codes C1 to C5 are provided in the color code arrangement units M1 to M5, the arrangement of the color codes C1 to C5 of the pachinko machine 1 and the arrangement of the color code arrangement units M1 to M5 are naturally the same.
In addition, a plurality of color codes C1 to C5 are provided in one pachinko machine 1 (game machine), and these may be the same or different depending on necessity, and they are managed for purposes and contents Is appropriately selected. In the present embodiment, each of the color codes C1 to C5 provided in one pachinko machine 1 is configured to correspond to the gaming machine ID including the machine-specific information A and B described above. Separately from the present embodiment, each color code C1 to C5 may be associated with machine-specific information having a different meaning.
Further, the color codes C1 to C3 and C5 are arranged in an upward state at a high position of the game board 5, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 so that photographing can be performed at an angle looking down from above.
The color codes C1 to C3 and C5 are used not only when the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are detached from the outer frame 2, but also when the color code C1 to C3 and C5 are rotated (open) with respect to the front surface of the outer frame 2. It is arranged in a state where it is exposed to the front and can be photographed from above. In particular, the color codes C <b> 1 to C <b> 3 and C <b> 5 according to the embodiment are provided on the opposite side (open side) of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. As a result, photographing can be performed even if the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are slightly opened.
In addition, the color codes C1 and C2 are provided on the game board 5 side at positions where shooting is possible with the game board 5 removed from the main body frame 4.
Further, the color code C2 is provided at a position corresponding to the lower side of the transparent ball tank 552 on the side of the game board 5 with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4, and through the ball tank 552. It is possible to shoot from above.
The color code C5 is provided in the color code arrangement part M5 which is a unit part that is detachable from the door frame 3. The detachable unit parts include, for example, the main control board box 1320, the ball feed unit 250, and the payout unit 800 in addition to the color code arrangement portion M5 dedicated to the color code as in the embodiment. A color code may be provided by using one side as a color code arrangement portion. In particular, when the color code C5 is provided in the main control board box 1320, the seal seal that prevents unauthorized opening of the main control board box 1320 can be used as the color code arrangement portion M5. The control board box 1320 can be sealed and managed. As shown in FIG. 191, the main control board box 1320 is entirely covered with a back cover 640. Since the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent member, the color code C5 can be photographed through the back cover 640. is there. Thus, the technical idea of providing the color code C5 on the sealing seal of the board box can be used only for sealing and management of the board box separately from the gaming machine management.

Note that the number and arrangement of the color codes described above are merely examples, and the number may be appropriately increased or decreased as necessary, or the arrangement may be changed.
Further, the color code Cx is not limited to being directly above but may be directed obliquely as long as it is possible to photograph at an angle looking down from above.
The color code Cx that can be photographed at an angle looking down from above may be at least one of a plurality, and the other color code Cx may face the front, rear, or side.
The color code Cx is a color code formed of a transparent member by providing an adhesive layer on the front surface side or applying an adhesive, in addition to providing an adhesive layer on the back side or applying an adhesive. You may make it stick on the inner surface side of an arrangement | positioning part. By doing so, there is no fear that the color code Cx will be damaged, and even if it becomes dirty, it is sufficient to wipe the transparent member, so that the dirt can be easily wiped off. Therefore, the clearness of the color code Cx is not easily lost, and stable gaming machine management can be performed over a long period of time.

[23-2. Game machine management method using color code]
Next, a gaming machine management method using the color code Cx will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.
In FIG. 193, reference numeral 6100 is a photographing apparatus which is an external device different from the pachinko machine 1, reference numeral 6110 is a machine-specific information acquisition unit programmed in a management computer connected to the photographing apparatus 6100, and reference numeral 6120 is the same. The matching unit programmed in the management computer, reference numeral 6150, is the gaming machine information corresponding to the unique machine-specific information, for example, the manufacturing information, configuration information, movement history information in the gaming hall, fraudulent information of each pachinko machine 1 This is a database in which history information, maintenance information, etc. are recorded electronically.

The photographing apparatus 6100 is attached to, for example, a high place inside the manufacturing factory of the pachinko machine 1 or inside the game hall, and a plurality of subjects SJ arranged below the photographing apparatus 6100 in FIG. The game board 5, the main body frame 4, the door frame 3, or an appropriate assembly thereof or a combination thereof and the outer frame 2 is combined. In the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facility.
The imaging device 6100 of the present embodiment is a wide-angle camera, and is arranged away from the color code Cx over a long distance as long as the arrangement pattern of a plurality of colors of the color code Cx is within a distance (for example, within 10 meters). can do. In addition, the imaging apparatus 6100 can capture not only one subject SJ but also a plurality of the subjects SJ at a time and shoot a plurality of color codes Cx provided on the subject SJ in a captured image (shooting). Step). In the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island facility of the game hall, the main body frame 4 including the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are normally closed with respect to the front surface of the outer frame 2, and therefore, in that state, Although the color code Cx is hidden in the island facility and is not captured by the photographing device 6100, the color code C5 is captured by the photographing device 6100 as soon as the door frame 3 is opened. The code C3 is captured by the photographing device 6100, and when the game board 5 is further removed from the main body frame 4, the color codes C1 and C2 are captured by the photographing device 6100.

Next, the photographed image photographed in the photographing step is transmitted to a management computer connected to the photographing apparatus 6100 and recognized by the device-specific information acquisition unit 6110, and a plurality of color codes Cx reflected therein are displayed. The color arrangement pattern is subjected to image analysis, and machine-specific information (for example, gaming machine ID) associated with the arrangement pattern is acquired (machine-specific information acquisition step).
Next, the collation unit 6120 programmed in the management computer collates the machine-specific information acquired in the machine-specific information acquisition step with the database 6150 in which the gaming machine information corresponding to the machine-specific information is set. If necessary, the corresponding gaming machine information is output and displayed on the screen or printed, and if necessary, the gaming machine information in the database 6150 is rewritten, added, updated, partially deleted, and managed.

According to the gaming machine management method using such a color code, what is conventionally performed one by one with a QR code from the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1 to the installation in the island facility of the gaming hall, A large number of gaming machines can be managed efficiently because a plurality of devices that fit in the system can be recognized and managed simultaneously.
In addition, the gaming machine management method and the gaming machine are not limited to general ordinary gaming machine management, but also include movement management of pachinko machines 1 in gaming halls that cannot be handled by conventional QR codes, and management against fraud. It can be carried out.

  Specifically, since the color code Cx can be surely recognized if the arrangement pattern of a plurality of colors of the color code Cx can be recognized even from a photographed image reflected on the photographing device 6100 provided at the height of the game hall. When the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 are opened and the color codes C1 and C5 are captured in the photographed image of the photographing apparatus 6100, the door frame 3 is based on the machine-specific information corresponding to the color codes C1 and C5. The pachinko machine 1 that is open and the like and the arrangement in the game hall can be found instantly. Further, the database 6150 includes maintenance information regarding a call notification by a button for a player as gaming machine information corresponding to unique machine-specific information. If the detection of opening of the door frame 3 or the like based on C1 and C5 is collated, it is possible to instantaneously determine whether or not the opening of the door frame 3 or the like is illegal. Therefore, it is possible to quickly cope with unauthorized opening of the door frame 3 or the like.

  Further, when the game board 5 is periodically moved in the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is specified by the color code C5 when the door frame 3 of the movement source pachinko machine 1 is opened, and the game board 5 is identified therefrom. Is removed, the game board 5 is specified by the color code C1 or C2. When the game board 5 is carried in front of the destination pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 of the destination pachinko machine 1 is opened, the pachinko machine 1 is specified by the color code C5. In this state, when the game board 5 of the destination pachinko machine 1 is removed and the source game board 5 is attached, the destination of the destination is changed due to the recognition, movement, disappearance, etc. of the color code C1 or C2 of the game board 5. When information about the game board 5 in the gaming machine information is rewritten, and the gaming board 5 removed from the destination is attached to the pachinko machine 1 as the movement source, the fact is read from the change in the color code C1 or C2, and the movement source The gaming machine information related to the gaming board 5 is rewritten. Therefore, the movement history of the game board 5 can be easily managed.

[23-3. Technical idea of game machine management method]
The above description regarding the gaming machine management method includes the following solution means (technical idea) for the following solution problems.

[23-3-1. Background art and solutions]
Conventionally, a so-called QR code (registered trademark) attached to a gaming machine is photographed by a camera, and individual information of each gaming machine is acquired by reading the photographed image, and managed by the individual information. (For example, JP 2008-295549 A).
However, since the conventional gaming machine management method needs to read the QR code one by one, there is a problem that it takes time to manage a plurality of gaming machines (such as grasping the types and installation states of gaming machines).
The following solution is made in view of the above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine management method and a gaming machine capable of efficiently managing a large number of gaming machines.

[23-3-2. Solution]
In order to achieve the above object, as Solution 1,
Using a gaming machine in which a color code in which machine-specific information specific to gaming machines is associated with a plurality of color arrangement patterns is provided at a position where a player cannot visually recognize the gaming state,
A photographing step of photographing the color code provided in each of a plurality of gaming machines so as to fit in one photographed image;
A machine-specific information acquisition step of recognizing one or more of the color codes in the captured image taken by the shooting step and acquiring unique machine-specific information corresponding to each of the one or more color codes; Prepared,
Manage the predetermined gaming machine information on a plurality of gaming machines by collating the machine-specific information acquired in the machine-specific information acquisition step with a database in which predetermined gaming machine information corresponding to the machine-specific information is set. Provide a gaming machine management method that has been made possible.

Moreover, as a solution 2,
In a gaming machine where a game is played using a game medium,
A color code in which machine-specific machine-specific information is associated with a plurality of color arrangement patterns;
A color code placement section provided with the color code,
The color code is photographed and recognized by a predetermined external device, and can provide machine-specific information specific to the gaming machine to the external device,
The color code placement unit provides a gaming machine provided at a place where the player cannot visually recognize the game.

According to the gaming machine management method and gaming machine of the above solutions 1, 2, for example, the color codes of a plurality of gaming machines are read using a wide-angle camera or the like provided at an appropriate position on the gaming machine production line. Thus, individual information of a plurality of gaming machines can be acquired simultaneously, and a large amount of gaming machines can be managed efficiently.
In addition, by providing the color code at a position where the player cannot see in the state of gaming, there is no possibility that the color scheme of the color code will destroy the atmosphere of the gaming machine design, and the machine-specific information unique to the gaming machine Hard to leak to the player. Furthermore, by providing a color code at a position where the player cannot see in the state of the game, the color code is not captured in the image captured by the wide-angle camera provided for crime prevention in the game hall during normal times. When the door frame of the gaming machine is opened from the normal state and the color code is captured in the image captured by the wide-angle camera, the door frame is opened based on the machine-specific information corresponding to the color code. A gaming machine can be identified instantly. As a result, effective crime prevention measures can be taken.

Further, the above gaming machine management method and gaming machine may be configured as the following solving means 3-9.
[Solution 3]
A gaming machine management method according to Solution 1 or a gaming machine according to Solution 2 in which a plurality of the color codes are provided in one gaming machine.
Each of the plurality of color codes may be the same or different. When a plurality of the same color code is provided, for example, a position that is easily recognized at the manufacturing stage and a position that is easily recognized when installed in the island facility of the game hall are appropriately arranged, so that the game by color code The reliability of machine management can be increased. In addition, when a plurality of different color codes are provided, it is possible to perform gaming machine management that is subdivided into parts constituting the gaming machine. Generally, a gaming machine is an assembly of parts (elements) such as a game board, a door frame, and a main body frame, and each part may be provided with the same or different color code.

[Solution 4]
4. The gaming machine management method or the gaming machine according to any one of solving means 1 to 3, wherein the color code is an arrangement that allows photographing at an angle looking down from above.
By arranging the color code so that it can be photographed at an angle looking down from above, it can be used for gaming machine management in the manufacturing process, as well as using a wide-angle camera installed at the height of the gaming hall for crime prevention purposes. Can easily manage gaming machines related to the installation, installation, and crime prevention during business hours.

[Solution 5]
Pachislot machines
A game board having a game area where the game is played;
A main body frame that is pivotably attached to the front side of the outer frame and supports the game board in a removable manner;
A door frame that covers the front surface of the main body frame and is rotatably attached to the front side of the outer frame like a door,
The color code is provided on the main body frame and / or the door frame, and the color code is turned upward in a state where the main body frame and / or the door frame is exposed to the front by rotating with respect to the front surface of the outer frame. The gaming machine management method or the gaming machine according to any one of solution means 1 to 4 that can be photographed from the gaming machine.
Since the color code is photographed and recognized with the main body frame and / or door frame rotating with respect to the outer frame and exposed in front of the machine, the door frame of a specific gaming machine is opened Instantly understand with information. Thereby, effective crime prevention measures can be performed quickly.

[Solution 6]
Pachislot machines
A game board having a game area where the game is played;
A main body frame that is pivotably attached to the front side of the outer frame and supports the game board in a removable manner;
A door frame that covers the front surface of the main body frame and is rotatably attached to the front side of the outer frame like a door,
The gaming machine management method or gaming machine according to any one of the solving means 1 to 5, wherein the color code is provided on the gaming board and the main body frame and / or the door frame.
Thus, detailed gaming machine management can be performed for each major gaming machine component.

[Solution 7]
Pachislot machines
A game board having a game area where the game is played;
A main body frame that is pivotably attached to the front side of the outer frame and supports the game board in a detachable manner, and has a ball tank for storing game balls on the upper rear surface;
A door frame that covers the front surface of the main body frame and is rotatably attached to the front side of the outer frame like a door,
The gaming machine management device or game according to any one of the solving means 1 to 6, wherein the color code is provided on the gaming board side at a position where the gaming board can be photographed with the gaming board removed from the main body frame. Machine.
In the game hall, when the game board is removed from the main body frame and replaced with the main body frame of another game machine, the color code of the removed game board is photographed and tracked with a plurality of wide-angle cameras. The movement history in the game hall can be easily managed.

[Solution 8]
Pachislot machines
A game board having a game area where the game is played;
A main body frame that is pivotably attached to the front side of the outer frame and supports the game board in a detachable manner, and has a ball tank for storing game balls on the upper rear surface;
A door frame that covers the front surface of the main body frame and is rotatably attached to the front side of the outer frame like a door,
By providing the color code at a position corresponding to the lower side of the ball tank with the game board mounted on the main body frame on the game board side, the ball tank is made of a transparent member, thereby forming the ball tank. 8. A gaming machine management method or a gaming machine according to any one of solution means 1 to 7, wherein the color code can be photographed via a game machine.
When the ball tank is empty, the color code on the game board side can be photographed through the ball tank even if the game board is still attached to the main body frame. It can be used extensively from manufacturing to mounting on the main frame.

[Solution 9]
Pachislot machines
A game board having a game area where the game is played;
A main body frame that is pivotably attached to the front side of the outer frame and supports the game board in a detachable manner, and has a ball tank for storing game balls on the upper rear surface;
A door frame that covers the front surface of the main body frame and is rotatably attached to the front side of the outer frame like a door,
The gaming machine management method according to any one of the solving means 1 to 8, wherein the color code is provided in a unit part that is detachably attached to the game board, the main body frame, or the door frame. Gaming machine.
Parts that are difficult to attach a seal-like color code or print a color code with a printer by installing the color code on a unit part that is detachably attached to the game board, main body frame, and door frame. In addition, it can be easily performed by removing the corresponding unit parts. In addition, if the color code is formed on the unit component that is detachably attached to the main body frame or the like, it is possible to prevent the unit component from being forgotten to be mounted due to the presence or absence of the color code.

[23-3-3. Effect of solution]
According to the above solution, a large amount of gaming machines can be managed efficiently.

[24. Other forms of pachinko machine 1]
Next, a pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 194 to 219. The pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 1 is obtained by mainly changing the game board 5 and the handle unit 180 of the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the description thereof will be omitted except in principle. Therefore, in FIG. 194 to FIG. 219 and FIG.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 206, the gaming board 5 according to the other embodiment 1 includes a gaming panel 1100 having a gaming area 5a on the front surface, a center member 2500 attached to the gaming panel 1100, and the gaming panel 1100. And a production unit 814 attached to the rear side.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 206, the game panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 made of an opaque plywood board, a back side decoration member 817 for applying a background decoration 816, a game area 5a, and a center member 2500. And a front structural member 1000 that surrounds.

[Base Panel]
The base panel 1110 is formed of a plywood as described above, and a synthetic resin cell serving as a first decorative surface 819 is attached to the entire front surface of the base panel 1110, and the first decorative surface 819 is used for background. The decoration 820a (the random arrangement of the boy's face in this other embodiment 1) is printed. In addition, a large through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 is provided at a substantially central position on the upper side of the base panel 1110.

[Back decoration member]
As shown in the perspective view of FIG. 208, the exploded perspective view of FIG. 209, and the cross-sectional views of FIGS. 202 and 203, the back side decoration member 817 for applying the background decoration 816 is an effect of the effect unit 814 described later. It is disposed on the back surface of the base panel 1110 via the support frame 852 (specifically, since it is screwed to the front surface of the production support frame 852, it is integrated with the production support frame 852). A background decoration 816 (for example, a decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 and a decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819) having the sameness as the decoration 820a of the first decoration surface 819 on the front surface (including not only the appearance uniformity but also the conceptional uniformity). And a second decorative surface 822 is formed. The second decorative surface 822 is provided with a perspective three-dimensional effect on the decoration 816 itself by disposing several blocks of plate pieces 822p at different positions.
The back side decoration member 817 has an upper decoration member 817a, a lower decoration member 817b, a right decoration member 817c, and a left decoration member so as to correspond to the four directions of the upper, lower, left and right sides of the through hole 1112 for attaching the center member 2500 of the base panel 1110. 817d, of which the second decorative surface 822 of the upper decorative member 817a, the lower decorative member 817b, and the right decorative member 817c is disposed so as to face the hole of the through hole 1112, while the left decorative member 817d The second decorative surface 822 is disposed so as to face the back surface of the base panel 1110 as shown in FIG. Note that the second decorative surface 822 of the left decorative member 817d is arranged to face the back surface of the opaque base panel 1110 in this way, and thus does not enter the player's view in the normal state, but is shown in FIG. Thus, when viewed from an oblique direction, a part can be recognized. Therefore, since the player can be given a feeling that the background decoration 816 extends beyond the base panel 1110, the stereoscopic effect can be further enhanced.

In the game area 5a surrounded by the front component member 1000 of the base panel 1110, as described above, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, not shown. Windmills, obstacle nails, and the like that change the fall of the game ball are appropriately provided according to the game contents, and an out ball opening 1008 for collecting the out ball is provided at the lowest position.
Note that most of these members are formed of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the background decoration 820a of the first decorative surface 819 is hardly hidden.

[Pre-component]
As shown in FIG. 207, the front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that defines an outer side above the gaming area 5a and the center member 2500, and an inner side that defines the side and lower sides of the gaming area 5a and the center member 2500. The game ball launched from the launch rail 544 passes through the launch passage portion 1012 between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and is placed on the upper portion of the game area 5a or the center member 2500. Guided.
The front component member 1000 is entirely formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the surface thereof can be seen through when the front component member 1000 is installed on the base panel 1110. On the other hand, as described above, the base panel 1110 of the other embodiment 1 has the background decoration 820a over the entire front surface, and thus the front component 1000 is hardly noticeable in a state of being camouflaged with the background decoration 820a. It looks as if the entire front surface of the base panel 1110 is a large game area 5a. Therefore, as compared with a conventional pachinko machine surrounded by an opaque front component, a visual effect as if the entire game panel 1100 has been expanded to the game area 5a is obtained.
In the other embodiment 1, the background decoration 820a inside and outside the game area 5a is unified in design (including not only the appearance uniformity but also the conceptional uniformity) to visually expand the game area 5a. However, the background decoration 820a corresponding to the game area 5a and the front component member 1000 may have a different design with no unity. In such a case, since the decoration of the front component member 1000 can be covered by printing the first decorative surface 819, it is not necessary to decorate the front component member 1000 itself, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The gaming panel 1100 according to the other embodiment 1 is configured as described above. Due to the difference in depth between the first decorative surface 819 on the surface of the gaming panel 1100 and the second decorative surface 822 on the back surface of the gaming panel 1100, Since a three-dimensional effect is produced in the decorations 816, 20, a novel gaming machine can be provided.

[Center member]
The center member 2500 protrudes from the mounting flange 830 having a slightly larger outline than the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110 and the back side of the mounting flange 830 so as to be loosely fitted in the through hole 1112. An inner frame portion 831 and a surrounding frame 832 projecting from the front side of the mounting flange portion 830 so as to prevent the inflow of game balls from the game area 5a, and a synthetic resin that is entirely transparent It is formed with.
An inclined taper portion 833 that is thinner toward the base panel 1110 is formed on the peripheral edge of the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500. In the other embodiment 1, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 200, at least the taper portion 833 of the portion (for example, the mounting flange portion 830 of the upper half of the center member 2500) that can enter the field of view of the player who is playing The hook of the mounting flange portion 830 and the base panel 1110 is set shallower than before so as to be hooked on the edge of the hole 1112. By doing so, the light that illuminates the inside of the through hole 1112 changes like a prism through the taper portion 833 of the mounting flange portion 830 and leaks to the outside. Can be easily and effectively decorated.

  Further, the center member 2500 is a plate having an effect area 834 facing a later-described drum 854 of the effect unit 814 and a decorative surface 835 having a height substantially flush with the game area 5a inside the enclosure frame 832. Shaped decorative member 836.

[Direction area-Light guide plate unit]
In the effect region 834 of the center member 2500, a light guide plate unit 837 for protecting and decorating the front surface of a drum unit 855, which will be described later, is provided. As shown in FIG. 204, the light guide plate unit 837 is obtained by fitting a light guide plate 842 into a frame-shaped display window 841 including a vertical frame 839 and a horizontal frame 840 with a built-in light emitting device 838. 839 and the light emitting device 838 of the horizontal frame 840 irradiate light to the light guide incident end face of the light guide plate 842 to display a predetermined image in an effect.
The light guide plate 842 is fitted in a state where the display window 841 has a backlash of about several mm (for example, 3 mm). By doing so, it is difficult to apply stress even if the light guide plate 842 is thermally expanded, so that the risk of deformation or breakage of the light guide plate 842 due to thermal stress can be reduced. Further, for the same purpose, the light guide plate 842 may be attached in a state in which a part of the four sides is fixed with screws (not shown) and the other sides are movable without restriction.

[Decorative material]
The decorative member 836 of the center member 2500 is a transparent synthetic resin plate projecting from the inside of the surrounding frame 832 of the center member 2500 toward the vertical frame 839 and the horizontal frame 840 of the display window 841, and has a game area on the surface. The decorative surface 835 has a height substantially flush with 5a. As shown in FIG. 205, the decoration surface 835 is unified with the background decoration 820b applied to the first decoration surface 819 of the base panel 1110 (including not only the appearance but also the conceptional unification). )) Is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 204, the difference in position and size between the effect area 834 and the through-hole 1112 indicated by the imaginary line in FIG. Can be filled with natural shapes. That is, the background decoration 820 b applied to the first decorative surface 819 bites into the center member 2500 in a natural manner. Further, although the unity is achieved by decoration, the light emitting decoration body may be disposed so as to straddle the outer side and the inner side of the center member 2500.
Therefore, by adjusting the size of the decoration member 836 according to the size of the effect area 834, it is possible to deal with many models with a minimum design change while maintaining the outer shape of the center member 2500.
Note that the decoration 843 drawn on the decorative surface 835 according to the other embodiment 1 is drawn with ink having excellent light-shielding properties. Therefore, the second decorative surface 822 can be seen through from the non-decorative portion of the transparent decorative member 836. By contrast with the decoration 816, the stereoscopic effect is further increased. In addition, the light shielding property of the decoration 843 has an advantage that light illuminated from the inside of the through hole 1112 can be softened in an indirect lighting manner.
In the other embodiment 1, a decoration lamp 844H for decoration is provided on the front upper surface of the effect support frame 852, which will be described later, and above a drum 854, which will be described later, and overlaps with the decoration lamp 844H of the decoration member 836. A notch 845 for avoiding polymerization is formed at the position. Accordingly, there is no possibility that the light of the decoration lamp 844H is reflected by the decoration member 836 so that it is difficult to see, so that the definition of the decoration lamp 844H is improved.

[Functions attached to the center member]
As shown in FIGS. 197 and 198, the center member 2500 enters from the game area 5 a and a stage shelf 2503 that drops the game ball into the game area 5 a while moving the game ball in the left-right direction below the enclosure frame 832. A so-called accessory comprising a warp passage 847 for guiding the game ball B to the stage shelf 2503 is integrally provided. As described above, the first start port 2002 is arranged immediately below the stage shelf 2503 in the game area 5a, and if a game ball falls from the center of the stage shelf 2503, it can be won with a high probability.

  In addition, a discharge part 848 that guides a game ball jumping over the upper part along the outer rail 1001 to the lower right side of the game area 5a is provided in the upper right outer half of the front side of the enclosure frame 832 of the center member 2500. It has been. The discharge portion 848 has a size corresponding to one game ball, and is provided with hook-shaped obstacle ridges 849 protruding from the right inner wall and the left inner wall in front of the passage alternately at substantially equal pitches. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 touches a number of the obstacle ridges 849 and meanders, and as if falling while colliding with the obstacle nail in the game area 5a. It is led to the lower right side of the game area 5a.

  In addition, the lower right half of the outer frame 832 of the center member 2500 is provided with a second starting port 2004 that opens and closes the winning opening by the rotation of the opening and closing piece 850, and the second starting port 2004 and the discharge unit. A pass-type gate portion 2003 is provided in the middle of 848 in the vertical direction. The gate portion 2003 is installed in an extending portion 830 a that extends in a horizontal peninsula shape from the mounting flange portion 830 of the center member 2500, and a rear portion thereof is aligned with the extending portion 830 a of the center member 2500 to form the base panel 1110. Are stored in a bay-shaped cut portion 1112a formed in the through hole 1112. In this way, the gate portion 2003 (the same is true for other winning holes) is installed in the extended portion 830a protruding from the mounting flange portion 830 in a peninsular shape, and the bay-shaped cut portion 1112a is cut into the through hole 1112. As a result, the installation space on the center member 2500 side becomes unnecessary as compared with the case where the gate portion 2003 having a unique mounting flange portion around it is installed separately. The area of the veneer plate of the base panel 1110 where the game ball flows can be increased accordingly. Note that the plywood plate has features such that the nail can be easily driven and adjusted, and the nail is difficult to remove even after long-term use. Therefore, it is preferable that the portion where the obstacle nail is provided be a plywood plate as much as possible. The game ball that has entered the discharge portion 848 is once guided to the area of the synthetic resin plate of the center member 2500, but when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the center member 2500, the game ball is discharged to the area of the plywood board where the obstacle nail is provided. That's what it means.

[Direction unit]
The effect unit 814 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and includes a display device 851 that can display, as game information, a lottery result related to a big hit started by detection of a game ball by the first start port 2002, for example. A frame-shaped effect support frame 852 that supports the display device 851, and a rear cover 853 that is attached to the rear surface of the effect support frame 852 and covers the rear surface of the display device 851.

[Display device]
The display device 851 may be either an image display type by the liquid crystal display device or the like described above, or an actual type that can display the game information by a change such as mechanical rotation / stop of a movable object. In 1, the latter production type is used.
As shown in FIGS. 210 to 214, a specific actual movement type display device 851 includes a plurality of sets of drum units 855 that can rotate and move the drum 854 that is a movable object in a horizontal row (3 in this other embodiment 1 Set) and the upper and lower sides thereof are fixedly connected by a connecting plate 856.

[Drum unit]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 212, each drum unit 855 includes a horizontal cylindrical drum 854, a rotation driving device 857 that rotates the drum 854 in the direction indicated by the arrow, and a drum 854 that rotates the rotation driving device 857. A moving drive device 858 that moves in the vertical direction and an illumination member 859 for illuminating the drum 854 from the inside to clarify game information.

The drum 854 is formed of a thin sheet made of synthetic resin, and a plurality of characters and symbols are displayed in a predetermined arrangement on the peripheral surface.
The rotation drive device 857 for rotating the drum 854 is a rim-shaped ring member 860 fixed to one opening edge of the drum 854, and is arranged at the center of the drum 854 and gradually increases in diameter toward the ring member 860. In addition, a frustum tube-shaped central member 861 that opens toward the outside on the ring member 860 side, a connecting member 862 that radially connects the ring member 860 and the central member 861, and an electric motor that is directly connected to the central member 861. The center member 861, the connecting member 862, the ring member 860, and the drum 854 are integrally rotated or stopped by rotating or stopping the drive shaft of the electric motor 863.

  Note that the rotary drive device 857 is provided with air cooling means for cooling the drum 854 through air. That is, the air-cooling means includes a sirocco fan-like intake vane piece 864 formed on the peripheral wall of the central member 861 and a propeller fan-like exhaust vane piece 865 formed on the connecting member 862. By rotation in the indicated direction, air is sucked from the opening of the center member 861 in the manner of a sirocco fan, discharged to the space between the outside of the center member 861 and the inside of the drum 854, and further the air guided to this space is propeller fan In this manner, it is discharged out of the drum 854 from between the connecting member 862 and the connecting member 862. Accordingly, a U-turn airflow in which the intake air and the exhaust gas are reversed in the inside and outside of the central member 861 of the drum 854 is generated, so that the inside of the drum 854 is efficiently cooled.

The movement drive device 858 that moves the drum 854 in the vertical direction together with the rotation drive device 857 is a disc-shaped support substrate 866 that supports the electric motor 863 of the drum unit 855 and the illumination member 859, and the support substrate 866 can slide up and down. A guide shaft 867 that is supported by the guide shaft, a male screw-like drive shaft 868 erected in parallel with the guide shaft 867, an upper and lower bearing base 869 that supports the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867, and an upper bearing base And an elevating motor 870 for the drive shaft 868 attached to an upper portion of the 869.
Therefore, when the drive shaft 868 is rotated by the lift motor 870, the support substrate 866 is raised or lowered along the spiral of the drive shaft 868, whereby the drum 854 is raised together with the rotary drive device 857 as shown by the solid line in FIG. Or it descends like the imaginary line in the figure. The drums 854 are normally stopped at substantially the middle position of the movable range (hereinafter referred to as “reference position”). From this state, all the drums 854 may be moved up and down all at once, or each drum 854 may be moved. May be moved up and down separately. Also, when the drum 854 is at the highest or lowest position, as shown in FIG. 214, a part of the drum 854 is removed from the display window 841 and cannot be seen. It exists in the frame of the display window 841.

  By the way, the movement drive device 858 of the other embodiment 1 can move the drum 854 only in the vertical direction. For example, another combination of the drive shaft 868, the guide shaft 867, the bearing base 869, and the support substrate 866 is used. A set is added to rotate the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 in a horizontal direction, and the two are added between the original support substrate 866 and the electric motor 863, that is, added to the original support substrate 866. The bearing base 869 is fixed side by side so that the drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867 are laterally passed, and the electric motor 863 is attached to a new support substrate 866 supported by the lateral drive shaft 868 and the guide shaft 867. Good. By doing so, each drum 854 can be freely moved up and down and back and forth, so that the variation of the production by the drum 854 is markedly improved, and members that obstruct the up and down movement are temporarily avoided by the back and forth movement. Is also possible.

  Further, the display device 851 according to the other embodiment 1 is provided with linear illuminations 871a to 871d having a vertical bar shape in front view between the drums 854 of the plurality of drum units 855. The linear lights 871a to 871d are light emitters such as cold cathode tubes, for example, and are formed to be curved in an arc shape (bow shape) toward the front surface (player), but at both ends of the three drums 854 The bending state of the linear illuminations 871a and 871d is set more gently than the bending state of the linear illuminations 871b and 871c provided between the drums 854, and further, the linear illuminations 871b and 871c between the drums 854 are located at the frontmost part. Are installed so as to protrude from the linear lights 871a and 871d located at both ends of the drum 854 to the player side. Thereby, a curved three-dimensional effect can be imparted to the front surface of the drum 854 in a state where the linear illuminations 871a to 871d are turned on.

  The display device 851 is attached to the game board 5 from the rear side by an effect support frame 852 described in detail below, and all the drums 854 at the reference position in the frame of the display window 841 of the center member 2500 in the front view. Has come to fit. That is, the vertical width of the display window 841 is larger than the vertical width (the diameter of the drum 854) of the drum 854 which is a movable object. In addition, the winning / losing result of the lottery is displayed by a combination of numbers or symbols in this portion. In addition, at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 is visible to the player. Thus, by seeing at least one of the upper and lower contours of the drum 854 from the display window 841, it is possible to give the player a feeling as if the drum 854 exists in the air without any support.

Since the display device 851 is configured as described above, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 as described above, a lottery that determines a hit / decision on the main control board 1310X. The combination of the symbols of the drum 854 stopped within the frame of the display window 841 after the lottery result has undergone a certain time of production operation by a mechanical change in which the rotation and vertical movement of the drum 854 are appropriately combined. Is displayed. If the lottery result is a big hit, there is a benefit that it is easy to win a large number of prizes in the big prize opening 2005 within a predetermined range of conditions. Of course, any display operation of the display device 851 may be used.
In the other embodiment 1, at the timing when a large amount of winnings can be made to the winning a prize opening 2005 (preferably before the opening of the winning prize opening 2005), it should be right-handed, that is, how to play the game ball is strongly strengthened. The level is instructed that it should be driven to the right side of the game area 5a (for example, the display panel 2005p indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. 194 is switched from OFF to ON and a character such as “Please make a right stroke” is displayed. Display or give voice guidance such as “Please make a right-hand strike.”) There is a way to hit, so that the player's profit is maximized. Yes.

[Direction support frame]
The effect support frame 852 has a frame shape having an opening-shaped installation portion 872 for mounting the display device 851, and is fixedly attached to the back surface of the base panel 1110 with screws or the like. In addition to the display device 851, the effect side support member 817 having the second decorative surface 822 is attached to the effect support frame 852 so as to surround the four sides of the display device 851 as described above. In addition, the effect support frame 852 is provided with the decorative lamp 844H for decoration located above the drum 854 in the upper part of the front surface as described above, and further on the lower side of the drum 854 in the lower part of the front surface of the effect support frame 852. There is provided a decorative lamp 844L for decoration. By flashing the upper and lower decorative lamps 844H and 844L at the same time, for example, it is possible to easily notify a target to be noted among the plurality of drums 854.

[Rear cover]
The rear cover 853 is attached to the rear surface of the production support frame 852 to cover the rear surface of the display device 851, and has a heat-dissipating fan 873 and vent holes 874 on both sides as shown in FIG. The rear surface is also provided with a vent hole 874 for heat dissipation. In addition, an effect illumination 875 for irradiating light toward the drum 854 of the display device 851 is provided above and below the rear cover 853, and the outline of the drum 854 is illuminated by illumination from the rear side. Yes. Note that at least the inner surface of the rear cover 853 has a dark color (specifically, black) in order to enhance the light effect of the effect lighting 875. Further, the effect lighting 875 is attached to the outside of the rear cover 853 so that a light emitter 876 such as an LED faces the rear cover 853 from there. Further, a half mirror 877 is provided in a portion corresponding to the effect illumination 875 in the rear cover 853 so that the rear surface side of the drum 854 can be seen on the mirror surface when the effect illumination 875 is OFF. As a result, the rear side of the drum 854 is also gorgeously produced.

In addition, the other embodiment 1 includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 1]
A gaming panel having a gaming area in which gaming balls can flow down;
A gaming machine comprising: a center member that is attached to a through-hole established in the gaming panel and has at least a production area inside a surrounding frame that can prevent the inflow of gaming balls from the gaming area,
A gaming machine comprising a decorative member provided with a decorative surface that is substantially flush with the game area inside the enclosure of the center member.

[Technical Thought 2]
A display device for displaying game information by moving a movable object;
A display window capable of recognizing the presence of the display device,
A gaming machine that allows a player to recognize game information by the movable body that can be recognized through the display window,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the display window is formed in a state in which at least one of the upper and lower contours of the movable object can be seen by the player, in addition to the portion showing the game information of the movable object.

[Technical Thought 3]
A gaming machine having a gaming panel having a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down,
A first decorative surface for applying a background decoration formed on the front surface of the gaming panel;
A gaming machine comprising: a second decorative surface for applying a background decoration formed at a position deeper than the front surface of the gaming panel.

[Technical Thought 4]
In a gaming machine comprising an operation medium for game operation on the front surface of a door frame disposed at a position facing a player,
A gaming machine characterized in that a hand cover portion is provided on the front surface of the door frame so as to enclose the vicinity of the outer periphery of the hand of a player who operates the operation medium.

[Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 according to the other embodiment 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 215 to 219 and the like. Note that the basic configuration for adjusting the firing force of the handle unit 180 is substantially the same as that described in paragraphs [0238] to [0253] and [FIG. 54], so FIGS. Reference is made to FIG. 54 for a description of parts not shown.

  The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame 3 (the door frame base unit 100), and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is controlled by manually rotating the player to control the ball launcher 540. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a.

  The handle unit 180 includes a handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, a handle 182 as an operation medium rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and a front end side of the handle 182 A disc-shaped cover base 183 that is attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the handle base, a handle decoration board 184 that is attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and on which a plurality of LEDs 184L are mounted, and covers the front side of the handle decoration board 184 A handle cap 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183 and a hand cover portion 195 provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the vicinity of the outer periphery of the hand of the player who operates the handle 182 are provided.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. A shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 (see FIG. 54) meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a (FIG. 54) rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188. And a handle rotation detection sensor 189 (see FIG. 54) sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (the rotation start end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 (see FIG. 54) biased in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side outward from the left side in a front view of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181. A single button 193 (see FIG. 54) that protrudes and has a base end side that is mounted behind the inner base 186 so as to be rotatable around a shaft extending back and forth on the handle base 181 and a pressing operation of the single button 193 are detected. And a single button operation sensor 194 (see FIG. 54) attached to the handle base 181.

[Handle base]
A handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 includes a cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, a cup-shaped front end 181b provided at the front end of the base 181a, and an inward recess from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three groove portions 181c (see FIG. 54) that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Accordingly, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three protrusions 102c, and the protrusions 102c are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot be rotated relative to the handle mounting member 102.
Around the base portion 181 a of the handle base 181, a bowl-shaped screen member 196 colored in a white color is provided in a state of being fixed to the handle mounting portion 102. The light of the full color LED irradiated from the end of the frame right side unit 410 toward the screen member 196 can be reflected almost in its color.

[handle]
The handle 182 is based on a disk having a diameter and thickness suitable for a player to hold with one hand, projects from the outer peripheral surface to a height that is at least as high as a finger can be inserted in the circumferential direction, and the handle 182 Four finger hooks 182g to 182j protruding at substantially point-symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation center (shaft member 187), that is, equally spaced (90 degrees), and a circle around the rotation shaft (shaft member 187) Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and a protrusion protruding rearward from an inner position with respect to the center of rotation than the slit 182e, and the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. Stop protrusion 182f (see FIG. 54).

  In addition, the handle 182 is integrally provided with a decorative handle 1820 as a circular decorative member concentrically with the handle 182 on the outer side through the finger hook portions 182g to 182j. The decorative handle 1820 has a front surface covered with a translucent decorative cover 1821 and an outer peripheral surface covered with a conductive touch cover 1822 serving as a sensing portion of the handle touch sensor 192, and is disposed in a hollow interior. The appropriate number of light emitting LEDs 1823 and the light emitting LEDs 182L provided in the form of dots in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j can perform appropriate full-color effects using light.

In addition, as an example of the light effect by the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820, the decorative handle 1820 is visually turned to the right due to a change in the light emission mode of the plurality of light emitting LEDs 182L, and now should be right-handed The timing is instructed, that is, it is used as the above-described hitting instruction means. Further, it is more dynamic if the full-color LED of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 is used to produce a clockwise light flow in the entire door frame 3. Can be instructed to turn right. For example, the full color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame top unit 450, and the door frame right side unit 410 of the door frame 3 are changed to “lower left → left → upper left → upper left → upper middle → upper right → upper right → right middle → The light is emitted in the order of “lower right” to produce the light flowing clockwise (clockwise), and the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 emits light in the clockwise direction so as to inherit the light flow. In particular, when light is emitted from the light emitting LED 1823 closest to the full color LED located at the lowermost part of the door frame right side unit 410, it is possible to achieve a more interlocked (integrated) effect. In this case, since the lighting method is instructed in two lighting modes of the door frame 3 and the decorative handle 1820, even if any one of the LEDs is defective, the player is hit without any trouble. Can be directed.
As described above, as an example of the light effect, an instruction indicating that it is time to make a right turn is shown, but it is needless to say that the present invention is not limited to this and can be performed for effects other than the above. . For example, when a left-handed instruction is given from the right-handed state, a series of effects opposite to the light effects in the case of right-handed (for example, the decorative LED 1823 on the decorative handle 1820 side is decoratively counterclockwise. The full color LEDs of the door frame left side unit 400, door frame top unit 450, and door frame right side unit 410 are moved to the lower right → middle right → upper right → upper right → upper middle → upper left → upper left → middle left. → Inserts that produce light in the order of the lower left), for example, when a performance with a high degree of expectation for a hit is executed, instead of an instruction on how to hit, an effect linked to that is executed, or the degree of expectation for a hit For example, an effect in conjunction with an effect is executed before a high effect is executed. In addition, the interlock here refers to an effect in which light flows from the upper side to the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, full-color LED of the door frame top unit 450). The upper left and upper right are emitted, then the upper left side unit 400 and the right side door unit 410 of the door frame are caused to emit light from the upper side, the middle side, and the lower side. Finally, the light emitting LED 1823 of the decorative handle 1820 is emitted. ).
The light emission timing when the light emitting LED 182L of the decorative handle 1820 is used as the hitting instruction means is the same as that of the display panel 2005p, which is another hitting instruction means, for example, or the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display device). It may be the same as the right-handed instruction that is displayed, or before or after them, but at least before a large-award winning to the big prize opening 2005 becomes possible (before the big prize opening 2005 is opened). It is preferable in protecting the player's profit.

  Moreover, changing the lighting pattern according to the emission intensity of the ball emitting device 540 is an example of the light effect of the light emitting LED 182L provided in a dot shape in front of the finger hooks 182g to 182j. For example, if the firing intensity is “weak”, the color is blue, and if the firing intensity is “medium”, the color is green. The general pachinko machine 1 is an advantageous gaming state in which the right-handed state with the firing strength set to “strong” is a big hit or the probability is changed. It should be lit in red, which is said to be effective.

When the handle 182 is in the initial rotation position, the four finger hooks 182g to 182j are both horizontally oriented with the two finger hooks 182g and 182i, and the other two finger hooks 182h and 182j are both vertically oriented. It is set in a cross shape so that when the player grips the handle 182 in a normal grip style, the right thumb is naturally engaged with the lower side of the finger hook portion 182g positioned on the left peripheral surface from the center of rotation. It has become. Therefore, in this other embodiment 1, the finger hook portion 182g is a finger hook portion for normal operation. In this normal grip style, fingers other than the thumb are put on the handle 182 with the upper finger hooking portion 182h sandwiched therebetween.
On the other hand, the finger hook portion 182j provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle 182 hardly touches any finger in the above-described normal grip style. If a finger such as an index finger is hooked on the finger hooking portion 182j away from the handle, the handle 182 can be rotated clockwise as viewed from the front by an irregular operation of moving the finger to the left. In this other embodiment 1, as described above, there is provided a hitting instruction means (display panel 2005p) for instructing that the player should hit the right, and such hitting instruction means should be driven to the right side of the game area. This can be dealt with by applying a force in the direction opposite to the direction (force in the left direction in the front view) to the finger hooking portion 182j of the handle 182.
Of course, the handle 182 may be rotated by a finger hooked on the finger hook portions 182h and 182i other than the finger hook portions 182g and 182j and pulled upward or downward.

[Cover base]
The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disc shape and includes a plurality of mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from the rear surface. The mounting boss 183a is attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 through the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cap 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, and the rotation angle of the handle 182 is restricted. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees from the initial stop position.

[Handle cap]
The handle cap 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and has a translucent center portion. Inside the handle cap 185, a lens member that is three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member is provided. The handle cap 185 can produce an effect by light by appropriately causing the LED 184L on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184 to emit light.

[Handle rotation detection sensor]
The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, a detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is transmitted via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. Rotates. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. In the other embodiment 1, the firing force of the game ball is set to be stronger when the handle 182 is rotated clockwise in front view.

[Handle touch sensor]
The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and the player touches either the handle 182, the finger hooks 182 g to 182 j, or the touch cover 1822 of the decorative handle 1820, thereby playing the game The static electricity acting from the player is detected, and the player's contact with the handle 182 and the like is detected. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is accepted and the rotation angle of the handle 182 adjusted (input) by the player is received. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is controlled with the strength according to the game ball B, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven and the game ball B cannot be driven. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 182 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thereby, even if it does not return rotation operation of the handle | steering-wheel 182, while launching of the game ball B can be stopped temporarily, by releasing the press operation of the single button 193, before operating the single button 193, The game ball B can be driven again into the game area 5a with the driving strength.

[Handle mounting member]
The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 101 b of the door frame base 101 via the handle attachment member 102. The handle mounting seating surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located rearward of the left end side in plan view, and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, the front end of the pachinko machine 1 is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 can be easily gripped, and the player can perform a rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

[Hand cover]
A substantially cylindrical hand cover portion 195 surrounding the vicinity of the outer periphery of the player's hand that operates the handle 182 is attached to the front surface of the door frame 3 so as to surround the outside of the handle attachment portion 102. FIG. As shown, the front opening 195h is substantially aligned with the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820. In addition, the joint portion of the hand cover portion 195 and the decorative handle 1820 has a joint portion by a slidable fitting between a joint ring 1824 protruding from the rear surface of the decorative handle 1820 and an annular slit 195a provided on the front surface of the hand cover portion 195. It is connected seamlessly.
The hand cover portion 195 can also be provided for the handle 182 not provided with the decorative handle 1820. In this case, the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 is set to the substantially outer peripheral position of the handle 182. The decorative means similar to the decorative handle 1820 may be applied to the front opening 195h.

In the hand cover portion 195 of the other embodiment 1, a window opening 195w leading to the outside is opened in a part of the trunk portion, and moisture or cigarette smoke in the hand cover portion 195 or intentional or It prevents stagnation of beverages or the like that have flowed in due to negligence, and also prevents illegal acts by improving internal visibility.
Note that the handle 182 may be detachable as shown in FIG. 219 in order to facilitate the cleaning of the inside of the hand cover 195 and the wiping of the beverage that has flowed in. Specifically, each of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 and the screen member 196 fixed to the handle mounting portion 102 side is provided with an engaging / disengaging means 197 comprising a combination of a claw piece 197a and an elastically deformable receiving piece 197b, for example. By providing and engaging / disengaging the engagement / disengagement means 197 (see the solid line in the enlarged view of FIG. 219) / disengagement (see the imaginary line in the enlarged view of FIG. 219), the handle 182 and the handle base 181 as shown in FIG. You may make it removable from 102 side. By doing so, the handle 182 can be removed from the handle mounting portion 102 and the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195 can be fully opened, so that internal cleaning, wiping off spilled beverages, and the like are facilitated. Preferably, if the release operation of the engagement / disengagement means 197 is performed by a dedicated release member (not shown) (for example, insertion of a thumbtack pin), the handle 182 is not likely to be extracted by mischief or the like.

As described above, by providing the hand cover portion 195 outside the handle 182, the player's hand (finger) operating the handle 182 seems to have entered the hand cover portion 195, that is, the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to feel more strongly that the pachinko machine 1 is being operated.
Also, if the air blowing means (not shown) is connected to the hand cover portion 195 and the air is blown, most of the wind comes out from the front opening 195h of the hand cover portion 195, so that the wind is surely applied to the player's hand. Can do. Therefore, for example, when the expectation for a big hit is high, or when the expectation for an advantageous hit (a hit with a large probability or a lot of balls) is high, the wind may be sent in a predetermined direction (for example, a state like an air gun). When a game state is controlled (for example, during probability change, short-running, under-latency), the wind is sent at a regular timing such as every 5 seconds, or a predetermined lottery is performed. It is possible to effectively produce such as sending wind when winning. Of course, you may always send a wind.
Although not shown, a game speaker (preferably a vibration speaker) may be provided inside the hand cover portion 195. In such a case, since the sound of the speaker is removed from the front opening 195h of the hand cover 195, the vibration of the sound can be effectively felt by the player's hand.

Other form 1 described above includes the following technical idea.
[Technical Thought 5]
A ball launcher for driving game balls into the game area of the game board;
In a gaming machine comprising a handle for adjusting the firing force of the ball launcher by a manual rotation operation,
The handle is
A finger hook portion for normal operation which is provided on the peripheral surface on the left side from the rotation center of the self and which can be engaged with the thumb of a hand operated in a normal grip style;
Separately from the finger hook portion, the finger hook portion is provided on the peripheral surface below the center of rotation of the handle and can be engaged with at least one finger of the player's hand. A gaming machine characterized by that.
In such a gaming machine,
A hitting instruction means for instructing the player how to hit a game ball according to the game situation,
On the other hand, the handle is set so that the firing force becomes stronger by clockwise rotation in front view,
When the hitting instruction means indicates that it should be driven to the right side of the game area, it can be dealt with by an operation of applying a leftward force in front view to the anomaly operation finger hook portion of the handle. It may be.

  As mentioned above, although the other form of the pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, the said other form can also be changed suitably. For example, in the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating or The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the electric motor 863 of the rotation drive device 857 and the lifting motor 870 of the movement drive device 858 are in different directions, specifically, the output shaft of the electric motor 863 has the same horizontal axis as the rotation axis of the drum 854. On the other hand, the lift motor 870 is in another direction such that its output shaft is in the same vertical direction as the drive shaft 868 of the drum unit 855, but the direction of the electric motor 863 and the lift motor 870 Can be the same. However, when the electric motor 863 and the lifting / lowering motor 870 are set in different directions as in the above embodiment, the motor that causes the trouble when the trouble occurs in either the rotation operation or the lifting / lowering operation of the drum 854 is identified and dealt with. Is excellent in that it can be performed quickly.

In the above embodiment, the opaque base panel 1110 has been described as an example, but a transparent synthetic resin base panel 1110 may be used.
In the above embodiment, the background decorations 816, 820a, 820b, and 843 are printed or the like, but may be decorations using light emitters such as LEDs.

  In the above embodiment, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle base 181 and the handle 182 rotates between them. However, the handle cap 185 is fixed to the handle 182 and rotated integrally with the handle 182. You may make it obtain.

  In the above embodiment, the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the hand cover 195 are combined. However, even if the decorative handle 1820 is provided outside the handle 182, the effect of making the handle 182 large and conspicuous is sufficient. Can enjoy.

[Other pachinko machines]
Next, another pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 231. The other pachinko machines 1 are mainly modified from the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIGS. 194 to 219 in terms of the number, arrangement, and structure of the handle units 180. Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 220, the pachinko machine 1 has a handle unit 180, which is an input medium for gaming, on both sides of a front bulging structure composed of the upper plate 201, the production operation unit 300, and the like. It has two. In FIG. 220, the right handle unit (hereinafter, also referred to as “right handle unit”) 180 (R) adjusts the strength of the ball hitting device 540 as described above. On the other hand, the left handle unit (hereinafter also referred to as “left handle unit”) 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type effect described above.

  Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is provided with the operation unit including the handle 182, the decorative handle 1820, and the finger hooking portions 182 g to 182 j as described above, and the finger unit 182 is provided between the handle 182 and the decorative handle 1820. And rotate (operate).

  Each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is formed such that the outer diameter of the decorative handle 1820 around the handle 182 is smaller than the inner diameter of the front opening 195 h of the hand cover 195, and the base 181 a of the handle base 181 is formed. The entire unit can be linearly moved in the front-rear direction within the hand cover portion 195. Further, each handle unit 180 (L), (R) is directed toward the player by a spring 4001 of a handle position control means 4000 (described later) loaded in a compressed state in the cylindrical portion 102 a of the handle mounting member 102. Always energized.

[Right handle unit]
The right handle unit 180 (R) adjusts the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by rotating the handle 182 as described above. Normally, the decorative handle 1820 is provided with the hand cover portion 195 as shown in FIG. The front opening 195h is substantially flush with the front opening 195h (hereinafter referred to as “front position”), and is locked (fixed) by the handle position control means 4000 at this front position.

[Handle position control means of right handle unit]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as “right handle position control means”) 4000 of the right handle unit 180 (R) includes a swingable lock arm 4004 having a roller 4003 at the tip, and the lock arm 4004. And a solenoid 4005 that changes between a horizontal locking posture (see a solid line in FIG. 225) and a releasing posture (see an imaginary line in FIG. 225) in which the roller 4003 is flipped up.
When the lock arm 4004 is in a horizontal locking posture, it lies between the handle base 181 and the handle mounting member 102 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and lies in a bar shape to urge the right handle unit 180 (R). When locked in the forward position and the plunger 4006 of the solenoid 4005 is pulled up from this state to swing the lock arm 4004 to the release posture, the roller 4003 is removed from the handle base 181 (the lock arm 4004 is released). The right handle unit 180 (R) is unlocked, and can move linearly to the back of the hand cover 195 (hereinafter referred to as “rear position”) as shown in FIG. 226.
Note that the lock arm 4004 is urged so as to move from the released position to the locked position by, for example, a torsion coil spring (not shown). Returning to the position automatically returns to the locked position.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) may be used as an input means for appropriately detecting an operation of moving the entire unit from the locked state by a sensor and issuing an input signal to the player participation type effect (that is, one The handle unit 180 can input the striking force of the ball launcher 540 and the player participation type effect.) In the embodiment, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by moving the entire unit from the stopped state. It is used as the second input means.

  Specifically, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in with the right handle position control unit 4000 unlocked, the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is proportional to the linear movement displacement. When the ball is pushed to the rear position as it is, the strength of the game ball is increased by taking over the previous hitting force due to the rotation of 182 (intention to eliminate the problem that the hitting force temporarily decreases at the point where the operating subject switches). The level changes to the right (see paragraph [1722]), and the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned from the rear position to the front position (the pushing force to the right handle unit 180 (R) can be loosened). For example, the spring 4001 naturally returns by the urging of the spring 4001) and the batting force based on the rotation angle of the handle 182 (usually the batting force during the immediately preceding game). There.

  Alternatively, when the right handle unit 180 (R) is pushed in, a striking force control signal is sent so that the striking force of the ball launcher 540 becomes a strong level, and the rotation angle of the immediately preceding handle 182 is transmitted. When the right handle unit 180 (R) is returned to the forward position, the striking force due to the rotation of the handle 182 (usually the striking force just before) may be returned all at once. Good.

  In short, the right handle unit 180 (R) includes two movable elements that can be displaced in different plane directions, and the other is in a state where the striking force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted by the displacement of one movable element. It is possible to adjust the striking force of the ball launcher 540 by the displacement of the movable element, and return to the striking force adjustment by the one movable element when the striking force adjustment by the other movable element is finished. For example, a handle 182 that is rotatably supported, and an entire handle unit 180 that is supported so as to be movable in a different plane direction. The ball launcher 540 is rotated by the rotational displacement of the handle 182. The ball striking force of the ball launcher 540 can be adjusted by the movement displacement of the entire handle unit 180 while the striking force is adjusted. When the batting force adjustment by the movement displacement of the entire knit 182 is finished, the batting force adjustment by the handle 182 is resumed. As a result, a normal game is performed by batting force adjustment by one movable element, A strong batting force required when changing to a different gaming state can be performed in a so-called interrupted state due to the displacement of other movable elements, while when a special gaming state ends, the batting by the other movable elements is performed. It is possible to return to the normal gaming state simply and accurately by simply ending the force adjustment.

  The right handle unit 180 (R) is configured as described above, and in a normal game, as shown in FIG. Locked. Accordingly, the striking force of the ball launching device 540 can be adjusted by rotating the handle 182 together with the decorative handle 1820 as in the pachinko machine 1 of FIGS.

  On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 changes to, for example, a special game state due to the progress of the game, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control unit 4000 is turned on, and the lock arm 4004 changes to a release posture in which the roller 4003 jumps up. The right handle unit 180 (R) is unlocked. Then, a character such as “Please push the right handle into the back” is displayed or voiced from the hitting instruction means of the pachinko machine 1 to the player, and the entire right handle unit 180 (R) An instruction for prompting input by moving is issued. In response to this, when the player pushes the entire unit to the rear position against the bias of the spring 4001 without changing the grip of the handle 182 being operated, the operation is detected and the hitting force so far is detected. The striking force is continuously changed to a strong level by adding a new striking force. As a result, the player becomes right-handed, and the benefits of the special game are more brought to the player.

  When the special game state is finished, the solenoid 4005 of the right handle position control means 4000 is turned off simultaneously with the control of the main control unit 1300, and the player is given a “right handle by the hitting instruction means. Please return to the front. ”The instruction is issued with a character display or voice. When the player releases the force pushing the right handle unit 180 (R) according to the instruction, the right handle unit 180 (R) returns to the forward position by the bias of the spring 4001. Then, the lock arm 4004 is changed to a horizontal locking posture by the biasing of a torsion coil spring (not shown), and lies between the handle base 181 of the right handle unit 180 (R) and the handle mounting member 102 so as to lie in a bar shape. Unit 180 (R) is locked in the forward position.

  As a result, the pachinko machine 1 returns to the normal gaming state. At this time, the grip (rotation angle) of the handle 182 of the right handle unit 180 (R) is maintained by the player himself in the state immediately before the start of the special game. Therefore, the normal game is resumed with the batting power immediately before the change to the special game state. By the way, since the conventional handle unit adjusts the hitting force by operating one handle, it is necessary to search for the optimum hitting force again when returning from the right hitting state to the normal gaming state. May be wasted.

[Left handle unit]
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is used as an input means for the player of the player participation type effect. The left handle unit 180 (L) has a substantially line-symmetric structure with respect to the vertical axis passing through the approximate center of the door frame 3 with respect to the right handle unit 180 (R). The control means 4000 is unique by a cam mechanism.

[Handle position control means (left)]
The handle position control means (hereinafter also referred to as “left handle position control means”) 4000 of the left handle unit 180 (L) is a cam mechanism as described above, and is provided on the base portion 181a of the handle base 181. A rotatable follower roller 4007, a long hole 4008 formed in the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 for passing the follower roller 4007, and a cylindrical cam rotatably fitted on the outer side of the tubular portion 102a 4009, a cam portion 4010 provided on the cylindrical cam 4009, and a motor (not shown) that transmits a rotational force to a gear 4011 provided on an end of the cylindrical cam 4009.

The cam portion 4010 includes a first cam surface 4012 formed in parallel with the end face (rear end face) on the opposite side of the gear 4011 of the cylindrical cam 4009 and an end face (front end face) on the gear 4011 side. The second cam surface 4013 formed parallel to the end surface at a position near the end surface, and an inclined third cam surface 4014 connecting the second cam surface 4013 and the first cam surface 4012.
As described above, the left handle unit 180 (L) is constantly urged toward the player side by the spring 4001 slidably supported by the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 and loaded in the cylinder portion 102a. However, the position is controlled by the engagement state of the follower roller 4007 provided on the left handle unit 180 (L) and the cam portion 4010.

That is, as shown in FIG. 228, the left handle unit 180 (L) is in the rear position in the state where the follower roller 4007 is in contact with the first cam surface 4012 of the cam portion 4010. As shown in FIG. With the roller 4007 in contact with the second cam surface 4013 of the cam portion 4010, the left handle unit 180 (R) is in the forward position.
Accordingly, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated clockwise in FIG. 220 with the left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position as shown in FIG. 228, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the first cam surface 4012 to the third position. The cam surface 4014 is inclined to reach the second cam surface 4013, and the left handle unit 180 (L) moves to the front position integrally with the follower roller 4007 as shown in FIG. Note that the cam portion 4010 is a space that is open at the rear, so that the follower roller 4007 can freely move rearward, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) at the front position is spring-loaded. When pushed against the bias of 4001, it sinks to the rear position in the hand cover 195, and when the force is released, it returns to the front position by the bias of the spring 4001. Therefore, the left handle unit 180 (L) in the front position can freely move linearly in the front-rear direction with the player's force.
Further, when the cylindrical cam 4009 is rotated counterclockwise in FIG. 220 while the left handle unit 180 (L) is in the forward position to return to the original state, the follower roller 4007 is moved from the second cam surface 4013 to the third position. Returning to the first cam surface 4012 through the cam surface 4014, in this state, the left handle unit 180 (L) moves backward to the rear position as shown in FIG.

  The left handle unit 180 (L) is configured as described above, and is in a rear position within the hand cover 195 as shown in FIG. The left handle unit 180 (L) in the rear position is hidden from the front bulging structure constituted by the upper plate 201, the production operation unit 300, and the like of the plate unit 200 and is not easily noticeable from the player. Further, since the projection to the outside can be suppressed to the minimum by being surrounded by the hand cover portion 195, it is difficult to receive an external impact leading to breakage, and the risk of injury due to contact is reduced. By the way, a large lever is currently used as an input means for players with player-participation-type effects, but if it always protrudes close to the player's hand or knee, it will receive an impact leading to damage. It is easy, and there is a risk that the player may come into contact and get injured.

Then, in the scene where the player participation type effect is executed as the game progresses and the player needs to input, the main control unit 1300 first rotates the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000, The left handle unit 180 (L) moves linearly toward the player side together with the follower roller 4007 by the rotation of the cam portion 4010 and the bias of the spring 4001 and stops at the front position. In this state, since it appears to the player as if the left handle unit 180 (L) has appeared, the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) from the pachinko machine 1 side at the timing attracting the player's attention. The rotation operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) and the pushing operation of the left handle unit 180 (L) are obtained by display, voice, or the like. When the player rotates the handle 182 of the left handle unit 180 (L) or pushes the left handle unit 180 (L) in response to this, the operation is detected and the production shifts to the next scene. Then, the production further proceeds and ends as appropriate.
In addition, since the handle unit 180 of the embodiment is surrounded by the decorative handle 1820 around the gripped hand, there is no fear that the finger will come into contact with the hand cover portion 195 even if a rotation or push-in operation is performed. There is little risk of injury. Accordingly, the decorative handle 1820 that surrounds the grasped hand and can be rotated or moved together with the hand can be substantially referred to as an “outer ring” that can protect the operating finger.

  Next, when the above effect is finished, the cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control unit 4000 rotates in the reverse direction, and the cam portion 4010 contacting the follower roller 4007 passes through the second cam surface 4013 and the third cam surface 4014. It changes to 1 cam surface 4012. In the meantime, the follower roller 4007 is pushed backward along the inclination of the third cam surface 4014, so that the left handle unit 180 (L) moves backward from the front position against the bias of the spring 4001, and the follower roller When 4007 comes into contact with the first cam surface 4012, the rear position is reached. The cylindrical cam 4009 of the left handle position control means 4000 stops here, and the left handle unit 180 (L) stands by at the rear position until the next effect is executed.

As is clear from the above description, the left handle unit 180 (L) can perform an operation effect and input substantially equivalent to the effect operation unit 301.
Therefore, for example, if the left handle unit 180 (L) and the rendering operation unit 301 are moved under the same control and inputs from both sensors are received, both the left handle unit 180 (L) and the rendering operation unit 301 can be used. .
In that case, for example, a player who thinks that the operation of operating the production operation unit 301 is large and embarrassed can operate with the minimum movement that is difficult to be realized by touching the left handle unit 180 (L) in advance. Therefore, since it can participate in a player participation type production casually, interest increases.
Whether the operation unit used for the player participation type production is the left handle unit 180 (L) or the production operation unit 301 is set in advance by, for example, providing a selection switch on a part of the front bulging structure. The player may be allowed to select.

  As mentioned above, although the other pachinko machine was demonstrated, of course, a pachinko machine is not limited to the above. For example, a handle unit having the same structure as that of the right handle unit 180 (R) of the embodiment may be installed at the place where the left handle unit 180 (L) is installed, and this may be used as an input means for a player with a player participation type effect. In addition, conversely, a handle unit having the same structure as that of the left handle unit 180 (L) of the embodiment is installed at the installation position of the right handle unit 180 (R), and the hitting force of the ball launcher 540 is adjusted. The input means may be used.

In the above description, two handle units 180 are provided, but one handle unit 180 may be provided.
In the above description, the handle unit 180 is provided with the handle 182. However, without providing the handle 182, it may be possible to perform a game input only by the linear movement operation of the handle unit 180.

  In the above, a pachinko machine is exemplified as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrange ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (revolving drum or reel) using a game medal. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates). When applied to a slot machine, one or two handle units 180 may be used as input means for player participation type effects.

[Other forms 2-1]
Next, another embodiment 2-1 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS.
In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 2-1 can be provided with the door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 instead of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the game board 5 (for details). Therefore, the configuration of the front top unit 4500 is the same as that described above, and the description thereof is omitted.
In addition, the configuration of the front frame top unit 4500 is obtained by appropriately changing that of the door frame top unit 450 described above, and therefore the configuration of the door frame top unit 450 except for those described below as the front frame top unit 4500. Is applied as it is.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the other embodiment 2-1 has a window portion that covers the game area 5a where the game is performed from the front (see the pachinko machine 1, the same as the door window 101a closed by the glass plate 162). ) 1010a, and a bowl-shaped front top unit 4500 corresponding to the door frame top unit 450 (see FIGS. 88 to 90) protrudes above the window 1010a.

The front top unit 4500 is, for example, a top having a shape in which a top upper cover 452 and a top lower cover 465 shown in FIG. A main body cover 4520 is provided, and a central speaker box 461 and a door frame top bottom plate 454 of the door frame top unit 450 are eliminated, and a space 4520S is formed inside.
Further, the top body cover 4520 is formed with an upward opening 452a that communicates with the space 4520S on the upper surface thereof and is greatly cut out from the rear end toward the front, and the opening 452a is aligned therewith. It is closed by a front top top plate 4680 which is a shape opening / closing lid.

The front top plate 4680 is pivotally attached to the top main body cover 4520 with a rotary shaft 4680c provided on the rear end side, and is free to close and close the opening 452a (see the broken line in FIG. 235). It can be turned to a standing posture (see FIG. 232) that flips up the end side to open the opening 452a and stands up in a state visible from the outside, and further controls driving means such as a motor (not shown). By linking with the peripheral control board 1510, the closed posture and the standing posture can be appropriately switched according to the progress of the game or at a predetermined timing determined separately from the progress of the game.
Further, the front top plate 4680 is appropriately decorated (not shown) on the outer surface 4680a facing outward in the closed posture, while the inner surface 4680b facing the space 4520S in the closed posture has a light reflecting performance. It is processed into an excellent screen.

  The front top top plate 4680 has a single panel structure as shown in FIGS. 232 to 235, and the front top top plate 4680 is divided into two at the center in the left and right directions, and the divided pieces are separated from each other by the rotation axis. 4680c may be connected to form a hinge, or as shown in FIG. 236, a plurality of elements may be connected by a hinge 4680p to be bent. By adopting the latter folding structure, the front top plate 4680 can be unfolded in an upright position, and light decoration can be effectively performed at a higher location and for the player. In addition, if the first stage of the folding structure is made into a gate type or transparent so as not to block the rear view, the data display body of the island facility (game provided on the curtain above the pachinko machine 1) It is also possible to prevent the operation of a display device showing the progress of the game (such as the number of occurrences of big hit games).

Further, the front top unit 4500 is provided with an illumination base 8000 on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the player side, and a bar-like light emission means 8002 in which a plurality of light emitting LEDs 8001 are arranged in a horizontal row on the illumination base 8000 swings. It is attached freely.
The light emitting means 8002 is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in the same manner as the front top top plate 4680 so that the light irradiation direction and the light emission pattern can be switched appropriately according to the progress of the game. Specifically, when the front top plate 4680 is in a standing posture, the light emitting means 8002 is directed upward so that light can be emitted to the inner surface 4680b toward the player side, while the front top top plate 4680 is closed. In conjunction with the change, the lower side, that is, the bottom of the top main body cover 4520 is switched downward so that light can be irradiated.
In the other embodiment 2-1, since the bottom portion of the top main body cover 4520 is formed of a transparent and opaque synthetic resin, only a light effect by the light emitting means 8002 is visible to the player. Moreover, since the light emitting means 8002 for irradiating light to the front top top plate 4680 can be used for the production of the light, there is almost no extra cost.
Further, the light emitting means 8002 may be a video projection type in which a character or the like is projected onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680 in addition to an illumination type that irradiates colored light onto the inner surface 4680b of the front top top plate 4680.

[Other form 2-2]
As shown in FIG. 237, the pachinko machine 1 according to another embodiment 2-2 pivotally attaches the front end of the front top top plate 4680 to the top main body cover 4520 so as to be swingable, and attaches the light emitting means 8002 to the top main body cover 4520. It is provided on the inner edge of the space 4520S on the anti-player side, and the other configuration is the same as in the other embodiment 2-1. In this case, the front top top plate 4680 needs to transmit the light of the light emitting means 8002 from the inner surface 4680b side (rear side) to the outer surface 4680a side (front side). Preferably, it is made of an opaque synthetic resin (for example, milky white synthetic resin).
According to such a structure, the front top plate 4680 stands up at a position close to the player, so that the player can feel the force and can stand out from the outside.

  Since the pachinko machine 1 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 is configured as described above, during the execution of the reach production or the reach development production, or during the lottery result or the big hit execution regarding the big hit, Light is emitted to the front top top plate 4680 by swinging the front top top plate 4680 or in a standing posture with the light emitting means 8002 or the top main body cover is covered with the light emitting means 8002 with the front top top plate 4680 closed. Various effects can be performed by irradiating light to the bottom of the 4520.

Note that, when the front top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) of the front top unit 4500 is opened, heat is released upward from the opening 452a, so that heat does not easily accumulate in the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for example, the front top plate 4680 is switched at an appropriate interval while the light emitting means 8002 is turned off to open and close the opening 452a, and the design is displayed on the effect display device 1600 suddenly in the standing state several times. If the effect pattern to be set is set, the opening / closing operation of the front top plate 4680 is incorporated into a part of the game to increase the interest of the player, and the heat can be radiated from the opening 452a without being noticed by the player. it can.
Further, the front top plate 4680 of the front top unit 4500 opens and closes the opening 452a by switching between a closed posture and a standing posture in a demonstration irrespective of the progress of the game, that is, regardless of the progress of the game. You may make it do.

  In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is not performing an effect of raising the front top top plate 4680, the opening 452a is closed by the front top top plate 4680 in the closed posture, so that the top body cover 4520 Even when dust, dust, cigarette dust or the like does not enter the space 4520S and the front top plate 4680 is in the standing posture, the heated air in the pachinko machine 1 rises and the front top unit 4500 Since an air flow that flows upward and outward from the opening 452a is generated, it is difficult for dust, dirt, dust, and the like to enter the space 4520S.

Although the pachinko machine 1 of other forms 2-1 and 2-2 has been described above, of course, the pachinko machine 1 is not limited to the other forms 2-1 and 2-2. For example, in the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the flip-up type that can open the opening 452a by flipping the front top top plate 4680 (opening / closing lid) on the free end side around the rotation shaft 4680c is adopted. The front top top plate 4680 may have a sliding shutter structure.
Moreover, you may make it provide the front top top plate 4680 of the other forms 2-1 and 2-2 separately in the front and back in one pachinko machine 1.
Further, the front top top plate 4680 does not always need to be fully opened, and may be, for example, half open, and it is desirable that the opening / closing for the purpose of heat dissipation is less noticeable to the player.
In the other embodiments 2-1 and 2-2, the light emitting means 8002 is swingably formed. However, the light emitting means 8002 can be further moved up and down, and light can be emitted from the height of the pachinko machine 1. .

  In other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the front top unit 4500 is provided on the door frame 3, but instead of the door frame 3, for example, the upper end of the game board 5 in FIG. As a mounting portion of the top unit 4500, the front top unit 4500 is attached to the mounting portion, and the game board 5 having the front top unit 4500 is attached to the main body frame 4, or the gaming board 5 is shown in FIG. On the other hand, an attachment portion of the front top unit 4500 may be provided on the upper portion of the main body frame 4 and attached thereto. In this case, the door frame 3 is integrally provided with a transparent bulging portion that can cover other than the upper surface of the front top unit 4500 that protrudes forward from the window portion 1010a.

In the other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the portion of the front top top plate 4680 that is decorated with light is planar, but may be a three-dimensional shape imitating a character or the like, for example. In that case, the light emitting means 8002 can be a video projection type, and a three-dimensional shape can be decorated more realistically by the projection mapping method. As a result, the visual difference between the front top plate 4680 in the closed position and the standing position becomes large, so that it is easy to attract the attention of the surroundings when changing to the standing position. The crime prevention effect for 452a is also increased.
Further, in the other embodiments 2-1, 2-2, the front top top plate 4680 and the light emitting means 8002 are formed separately at the front and rear positions, but the light emitting means 8002 is incorporated inside the front top top plate 4680. May be.
In addition, it is possible to irradiate the curtains of the island facility with light using the light emitting means 8002 of the other embodiment 2-1, so that the decoration and production of the light are performed in a state of jumping out of the pachinko machine 1.
Further, in the other forms 2-1 and 2-2, the pachinko machine is exemplified as the gaming machine, but it can be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, using a game medal The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine that rotates a plurality of drums (rotating drums or reels). In this case, a portion provided with a drum or the like that is visible from the window covering the state visible from the front of the gaming machine corresponds to a gaming area where the game is performed.

[Embodiment]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 238 to 264. In addition, since the pachinko machine 1 of embodiment is what changed the said pachinko machine 1, the description is abbreviate | omitted except a change point. Therefore, in FIGS. 238 to 264 and other drawings, components having the same reference numerals are components having the same or the same function in principle.

[Game board]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 241, the game board 5 of the embodiment includes a game panel 1100 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven by operating a handle 182 of a handle unit 180 by a player, A back box 3010 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 and a board holder 1200 attached to the lower back side of the game panel 1100 so as to surround the lower part of the back box 3010.

[Game panel]
As shown in the exploded perspective view of FIG. 241, the gaming panel 1100 includes a base panel 1110 having a predetermined thickness, a front component member 1000 that surrounds the gaming area 5a, and a group of gaming elements that constitute a gaming entity (for details). Will be described later).

[Base Panel]
The base panel 1110 of the embodiment is formed of an opaque plywood board, and has large and small through holes 1112 corresponding to the gaming element group.
The base panel 1110 may be a transparent synthetic resin plate or an opaque synthetic resin plate in addition to an opaque plywood plate.
Further, in FIG. 241, reference numeral 1110t denotes a game ball lining member attached to the rear surface of the base panel 1110.

[Back box, substrate holder]
As shown in FIG. 241, the back box 3010 has a box shape with the front opened, and is attached so as to cover the rear side of an upper layer game zone 4823, a lower layer game zone 4825, and a right-handed game zone 4824 described later. In addition, the substrate holder 1200 is attached so as to cover the lower outside of the back box 3010. A main control unit having a main control board 1310X (see a block diagram in FIG. 256) for performing various game controls based on the detection state of the game balls in the game area 5a is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. Further, on the rear surface of the back box 3010, a peripheral control unit having a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling various effects based on control signals from the main control board 1310X is attached.
In addition, the top plate portion of the back box 3010 is provided with an interference avoiding portion 3010a penetrating into the box at a position where it intersects with the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, whereby the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 There is an effect that it is possible to avoid the interference and set the top plate height of the back box 3010 to be high, that is, to easily cope with a large production device or the like.

[Game elements]
As shown in the front view of FIG. 238 and the block diagram of FIG.
A function display unit 1400 that displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310X and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side;
A plurality of obstacle nails 2007 that are implanted in the base panel 1110 and randomly change the falling direction of the game ball;
A windmill 2008 that rotates upon contact with a game ball;
A general winning port 4801 in which a privilege is set so that a predetermined number of gaming balls are released by entering a game ball (in terms of control configuration, <general winning port sensor 4872> in the block diagram of FIG. 256, hereinafter <>). (Refer to the block diagram in FIG. 256)
The first electric shutter plate 4802 <starting-port solenoid 4873> that slides in the front-rear direction can be switched between entering and non-entering (a game ball that receives a game ball falling in a forward state and falls in a reverse state) Is passed through as it is and does not enter the ball) an electric start winning port 4871 <electric start port sensor 4874>;
A plurality of start gates 4803 <gate sensors 4875> for starting a lottery for opening / closing the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning port 4871;
An effect normal symbol display device 4804 for displaying the lottery result of the lottery per ordinary drawing described later by the start gate 4803 for the effect;
A normal symbol hold display device 4805 for effect display for displaying the number of holds corresponding to a normal hold indicator to be described later,
As in the case of the first shutter plate 4802, the electric second shutter plate 4806 <first big prize opening solenoid 4876> can be used to switch between entering and non-entering (opening the winning opening in the reverse state and entering and moving forward) Close the winning opening and not enter) The first big winning opening 4807,
A rotating ball receiving member 4808 <V rotating solenoid 4877> provided in the first grand prize winning port 4807;
A V winning opening 4810 <V winning opening sensor 4878> into which only a game ball placed in the ball receiving recess 4809 of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 can enter,
A general winning port 4801 <general winning port sensor 4872> into which a game ball placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined downwardly of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters,
A second grand prize opening 4812 that can open and close the open / close plate 4811 <second big prize opening solenoid 4879> in an open-open sash window system to allow a lot of game balls to enter;
A fixed start winning port 4813 <fixed starting port sensor 4880> provided on the vertical center line of the game area 5a for starting the lottery related to opening and closing of the first big winning port 4807;
A first display device 4815 formed by a group of display lamps 4814 that produce and display various lottery games associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871;
A group (three in the embodiment) of symbol display members 4816 showing the first stage in the case of displaying the results of various lottery games accompanying the entry to the fixed start winning opening 4813 and the electric start winning opening 4871 step by step. A formed second display device 4817;
The second (final) in the case where the results of various lottery games that are provided at the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a and are entered into the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871 are displayed step by step. ) A third display 4818 indicating the stage;
A fourth symbol display lamp 4819 that complementarily displays the display of the results of various lottery games associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 and the electric start winning port 4871;
A special symbol hold display device 4820 for production that displays the number of balls on hold for production on a first special hold number display and a second special hold number display described later,
A decorative light emitting member 4821 provided as appropriate;
Announcement unit 4822 for displaying a message image such as “right-handed”,
A plurality of out guiding sections 1003 <out ball sensor 4881> for finally collecting game balls in the back of the machine;
Timer segment 4882 for production by segment display capable of displaying 5-digit number,
It is roughly composed. Details of the necessary game element group will be described later.

  Here, the main control board 1310X and the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The fixed start port sensor 4880 and the electric start port sensor 4874 are directly input to the main control board 1310X. The detection signals from the fixed start port sensor 4880 and the electric start port sensor 4874 input to the main control board 1310X are input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Yes. On the other hand, various sensors such as a gate sensor 4875, a general winning opening sensor 4872, a V winning opening sensor 4878, an out ball sensor 4881, a dive sensor 4831, a first ball sensor 4870a, a second ball sensor 4870b, and a magnetic sensor 3003. Is indirectly input to the main control board 1310X via the panel relay board 1710. Detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310X are input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. The sensor input directly or indirectly to the main control board 1310X described above can be appropriately configured as the double sensor described above.

  The detection signals from the sensors input directly or indirectly to the main control board 1310X described above are input by the main control MPU 1310a in the switch process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Various signals input to the input terminal of the port are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby driving the main control solenoid from the main control output circuit with the reset function. By outputting a control signal to the circuit 1310d, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d is supplied to various solenoids such as a start opening solenoid 4873, a V rotation solenoid 4877, a first large winning opening solenoid 4876, and a second large winning opening solenoid 4879, respectively. The output signal is output via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, or the drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with the reset function. Normal design display device 480 for production from main control output circuit , Each drive signal to various display devices such as the normal symbol hold display device 4805 for the effect and the special symbol hold display device 4820 for the effect and the fourth symbol display lamp 4819, that is, directly without passing through another substrate, Or output. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, whereby various sort stepping motor voltage switching circuits, which will be described later, from the main control output circuit with the reset function, By outputting control signals to various sort stepping motor drive ICs, the respective drive signals to the various stepping motors such as the first sort motor 4908, the second sort motor 4909, and the drive motor 4860 are transmitted via the panel relay board 1710. In other words, output indirectly.

  Each drive signal output from the main control board 1310X described above is output in the port output process in step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, and the main control MPU 1310a outputs the output information storage area described above. The output information is read out, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information.

  The peripheral control unit 1500 can be configured with an air cooling fan FAN. As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 includes the peripheral control IIC 1510a and the like. Detection signals from various detection sensors and the like provided on the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the panel drive board 1720 and the peripheral control input circuit.

  The detection signals from the various detection sensors and the like input to the peripheral control board 1510 described above are the CPUs of the peripheral control IC 1510a in the movable body information acquisition process in step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. Reads various signals input to input terminals of various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a and determines whether detection signals from various sensors are input, thereby detecting detection signals from various sensors. History information (for example, original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads various data for outputting drive signals to various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Are transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports via the panel drive substrate 1720 to various substrates included in various display devices such as the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818. Further, the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 emits light on the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full color LED or a single color LED provided on various decoration boards of the game board 5. Data is read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to various decorative boards of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 reads game board side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors provided in the game board 5 from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drives the panel from various serial I / O ports as commands. Transmit to the substrate 1720.

  Of the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for various display devices and various decorative boards of the game board 5, the display in step S1016 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Output is executed in the data output processing, and the CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 indicates the pointer among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the light emission mode generation schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. According to the light emission data, the data is output to various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and various decorative boards (including the panel driving board 1720) provided on the game board 5. Of the drive signals output from the peripheral control board 1510 described above, for the various drive motors of the game board 5, the motor and solenoid drive process in step S1104 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. The CPU of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Among them, an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid is driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. Each time the pointer is updated.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a instructs the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to provide drawing data for drawing an image on the liquid crystal display device as a dummy even when the game board 5 is not provided with a liquid crystal display device. When it is generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the screen data defining the screen configuration can be accepted, the V blank signal is output to the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the peripheral shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit steady process in the control unit power-on process may be executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a does not use the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a when the game board 5 is not provided with a liquid crystal display device, and counts the number of executions of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. When the predetermined value (peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process execution count is 32) is reached, the peripheral control unit steady process in the power-on process of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 185 may be executed. This determination is performed in place of the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In this case, in the display data output process in step S1016 in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 185, the process related to VDP, the display data creation process in step S1030, and the peripheral controller V blank interrupt process shown in FIG. Etc. are not executed.

Here, an example of the game content by the said game element group is demonstrated.
The function display unit 1400 provided at the upper left of the game board 5 includes, for example, a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs, a second special symbol display composed of another eight LEDs, and the like. In the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, a lottery game (special symbol variation game) is performed in which each special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is displayed in a variable manner. The first and second special symbols are symbols for deriving a lottery result indicating the results of determination of big hit, small hit, and loss (win lottery). And in this embodiment, the said lottery game has the symbol fluctuation | variation which fluctuates and displays each special symbol (1st special symbol, 2nd special symbol) in a 1st special symbol display or a 2nd special symbol display. From the start to the stop, it is executed as one lottery game. Hereinafter, the lottery game related to the first special symbol performed on the first special symbol display may be referred to as “first lottery game”, and the lottery game related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display It may be indicated as “second lottery game”.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a lottery game is started, which of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is used to perform the winning lottery? Is to be selected. Specifically, based on the game ball entering the fixed start winning opening 4813, the lottery game (first lottery game) relating to the first special symbol performed by the first special symbol display is selected, and A lottery game (second lottery game) related to the second special symbol performed on the second special symbol display is selected based on the game ball entering the start winning port 4871. Then, when the winning lottery using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the eight LEDs are blinked on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the corresponding lottery. Control for starting the fluctuation is performed (main control board 1310X). With the symbol variation started in this way, after maintaining the variation state for the variation time selected based on the result of the winning lottery, the big winning symbol (big hit display result), which is a special symbol stopping mode that can recognize the big hit, In the form of either a small symbol (small hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize a hit, or an out symbol (out-of-display result), which is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize a hit By lighting up the 8 LEDs on the symbol display in a predetermined combination (the symbol fluctuation stops), the player can determine whether he has won a big hit, won a small hit, or has lost (lost) Be able to recognize. When the game is stopped in the form of a jackpot symbol, a jackpot game in which a player can acquire a game ball (prize ball) as a prize is executed by the main control board 1310X. The big hit game is a game that continues until the open / close plate 4811 of the second grand prize winning port 4812 is opened and closed 15 times, and a lot of prize balls can be awarded to the player. In addition, when the game stops when the small hit symbol appears, the main control board 1310X executes a small hit game in which a prize ball can be acquired by the player. The small hit game is a game that allows a big hit game to be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and it is not possible to obtain a prize ball as much as a big hit game with only the small hit game.

  Here, the small hit game will be described. In this embodiment, there are a plurality of small winning symbols, and depending on the type of the small winning symbol determined in the symbol lottery performed at the same time as the winning lottery, a plurality of small hitting game execution modes to be executed subsequently are performed. It is supposed to be set to one of the modes. Specifically, the small hit game is a game in which the second shutter plate 4806 of the first big prize opening 4807 is operated to allow a game ball to enter the first big prize opening 4807, which is executed this time. Depending on whether the small hit symbol resulting from the small hit game is a plurality of small hit symbols, the opening and closing pattern of the ball opening by the second shutter plate 4806 and the execution mode such as the opening time when opening are set differently. Therefore, the possibility of entering a game ball into the first grand prize opening 4807 differs depending on this execution mode. That is, the execution mode of the small hit game in which the second shutter plate 4806 is moved backward for a relatively long time (for example, 1.5) is the second shutter plate 4806 for a relatively short time (for example, 0.5 second). It is easier to enter the game ball into the first big prize opening 4807 than the execution mode of the small hit game in which the player moves backward.

  Next, in a small hit game, all the game balls that have entered the first big prize opening 4807 reach the rotating ball receiving member 4808 inside the first big winning opening 4807, and the gaming balls become the rotary ball receiving member 4808. When the ball is received by the ball receiving recess 4809, the game ball that is guided to the V winning opening 4810 side by the rotating operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 and is not received by the ball receiving recess 4809 is stored in the rotating ball receiving member 4808. It rolls on the tapered peripheral surface inclined downward and enters the general winning port 4801. When the game ball guided to the V prize opening 4810 side by the rotation operation of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters the V prize opening 4810 as described above, the opening / closing plate 4811 of the second big prize opening 4812 is given as a privilege. A jackpot game that opens and closes until the maximum number of opening and closing times is reached.

  Although the details will be described later, the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, and 4818 are configured with a display area larger than both the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display, and the big hit, small The result is that the result of the winning lottery of winning or losing is displayed in a state that the player can recognize more easily than the special symbol described above, and the game is enhanced. As a result, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won the big hit, won the small hit, or has lost (lost) by checking the first to third display devices 4815, 4817, 4818. Will be able to.

  Although not shown in the function display unit 1400, a first special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds for receiving a game ball in the fixed start winning opening 4813, and an electric start winning prize A second special hold number indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the reception of game balls in the mouth 4871 and four lottery results determined by the passing of the game balls to the start gate 4803 are displayed. There are provided a normal symbol display composed of two LEDs and a normal retention indicator composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the start gate 4803.

  Here, the first special reserve number display unit notifies the player of the number of winning lotteries on the first special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved stored number). Is. The first reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when the game ball wins the fixed start winning opening 4813, and is subtracted by “1” when the first lottery game is started. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the fixed start winning port 4813 during the period in which the first lottery game is being performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, book In the embodiment, "4") is accumulated.

  In addition, the second special reserve number display device notifies the player of the number of memories of the winning lottery on the second special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved memory number). It is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when a game ball wins the electric start winning opening 4871, while it is decremented by “1” when the second lottery game is started. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the electric start winning port 4871 during the period in which the second lottery game is being performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, book In the embodiment, "2") is accumulated.

  In addition, in the normal symbol display, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (lottery per common symbol), normal symbol variation is performed to vary a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the lottery per common symbol. Is called. This normal symbol variation is a normal symbol pattern (normal result display result) that is a normal symbol stop mode that can recognize the normal symbol after maintaining the variation state for the variation time selected based on the result of lottery per standard symbol. When the player is stopped in the form of a normal symbol that is a normal symbol that can be recognized as being out of place (usage display result), the player loses whether or not he / she wins the normal (normal) You will be able to recognize if you have lost. If the normal winning symbol is stopped, the first shutter plate 4802 of the electric start winning prize port 4871 moves forward to enter a state where a ball can be entered.

  Further, the normal hold indicator notifies the player of the number of lotteries stored per drawing that are held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the number of reserved drawings). The number of stored general symbols is incremented by “1” when the game ball is received at the start gate 4803 disposed on the game board 5, and is subtracted by “1” when the normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when a game ball is accepted by the start gate 4803 within the period during which the normal symbol variation is performed, the number of the common figure holding memory is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (the common figure upper limit number, in the present embodiment). "4") is accumulated.

  In the present embodiment, the first lottery game and the second lottery game are configured not to be executed at the same time, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) is completed. When the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both “1” or more, the second lottery game based on the second reserved memory number is preferentially executed. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first lottery game or the second lottery game) and the normal symbol variation can be executed simultaneously.

  As mentioned above, although the example of the game content by the game element group of embodiment was demonstrated, of course, you may add various variations, such as big hit, medium hit, and small hit.

[Details of game area and game element group]
In the game area 5a of the embodiment, the above-described game element groups are arranged in three game zones so that the fun of the game is maximized.
That is, the game area 5a includes the upper game zone 4823 corresponding to the first game area 5a1 of FIG. 131, the right game zone 4824 corresponding to the second game area 5a2 of FIG. 131, and the third game of FIG. 131. It is divided into a lower game zone 4825 corresponding to the area 5a3.

[Upper game zone]
The upper-layer game zone 4823 includes the above-described obstacle nail 2007 of the game element group, the windmill 2008, the general winning port 4801, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818.
At the lower edge of the upper game zone 4823, a shelf-like boundary rail 4826 is provided between the lower game zone 4825 and the lower game zone 4825 so that a game ball does not fall into the lower game zone 4825. A diving portion 4827 provided in the middle of 4826 (on the vertical center line of the game area 5a) communicates with the lower game zone 4825 in the size of one game ball. The details of the diving portion 4827 will be described in the section of the lower game zone 4825.
In addition, the boundary rail 4826 is provided with a gradient of inclination that goes down in the left-right direction with the diving portion 4827 as an apex, and is provided with out guiding portions 1003 at both ends that have been lowered.

  In addition, at the lower corner of the upper rail game zone 4823 on the inner rail 1002 side (left side in FIGS. 238 and 239), the out guide portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 passes between the inner rail 1002 and the lower game zone 4825. Even if game balls that exceed the discharge capacity temporarily concentrate on the out guide part 1003 on the inner rail 1002 side of the boundary rail 4826, the overflowed game balls will remain in the out bypass 4828. It flows through the lower guidance zone 4825 to the out guidance part 1003. The so-called out-ball with no possibility of entering the ball can cause the player to have negative emotions, and the game can be played comfortably by quickly collecting it and shortening the time it touches the player's eyes. Can be made.

[Second display device]
The second display device 4817 is formed of three circular symbol display members 4816 arranged side by side on the rear side of the boundary rail 4826. As described above, the second display device 4817 is used for lottery in association with entering the fixed start winning port 4813. In the case where the result is displayed step by step, the display proceeds to the display by the third display device 4818. In the case of proceeding to the display by the third display device 4818, the symbol “GO” is displayed on all three symbol display members 4816. When the process is completed in the first stage, a symbol “x” is displayed on at least one of the three symbol display members 4816.

  The second display device 4817 is a transparent cover plate 4883 that is attached to the front surface of the base panel 1110 with the front surface of the symbol display member 4816 covering a part of the through-hole 1112 and is integral with the boundary rail 4826. Therefore, even if game balls frequently pass through the front surface of the symbol display member 4816, there is no possibility that the display surface is damaged. In the embodiment, although not shown, an appropriate pattern is printed on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 by printing or sealing, and a pattern related to the pattern on the front surface of the cover plate 4883 is provided behind the cover plate 4883. The decorative plate on which is formed is erected at an appropriate interval (preferably within the thickness of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110). By doing so, for example, a three-dimensional effect can be given to the game area 5a such that a plant pattern is drawn on the front face and the back decorative board of the cover board 4883 to give a visual depth to the background.

[Third display device]
The third display device 4818 is provided on the upper part of the vertical center line of the game area 5a, and displays the lottery results associated with entering the fixed start winning port 4813 in a stepwise manner as described above. Shows the second (final) stage.
This third display device 4818 is generally configured by a seven-segment display member 4884 corresponding to a one-digit number and a display frame 4885 as a mounting base of the display member 4884, and the whole is penetrated by the base panel 1110. It is attached to the production back cover 4886 that covers the rear surface of the hole 1112 so as to be movable up and down, and can be viewed from the front side (player side) through a frame-shaped center member 2500 that borders the front side of the through hole 1112.

[Display material]
As shown in FIG. 244, the display member 4884 of the third display device 4818 has a cylindrical segment partition frame 4884a penetrating in the front-rear direction in the shape of the individual segment of the seven-segment display. A plurality of light emitting elements 4884c are installed in each frame of the segment partition frame 4884a (including two upper and lower frames surrounded by seven segments), and the front opening of the segment partition frame 4884a is further provided. A lens 4884d is attached to the portion. This makes it possible to produce an effective performance using the entire part surrounded by 7 segments as well as a single digit. The display member 4884 may be an image display device such as liquid crystal or organic EL.

[Display frame]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 has a substantially hemispherical frame main body 4887 that swells forward, and arms that protrude from the left and right sides of the center of the frame main body 4887 and hold the fist downward. A first movable portion (hereinafter also referred to as an arm-shaped movable portion) 4888 having a shape and projecting in a shape (opening) in the direction (angle) at about 7:25 on the left and right sides of the lower side of the frame main body 4887. And a second transparent movable portion 4889 (hereinafter also referred to as a “foot-shaped movable portion”) and a colored transparent sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 attached to the display frame 4885 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884. It has a spherical bomb character shape that is anthropomorphized as a whole.

[First movable part (arm-shaped movable part)]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is formed by connecting left and right arm members 4888a, which are resin molded products, with an arm shaft 4888c to which a driven gear 4888b is fixed at the center. The arm member 4888a can be rotated in both the return direction and the return direction by pivotally mounting on the arm support plate 4891.

[Second movable part (foot-shaped movable part)]
The entire foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is a resin molded product, and the left and right foot members 4889a are pivotally attached to the joint shaft holes 4889b through the foot joint shafts 4892 projecting from the display frame 4885. Furthermore, when the sector gears 4889c provided at the ends of each other are engaged with each other, the left and right foot members 4889a swing symmetrically with respect to the vertical center line.

[Arm-shaped moving part + Foot-shaped moving part]
The arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are connected so that the respective operations can proceed simultaneously through a lifting slider 4893 that is supported so as to be vertically movable up and down inside the display frame 4885.
That is, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 meshes with the rack gear 4894 formed on the lifting slider 4893 with the driven gear 4888b of the arm shaft 4888c, while the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is provided at the upper end portion of the right foot member 4889a. A connecting pin 4895 projecting from the lifting slider 4893 is loosely fitted into the elongated hole 4889d.
Then, in the state of FIG. 247 in which the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 holds the fist downward and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 opens in the direction of about 7:25, the lift slider 4893 is at the highest position, and the lift slider 4893 The raised position is maintained by the own weight (balance) of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Therefore, when the external slider 4893 is forcibly pushed down by applying an external force against the dead weight, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 is rotated by the meshing of the driven gear 4888b and the rack gear 4894, and the arm member 4888a is changed in the direction of life. At the same time, the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 is rotated about the joint shaft hole 4889b by the downward movement of the connecting pin 4895 of the elevating slider 4893 and the one leg member 4889a is rotated around the joint shaft hole 4889b and meshed with the fan-shaped gear 4889c. The other leg member 4889a is also rotated around the joint shaft hole 4889b, and as a whole, a spherical bomb type character raises his fist up and jumps up both feet in the direction of about 8:20 as shown in FIG. To change. Thereafter, when the external force applied to the elevating slider 4893 is removed, all of the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are moved in the reverse direction to return to the original position (posture) in FIG.

[Display cover]
The sunglasses-shaped display cover portion 4890 is fixedly attached to the frame body 4887 so as to cover a part of the display of the display member 4884 as described above. The color of the display cover portion 4890 is very thin, and therefore there is no possibility of hindering the display of the display member 4884. Note that a part of the display of the display member 4884 is made difficult to see by making the color of the display cover part 4890 darker or opaque, and the display cover part 4890 is directed upward, for example, with sunglasses after the display change stops. The display member 4884 may be completely displayed by rotating the display member or switching to an electrically transparent state. By doing so, a part of the display member 4884 is hidden, for example, first, the player's expectation is increased by not knowing whether the display is “0” or “8”. The fun of the game can be further enhanced by increasing the head of the result display, such as exploding joy at the moment when the whole picture is visible.

[Production back cover]
The production back cover 4886 covers the rear surface of the through hole 1112 of the base panel 1110, and as shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 249 and 250, the back cover body 4896 positioned in front and the back cover And a lifting device 4897 attached to the rear surface of the main body 4896.

[Back cover body]
The back cover main body 4896 is a front open box shape surrounding the rear surface of the through hole 1112 corresponding to the center member 2500, and forms an effect space 4898 communicating with the opening of the center member 2500. The back cover body 4896 has a curved shape in which the bottom part is lowered from the front toward the back as shown in the central longitudinal sectional view of FIG. 244 in order to ensure a sufficient vertical width (height) in the back of the production space 4898. It has become. In addition, a plurality of flanges 4899 extending in the front-rear direction are formed side by side at the bottom of the back cover body 4896. This kite 4899 is for expressing the waves of the sea. For example, when an employee opens the door frame 3 to deal with a trouble, even if a game ball is accidentally dropped in the production space 4898, The game ball can be rolled out along the 畝 4899 and easily removed. By the way, if the back cover body 4896 has no front-rear hook 4899 (a streak guiding portion for scraping the game ball), the game ball rolls freely in the lateral direction, and it takes time to capture it. Note that arranging the ridges 4899 in the horizontal direction and arranging the grooves in the horizontal direction are merely synonymous differences and are substantially synonymous.

[lift device]
The elevating device 4897 moves the third display device 4818 up and down within the production back cover 4886. As shown in the exploded perspective views of FIGS. 249 and 250, the rear surface of the back wall 4896r of the back cover body 4896 is provided. A fixed elevating base 4900 attached to the elevating base 4900, an elevating panel 4901 attached to the elevating guide shaft 4918 erected between the elevating base 4900 and the back cover main body 4896, and a rear surface of the elevating panel 4901. A lifting / lowering motor 4904 that lifts and lowers the lifting / lowering panel 4901 by engaging a pinion gear 4903 with the formed lifting / lowering rack gear 4902 is schematically configured.

[Third display device and lifting device]
The display frame 4885 of the third display device 4818 is integrally joined to the lifting panel 4901 of the lifting device 4897. Specifically, the connecting rod 4905 protruding from the rear surface of the display frame 4485 of the third display device 4818 is screwed to the lift panel 4901 through the communication port 4896w provided in the rear wall 4896r of the back cover body 4896. Has been. Therefore, the third display device 4818 is raised together with the lift panel 4901 as shown in FIG. 247 when the lift motor 4904 is driven, and conversely when the lift panel 4901 is lowered as shown in FIG. Descend with. Note that the lifting device 4897 is provided with a tension spring 4906 that pulls the lifting panel 4901 upward. The weight of the lifting panel 4901 and the third display device 4818 is supported by tension elasticity to reduce the load on the lifting motor 4904. It is like that.

The lifting device 4897 also functions as means for applying an external force necessary to move the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818.
That is, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 249, a key-type pressing member 4907 whose front surface is a squib wire shape protrudes forward from the upper end of the center on the lifting base 4900 that is a fixed element of the lifting device 4897. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 244, the lower end of the pressing member 4907 has an appropriate gap at the top of the liftable lift slider 4893 connected to the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889. Opposite in the state provided.
Therefore, when the third display device 4818 is lifted by the lifting device 4897, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are initially set until the top portion of the lifting slider 4893 comes into contact with the lower end of the pressing member 4907, that is, until it rises by the gap. When the third display device 4818 continues to rise, the top of the lift slider 4893 abuts against the lower end of the pressing member 4907 to prevent the lift of the lift slider 4893. As shown in FIG. 248, the spherical bomb type character raises his fist to the state of being hung up and jumps up both legs in the direction of about 8:20. To change. In this way, the third display device 4818 is linked to the ascent by the elevating device 4897, and operates as if the fist is lifted up and jumped up while both feet are opened.
On the other hand, when the third display device 4818 shifts from the raised position in FIG. 248 to the lowered position, the external force applied to the lift slider 4893 is removed by the lowered position, so that the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion. The lift slider 4893 relatively rises due to its own weight, and finally the position and posture of the third display device 4818 returns to the state shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part 4889 in the stationary state shown in FIG. 247 are changed to the jump state in FIG. 248, the lifting of the lift slider 4893 in the stationary state and the arm-shaped movable part 4888 and the foot-shaped movable part are movable. Since a large force is required to start the swinging of the portion 4889 at the same time, in the embodiment, as described above, there is a slight gap between the heating wire type pressing member 4907 on the lifting device 4897 side and the top of the lifting slider 4893. First, only the lift slider 4893 is raised, and the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are swung with a time difference corresponding to the gap. As a result, the load applied to the lifting motor 4904 of the lifting device 4897 can be distributed and reduced.

  Further, by providing the rack gear 4894 on the lifting slider 4893 instead of the fixed element of the back cover body 4896, when the third display device 4818 is completely lowered, the arm-shaped movable portion 4888 and the foot-shaped movable portion 4889 are lifted and lowered by the reaction. Since it bounces slightly together with the slider 4893 (in appearance, the arms and legs swing slightly a few degrees), the slight movement caused by the bounce makes the character's movement that tends to be mechanically impersonal. be able to.

  The center member 2500 surrounding the third display device 4818 has a warp inlet 2501 that is open on the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view so that a game ball in the upper game zone 4823 can enter, The warp outlet 2502 opened in the frame so that the game ball B that has entered the warp inlet 2501 can be released, and the game ball released from the warp outlet 2502 rolls in the left-right direction and then moves to the upper game zone 4823. A stage shelf 2503 that can be discharged is provided, and a game ball falling from the center of the stage shelf 2503 can enter the diving portion 4827 with a high probability.

[Lower level game zone]
As shown in FIGS. 239, 244, 245, and 251 to 254, the lower game zone 4825 includes the first display device 4815, the start gate 4803, and the normal symbol display device 4804 described above. , A fixed start winning port 4813, and a game ball that has entered the lower game zone 4825 from the diving portion 4827 of the upper game zone 4823 has a plurality of (three in the embodiment) distribution units 4829a to 4829c to be described later. After that, it is sorted whether the ball enters the fixed start winning port 4813, passes through the start gate 4803 and is collected by the out guidance unit 1003, or is collected by the out guidance unit 1003 without obtaining any benefits. It is done.

[Dive part]
As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 244, the diving portion 4827 includes a diving pocket 4830 that opens upward at the lower part of the upper game zone 4823, a through type diving sensor 4831 provided in the diving pocket 4830, and a diving pocket. The side that moves the game ball in the front-rear direction from the front to the back, from the back to the front, such as rolling the game ball that has entered 4830 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and then rolling forward to the front position of the game panel 1100. And a front-rear bending passage 4832 that is V-shaped in view.

[First sorter]
Of the distribution portions 4829a to 4829c, the first distribution portion 4829a includes a spherical passage 4834 that intersects with the end of the front-rear bending passage 4832 in the left-right direction via a step portion 4833 that is substantially one sphere, and the step portion The first electric distribution piece 4835 <first distribution motor 4908>, which is provided in 4833 and always swings in the form of a wiper. Depending on the swing timing of the piece 4835, the ball path 4834 is divided into a rightward traveling path on the right side and a leftward traveling path on the left side. The right path of the ball path 4834 is directly connected to a third distribution unit 4829c, which will be described later, via a screw path 4836 descending in a spiral shape, while the left path is indirectly connected via the second distribution unit 4829b. It is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c.

  As will be described later, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage in which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning opening 4813. Therefore, the distribution to the right course directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is performed. Is what the player wants. Therefore, the player tries to enter the diving portion 4827 aiming at the timing to be distributed to the right path. Since it is bent in the front-rear direction by the front-rear bending passage 4832 and reaches the first electric distribution piece 4835, the change in the front-rear direction is difficult for the player in front to understand, and the timing is accordingly It is difficult to catch. Therefore, it becomes difficult to match the entry timing of the jumping portion 4827 with the movement of the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the elements of the game's original luck / bad luck are improved and the interest of the game can be increased.

[Second sorting section]
The second distribution portion 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a includes a shallow swirl-shaped circular turning portion 4837 connected to the left end of the ball passage 4834, and the circular turning portion 4837. A plurality of (three in the embodiment) ball drop openings 4838 penetrating in the central area of the game, and a forward tilting face 4839 that receives the game balls falling from the ball drop openings 4838 and guides them to a substantially front position of the game panel 1100. The second electric distribution piece 4840 <second distribution motor 4909>, which is provided below the front end portion of the forward tilting part 4839 and always swings like a wiper, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 tilted leftward in FIG. A right rear passage 4841 that sometimes communicates with a left front passage 4842 that communicates when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stands up, and includes a first distribution portion 4829a. Game balls distributed to the left path is further adapted to be distributed to the right rear channel 4841 and the front left channel 4842 by the swinging timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The right back passage 4841 is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c, while the left front passage 4842 is connected to the start gate 4803.

  Here, both the first electric distribution piece 4835 of the first distribution unit 4829a and the second electric distribution piece 4840 of the second distribution unit 4829b are always oscillated, but both are oscillated at different periods. It is set to be. Specifically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is set so as to swing slowly with a period of slightly less than two times with respect to the first electric distribution piece 4835, so that the swing timing of both is shifted. Is set. By doing so, when the first distribution unit 4829a and the second distribution unit 4829b are synchronously headed from the first distribution unit 4829a to the second distribution unit 4829b, the distribution direction is generally known. It is possible to prevent the adverse effect that the existence value of the distribution unit 4829b is significantly reduced.

[Third distribution section]
The third distribution portion 4829c is a ball swivel type generally called “Kroon”, which is located at the center of the lower center of the lower game zone 4825 and on the vertical center line of the game area 5a, like the diving portion 4827. It consists of a distribution device 4843 and a distribution base 4844 provided immediately below the distribution device 4843.

[Distributor]
The sorting device 4843 includes a ball rolling member 4845 that vigorously rolls the game ball and turns it by inertia, a rotating member 4846 that can rotate around a vertical axis passing through the center of the ball rolling member 4845, and the rotating member 4846. And a driving device 4847 that supports the motor and rotates it in a fixed direction at a low speed.

[Ball rolling member]
The ball rolling member 4845 has a bottom wall portion 4849 that gently slopes down toward the center of a circle like a shallow ridge and has a circular hole 4848 at the center, and a short cylindrical shape that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion 4849. And a spherical channel curved in an annular shape composed of the peripheral wall portion 4850, and, as shown in FIG. 245, a game ball is inserted into the spherical channel toward the inside of the peripheral wall portion 4850 and in a substantially tangential direction. Throwing rods 4851a and 4851b to be obtained are provided at two front and rear positions.
Then, a screw passage 4836 connected to the right path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a is connected to the throwing rod 4851a in front of the ball rolling member 4845, while the screw rod 4851b in the rear is connected to the throwing rod 4851b. The right rear passage 4841 of the second distribution portion 4829b is connected, so that the first distribution portion 4829a passes through the rightward path and the screw passage 4836 and is introduced into the ball rolling member 4845 from the front introduction rod 4851a. The game ball and the game ball thrown into the ball rolling member 4845 from the rear throwing rod 4851b through the left course from the first sorting portion 4829a and the right back passage 4841 of the second sorting portion 4829b are the peripheral wall portion 4850. While making a centrifugal force to the side act, it is coasted and turns clockwise on the bottom wall portion 4849 in FIG. 245. Since the turning game ball gradually loses centrifugal force as the speed decreases, the game ball descends gradually toward the circular hole 4848 due to the downward inclination of the bottom wall portion 4849.

  The ball rolling member 4845 receives the game balls from the two input rods 4851a and 4851b as described above. In the embodiment, the game balls are input from the input rod 4851a connected to the screw passage 4836 having a large drop. The speed of the ball is higher than that of the game ball thrown from the throwing basket 4851b. Therefore, depending on the throwing timing, one game ball may collide with the other game ball and develop into an unexpected development. Thus, by providing a plurality of throwing rods on one ball rolling member 4845 and throwing the game balls at different design speeds (inclination distance and angle), the game contingency is increased and the interest is effectively increased. be able to.

  As shown in FIG. 253, the ball rolling member 4845 of the embodiment contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball placed on the bottom wall portion 4849 and guides the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall portion 4850. An obtained ball guiding portion 4852 is provided. The ball guiding portion 4852 has a wedge-shaped projection having a wedge-shaped cross section that is inclined downward (about 20 ° with respect to the horizontal line) toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion 4849 of the game ball, as shown in FIG. You may make it the form which inclined the inclination of the bottom wall part 4849 from the middle.

[Rotating member]
The rotating member 4846 has a distribution disk 4853 which is slightly smaller in diameter than the circular hole 4848 of the ball rolling member 4845 and provided at a height substantially equal to or slightly lower than the circular hole 4848, and an edge of the distribution disk 4853. And a plurality of (four in the embodiment) are provided at positions that are point-symmetric with respect to the center of the sorting disk 4853 (= the center of the bottom wall portion 4849). A game ball receiving port 4855 and a game ball that falls under the receiving port 4855 so as to make one of the receiving ports 4855 a specific receiving port 4855v are placed outside the drooping cylinder 4854. A lateral feed rod 4856 that feeds horizontally, a cross-shaped partition wall 4857 that partitions adjacent ones of all the receiving ports 4855 including the specific receiving port 4855v, and a drive device 4847 described later. A bushing 4859 for inserting the shaft 4858, schematically composed.

[Driver]
As shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, the drive device 4847 includes a drive motor 4860 provided on the lower surface of the distribution base 4844, a drive shaft 4858 protruding upward from the upper surface of the distribution base 4844, and a distribution base. A gear group 4861 that is located inside the base 4844 and transmits the rotation of the drive motor 4860 to the drive shaft 4858, and the drive shaft 4858 is inserted from below into the bearing cylinder 4859 of the rotation member 4846, so The rotating member 4846 is rotated at a low speed in a certain direction (in the embodiment, counterclockwise opposite to the turning direction of the game ball in the ball rolling member 4845).

[Distribution base]
The distribution base 4844 is fixedly attached to the lower part of the lower game zone 4825, and has a pocket-like fixed start winning opening 4813 on the front side as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. A winning passage 4862 that leads to the fixed start winning opening 4813 is provided, and a disengagement passage 4863 that leads to the out guiding portion 1003 of the lower game zone 4825 is formed on both sides of the winning passage 4862 on the front surface.
Further, an upper part of the distribution base 4844 is provided with a separation sorting path 4864 for receiving a game ball that has entered the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 in the sorting device 4843 and guiding it to the detaching passage 4863, and a rotation. A prize sorting passage 4865 that receives a game ball that has entered the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and guides it to the prize passage 4862, and a game ball that has jumped out of the ball rolling member 4845 in the sorting device 4843 and dropped to the game hall side. A drop recovery passage 4866 for recovery is formed.

[Outgoing sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 251 to 253, the detachment sorting passage 4864 protrudes from the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to project at a height close to the drooping cylinder portion 4854 of the rotating member 4846 of the sorting device 4843. It is formed of a substantially U-shaped enclosure frame 4867 having a curved portion having substantially the same diameter as the member 4846, and enters the receiving port 4855 other than the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 so as to straighten the inside of the drooping cylinder portion 4854. The falling game ball is received and guided to the detaching passage 4863.

[Winning sorting passage]
As shown in FIGS. 251 to 253, the prize sorting passage 4865 is formed by a corridor 4868 attached to the upper surface of the sorting base 4844 so as to surround the periphery of the rotating member 4846. The game balls that have entered the special receiving port 4855v of the member 4846 and are laterally fed out of the drooping cylinder portion 4854 by the lateral feed rod 4856 are received and guided to the front winning path 4862. When a game ball enters the special receiving port 4855v at the timing when the special receiving port 4855v of the rotating member 4846 is positioned above the winning path 4862 as shown in FIG. Falls directly into the winning path 4862.

[Fall collection passage]
The fall recovery passage 4866 includes an upper surface of a distribution base 4844 inclined downward and a bowl-shaped step 4869 provided at the rear of the distribution base 4844, and from the ball rolling member 4845 of the distribution device 4844. The game balls that have jumped out and dropped are collected in the bowl-shaped step 4869 and collected together with the out balls to the game hall side.

[Countermeasure against sorting device]
Dotsukigoto for the ball-swivel type sorter strikes the front of the pachinko machine with the timing when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specific entrance and vibrates the pachinko machine with the impact. The trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by vibration to enter the target specific entrance.
On the other hand, the ball rolling member 4845 of the sorting device 4843 of the embodiment is slightly separated from the peripheral wall portion 4850 by the ball guiding portion 4852 when the game ball rolls on the bottom wall portion 4849 by inertia while receiving the action of centrifugal force. Since it is guided to the position, there is a slight gap as shown in FIG. 253 (a) even when the game ball is closest to the peripheral wall portion 4850.
Therefore, a player who makes a throbbing strikes the pachinko machine 1 as shown by an arrow F in FIG. 253 (b), vibrates the ball rolling member 4845 in the front-rear direction, and hits the game ball with the peripheral wall 4850. Even if the trajectory is changed in the radial direction, there is a gap between the peripheral wall portion 4850 and the game ball, so that the movement of the peripheral wall portion 4850 is not immediately transmitted to the game ball. In addition, the ball guiding portion 4852 that is in contact with the game ball obliquely hits the lower side from the center of the game ball and sinks into the lower side of the game ball by vibration, and the game ball is moved as shown by an arrow M in FIG. It tries to move in a direction different from the direction intended by the unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to make it substantially difficult.

[Others]
In addition, in the lower game zone 4825c, a passing-type first ball sensor 4870a that detects a game ball passing through the right path in the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a and a right back passage 4841 of the second distribution unit 4829b. A passing-type second ball sensor 4870b for detecting a game ball passing through the first ball sensor 4870b is provided, and the first and second ball sensors 4870a and 4870b detect the game ball to thereby distribute the third sorting unit 4829c. The number of balls entering 4843 can be managed. Then, the number of balls entered in the sorting device 4843 and the number of balls detected by the start gate 4803 through the left front passage 4842 of the second sorting unit 4829b are added together and detected by the jump sensor 4831 of the jump unit 4827. By comparing with the number of balls that have entered the lower game zone 4825, it is possible to know the existence of game balls that have not entered the lower game zone 4825, and thereby warn that some sort of fraud is suspected. Can be issued to the administrator.

  Further, in the embodiment, since the flow path from the diving portion 4827 to the fixed start winning port 4813 is long and the residence time of the game ball is long, for example, the game ball according to the stored number of winning lotteries held in an unexecuted state It becomes difficult to perform so-called stoppages that temporarily stop the launching of fire. Therefore, there is an effect that can effectively prevent the stop hitting which is disadvantageous for the game hall.

[Right-handed gaming zone]
The right-handed game zone 4824 includes the above-described obstacle nail 2007, start gate 4803, electric start winning port 4871, first big winning port 4807, and rotating ball receiving member 4808 in the order of game balls. , A general winning port 4801 into which a game ball placed on a tapered circumferential surface inclined downward toward the rear of the rotating ball receiving member 4808 enters, a V winning port 4810, a general winning port 4801, a second large winning port 4812, The out guidance unit 1003 is shared with the lower game zone 4825.

  The right-handed game zone 4824 is connected to the upper game zone 4823 through a communication passage portion 5a4 through which a game ball launched with a specific strong firing force can pass, as in FIGS. 131 to 139 and 198. The details of the communication passage 5a4 are the same as those described with reference to FIGS.

Further, the right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a right-handed ball flow path that goes around the above-mentioned game element group.
This right-handed ball flow path
An upper free fall region 4910 formed immediately below the outlet portion of the communication passage portion 5a4 and having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a start gate 4803;
In addition, a first ball 4911 that opens upward at the lower end of the free fall region 4910 and receives a game ball that has passed through the start gate 4803 and a game ball that has simply passed through the side without passing through the start gate 4803,
A branch region 4912 having a first shutter plate 4802 of an electric start winning prize port 4871 in a direction in which four obstacle nails 2007 are planted in the shape of a corner post and continue straight to the end of the first rod 4911.
A second rod 4913 that opens to the left in FIG. 238 of the branch area 4912 and bypasses the outside of the electric start winning port 4871 in a horizontal U shape and joins the flow path of the branch area 4912 in the straight drop direction;
A third collar 4914 that is continuous from the second collar 4913 and includes the upper surface of the first shutter plate 4802 of the first grand prize winning port 4807 in a part of the flow path;
A lower free fall region 4915 having a plurality of obstacle nails 2007 and a general winning port 4801 located between the second large winning port 4812 and immediately below the outlet portion of the third rod 4914 is formed.

In the right-handed game zone 4824, as shown in FIG. 238 and FIG. 255, the right-handed ball channel is placed on the inner surface side of the boundary wall 4916 that partitions the upper game zone 4823 and the lower game zone 4825. An illumination board 4917 for effecting illumination from the direction is provided. The lighting board 4917 has a front end face or a rear face that is exclusively opaque when viewed from the player side depending on the position and orientation of the lighting board 4917, and the light emitted from the light-emitting LED does not easily enter the field of view. It is possible to suppress glare while shining brightly.
The right-handed game zone 4824 is provided with a timer segment 4882 using a segment indicator capable of displaying a 5-digit number in the vicinity of the terminal end of the third base 4914. It is designed to enhance the interest of the game by giving a notice.

The pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment has the above-described configuration, and the outline of the game is as described above. However, to further supplement the explanation, the player first throws a game ball into the upper game zone 4823 and jumps in. Aiming to enter part 4827. Of course, only a part of the ball enters the diving section 4827 as intended, and there are those that enter the general winning opening 4801 and others that enter the out guidance section 1003 and finish the game.
In this upper-layer game zone 4823, the ball enters the diving section 4827 and enters the lower-layer game zone 4825. When a game ball enters the fixed start winning port 4801 through the above-described multiple assignments, the first special symbol display A lottery game (first lottery game) related to the first special symbol is performed, and in this first lottery game, the first display device 4815, the second display device 4817, and the third display device 4818 step by step. With the effect display, the player is expected to have hit the above-mentioned big hit game or small hit game. That is, based on the progress of the lottery game described above, first, the display lamp 4814 of the first display device 4815 is turned on in order from the bottom to the top, so that the start of the lottery is displayed as if the fire of the lead wire is burning. Subsequently, the lottery result of the first stage is displayed with the contents of the three symbols displayed on the second display device 4817 (for example, three “GO” displays are arranged), and finally the final stage is displayed on the third display device 4818. Is displayed (specifically, a single-digit number is displayed on a large segment display, or a spherical bomb character jumping operation is performed by the display frame 4885, the arm-shaped movable unit 4888, and the foot-shaped movable unit 4889). Make the player recognize the hit and hit.

Of the game balls launched into the upper game zone 4823, a part of the game balls that entered the diving portion 4827 but did not enter the fixed start winning port 4801 pass through the second distribution portion 4829b. When the game ball passes through the start gate 4803, the signal is detected by the gate sensor 4875, and the above-described normal symbol lottery regarding the operation of the first shutter plate 4802 is performed.
When the winning symbol (1/10) is obtained in the normal symbol lottery, the first shutter plate 4802 of the right-handed gaming zone 4824 moves forward by an amount corresponding to the lottery result and can enter the electric start winning opening 4871. When the time elapses, the first shutter plate 4802 moves backward to make it impossible to enter the electric start winning port 4871.
The lottery result is displayed on the effect normal symbol display device 4804 (specifically, a one-digit number is displayed on the segment display).

  In addition, after the big hit game is over, the short game state where the variation time of the normal symbol in the normal symbol lottery is a shortened time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the variation time in the normal game state (for example, 120 seconds) The lottery game related to the second special symbol (second lottery game) performed by the second special symbol display device by directly aiming at the start gate 4803 of the right-handed gaming zone 4824, not the diving portion 4827. It becomes possible to advance the game. The short-time gaming state is terminated under a predetermined termination condition (for example, a 10-time variation display of a special symbol) and returns to the normal gaming state.

  The embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but the present invention is of course not limited to the above-described embodiments. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating drum or The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a reel.

In the embodiment, the game area 5a is formed by three game zones. However, the game area 5a may be constituted by two game zones or a single game area 5a.
In the embodiment, the ball rolling member 4845 has been described as a part of the sorting device 4843. However, the ball rolling member 4845 rolls the game ball in a state that is visible to the player in the game area 5a. If it is a thing, it will not be limited to the distribution apparatus 4843.

Incidentally, conventionally, a pachinko machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, is provided with a gaming area surrounded by rails and covered with a window on the front, and a player places a game ball above the gaming area. When a player enters a specific entrance or the like during the process of flowing down the game ball, a predetermined number of game balls are provided (released) to the player as a prize for the entry, while entering the specific entrance. The game balls that have not been balled are collected by the game hall through the out ball opening.
By the way, some players apply a strong external force to the pachinko machine (specifically, hitting it, pulling the ball tray strongly, etc.) to vibrate the whole and force the game ball trajectory by the vibration. There is a person who tries to get a prize by changing the ball into a specific entrance (hereinafter referred to simply as “dokkigoto”).
For example, there is a ball-swivel sorter that is generally called “Kroon” as an accessory of a pachinko machine that is easily damaged by the above-described pounding.
The distribution device includes a spherical flow path including a bottom wall portion that gently descends and inclines toward the center of a circle like a shallow ridge, and a peripheral wall portion that surrounds the outer periphery of the bottom wall portion, and the spherical flow A ball rolling member which turns on the bottom wall part while applying a centrifugal force directed toward the peripheral wall part side by throwing a game ball inside the peripheral wall part and in a substantially tangential direction to the road, and the bottom wall A plurality of (for example, two to four) game ball reception openings provided at point-symmetric positions with respect to the center of the section, and one of the reception openings, which is a privilege for the entry. A game ball that is thrown into the ball flow path of the ball rolling member and swirls along the peripheral wall portion by the initial centrifugal force gradually loses momentum and becomes the center of the bottom wall portion. It gradually descends to the side, and finally it decides which of the entrances including the specific entrance will enter the ball. It is an element.
Dotsukigoto for such a ball-swivel sorter applies an external force by hitting the front of the pachinko machine, for example, when the game ball turning on the bottom wall approaches the specific entrance and applying external force. The pachinko machine is vibrated, and the trajectory of the game ball is changed from the turning direction to the radial direction by the vibration to enter the target specific entrance.
Therefore, a conventional countermeasure against such a pounding noise is, for example, that a vibration sensor is installed in a pachinko machine as described in the literature (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-229209), and the pounding noise is detected by the vibration detected by the vibration sensor. The game hall side takes necessary measures based on the determination result.
The conventional anti-vibration measures using vibration sensors only estimate that the anti-vibration was detected by detecting abnormal vibrations in the pachinko machine. Even if a specific entry is entered immediately after abnormal vibrations, It was difficult to prove the causal relationship between the vibration and the abnormal vibration, and it was not possible to prevent the actual damage caused by Dotsukigoto.

[Angle position of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft of the stepping motor]
Next, the rotating shaft of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 that swings the first electric sorting piece 4835 in a constantly wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position) The second electric distribution piece 4840 is always in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that is always reciprocated between the position of the left mechanical end (hereinafter referred to as “vertically inverted”) and the mechanical end position). The angular positions of the D-cut surfaces respectively formed on the rotating shaft of the swinging second sorting stepping motor 4909 will be described. FIG. 257 is a diagram illustrating D cut angle positions formed on the rotation shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors. Here, since the arrangement method of the angular positions of the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is the same, the rotating shafts of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are the same. In the description of the method of arranging the angular position of the D-cut surface formed in FIG. 2, the reference numerals for the second sorting stepping motor 4909 are shown in parentheses after the reference numerals for the first sorting stepping motor 4908.

  The first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are unipolar stepping motors having phases of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, and a rotary shaft is press-fitted into the rotor. The first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described in detail later, but the rotation shaft is press-fitted into the rotor so that the rotation position of the rotation shaft is determined according to the number of steps from the reference excitation phase. ing. That is, in this embodiment, the position of the rotation shaft can be almost grasped without providing a rotation angle sensor such as a rotary encoder for accurately measuring the angle of the rotation shaft.

  As shown in FIG. 257 (a), the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) has mounting holes 4908b (4909b) on the left and right sides of the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a). The left mounting hole 4908b (4909b), the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a), and the right mounting hole 4908b (4909b) are arranged on the same straight line and become the horizontal center line of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). ing. A straight line that intersects the horizontal center line vertically and passes through the rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) is a vertical center line of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). The diameter of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is 4 mm (φ4).

  The rotation shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) has a D-cut surface formed in advance, and this D is in a state where φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). The cut surface is press-fitted into the rotor so that the cut surface is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. As a result, in the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) is horizontal. It becomes a D-cut angle position that is an absolute position that is a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the center line of the direction.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 in the first distribution unit 4829a swings like a wiper that reciprocally moves between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. When the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to reach the position of the left mechanical end, the third electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the rightward path flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball path 4834 and is spirally lowered via the screw path 4836. Whereas the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to reach the position of the right mechanical end while being connected to the distribution unit 4829c, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the left path that flows to the left toward the front of the ball path 4834. Connected to the distribution unit 4829b. In the present embodiment, in the state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the left mechanical end, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so as to be a D-cut angle position that is a position rotated by 3 °. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 has the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 that swings in a wiper shape when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), and the left mechanical end. Or the position of the right mechanical end. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  The second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution unit 4829b connected to the left path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution unit 4829a always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically. Swings like a moving wiper. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left inter-hand passage 4842, whereas the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected. Swings to reach the position of the left mechanical end, it is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841. In the present embodiment, in the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the left mechanical end, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is preliminarily designed to be a position rotated by 3 °) and to be a D-cut angle position. The second sorting stepping motor 4909 has a rotational position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 that swings in a wiper shape when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). Or the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically. A detailed description of this point will be described later.

  As described above, the third distribution unit 4829c is the final stage at which a ball can be expected to enter the target fixed start winning port 4813, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings to the position of the mechanical end on the left side. When it reaches, the third distribution portion 4829c is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c through a screw passage 4836 that is distributed in a rightward direction that flows to the right side toward the front of the ball passage 4834 and spirals down. The distribution to the right path directly connected to the portion 4829c is what the player desires, and is an allocation to an area that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4845 in the second distribution portion 4829b connected to the leftward path of the ball passage 4834 of the first distribution portion 4829a swings to reach the position of the left mechanical end, the right rear passage 4841 is set. Therefore, the distribution that is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is what the player desires, and the region that is advantageous to the player is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c. It is a sort.

  On the other hand, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings and reaches the position of the right mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the leftward path flowing to the left side in front of the ball path 4834 and connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. Since the second distribution unit 4829b can obtain a distribution opportunity connected to the third distribution unit 4829c, the right distribution route directly connected to the third distribution unit 4829c described above can be obtained. In comparison, the connection to the third distribution unit 4829c is interspersed with the distribution by the second distribution unit 4829b, and the probability of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is reduced, which is advantageous for the player. It's hard to say it's sort to Further, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings and reaches the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left inter-hand passage 4842. Is not connected to the distribution unit 4829c at all, and the distribution to an area advantageous to the player is not performed.

  The connector 4908c (4909c) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is provided at a position rotated by 135 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) clockwise from the horizontal center line, as shown in FIG. 257 (b). As shown, / φ2 is assigned to the first pin, / φ1 is assigned to the second pin, φ2C (common) is assigned to the third pin, φ1C (common) is assigned to the fourth pin, Φ2 is assigned to the pin, and φ1 is assigned to the sixth pin. Various voltages (operation voltage described later, stop voltage described later) are applied to φ2C (common) allocated to the third pin, toward / φ2 allocated to the first pin or φ2 allocated to the fifth pin Current flows. Various voltages (operation voltage described later, stop voltage described later) are applied to φ1C (common) allocated to the fourth pin, toward / φ1 allocated to the second pin or φ1 allocated to the sixth pin Current flows.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) switches between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage according to the rotational state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) as excitation to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2. It has been.

  As described above, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is excited (ON) with φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) The D-cut angle position is a position rotated counterclockwise by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) from the horizontal center line. In the present embodiment, the following eight combinations (φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 are described as combinations of excitation of the phases φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). Except for those that do not excite all), the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined by the combination of these eight types of excitation of each phase. It has become.

  As described above, the combination of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Is not formed at all, for example, a sensor is provided so that the first electric distribution piece 4835 is detected in the state of the left mechanical end, and the rotation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is performed. The shaft 4908a is rotated to perform a pushing operation to move the first electric distribution piece 4835 to the position of the left mechanical end, and when detected by the sensor, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the first electric distribution There is a drawback in that it is necessary to grasp the correspondence with the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the piece 4835, and the second power A sensor is provided so that the split piece 4840 is detected in the position of the left mechanical end, the rotary shaft 4909a of the second sort stepping motor 4909 is rotated, and the second electric sort piece 4840 is moved to the left mechanical end position. When the moving push-in operation is performed and detected by the sensor, it is necessary to grasp the correspondence between the excitation phase of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 and the position of the mechanical end on the left side of the second electric sorting piece 4840 There is.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) rotates the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). ) Is structurally determined so that the angle of the D-cut surface formed is a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line to be the D-cut angle position. The combination of eight excitations of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end), Since the corresponding relationship is electrically determined, the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric distribution can be performed without performing the pushing operation described above. 4835 and (. Excluding the position of each mechanical end) rotation position of the (4840), and is capable of determining.

  In addition to when power is turned on and when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the first excitation to rotate the first electric sorting piece 4835 (4840). Even if the position is different from the assumed rotational position, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the next excitation to adjust the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 (4840) to the intended rotational position. Therefore, recovery can be performed easily. This can also be applied to the case where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) has stepped out due to the current excitation, and the first electric stepping motor 4908 (4909) is controlled by the next excitation to control the first electric distribution. Since the rotational position of the piece 4835 (4840) can be adjusted to the intended rotational position, recovery of the step-out of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) can be easily performed.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is always used as an electric drive source that swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position). An electric drive that adopts a stepping motor and swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always moves back and forth between the left mechanical end position and the vertical mechanical end position). The reason why the stepping motor is adopted as the source will be briefly described.

  The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 distribute game balls according to the distribution ratio, and are required to be accurate. For this reason, when a solenoid is used as the electrical drive source, there is a difference between the plunger movement speed when the excitation drive of the solenoid is started and the plunger movement speed returned by the restoring force of the spring when the excitation drive of the solenoid is stopped. . Further, since the plunger returns due to the restoring force of the spring, the plunger moving speed is not always constant, and the plunger moving speed due to the variation of the spring varies depending on the solenoid. Further, as described above, since the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 always swing in a wiper shape, when a solenoid is used as an electrical drive source, the solenoid is not durable. There is aged deterioration of the spring, and it is difficult to continue the sorting operation by the first electric sorting piece 4835 and the second electric sorting piece 4840 according to the sorting ratio set at the time of design. As described above, when a solenoid is used as an electrical drive source, it is difficult to accurately control the distribution operation by the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the distribution operation is finely controlled. Is difficult.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, electrical drive that is durable, has little deterioration over time, has little variation in performance among individuals, can accurately control the sorting operation, and can finely control the sorting operation. As a source, a first sorting stepping motor 4908 that is a stepping motor was adopted for the first electric sorting piece 4835, and a second sorting stepping motor 4909 that was a stepping motor was adopted for the second electric sorting piece 4840.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is formed on the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). The D-cut surface angle is structurally determined to be a D-cut angle position that is a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. Correspondence relationship between combinations of eight excitations of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 and the rotational position of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) (excluding the position of each mechanical end). Therefore, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) and the first electric sorting piece 483 are not performed without performing the pushing operation described above. (4840) rotation position (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined, but such a mechanism is used for another effect device provided with a movable body operated by a stepping motor. Can be used. Such other effect devices may be provided in the game board 5 or in the door frame 3. When other rendering devices are controlled by the main control board 1310X, a stepping motor that operates the movable body is driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and when other rendering devices are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, they are movable. The stepping motor that operates the body is driven and controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable effector (movable body) is driven by a drive motor (stepping motor) on the front surface of a liquid crystal display that displays various images according to various effects ( For example, JP 2008-012194 A (paragraph [0039], paragraph [0045] to paragraph [0051], FIGS. 2 to 4)). A photo sensor is arranged at the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) so that the movable effect body (movable body) is present at the original position by being detected by the photo sensor. It has become. However, since the gaming machine described in this document is configured to identify the original position of the movable effect body (movable body) based on the detection signal from the photosensor, In addition, including the time when power is restored due to a power failure and instantaneous power failure.) When the original position of the movable effector (movable object) cannot be specified, the excitation phase to the drive motor (stepping motor) and the effect of the movable object There was a problem that the position of (movable body) could not be specified.

[Voltage switching circuit]
Next, according to the rotation state of the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), the excitation voltage to the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 is mutually switched between the operating voltage and the stopping voltage. A voltage switching circuit that can be switched to will be described. FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram of the voltage switching circuit.

  The first distribution stepping motor 4908 always swings the first electric distribution piece 4835 in a wiper shape, and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 always swings the second electric distribution piece 4840 in a wiper shape. The second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 need to be driven at all times. However, if the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are always driven, the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 generate excessive heat, which causes a problem with the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Or failure may occur. For this reason, it is necessary to suppress heat generation even if the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are always driven.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to swing the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840 in a wiper shape, an operating voltage is used. On the other hand, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are driven to stop the first and second electric distribution pieces 4835 and 4840, the voltage switching circuit that uses the stop voltage is controlled. And realized.

  First, as shown in FIG. 258, the main control board 1310X has first and first switching voltages that can be switched between an operating voltage and a stopping voltage as voltages applied to the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909. 2 distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, and first and second distribution stepping motor driving ICs 1310n and 1310q capable of driving the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are provided.

  Here, the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p have the same circuit configuration, and the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q have the same circuit configuration. In the description of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p and in the description of the first and second distribution stepping motor driving ICs 1310n and 1310q, the reference numeral for the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is followed by the reference numeral for the first distribution stepping motor 4908. Is shown in parentheses.

  The first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) mainly includes a transistor MTR50 (MTR60), a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60), a diode M50 (M60), and a polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a resettable fuse. Has been. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) and electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR51 (MR61) whose one end is electrically connected to the ground (GND). It is connected to the. The other end of the resistor MR50 (MR60) is a first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 2) (not shown as a line for transmitting a signal of voltage switching 2). It is electrically connected to the output terminal of the sorting piece voltage switching D type flip-flop). The input terminal of the first electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop (second electric distribution piece voltage switching D-type flip-flop) is the first electric distribution piece voltage switching output of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to a terminal (second electric distribution piece voltage switching output terminal).

  The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is electrically connected to the gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR52. It is connected to the. The gate terminal G of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) via the resistor MR53 (MR63). The source terminal S of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The drain terminal D of the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60), which is a rectifier diode, and is also electrically connected to one end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). . The anode terminal of the diode MD50 (MD60) is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. The other end of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) is electrically connected to the anode terminals of the Zener diodes MD51 and MD52 (MD61 and MD62), and supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). It is electrically connected to a terminal of a connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) as a power supply line U (+ 12V-D).

  The first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) includes four chip NPN Darlington transistors and four diodes in the same package. Of the four elements of the NPN type Darlington transistor, the base terminal 1 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), and the base terminal 5 of the second NPN type Darlington transistor is The base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR55 (MR65), and the base terminal 8 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR56 (MR66). The terminal 12 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR57 (MR67).

  The collector terminal 2 of the first NPN type Darlington transistor is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) as a Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which a current for exciting φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. The collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to a connector 1310z (D / φ1 line) as a U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which current for exciting / φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. The collector terminal 9 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor is connected to the terminal of FIG. 259. The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which current for exciting φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows ) As connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) ) And the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN-type Darlington transistor is a U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which a current exciting / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows. ) Is electrically connected to the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259).

  The other end of the resistor MR54 (MR64), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 1 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor, instructs the start and stop of excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 for φ1. ) Is electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 (not shown)) as a line for transmitting the signal. Yes. The input terminal of the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ1 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ1 output terminal (φ1 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of the resistor MR55 (MR65) whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 5 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor is PD1 (instructing start / stop of excitation for / φ1 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908) PD5) is electrically connected to the output terminal of the D type flip-flop for / φ1 (not shown) / D type flip-flop for / φ1 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 (not shown) as a line for transmitting the signal PD5). It is connected. The input terminal of the / φ1 D type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (/ φ1 D type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the first distribution stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This is electrically connected to the output terminal for / φ1 4908 (the output terminal for / φ1 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of the resistor MR56 (MR66), one end of which is electrically connected to the base terminal 8 of the third NPN-type Darlington transistor, instructs the start and stop of excitation with respect to φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. ) Electrically connected to the output terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) (φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 (not shown)) as a line for transmitting the signal Yes. The input terminal of the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the φ2 D-type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the input terminal of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. It is electrically connected to the φ2 output terminal (φ2 output terminal of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

  The other end of the resistor MR57 (MR67) whose one end is electrically connected to the base terminal 12 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor is PD3 (instruction for starting and stopping excitation of / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908) PD7) is electrically connected to an output terminal of a D-type flip-flop for / φ2 (not shown) of a first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) / D-type flip-flop for / φ2 of a second distribution stepping motor 4909). It is connected. The input terminal of the / φ2 D type flip-flop of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (/ φ2 D type flip-flop of the second distribution stepping motor 4909) is the first distribution stepping motor of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a. This is electrically connected to the output terminal for / φ2 4908 (the output terminal for / φ2 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909).

  The emitter terminal of the first NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the second NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 6 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 6 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The emitter terminal of the third NPN type Darlington transistor and the emitter terminal of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor are electrically connected to the emitter terminal 7 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. The emitter terminal 7 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) includes four diodes, a pair of first and second diodes are arranged in the package, and a pair of third and fourth diodes. It is arranged in the package.

  The anode terminal of the first diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 2 of the first NPN-type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the second diode is the collector terminal 4 of the second NPN-type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the first diode and the cathode terminal of the second diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been. The cathode terminal 3 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD51 (MD61).

  The anode terminal of the third diode is electrically connected to the collector terminal 9 of the third NPN type Darlington transistor inside the package, and the anode terminal of the fourth diode is the collector terminal 11 of the fourth NPN type Darlington transistor. The cathode terminal of the third diode and the cathode terminal of the fourth diode are electrically connected to the cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) inside the package. Has been. The cathode terminal 10 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the Zener diode MD52 (MD62).

  The first to fourth diodes convert the back electromotive force generated when the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 is stopped to heat and remove it. Thus, the first to fourth NPN Darlington transistors are protected.

  A power line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) is connected to the first distribution stepping motor via a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to φ2C (common) of the third pin and φ1C (common) of the fourth pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of 4908 (4909). The Uφ1 line (Dφ1 line) through which the current for exciting φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) via a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) and a wiring (not shown). 4909) is electrically connected to φ1 of the sixth pin of connector 4908c (4909c). The U / φ1 line (D / φ1 line) through which the current for exciting / φ1 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) and a wiring not shown. It is electrically connected to / φ1 of the second pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909). The Uφ2 line (Dφ2 line) through which the current for exciting φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is connected to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (not shown) via the terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) and the wiring (not shown). 4909) is electrically connected to φ2 of the fifth pin of connector 4908c (4909c). The U / φ2 line (D / φ2 line) through which the current for exciting / φ2 of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) flows is the first via a terminal of the connector 1310z (see FIG. 259) and a wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to / φ2 of the first pin of the connector 4908c (4909c) of the distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909).

  PD0 to PD3 instructing start and stop of excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, and excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 When the oscillation drive data PD0 to PD7, which is 8-bit information including PD4 to PD7 instructing start and stop of the output, is output from the main control MPU 1310a, the corresponding D-type flip-flops and the resistors Are input to the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n and the base terminals 1, 5, 8, 12 of the second sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310q, respectively. The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) is operated by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) according to the oscillation drive data PD0 to PD3 (PD4 to PD7) from the main control MPU 1310a. A current that excites φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is supplied with the voltage switched to the stop voltage.

  Here, the operation of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) will be briefly described. When the logic of the voltage switching 1 (voltage switching 2) signal from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the operating voltage logic. The transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned OFF, and the voltage of the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is raised to the + 12V side by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60). As a result, + 12V is supplied as an operating voltage to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) as a power line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D). It is not supplied from the power line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) to the +5 power line via the diode MD50 (MD60).

  On the other hand, when the logic of the voltage switch 1 (voltage switch 2) signal from the main control MPU 1310a is output as the stop voltage logic obtained by inverting the logic of the operation voltage logic, the transistor MTR50 (MTR60) is turned on. Then, when + 12V by the field effect transistor MF50 (MF60) is cut off, the voltage of the power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) that supplies power to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is diode MD50 (MD60). Is pulled up to + 5V side through + 5V, and + 5V is supplied as a power supply line called + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909). Is done.

  Here, the difference in temperature rise between the power consumption of the operating voltage and the power consumption of the stop voltage will be briefly described. The power consumption W can be calculated by Ohm's law: voltage V × voltage V ÷ resistance R. The power consumption Wo due to + 12V being the operating voltage is 144 / resistance R, and the power consumption Ws due to + 5V being the stopping voltage is 25 / resistance R. Then, the power consumption Wo by + 12V that is the operating voltage is 5 times or more (5.76 = 144/25) compared to the power consumption Ws by + 5V that is the stopping voltage, so the temperature rise is also about 5 times or more. It becomes. The same applies to the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q).

  In other words, even if the temperature rise becomes a problem with single (continuous) driving with the operating voltage +12 V, the temperature rise can be suppressed to about one-fifth or less with driving with the stopping voltage +5 V.

  The package of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors that excite φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909), The first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) absorbs the heat generated by the first to fourth diodes that convert the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 into heat, and the absorbed heat is outside air. (Around the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q)). The island facilities of the game hall are lined up behind other pachinko machines, so the temperature in the island facilities of the game hall is high due to heat generated from the power supply board and various control boards of the pachinko machine.

  Therefore, even if the package of the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n (1310q) absorbs heat generated by the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors and the first to fourth diodes, the first distribution stepping motor drive In the vicinity of the IC 1310n (1310q), that is, in a state where the temperature of the outside air is high, the efficiency of releasing the absorbed heat to the outside air is reduced, so that heat is stored in the package of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q). It will be. Then, when the temperature of the package of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q) is increased and the junction temperature of the first to fourth NPN type Darlington transistors is increased to the junction temperature, the first to fourth NPN type Darlingtons. The transistor may break down.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is driven to rotate the rotating shaft 4908a (4909a) in CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise), the first The stepping motor 4908 (4909) is excited to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 as continuously as possible, so that the first stepping motor 4908 (4909) is transferred to φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2. The counter electromotive force generated when the excitation to the φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) is stopped is reduced by reducing the number of times the excitation is stopped. The number of times of conversion to heat by the diode can be reduced. Thereby, since heat generation by the first to fourth diodes can be suppressed to a low level, it is possible to contribute to a reduction in temperature rise of the package of the first sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310n (1310q). Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, a field effect transistor (FET) MF50 (MF60) that is a semiconductor is used for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m (1310p) without using a relay. This is because a time lag occurs in the relay, and the performance variation among individuals is large, so that it is difficult to accurately control the sorting operation.

Incidentally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a movable effector is driven by a drive motor (stepping motor) on the front surface of a liquid crystal display that displays various images in accordance with various effects (for example, JP, A 2008-012194 (paragraph [0039], paragraph [0045] to paragraph [0049], FIG. 2 and FIG. 3)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, when the movable effector is started by the drive motor (stepping motor) and stopped at the effect position, the drive motor (stepping motor) is excited to produce the effect. Since it is necessary not to move from the position, when excitation to the drive motor (stepping motor) is always performed, the drive motor (stepping motor) generates heat excessively.
[Polyswitch]

  Here, a polyswitch will be described as a resettable fuse. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of polyswitches.

  The operating voltage or the stopping voltage is supplied to the first sorting stepping motor 4908 (4909) as a power supply line of + 12V-U (+ 12V-D) via the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60). The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a resistance value that suddenly increases from a specific temperature in the relationship between element resistance and element temperature, and the main body generates heat. This heat lowers conductivity and cuts off the current. When cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. When this is used, the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is the load, is limited and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), which is the load. ) Can be protected. A fuse can be mentioned as a thing which restrict | limits the electric current to load. In this fuse, when an overcurrent flows, the current flowing to the load can be cut off by fusing, but it is necessary to replace the fuse itself with a new one.

  However, like the pachinko machine 1, it is necessary to prevent an important main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game from being illegally modified to acquire an unauthorized game ball. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 259, the main control board 1310X is accommodated in a main control board box 1320 including a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are included. Are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303. The crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and a plurality of crimping portions 1303 are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by caulking the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of the caulking portion 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then to open the main control board box 1320 It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Then, a fuse is mounted on the main control board 1310X, and if the fuse is blown, the caulking portion 1303 must be destroyed. However, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, the caulking portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 provided in the pachinko machine 1 cannot be destroyed, so that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game is performed. It becomes a state that can not be.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a polyswitch is employed as an element for limiting overcurrent, similarly to the fuse. Thereby, when an overcurrent flows through the polyswitch, the load can be protected by limiting the current flowing to the load by specifying the polyswitch. That is, unlike the fuse, the polyswitch itself due to overcurrent is not destroyed and does not need to be replaced at all, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) as the load can be protected, and the caulking portion 1303 needs to be destroyed. There is no.

  The polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) has a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a main body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape, and two leads projecting downward from the bottom surface. As described above, in the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), in the relation between the element resistance and the element temperature, the resistance value suddenly increases from a specific temperature and the main body generates heat. When it is shut off and the body is cooled, the conductivity returns and returns. Therefore, in order to efficiently cool the heat generated by the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), the thickness of the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be reduced by arranging the two leads of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) in the vertical direction. The smaller surface can be set in the vertical direction, and heat generated by the main body of the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can be easily convected upward.

  Further, since a large current flows through the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60), a terminal for supplying power to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) and each phase (φ1, / φ1 of the power supply first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) , Φ2, / φ2) are arranged in the vicinity of the connector 1310z having terminals for exciting the same. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to reducing the influence of noise due to the current on the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909) with respect to other electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310X.

  Further, since the polyswitch MPS50 (MPS60) can limit the current flowing to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909), it is possible to protect the overheating of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (4909).

  In this embodiment, a polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310X for the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The polyswitch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310X. Instead of this, the collector terminals 2 of the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q are provided. 4, 9, 11 and the corresponding first and second distribution stepping motors 4908, 4909 connectors 4908 c, 4909 c may be provided with a single poly switch. Good.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one polyswitch MPS50 is provided exclusively for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of the main control board 1310X, and for the second distribution stepping motor 4909. The poly switch MPS60 is provided exclusively for the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p of the main control board 1310X. Instead, it is supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. A common polyswitch may be provided for each of the + 12V and + 5V motor power supplies, or supplied to the first and second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p, respectively. + 12V Common poly switch only for motor power may be configured to provide one dedicated.

  Further, for example, when driving another stepping motor together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 (the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven by the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n, and the other stepping motors are other stepping motor drive ICs. In this case, the motor power supplied to the other stepping motors together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be switched by the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m. In this case, the common polyswitch for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the other stepping motor is the polyswitch MPS50, and the motor power of + 12V or + 5V is supplied to the other stepping motor 4908 together with the first distribution stepping motor 4908 via the polyswitch MPS50. Each is supplied to the motor.

  In this embodiment, unipolar stepping motors are used as the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909, but bipolar stepping motors may be used instead. In this case, one poly switch is provided for each terminal to which motor power of + 12V and + 5V is supplied to the bipolar stepping motor.

In this embodiment, the polyswitch employed as a resettable fuse is a polymer-based PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) thermistor or other PPTC (Polymer Positive Temperature).
Although it is a device (abbreviation of Coefficient), a ceramic PTC (abbreviation of Positive Temperature Coefficient) device or a bimetal can be used as a resettable fuse, and the same effect as the polyswitch described above can be obtained.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a board box in which a game control board (control board) is stored in a storage member (cover body) in a base member (base body), and the base member and the storage member are fixed by a caulking portion (fixing means). A gaming machine provided is proposed (for example, JP 2010-234125 A (paragraph [0017], paragraph [0027], FIG. 7)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, when a fuse is provided as a countermeasure against overcurrent on a game control board (control board) housed in a board box, if the fuse blows, the base member (base body) and the housing are stored. Since the member (cover body) is fixed by the crimping portion (fixing means), there is a problem that the fuse cannot be replaced and the game control board (control board) cannot be used.

[Drive management block for first and second stepping motors]
Next, drive management blocks for the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 will be described. 260 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and FIG. 261 is a table for explaining the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909.

  In the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6, the table corresponding to the block that manages the driving of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the second distribution stepping motor 4909 The first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are set so that the values are different based on the relationship with the table corresponding to the block that manages the drive of the electric drive source, which is disadvantageous for the player. Is set in advance so that the stop time is different. In the case where the stop time of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 which are advantageous to the player is set to be different, the probability is obtained by slightly changing the time advantageous to the player. This is because it changes drastically.

  In addition, in the setting management unit 1, the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has the setting value 1, the setting value 2, and the setting value. The excitation time of the value 3 is changed mutually, and the excitation time of the setting value 4, the setting value 5 and the setting value 6 is changed mutually in the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909. This is because, by separately performing the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 whose excitation times are changed, it is determined which of the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 has been changed. This is because it can be made difficult to be detected by the player.

  Here, the drive management block that is preset to the setting value 1 among the setting value 1, the setting value 2, the setting value 3, the setting value 4, the setting value 5, and the setting value 6 will be described. The drive management blocks of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X. In the port output process of step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), the main control MPU 1310a performs the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908, As the drive control of 4909, the swing drive data PD0 to PD7 are output to the first and second distribution stepping motor drive ICs 1310n and 1310q, and the voltage switching control of the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 is the first and first. Signals of voltage switching 1 and 2 in which logic is set are output to the two distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuits 1310m and 1310p.

  As described above, when the first and second distribution stepping motors 4908 and 4909 are excited (ON) as φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase, the D-cut surfaces formed on the rotary shafts 4908a and 4909a The angle is a position rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) counterclockwise from the center line in the horizontal direction and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, eight combinations (φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 described later) are described as combinations of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909. Except for the case where all phases are not excited), the rotational positions of the rotating shafts 4908a and 4909a can be determined by the combination of the excitation of the eight phases.

  In the present embodiment, there are eight combinations of excitation of each phase of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2 of the first and second sorting stepping motors 4908 and 4909, combination 1: φ1, φ2 excitation (ON), Combination 2: Excitation of φ2 only (ON), Combination 3: Excitation of φ2, / φ1 (ON), Combination 4: Excitation of / φ1 only (ON), Combination 5: / φ1, / φ2 excitation (ON), Combination 7: / Excitation only for φ2 (ON), combination 8: / φ2, φ1 excitation (ON) exists.

  In the present embodiment, the rotation direction and rotation position of the rotation shafts 4908a and 4909a are defined as a drive management block composed of eight combinations of excitation of each phase, and according to this drive management block, the main control board 1310X Main control MPU 1310a instructs PD0 to PD3 to start and stop excitation for φ1, / φ1, φ2, and / φ2 of first distribution stepping motor 4908, and φ1, / φ1, φ2, and second distribution stepping motor 4909, and PD0 to PD3 are output to the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n among the swing drive data PD0 to PD7, which is 8-bit information including the PD4 to PD7 instructing the start and stop of excitation for / φ2. PD4 to PD7 are connected to the second sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310q. And output. At this time, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X sets and outputs the logic of the voltage switch 1 signal to the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m according to the drive management block, and outputs the second distribution stepping motor voltage. By setting the logic of the signal of voltage switching 2 to the switching circuit 1310p and outputting it, φ1, / φ1, φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 with the voltage switched to the operating voltage or the stopping voltage, and The rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 rotates clockwise, rotates counterclockwise, stops rotating, or the rotation of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is turned on. , / Φ1, φ2, and / φ2 are passed through the second distribution stepping motor The rotation shaft 4909a of 4909 is rotated clockwise, rotated counterclockwise, or stopped. As a result, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 swings the first electric sorting piece 4835 and swings in a constantly wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position). The second sorting stepping motor 4909 swings the second electric sorting piece 4840 and always wipes (wiper that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically). Sway).

[Driving stepping motor drive management block]
As shown in FIG. 260, the drive management block of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 includes a drive management block management number (No.), rotation direction, number of steps, pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), excitation time (milliseconds). Second (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the management number, no. 1-No. Up to 20 are specified.

  Control number No. 1. Rotation direction: Stop, Number of steps: None ("-" symbol in the figure), Pulse width (ms): None ("-" symbol in the figure), Excitation time (ms): 12, Excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the excitation phase is indicated by the “O” symbol, and the same shall apply hereinafter). It is prescribed. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 1, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the right mechanical end, and is distributed to the left path that flows to the left toward the front of the ball path 4834, and the second distribution. Connected to portion 4829b.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the left mechanical end, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so as to be a D-cut angle position that is a position rotated by 3 °.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece is obtained by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase. When 4835 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, whereas the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the right mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). Thus, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the right mechanical end.

  Control number No. 2 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252), the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted from the right mechanical end position toward the left mechanical end position by an angle corresponding to one step (see FIG. 251 and FIG. 252). That is, it rotates CCW (counterclockwise). Control number No. 1 to the management number No. When proceeding to 2, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 3, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 2 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2 toward the mechanical end position on the left side (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 2 to the management number No. When proceeding to 3, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 4, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 4, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is in a rotation position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 3 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3 toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 3 to the management number No. When proceeding to 4, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 5 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 ( Operation voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 5, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 4 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4 toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 is an intermediate position in the range from the position of the left mechanical end to the position of the right mechanical end, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction. It becomes a state to do. Control number No. 4 to the management number No. When proceeding to 5, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 5, the excitation time (ms) is defined as 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction because the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small. Immediately before, the control number No. is reduced by reducing the torque of the first sorting stepping motor 4908. This is to prevent the first electric distribution piece 4835 from rotating further from the position defined by 5, and to ensure followability.

  Specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end by measurement with a high-speed camera, the management number No. described later is set. Before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the conditions defined in 9, the result that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the left mechanical end is obtained, and the management number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence with the rotation position is broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric sorting piece 4835 is in a state of being inverted in the vertical direction, that is, the management number No. 5, the excitation time (ms) is defined as 0 (zero) and the torque of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is weakened to prevent the correspondence between the management number and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 from being broken. I came up with a technology that could do that.

  Control number No. 6 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2 is defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 6, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in a rotation position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 5 is rotated from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. No. 5 to management number no. When proceeding to 6, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 7 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 7, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 6 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6 toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 6 to the management number No. When proceeding to 7, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 8 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 8, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 7 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7 toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 7 to the management number No. When proceeding to 8, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 9 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 9, the rotational shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in a rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotational shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244, 251 and 252) to the first electric distribution piece 4835, and the management number No. 8 from the position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 rotated by 8 toward the left mechanical end position (ie CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the left mechanical end, and is distributed to the rightward path flowing to the right side toward the front of the ball path 4834, and then the third distribution through the screw path 4836 that descends spirally. Connected to portion 4829c. Control number No. No. 8 to management number no. When proceeding to 9, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the left mechanical end, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so as to be a D-cut angle position that is a position rotated by 3 °.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece is obtained by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase. When 4835 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, whereas the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the right mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). Thus, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the right mechanical end. Control number No. No. 8 to management number no. By proceeding to 9, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, and the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 ° ) And a D-cut angle position.

  Control number No. 10 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the position 9 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the mechanical end on the left side and is maintained in a stopped state. Thus, the state of being connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is maintained. Control number No. 9 to the management number No. When proceeding to 10, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Control number No. 11 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 is specified. Control number No. 11, when the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in a rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 10 (control number No. 9) from the position of the left mechanical end, which is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835, toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). )Rotate. Control number No. 11, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number No. 8 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 8. Control number No. 10 to the management number No. When proceeding to 11, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 12 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 12, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 11 is rotated from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 11 toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 12, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number No. 7, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 7. Control number No. 11 to the management number No. When proceeding to 12, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 13 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 13, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 12 from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 toward the right mechanical end position (ie, CW (clockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number 13 is the management number No. 6, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 6 is obtained. Control number No. 12 to the management number No. When proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from the two-phase to the one-phase.

  Control number No. 14, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 0 (zero), excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (Operation voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 is defined. Control number No. 14, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 13 rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 13 toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 14, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number No. 5 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 5 and the middle of the range from the position of the right mechanical end to the position of the left mechanical end, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction. It becomes a state to do. Control number No. 13 to the management number No. When proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 14, the excitation time (ms) is defined as 0 (zero). This is because when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the right mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is inverted in the vertical direction because the inertia of the first electric distribution piece 4835 is small. Immediately before, by reducing the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is assigned the management number No. This is to prevent further rotation from the position defined by 14 and to ensure followability.

  Specifically, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the right mechanical end by measurement with a high-speed camera, the management number No. described later is set. 18, before the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the conditions defined in FIG. 18, the result is that the first electric distribution piece 4835 has reached the position of the right mechanical end, and the management number and the first electric distribution piece 4835 are obtained. We confirmed the fact that the correspondence with the rotation position is broken. Therefore, immediately before the first electric sorting piece 4835 is in a state of being inverted in the vertical direction, that is, the management number No. 14, the excitation time (ms) is defined as 0 (zero), and the torque of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is weakened to prevent the correspondence between the management number and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from being broken. I came up with a technology that could do that.

  Control number No. 15 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 15, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 14 rotates from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 14 toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number 15 is the control number No. 4 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 4. Control number No. 14 to the management number no. When proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 16 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 16, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 15 is rotated from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 15 toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 16, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number No. 3 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 3. Control number No. 15 to the management number No. When proceeding to 16, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 switches from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 17 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to No. 17, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is in the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. 16 is rotated from the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 16 toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 17, the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number No. 2 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 2. Control number No. 16 to the management number no. When proceeding to 17, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 18 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven according to 18, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4908a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 244). , Refer to FIG. 251, and FIG. 252, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is transmitted to the control number No. The first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 17 rotates toward the right mechanical end by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number 18 is the management number No. 1 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the right mechanical end, and is distributed to the left path that flows to the left side in front of the ball path 4834 and is connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. Control number No. 17 to the management number No. When proceeding to 18, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line as described above. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 is at the position of the left mechanical end, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4908a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is designed in advance so as to be a D-cut angle position that is a position rotated by 3 °.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric sorting piece 4835 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, the first electric distribution piece is obtained by exciting (ON) φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase. When 4835 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, whereas the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotates toward the position of the right mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON). Thus, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the right mechanical end. Control number No. 17 to the management number No. By proceeding to No. 18, the first electric distribution piece 4835 becomes the position of the mechanical end on the right side. 1 is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 1.

  Control number No. 19 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control No. 19, the management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 18 is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the right mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the leftward path that flows to the left toward the front of the ball path 4834 and is connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. Is maintained. Control number No. No. 18 to management number No. When proceeding to 19, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Control number No. 20 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 324, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven according to the control No. 20, the management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by the control number 19 (management number No. 18) is maintained. As a result, the first electric distribution piece 4835 reaches the position of the right mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is distributed to the leftward path that flows to the left toward the front of the ball path 4834 and is connected to the second distribution unit 4829b. Is maintained. Control number No. 19 to the management number No. When proceeding to 20, the excitation mode of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from the operating voltage of + 12V to the stopping voltage of + 5V.

  Control number No. 20, the management number No. Rotation direction at 19: Stop, Excitation mode: While the two phases are maintained, the voltage is switched from + 12V (operation voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. 19, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. 20, the excitation time (ms) is 324. That is, the management number No. 20, the management number No. 19 is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in FIG. 19, and the excitation time is 27 times longer and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is always driven, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be prevented (suppressed) from generating excessive heat. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Here, the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 324 is preset. On the other hand, the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 320 is preset, and the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 316 is preset, and the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 316 is preset, and the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 316 is preset, and the management number No. 20, excitation time (ms): 316 is preset.

  The management number No. Following the control number 20, the management number No. 1 and the management number no. 1 to control number No. The first distribution stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions defined in No. 20, and the first electric distribution piece 4835 is swung in a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end. Move. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped at the right mechanical end position according to the control number No. 19 excitation time (ms): 12, control number no. Excitation time (ms) stipulated in No. 20: 324; Excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms plus 12, whereas the time to stop at the mechanical end position on the left side is the control number No. Excitation time specified in 10 (ms): only 8 and 8 ms, the stop time at the left and right mechanical end positions is different, and the voltage at the left mechanical end position where the stop time is long The operating voltage is switched from +12 V to the stopping voltage +5 V.

  Further, the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (that is, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped). 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 19 and management number No. Two phases are defined in the excitation mode of No. 20, and the control number No. 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 19 and management number No. In the excitation phase designation of 20, φ1 and φ2 are defined. 1, management number no. 10 and the management number No. The voltage of 19 is defined as + 12V. The voltage of 20 is regulated to + 5V. That is, when the first electric distribution piece 4835 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two-phase, excitation phase regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. The first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven as designated by φ1 and φ2.

  In addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, the management number No. 1 to control number No. 20, the management number No. which is the management number defined as the rotation direction: stop. 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 19 and management number No. Except for 20, the management number No. The first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with the conditions defined in the management number one by one toward the control line 20. And the management number No. 20, the management number No. 1, management number no. 2,..., The first sorting stepping motor 4908 is driven in accordance with each condition defined by the management number immediately before the one management number. 1 to control number No. The first sorting stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions defined by No. 20. The “one management number” may be determined in advance as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and the acquired random number is subjected to a predetermined calculation according to the acquired random number. It may be determined based on a result obtained by execution, or a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted and determined based on the extracted ID code.

  In addition, it is good also as what is included in the game backup information mentioned above the management number just before the power-off of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and a momentary power failure). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts to drive the first distribution stepping motor 4908 according to the conditions specified by the read management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is rotating in the CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise) direction, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 has φ1, φ2, / φ1, / Excitation to φ2 is performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, but it may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation and 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), if excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth of the first sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310n In the diode, the order in which the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is converted into heat is the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth It becomes a diode. Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can alternately generate heat. The first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n can contribute to a reduction in the temperature rise of the package. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotation position of the first electric distribution piece 4835. The excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 may be determined so as not to overlap with each other. For example, when the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is driven, as described above, the rotation shaft 4908a of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is moved through the gear mechanism (see FIGS. 244, 251, and 252). Since it is configured to be transmitted to the electric distribution piece 4835, in this gear mechanism, the gear ratio in the present embodiment (the current gear ratio) is changed to reduce the number of steps so that the positions of the mechanical ends do not overlap. Further, the first electric stepping motor 4908 is excited within a range in which the first electric distribution piece 4835 always swings in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always moves back and forth between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position). The phase and the rotational position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 can be determined, and the first vibration Only it can be defined driving management block of the stepping motor 4908.

[Driving stepping motor drive management block]
As shown in FIG. 261, the drive management block of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 includes a drive management block management number (No.), rotation direction, number of steps, pulse width (milliseconds (ms)), excitation time (milliseconds). Second (ms)), excitation mode, voltage (V), and excitation phase designation. As the management number, no. 1-No. Up to 21 are specified.

  Control number No. 1. Rotation direction: Stop, Number of steps: None ("-" symbol in the figure), Pulse width (ms): None ("-" symbol in the figure), Excitation time (ms): 12, Excitation mode: 2 Phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage, described as “12” in the figure, the same shall apply hereinafter) Excitation phase designation: φ1, φ2 (in the figure, the excitation phase is indicated by the “O” symbol, and the same shall apply hereinafter). It is prescribed. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 1, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left-hand channel 4842. As a result, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is closed.

  As described above, when φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by 10 ° (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the left mechanical end, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is preliminarily designed to be a position rotated by 3 °) and to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), whereby the second electric distribution piece When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction while 4840 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction.

  Control number No. 2 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2 is defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 2, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotation position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). The second electric distribution piece 4840 is transmitted to the position of the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the mechanical end where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inverted vertically (that is, CCW (reverse) Rotate clockwise)). Control number No. 1 to the management number No. When proceeding to 2, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 3, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 3, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 2 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2 toward the left mechanical end position (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 2 to the management number No. When proceeding to 3, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 4, rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 4, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is in the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 3 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3 toward the mechanical end position on the left side (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 3 to the management number No. When proceeding to 4, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 5 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2 is defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 5, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotation position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 4 from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4 toward the mechanical end position on the left side (ie CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 4 to the management number No. When proceeding to 5, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 6 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2 is defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 6, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is in a rotation position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 5 is rotated from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5 toward the position of the mechanical end on the left side (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. No. 5 to management number no. When proceeding to 6, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from the two-phase to the one-phase.

  Control number No. 7 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 7, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 6 is rotated from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 6 toward the mechanical end on the left side (ie, CCW (counterclockwise)) by an angle corresponding to one step. Control number No. 6 to the management number No. When proceeding to 7, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 8 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 8, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 7 is rotated from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 7 toward the mechanical end on the left side by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Control number No. 7 to the management number No. When proceeding to 8, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 9 includes rotation direction: CW (clockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage) ), Excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 9, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CW (clockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. Rotate by the angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 8 toward the position of the left mechanical end (that is, CCW (counterclockwise)). Accordingly, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the left mechanical end, and is connected to the third distribution unit 4829c via the right back passage 4841. That is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is opened. Control number No. No. 8 to management number no. When proceeding to 9, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the left mechanical end, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is preliminarily designed to be a position rotated by 3 °) and to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), whereby the second electric distribution piece When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction while 4840 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. Control number No. No. 8 to management number no. 9, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, and the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909 a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± 3 ° ) And a D-cut angle position.

  Control number No. 10 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 9 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the left mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The state where the right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened) is maintained. Control number No. 9 to the management number No. When proceeding to 10, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Control number No. 11 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 32, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. 10 (management number No. 9), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the left mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The state where the right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened) is maintained. Control number No. 10 to the management number No. When proceeding to 11, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage.

  Control number No. 11, the management number No. Rotation direction at 10: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained, respectively, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operation voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. 10, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. 11, the excitation time (ms) is 32. That is, the management number No. 11, the management number No. 10 is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in FIG. 10, the excitation time is about 2.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is always driven, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 can be prevented (suppressed) from generating excessive heat. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Control number No. 12, rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with the control number No. 11 (management number No. 10, management number No. 9), the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the left mechanical end and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The state where the right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is opened) is maintained. Control number No. 11 to the management number No. When proceeding to 12, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched again from + 5V, which is a stopping voltage, to + 12V, which is an operating voltage.

  The reason why the voltage is switched again from + 5V, which is the stopping voltage, to + 12V, which is the operating voltage, is that the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and larger in inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835. When the second electric distribution piece 4840 starts to rotate from the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is tilted obliquely) to the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically, a strong torque is required. Therefore, the management number No. 12, the voltage is switched from + 5V, which is a stopping voltage, to + 12V, which is an operating voltage, as a preparation.

  Control number No. 13 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2, φ1. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to No. 13, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 12 from the position of the left mechanical end that is the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 rotated by 12 toward the position of the mechanical end that is inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number 13 is the control number No. Management number no. 7 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the rotation number 7. Control number No. 12 to the management number No. When proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  As described above, since the second electric distribution piece 4840 is larger in size and inertia than the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is moved to the position of the mechanical end on the left side (that is, This is because a strong torque is required to start rotation from the state in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is tilted obliquely) to the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. 12 to the management number No. When proceeding to 13, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and a strong torque can be obtained when the rotation starts. And the management number No. 8 excitation time (ms): 4, and control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 7: 4 is added, Excitation time (ms): 8 is assigned the management number No. No. 13 indicates that the management number No. The position of the first electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number 13 is the control number No. Management number no. 7 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the rotation number 7.

  Control number No. 14 includes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ2 is specified. Control number No. 14, when the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 13 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 13 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 14, the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number No. 6 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the rotation number 6. Control number No. 13 to the management number No. When proceeding to 14, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 14, the excitation time (ms): 8 is defined. This is a mode in which the second electric distribution piece 4840 is gradually rotated from the tilted state toward the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. By creating, the state of being connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened) is gradually closed. This is because it is possible to realize a mode of shifting to the state of being.

  Control number No. 15 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 8, excitation time (ms): 8, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1, / φ2. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 15, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 14 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 14 toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 15, the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number No. 5 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 5. Control number No. 14 to the management number no. When proceeding to 15, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 15, the management number No. 14, the same excitation time (ms): 8 is defined. This is because the position of the mechanical end where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is inverted vertically from the state where it is tilted obliquely as described above. By creating a mode of gradually rotating toward the right side, it is connected to the third distribution portion 4829c via the right back passage 4841 (that is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution portion 4829c is opened). This is because it is possible to realize a mode in which the state is gradually shifted to a closed state.

  Control number No. 16 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: / φ1 is defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 16, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotation position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 15 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 15 toward the position of the mechanical end that is inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. 16, the position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by the control number No. 4 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 4. Control number No. 15 to the management number No. When proceeding to 16, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 17 includes rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2, / φ1 are defined. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 17, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. 16 rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 16 toward the position of the mechanical end that is inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric sorting piece 4840 rotated by the position No. 17 is indicated by the management number No. 3 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 3. Control number No. 16 to the management number no. When proceeding to 17, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  Control number No. 18 includes a rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: 1 phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ2 is specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 18, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. It rotates from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 17 toward the position of the mechanical end that is inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step (ie, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the position No. 18 is the control number No. 2 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 2. Control number No. 17 to the management number No. When proceeding to 18, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from two phases to one phase.

  Control number No. 19, rotation direction: CCW (counterclockwise), number of steps: 1, pulse width (ms): 4, excitation time (ms): 4, excitation mode: two-phase, voltage (V): +12 (for operation) Voltage), excitation phase designation: φ1 and φ2 are specified. Control number No. When the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven according to 19, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 reaches the rotational position CCW (counterclockwise) by one step, and the rotation of the rotation shaft 4909a is the gear mechanism (FIG. 245). To the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the control number No. Rotate toward the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically by an angle corresponding to one step from the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 18 (that is, CW (clockwise)). Control number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by the control number 19 is the management number No. 1 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left inter-hand passage 4842. That is, the right back passage 4841 connected to the third distribution unit 4829c is closed. Control number No. No. 18 to management number No. When proceeding to 19, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is switched from one phase to two phases.

  When φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), as described above, the angle of the D-cut surface formed on the rotating shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line. The position is rotated by (tolerance ± 3 °) and becomes the D-cut angle position. In the present embodiment, in the state where the second electric distribution piece 4840 is positioned at the left mechanical end, the angle of the D cut surface formed on the rotation shaft 4909a is 10 ° counterclockwise from the horizontal center line (tolerance ± It is preliminarily designed to be a position rotated by 3 °) and to be a D-cut angle position.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 (excluding the position of each mechanical end) can be determined. Therefore, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited (ON), whereby the second electric distribution piece When the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotates toward the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction while 4840 becomes the position of the left mechanical end, φ1 and φ2 set as the reference excitation phase are excited. By turning on (ON), the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. Control number No. No. 18 to management number No. By proceeding to No. 19, the second electric distribution piece 4840 becomes the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. 1 is the position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 1.

  Control number No. 20 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 12, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +12 (operation voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control No. 20, the management number No. The position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 19 is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left inter-hand passage 4842 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The state where the right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed) is maintained. Control number No. 19 to the management number No. When proceeding to 20, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases.

  Control number No. 21 includes rotation direction: stop, number of steps: none, pulse width (ms): none, excitation time (ms): 428, excitation mode: two phases, voltage (V): +5 (stop voltage), excitation phase Specification: φ1 and φ2 are defined. Control number No. When the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven according to the control number No. 21, The position of the 2nd electric distribution piece 4840 rotated by 20 (management number No. 19) is maintained. As a result, the second electric distribution piece 4840 reaches the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction and is maintained in a stopped state, and is connected to the start gate 4803 via the left inter-hand passage 4842 (that is, the third electric distribution piece 4840). The state where the right back passage 4841 connected to the distribution unit 4829c is closed) is maintained. Control number No. 20 to the management number No. When proceeding to 21, the excitation mode of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is continuously maintained in two phases, and the voltage is switched from +12 V, which is the operating voltage, to +5 V, which is the stopping voltage.

  Control number No. 21, the management number No. Rotation direction at 20: stop, excitation mode: two phases are maintained, respectively, while the voltage is switched from + 12V (operation voltage) to + 5V (stop voltage). In addition, the management number No. 20, the excitation time (ms) is 12, whereas the control number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 428. That is, the management number No. 21, the management number No. 20 is as small as about 42% of the voltage specified in 20, and the excitation time is about 35.7 times longer, and the stop time is longer. As a result, even if the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is always driven, the second sorting stepping motor 4909 can be prevented (suppressed) from generating excessive heat. Occurrence can be prevented.

  Here, the management number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 428 is preset. On the other hand, the management number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 428 is preset, and the management number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 428 is preset, and the management number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 420 is preset, and the management number No. 21, excitation time (ms): 416 is preset, and the management number No. In 21, the excitation time (ms): 412 is preset.

  The management number No. Subsequent to the management number No. 1 and the management number no. 1 to control number No. The second sorting stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven in accordance with the conditions defined in 21, and the second electric sorting piece 4840 is a wiper that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the vertical mechanical end position. Rocks in the shape of a circle. The second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped at the position of the mechanical end that is inverted in the vertical direction. Excitation time (ms) stipulated in No. 20: 12, control number no. Excitation time (ms) stipulated in No. 21: 428; Excitation time specified in 1 (ms): 452 ms plus 12, the voltage is switched from the operating voltage +12 V to the stopping voltage +5 V, and stops at the mechanical end position on the left side The time is the control number No. 10 excitation time (ms): 12, control number no. Excitation time (ms) specified in 11: 32, and the management number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 12 is 48 ms including 4 and the voltage is switched from +12 V, which is an operating voltage, to +5 V, which is a stopping voltage. Thus, although the stop time at the mechanical end position on the left side is different from the stop time at the mechanical end position inverted in the vertical direction, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 stops, the voltage is always the operating voltage. It is switched from a certain + 12V to a stopping voltage + 5V.

  Further, the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (that is, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped). 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 11, management number No. 12, management number no. 20 and the management number No. Two phases are defined in the excitation mode of No. 21. 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 11, management number No. 12, management number no. 20 and the management number No. In the excitation phase designation of φ21, φ1 and φ2 are defined. 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 12, and the management number No. The voltage of 20 is defined as + 12V. 11 and management number no. The voltage of 21 is regulated to + 5V. That is, when the second electric distribution piece 4840 is stopped (when the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is stopped), the excitation mode is always two-phase, excitation phase regardless of the magnitude of the voltage. As a designation, φ1 and φ2 are set, and the second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven.

  In addition to when the power is turned on, when the power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, the management number No. 1 to control number No. 21. Management number No. 21 which is a management number defined as rotation direction: stop. 1, management number no. 10, management number no. 11, management number No. 12, management number no. 20 and the management number No. Except for the management number No. 21, starting from one management number. The second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with the conditions defined in the management number one by one toward the terminal 21. And the management number No. 21, the management number No. 1, management number no. 2,..., The second sorting stepping motor 4909 is driven in accordance with each condition defined by the management number immediately before the one management number. 1 to control number No. The second sorting stepping motor 4909 is repeatedly driven according to the conditions defined in 21. The “one management number” may be determined in advance as an initial value (default), or a random number is acquired at the time of power recovery, and the acquired random number is subjected to a predetermined calculation according to the acquired random number. It may be determined based on a result obtained by execution, or a unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a may be extracted and determined based on the extracted ID code.

  In addition, it is good also as what is included in the game backup information mentioned above the management number just before the power-off of the pachinko machine 1 (including a power failure and a momentary power failure). In this case, the main control MPU 1310a reads the management number from the game backup information at the time of power recovery, and starts to drive the second sorting stepping motor 4909 according to the conditions specified by the read management number.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is rotating in the CW (clockwise) or CCW (counterclockwise) direction, the second distribution stepping motor 4909 has φ1, φ2, / φ1, / Excitation to φ2 has been performed as so-called 1-2 phase excitation, but may be performed by 1-1 phase excitation and 2-2 phase excitation. For example, in the case of performing 1-1 phase excitation in CW (clockwise), if excitation is performed in the order of φ1, φ2, / φ1, and / φ2, the first to fourth of the second sorting stepping motor drive IC 1310q In the diode, the order of converting the back electromotive force from φ1, φ2, / φ1, / φ2 of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 into heat is the first diode, the third diode, the second diode, and the fourth It becomes a diode. Thereby, as described above, the chip in which the first diode and the second diode are paired and the chip in which the third diode and the fourth diode are paired can alternately generate heat. This can contribute to a reduction in temperature rise of the package of the second sorting stepping motor driving IC 1310q. Therefore, failure of the first to fourth NPN-type Darlington transistors due to heat can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the positions of the mechanical ends overlap in the excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840. The excitation phase of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 and the rotational position of the second electric distribution piece 4840 may be determined so as not to overlap with each other. For example, when the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is driven, the rotation shaft 4909a of the second distribution stepping motor 4909 is transmitted to the second electric distribution piece 4840 via the gear mechanism (see FIG. 245) as described above. Therefore, in this gear mechanism, the second electric distribution piece is changed so that the position of each mechanical end is not overlapped by changing the gear ratio (current gear ratio) in the above-described embodiment to reduce the number of steps. The range in which 4840 is constantly swung in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the mechanical end inverted in the vertical direction) 2 The rotational position of the electric distribution piece 4840 can be determined, and the second distribution step It is possible to define the drive control block Gumota 4909.

  Incidentally, a gaming machine including a sorting device that drives a solenoid and sorts game balls into a specific area by a sorting member has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2006-036378 (paragraph [0029], FIG. 4)). By the way, in the gaming machine described in this document, although the sorting member is driven by a solenoid, the solenoid is driven by the moving speed of the sorting member when driven and the restoring force of the spring released from driving. There is a difference in the moving speed of the sorting member that returns to the position, and there are also individual differences of solenoids, and the sorting ratio by the sorting device cannot be stabilized and the sorting ratio cannot be finely adjusted. There was a problem.

[Method of mounting field effect transistor]
Next, a method for arranging the field effect transistor MF50 of the first distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m and the field effect transistor MF60 of the second distribution stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310p will be briefly described. FIG. 262 is a schematic view of a method for mounting a field effect transistor.

  As shown in FIG. 262, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 includes a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and accommodates the main control board 1310X. In this state where the main control board 1310X is housed in the main control board box 1320, the distance dimension from the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X to the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301 in this embodiment is 15.0 mm. There is a need to mount various electronic components on the main control board 1310X within this distance dimension.

  However, the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 employed in the present embodiment are so-called TO type packages, and the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 is large and protrudes from the main body of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60. If the various terminals to be mounted are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X as they are, the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310X is connected to the main control board box 1320. Cannot be accommodated.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the various terminals of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are configured to be mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X after being bent at a predetermined angle using a predetermined jig. As a result, the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are mounted on the mounting surface of the main control board 1310X while the main bodies of the field effect transistors MF50 and MF60 are obliquely inclined and maintain a predetermined distance d from each other. The main body does not interfere with the back surface (ceiling) of the cover body 1301, so that the main control board 1310X can be accommodated in the main control board box 1320, and the lower side of the main body of the field effect transistor MF50 that is inclined obliquely. Resistors MR52 and MR53 (including part numbers attached to the mounting surface) which are electronic components mounted on the field effect transistor can be viewed through the transparent cover body 1301, and the field effect transistor is in an inclined state. Resistors MR62 and MR63 (electronic components mounted on the mounting surface) below the main body of the MF60 By part number also includes.) Was, can be viewed through a predetermined distance dimension field effect transistor MF50 to d are arranged keeping became tilted obliquely, MF60 transparent cover member 1301 from between the main body.

[Dotsukigoto measures]
Next, the pachinko machine 1 is vibrated and struck to change the course of the game ball flowing down the game area 5a formed in the game board 5 by applying vibration to the pachinko machine 1 and provided in the game board 5 A circuit for detecting fraudulent acts (referred to as “dokkigoto”) to be entered at various winning holes and gates will be described. FIG. 263 is a circuit showing a vibration detection circuit.

  In the game board 5, an upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection switch 3006 are respectively arranged at predetermined positions (see FIG. 241). A panel relay substrate 1710 is provided with a circuit capable of setting sensitivity for detecting vibration. As shown in FIG. 263, the panel relay board 1710 has an upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za that can set the vibration detection sensitivity by the upper vibration detection switch 3005, and the vibration detection sensitivity by the lower vibration detection switch 3006. A lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb that can be set is provided.

  Here, since the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb have the same circuit configuration, the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting are set. In the description of the circuit 1710zb, the reference numerals for the upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the reference numerals for the lower vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb are shown in parentheses.

  An upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and a lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are signals that are wired or connected to the panel relay board 1710 to detect vibration. It is transmitted to the main control board 1310X as a sensor and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b described above. The main control MPU 1310a reads the vibration detection sensor, which is a wired or connected signal, in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), In the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. When detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 1 as fraud detection, while when no throb is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to 0 as no fraud detection. ), The main control side tie shown in FIG. In the port output process of step S118 in the interrupt process, this determination result (whether or not there is a crawl) is output to the external terminal board 558 described above, and the peripheral control board command is transmitted in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In the processing, a command for transmitting a determination result indicating that a throbbing is being performed is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The panel relay board 1710 is supplied with + 35V from the main control board 1310X, and has the same ground (GND) as the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310X. The ground (GND) to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the panel relay board 1710.

  The sensitivity setting circuit 1710za (1710zb) for the upper vibration detection switch is mainly composed of a shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80), resistors MR70 to MR73 (MR80 to MR83), a Zener diode MD70 (MD80), and an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80). Yes. The shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80) has a reduced temperature drift due to the ambient temperature, and can create and supply a stabilized power supply that is held at a constant voltage with respect to the load.

  The other end of the resistor MR70 (MR80) whose one end is electrically connected to the + 35V power supply line is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of a Zener diode MD70 (MD80) whose anode terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). At the same time, it is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR71 (MR81). The other end of the resistor MR71 (MR81) is electrically connected to one end of the resistor MR72 (resistor MR82), and is also electrically connected to the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). 1 (vibration detection power supply 2) is supplied to the upper vibration detection switch 3005 (3006). The line supplying the vibration detection power source 1 (vibration detection power source 2) is electrically connected to the positive terminal of an electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) whose negative terminal is electrically connected to the ground (GND). The ripple (the AC component folded on the voltage) of the vibration detection power source 1 (vibration detection power source 2) is removed and smoothed. Electrolytic capacitor MC70 (MC80) also serves as a low-pass filter.

  The other end of the resistor MR72 (MR82) is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR73 (MR83), one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage input of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80). The terminal is electrically connected to the REF terminal. The A terminal that is the anode terminal of the shunt regulator MIC70 (MIC80) is electrically connected to the ground (GND).

  The vibration detection power source 1 is determined by 2.5V × (MR72 + MR73) ÷ MR73 according to the resistance values of the resistors MR72 and MR73. Similarly to the vibration detection power source 1, the vibration detection power source 2 is determined by 2.5V × (MR82 + MR83) ÷ MR83 according to the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83.

  The upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 can vary the sensitivity of vibration detection by the supplied power. The upper vibration detection switch sensitivity setting circuit 1710za and the lower vibration detection switch are used. The sensitivity setting circuit 1710zb can set the sensitivity of vibration detection by the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are wired on the panel relay board 1710 as described above. It is OR-connected and transmitted to the main control board 1310X as a vibration detection sensor, and is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit. This is because either one or both of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not react at all, depending on the mode (hitting position, tapping angle, tapping strength, etc.). One or both of them may react excessively, so that the vibration detection sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the vibration detection sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are mutually supplemented.

  By various tests, the resistances of the resistors MR72 and MR73 and the resistance values of the resistors MR82 and MR83 are selected, respectively, and the vibration detection sensitivity of the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the vibration detection sensitivity of the lower vibration detection switch 3006 , Is set.

  In this embodiment, the upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006 are, as described above, the panel relay board 1710. Wired or connected to the main control board 1310X as a vibration detection sensor and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. It may be transmitted independently to the main control board 1310X and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b. In this way, the mode of the pounding is controlled by using a combination of the upper vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection sensor that is a detection signal from the lower vibration detection switch 3006. The MPU 1310 can determine and transmit it to the outside (a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) from the external terminal board 558).

  For example, when both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 do not react, the 0th (zero) tapping mode in which no throbbing is performed and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 reacts. If the lower vibration detection switch 3006 does not react, the first hit mode in which there is a possibility that the upper vibration detection switch 3005 does not react and the upper vibration detection switch 3005 reacts. The second hit mode in which there is a possibility, and when both the upper vibration detection switch 3005 and the lower vibration detection switch 3006 react, the third hit mode in which the pounding is performed can be given.

[Abnormality notification of various sorters]
Next, abnormality notification of the first, second, and third distribution units 4829a, 4829b, and 4829c will be briefly described. As described above, the first distribution portion 4829a is configured to be distributed to the rightward course flowing to the right side and the leftward course flowing to the left side toward the front of the ball passage 4834 according to the swing timing of the first electric distribution piece 4835. Has been. As described above, the first electric distribution piece 4835 swings in a constantly wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the left mechanical end position and the right mechanical end position). An optical first electric sorter sensor (not shown) for detecting whether or not the first sorter 4829a is provided is provided in the first sorter 4829a. As described above, the second distribution portion 4829b is configured to be distributed to the right back passage 4841 and the left inter-hand passage 4842 according to the swing timing of the second electric distribution piece 4840. As described above, the second electric distribution piece 4840 swings constantly in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that reciprocally moves between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the mechanical end inverted vertically), An optical second electric distribution piece sensor (not shown) that detects whether or not the second electric distribution piece is swinging is provided in the second distribution section 4829b. As described above, the third allocating unit 4829c is configured such that the rotating member 4846 of the ball turning type allocating device 4843 is always rotated, and detects whether or not the rotating member 4846 is rotating. The sensor for use is provided in the third distribution unit 4829c.

  Detection signals from the first and second electric distribution piece sensors and the rotating member sensor are input to the main control board 1310X and input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control side input circuit 1310b described above. The main control MPU 1310a is used for the first and second electric distribution pieces in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177, which is repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms). The detection signals from the sensor and the rotating member sensor are read, and in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interruption process shown in FIG. 177, the read first and second electric distribution piece sensors, Based on the detection signal from the rotating member sensor, the rocking abnormality or the rotation abnormality is discriminated. In the port output process of step S118 in the main control side timer interruption process shown in FIG. The presence or absence of occurrence of an abnormal swinging operation of 4835, the swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840 The presence or absence of normal occurrence or the presence or absence of abnormal rotation operation of the rotating member 4846) individually outputs a lighting signal to the corresponding decoration lamp provided in the game board 5, and the main control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the process, this determination result (the occurrence of an abnormal swinging operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of an abnormal swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the rotational operation of the rotating member 4846) A command notifying the occurrence of abnormality) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  When the swinging operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 occurs, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) lights the corresponding first electric distribution piece decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 in a red light emitting mode. If the swinging operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840 occurs, the corresponding second electric distribution piece decoration lamp provided on the game board 5 lights in green, and the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846 occurs. Then, the corresponding decorative lamp for rotating member provided on the game board 5 is lit in a blue light emission mode. In addition, using one full-color LED, a red LED element is associated and notified as the presence / absence of occurrence of a swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, and a green LED element is swung by the second electric distribution piece 4840. The presence / absence of the occurrence of abnormal operation can be reported in association with the blue LED element, and the presence / absence of occurrence of abnormal rotation in the rotating member 4846 can also be notified in association with each other.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is a command for notifying the occurrence of the swinging operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of the swinging operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, or the occurrence of the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310X. Is received, if there is an abnormality in the swing operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835 based on the command, the first electric distribution piece notification sound is controlled from various speakers, and the second electric distribution piece 4840 is controlled. When there is a swing operation abnormality occurrence, control is performed to flow a second electric distribution piece notification sound different from the first electric distribution piece notification sound from various speakers, and when there is a rotation operation abnormality occurrence of the rotating member 4846. Control is performed such that a notification sound for a rotating member different from the notification sound for the first electric distribution piece and the notification sound for the second electric distribution piece is sent from various speakers. The first electric distribution piece notification sound, the second electric distribution piece notification sound, and the rotating member notification sound have different timbres.

  As described above, by notifying the occurrence of the swinging operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the occurrence of the swinging operation abnormality of the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the occurrence of the rotation operation abnormality of the rotating member 4846, it is possible to determine whether or not the abnormality has occurred. It is possible to promptly communicate to the game hall clerk and staff. Further, even if an illegal act of stopping the operation of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 with a wire, a string, or the like is performed, the region is advantageous to an illegal person. It is possible to promptly inform the game hall clerk and staff of the state of the distribution.

  Further, the main control board 1310X (main control MPU 1310a) may output a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 when the swinging operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 occurs. If there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the second electric distribution piece 4840, a signal to be transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the external terminal plate 558. A signal transmitted to the hall computer may be output via the terminal board 558. Such signals can be individually output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. Any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 can be used. When an abnormality occurs (that is, the target in which the abnormality has occurred cannot be specified), a signal may be output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. .

  In the case where the game board 5 is provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control board 1510 generates a swing operation abnormality of the first electric distribution piece 4835 from the main control board 1310X, and the second electric distribution piece. Upon receipt of a command notifying the occurrence of an abnormal swinging operation of 4840 or an occurrence of abnormal rotational motion of the rotating member 4846, if there is an abnormal swinging operation of the first electric sorting piece 4835, that fact is reported. Control may be performed to display a message on the display device, and control may be performed to display a message to that effect on the display device when there is an abnormality in the swinging operation of the second electric sorting piece 4840. Alternatively, when there is an abnormality in the rotational operation of the rotating member 4846, control may be performed to display a message to that effect on the display device. There. Note that the peripheral control board 1510 is in a state where an abnormality has occurred in any one of the first electric distribution piece 4835, the second electric distribution piece 4840, and the rotating member 4846 from the main control board 1310X (that is, the abnormality However, it may be possible to control to display a message indicating the occurrence of an abnormality on the display device.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 258 that can control the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 251 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. ing. The main control board box 1320 is formed in a box shape from the transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. 259 and the transparent base body 1302 of FIG. 259, and by destroying the caulking portion 1303 of FIG. The fixed state between the transparent cover body 1301 and the transparent base body 1302 can be released. The main control board 1310X includes the polyswitch MPS50 of FIG. 258 which is a resettable fuse. This polyswitch MPS50 is one that can generate heat due to overcurrent to the first distribution stepping motor 4908, thereby reducing the conductivity and cutting off the current, and then cooling to restore the conductivity. is there.

  As described above, when an overcurrent flows to the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the current to the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be automatically restored by being shut down and cooled by the polyswitch MPS50. Therefore, there is no need to destroy the caulking portion 1303 that is the fixing portion due to an overcurrent to the first distribution stepping motor 4908, and it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310X from being unable to be used. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310X from becoming unusable due to overcurrent.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 258 capable of controlling the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 251 is provided, and the game board 5 of FIG. A right path and a ball path 4834 that are provided and flow into the right side of the ball path 4834 of FIG. 239, which is a plurality of ball discharge parts, of the game balls entered from the diving part 4827 of FIG. The first distribution unit 4829a of FIG. 239, which is a distribution device that can perform distribution by controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 to a leftward path that flows to the left of the front side of FIG. The first distribution unit 4829a may discharge to a region that is advantageous to the player, out of a right course that flows to the right side of the front of the ball passage 4834 and a left course that flows to the left side of the front of the ball passage 4834. It has a rightward course that flows to the right of the front of the spherical passage 4834 that is a specific spherical discharge portion. The main control board 1310X has a time allocated to the right course that flows to the right side toward the front of the ball path 4834 and a left path that flows to the left side toward the front of the ball path 4834, which is another sphere discharge section except for the specific sphere discharge section. The excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 can be controlled so that the time for sorting is different.

  Specifically, the first electric distribution piece 4835 has a control number No. 4 for the time to stop at the right mechanical end position. 19 excitation time (ms): 12, control number no. Excitation time (ms) stipulated in No. 20: 324; Excitation time (ms) specified in 1 is 348 ms plus 12, whereas the time to stop at the mechanical end position on the left side is the control number No. Excitation time (ms) specified in 10 is only 8: 8 ms, which is 8 ms, and the stop time at the mechanical end positions on the left and right sides is different and the stop time is long.

  Thus, by controlling the first distribution unit 4829a by the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the time allocated to the right path flowing to the right side of the front of the spherical passage 4834 which is the specific spherical discharge unit and the specific spherical discharge unit are determined. It is possible to finely adjust the time allocated to the leftward path flowing to the left side of the front of the ball passage 4834, which is the other ball discharge portion, and to stabilize the distribution ratio by the first distribution portion 4829a. it can. Therefore, the distribution ratio by the first distribution unit 4829a can be stabilized and the distribution ratio can be finely adjusted.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 258 capable of controlling the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 251 is provided, and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 of FIG. The first electric distribution piece 4835 of FIG. 239 which is a movable body that can move within a predetermined range by controlling excitation is provided. The excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body are associated in advance without overlapping. At the time of power recovery, the main control board 1310X is brought into an excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 previously associated with one of the positions of the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body within a predetermined range. It can be controlled.

  Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310X performs the port management process in step S118 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 177 repeatedly performed every 4 milliseconds (ms), according to the drive management block. As the drive control of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the swing drive data is output to the first distribution stepping motor drive IC 1310n. The set voltage switch 1 signal is output. In addition to when power is turned on, when power is restored due to a power failure or instantaneous power failure, the first sorting stepping motor 4908 is repeatedly driven according to each condition defined in the drive management block of the first sorting stepping motor 4908.

  Thus, at the time of power recovery, the first electric distribution piece 4835 which is a movable body is controlled by controlling the excitation phase of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 previously associated with any position in a predetermined range. The position of can be specified. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to specify the excitation phase for the first distribution stepping motor 4908 and the position of the first electric distribution piece 4835 that is a movable body.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310X of FIG. 258 capable of controlling the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 of FIG. 251 is provided, and the game board 5 of FIG. In addition, by controlling the excitation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908, the first electric sorting piece 4835 shown in FIG. 239 that reciprocates within a predetermined range is used as a ball entry portion. Can be divided into a right course that flows to the right of the ball passage 4834 in FIG. 239 and a left course that flows to the left of the front of the ball passage 4834. The first distribution unit 4829a of FIG. 239 which is an apparatus is provided. The first electric distribution piece 4835 is swung in a wiper shape (a wiper shape that always reciprocates between the position of the left mechanical end and the position of the right mechanical end) of the first electric distribution piece 4835 of FIG. 239. It can be reciprocated within a predetermined range. The main control board 1310X constantly controls the excitation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 after power recovery, and stops the first distribution stepping motor 4908 in a state where the first electric distribution piece 4835 reciprocates within a predetermined range. A voltage for switching between + 5V, which is a stop voltage used during the operation, and + 12V, which is a voltage higher than this stop voltage and used during the operation of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 The first sorting stepping motor voltage switching circuit 1310m of FIG. 258 as a switching unit is provided.

  As described above, in the state where the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is always controlled after the power recovery and the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is excited, the operation voltage is higher than the stop voltage, so the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped. By switching between the stop voltage used during the operation and the operation voltage used during the operation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908, the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped while the first distribution stepping motor 4908 is stopped. Heat generation can be suppressed. Therefore, heat generation of the first distribution stepping motor 4908 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the fixed start winning opening shown in FIG. 239 is used as a receiving port provided with the game ball B fired by the ball launching device 540 shown in FIG. 92 as the launching means in the game area 5a. A main control board 1310X shown in FIG. 256 is provided as game control means capable of progressing the game based on the player entering the ball 4813 or the electric start winning opening 4871.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a setting switch button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 259 as selection means, and a setting switch provided on the setting change board 1310Y in the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 1311a. The setting switching button 1311b selects any one of the setting values 1 to 6 as a plurality of setting values that are advantageous to the player, and uses the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b as a selection signal. One transmission path can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern or the like through which a signal from the setting switching button 1311b provided in the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 259 is transmitted. The setting switch 1311a determines the setting value selected by the setting switch button 1311b and uses the determination key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a as a determination signal as the second transmission path different from the first transmission path. This can be output to the main control board 1310X via a wiring pattern through which a signal from the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the unit 1300 is transmitted. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  Specifically, in order to prevent unauthorized modification, a wiring pattern in which a setting key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a setting switch 1311a As a routing between the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted, the setting change board 1310Y is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). In addition, the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) of the setting change board 1310Y is also formed apart, and various signals from the setting switch 1311a are transmitted also in the main control board 1310X. Wiring pattern (that is, the setting key of the setting switch 1311a) A wiring pattern in which an ON signal is transmitted, a wiring pattern in which a determination key ON signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted, and a wiring pattern in which an OFF signal of the setting switch 1311a is transmitted) and a signal from the setting switch button 1311b. The routing with the wiring pattern to be transmitted is formed so as not to be close to each other (separate from each other), and the routing with the wiring pattern to which the signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is not close to each other. (Separated from each other).

  As described above, when any one of the plurality of setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6) that is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting value is determined, the determined setting value is set. The game based on the set value can be provided to the player by the progress of the game based on the game. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Also, unauthorized modification can be prevented by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other.

From the above, the embodiment includes the following technical idea.
“A gaming machine comprising a ball rolling member that rolls a game ball in a game area that is visible to the player,
The ball rolling member is
A spherical flow path having an annular shape or an arc shape so that a centrifugal force directed to the peripheral wall portion side is applied to a game ball rolling on the bottom wall portion and having at least a bottom wall portion and a peripheral wall portion;
A ball guiding portion that is provided in the ball flow path and contacts the lower side of the center of the game ball that rolls on the bottom wall and can guide the game ball to a position slightly away from the peripheral wall; Gaming machine. "
According to such a technical idea, it is possible to provide a gaming machine provided with a ball rolling member that can prevent actual damage caused by the pounding.
In addition, in order to make the ball guiding portion enter under the game ball surely by vibration, the shape of the ball guiding portion is a wedge-shaped cross section inclined downward toward the contact point with the bottom wall portion of the game ball. Is good.

From the above, the embodiment includes the following technical idea.
“A gaming machine that uses a game medium to perform a predetermined game and has a display device for production in the game area,
The display device (third display device)
A display member capable of variably displaying characters, figures, images, etc .;
A display frame that supports the display member,
The display frame is
A frame main body variably attached in the game area;
A game machine comprising: a movable portion variably attached to the frame body. "
Such a gaming machine changes the position or posture of the display member by changing the frame main body within the game area while producing an effect by an image or the like by the display member of the display device, and further has a movable part with respect to the frame main body. The effect of the display member can be effectively enhanced by moving it.

  As described above, the embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, in the embodiment, the first movable portion 4888 and the second movable portion 4889 of the third display device 4818 which is an example of the display device are moved up and down. Although it was made to change by 4897, you may make it provide the drive source different from the raising / lowering apparatus 4897, and make the operation | movement of the 1st movable part 4888 and the 2nd movable part 4889 independent. By doing so, more complicated production can be performed.

  In the embodiment, of course, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment. For example, in the embodiment, a pachinko machine is illustrated as a gaming machine, but it can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine and an arrangement ball machine, and further, a plurality of drums (rotating drum or The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a reel. Here, the slot machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 264 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 264, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. Front door 6002 and main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, the front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting a key into a key hole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise.

  The upper half of the front door 6002 is provided with a game panel 6006, and the lower half of the front door 6002 is formed with a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006. In the protruding portion, a medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a storage and settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are disposed in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, the storage adjustment button 6022 and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 1310X that controls the progress of the game. Has been. The main control board 1310X is mounted and fixed to a board holder (not shown) that is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Three variable rotators (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through the display window are provided. You can see through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, an effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, translucent symbol bands on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information are affixed to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310X, and by rotating the output shaft of the stepping motor, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the display window described above. It has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Peripheral control unit 1500 is based on various commands from main control board 1310X, such as operation control of a plurality of movable effectors, rendering control of effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates, and the like. The progress of the production is controlled by performing various controls. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

  On the main control board 1310X, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal slot 6008 as game media, and the symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014. The left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right Based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time, the change display of the symbol information is stopped. The main control board 1310X generates a profit granting state (a big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008 ′, and the main control board 1310X has a predetermined number of game balls thrown in the ball slot 6008 ′ as game media, and the start lever 6014 is operated. The symbol information variation display is started based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the variation display of the symbol information is stopped based on the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310X generates a profit granting state (a big hit gaming state) on condition that the symbol information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as gaming media to the tray 6026.

The above description includes the following technical ideas i.
(Technical thought a)
A gaming machine comprising game control means capable of proceeding with a game based on a game ball launched by the launching means entering a receiving port provided in the game area, which is advantageous to the player Selection means that can select any one of the setting information and output a selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path, and determine setting information selected by the selection means Decision means capable of outputting a decision signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path, wherein the first transmission path and the second transmission path are mutually A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming machine is spaced apart.

  This gaming machine is provided with game control means capable of proceeding with the game based on the fact that the game ball fired by the launching means has entered the entrance provided in the game area.

  This gaming machine includes selection means and determination means. The selection means is capable of selecting any one of a plurality of setting information that is advantageous to the player and outputting a selection signal to the game control means via the first transmission path. The determination means can determine setting information selected by the selection means and output a determination signal to the game control means via a second transmission path different from the first transmission path. The first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other.

  As described above, when any one of a plurality of setting information that is advantageous to the player is selected and the setting information is determined, a game based on the determined setting information proceeds, so that each setting information Can be provided to the player. Therefore, the range of games can be expanded. Also, unauthorized modification can be prevented by arranging the first transmission path and the second transmission path apart from each other.

  In this embodiment, for example, the ball launching device 540 of FIG. 92 corresponds to the launching means, and the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004 of FIG. 131, the fixed start winning port 4813 of FIG. 239, and the electric start winning port 4871. Corresponds to the receiving port, the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X in FIG. 151 and the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310X in FIG. 256 correspond to the game control means, and the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. The setting value 1 to the setting value 6 correspond to a plurality of setting information, the detection signal from the setting switching button 1311b corresponds to the selection signal, and the setting switching provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A. A wiring pattern for transmitting a signal from the button 1311b (provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 259). The wiring pattern through which the signal from the constant switching button 1311b is transmitted corresponds to the first transmission path, and the setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A and the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The setting change button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1310Y corresponds to the selection means, and the decision key ON signal from the setting switch 1311a by the setting key K1 corresponds to the decision signal, and the setting change board of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 144A. A wiring pattern in which a signal from the setting switch 1311a provided in 1310Y is transmitted (a wiring pattern in which a signal from the setting switch 1311a provided in the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 259) is transmitted to the second transmission path. Corresponding to the main control unit of FIG. The setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of 1300 and the setting switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1310Y of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 259 correspond to the determining means, and “to the wiring pattern to the setting switch 1311a and the setting switching button 1311b”. The wiring pattern is formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other) on the setting change board 1310Y, and the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1310Y (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310X) The main control board 1310X also has a wiring pattern that transmits a signal from the setting switch 1311a and a wiring pattern that transmits a signal from the setting switch button 1311b, which are also close to each other. Not to In addition to being formed (separated from each other), routing with a wiring pattern to which a signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted is also formed so as not to approach each other (separated from each other). "Corresponds to the point that" the first transmission path and the second transmission path are spaced apart from each other ".

[Security structure other than the above in the game settings]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the above embodiment, the change operation means provided in the main control unit 1310 is targeted as a crime prevention structure for game setting, but other than that, the crime prevention measures for game setting using the structure of the pachinko machine 1 May be performed. Such a crime prevention structure will be described below.

[Game setting change device]
As described above, the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1) according to the embodiment has a frame-shaped outer frame 2 or a box-shaped main body portion fixedly attached to a gaming machine installation part (island facility) in a facility (game hall). A fixed portion (hereinafter, referred to as an outer frame 2), such as 6004, a door frame 3 that covers the front surface of the outer frame 2 and can be rotated in a single-opening manner, and the door frame 3 And a main body frame 4 that is formed so as to be able to rotate in a single-opening manner with respect to the door frame 3 and the outer frame 2, and a game setting of a winning probability by lottery is predetermined. The game setting changing device that can be changed within the range is provided.
This game setting changing device is for changing the winning probability of the lottery to be determined by the main control unit 1310 described above. The setting key switch 131Xa is turned on / off with a dedicated setting key, and pushed or Is a change comprising a setting switching unit 131Xb for changing the set value of the hit probability by an operation such as rotation, a setting display unit 131Xc for displaying the set value of the hit probability, and a power switch 630a of the power unit 620c of the pachinko machine 1. Operation means are provided. It should be noted that the elements constituting the change operation means can be arbitrarily set. For example, the power switch 630a may be excluded from the constituent elements, or an input key for inputting a password may be added to the constituent elements. .

[How to change set values using the change operation means]
Next, a method for changing the set value of the hit probability by the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described. As a premise for operating the change operation means, an unlocking process for rotating the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is necessary. The operation of the change operation means including such an unlocking process will be described later.

First, the setting key for setting change is inserted into the setting key switch 131Xa, and the power is turned off by the power switch 630a in the state as it is.
Next, the setting key of the setting key switch 131Xa is turned to switch from OFF to ON, and in this state, the power is turned on by the power switch 630a. As a result, the main control unit 1310 switches to the setting change mode, and the current setting value of the hit probability is visually displayed on the setting display unit 131Xc by lighting the 7-segment display or the LED. Note that the hit probability of the game setting is, for example, “setting 1 = 1 / 20.0”, “setting 2 = 1 / 19.8”, “setting 3 = 1 / 19.6”, “setting 4 = 1/19” .4 ”,“ setting 5 = 1 / 19.2 ”, and“ setting 6 = 1 / 19.0 ”.
Next, the setting switching unit 131Xb is operated while looking at the setting display unit 131Xc to change the set value of the hit probability, and when the set value to be changed is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is turned OFF and extracted. As a result, the set value of the hit probability is confirmed, and the display of the set value on the setting display portion 131Xc disappears, and the setting change mode ends and a game is possible.
In order to confirm the current set value, the setting key switch 131Xa may be turned on with the setting change setting key while the power is on. After confirmation, the setting key switch 131Xa is turned off and the setting key is exited. For example, the setting value display on the setting display portion 131Xc disappears.
Of course, the procedure of the change method is an example, and may be changed as appropriate according to the combination of the elements of the change operation means.

[Specific examples of change operation means]
Next, specific examples of the change operation means of the game setting change device will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 238, 240, 265 to 268. FIG.

[Specific Example 1]
The change operation means of the game setting changing device shown in FIGS. 238 and 240 are all installed in the upper left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a of the game board 5.
That is, the change operation means of the specific example 1 includes a setting display unit 131Xc shared by the function display unit 1400, a setting key switch 131Xa disposed obliquely above the function display unit 1400 along the game area 5a, The power switch 630a is also disposed obliquely above the setting key switch 131Xa, and the push button type setting switching unit 131Xb is disposed obliquely above the power switch 630a.
The game board 5 is detachably mounted on the front surface of the main body frame 4 and substantially constitutes a part of the main body frame 4. Therefore, in the game setting changing device shown in FIGS. 238 and 240, all of the changing operation means for changing the setting value are provided on the front side of the main body frame 4.
Further, the power switch 630a is a relocation of the power supply unit 620c, and the function of turning the power ON / OFF is not changed.

A procedure for changing the setting value of the game setting changing device by the changing operation means of the specific example 1 will be described.
First, in the pachinko machine 1, the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 are locked by the locking unit 650 attached to the main body frame 4 as described above, and the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are locked. The frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2 via the main body frame 4.
Therefore, before operating the change operation means, the setting key is inserted into the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 and rotated in a predetermined direction (for example, counterclockwise when viewed from the front) to lock the door frame 3. After unwinding and rotating only the door frame 3 in the opening direction, the employee stands in front of the main body frame 4 (game board 5) with the opened door frame 3 viewed to the left (unlocking process).
In this state, the setting value is changed by the changing operation means of the game setting changing device according to the procedure described above, and then the door frame 3 is returned to its original state and locked.
Note that the game setting changing device of all the specific examples is provided with a door frame opening switch 4a (see FIG. 268) in the door frame 3 to detect the opening of the door frame 3, and the door frame 3 is opened to enter the setting change mode. When switching, a “setting change” sound flows from the main body frame speaker 622 or the like at a large volume and a setting changing signal is transmitted from the external terminal board 558. As a result, the setting change operation of the game setting changing device is clearly transmitted to the persons around and the manager, so that it is difficult for unauthorized setting changes to be made. Also, the sound that informs that the setting change from the main body frame speaker 622 is being changed depending on the degree of opening of the door frame 3, for example, when the door frame 3 is small, the sound is loud, while the door frame 3 is open. If the angle is larger than an easily identifiable angle (for example, an opening angle of 80 degrees or more), a volume difference may be provided such that the volume is medium volume or less. By doing so, it is possible to detect fraud centered on the voice when the door frame 3 is small open, and on the other hand, when the door frame 3 is large open, and the door frame 3 is enlarged. For regular setting change work that is performed by opening, the stress caused by sound can be reduced.

The change operation means of the game setting changing device of the first specific example described above is provided in the upper left corner corresponding to the outside of the game area 5a of the game board 5, but besides that, although not shown, the upper right corner outside the game area 5a. It may be provided at the corner, similarly at the lower left corner, and at the lower right corner. Further, as shown in FIGS. 265 (a) and (b), the main body frame 4 may be provided below the game board 5.
In this case, the change operation means against the malicious act of a malicious person who opens the door frame 3 and steals the eyes of an employee who is dealing with a trouble such as a ball clogging and secretly operates the change operation means. At least one element (preferably, a setting switching unit 131Xb for directly inputting a set value) is provided in either the upper left corner or the upper right corner of the game board 5, or a plurality of elements are provided in a distributed manner (for example, The setting key switch 131Xa may be the upper right corner, and the setting switching unit 131Xb may be the upper left corner. If there is a change operation means at these positions, it is far from the player sitting in the chair, and the gesture of extending the hand is unnatural and there is a high risk that the employee will notice it, so it is thought that fraudulent acts It can be a psychological pressure to stop. For this reason, since the field of view is blocked by the worker who is farthest from the player seated on the chair and is working, it is difficult to see from the player. It is best to provide a part (preferably a part that becomes the key of the conversion operation).
On the contrary, as shown in FIGS. 265 (a) and (b), when the change operation means is provided below the game board 5 of the main body frame 4, it may be disadvantageous in terms of crime prevention because it is close to the player at a low position. However, for such a problem of crime prevention surface, a stepped portion in which a hidden region 131Xd is formed on the main body frame 4 that is hidden from view from an oblique direction while avoiding the open door frame 3 is difficult to see. 131Xe may be provided, and all or part of the change operation means may be provided in the hidden area 131Xd. In FIGS. 265 (a) and 265 (b), the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe that is hidden from the above-described viewpoint (for example, a viewpoint viewed obliquely from the open side (the anti-hinge side) of the door frame 3 that is open to cope with the clogging). In addition, as shown in the flat or enlarged view of FIG. 265 (a), a depression is further provided and a setting display portion 131Xc by LED is provided, and it is inevitable that even if the door frame 3 is opened during business hours, the player The setting value is almost invisible. Of course, it is most advantageous in terms of crime prevention measures to provide all the change operation means on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe, but it is illegal to provide only a part of the change operation means on the hidden surface 131Xf of the stepped portion 131Xe. It is effective as a security measure because it is difficult to perform. In particular, the setting display portion 131Xc of the change operation means can be installed if there is a small step portion 131Xe for arranging the LEDs in a line, so that it is easy to secure the installation location.

[Specific Example 2]
The change operation means of the specific example 2 is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 as shown in FIG. 266. Each element constituting the change operation means is as described above, and the description thereof is omitted.
When the change operation means is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, when the door frame 3 is opened in response to a trouble as described above, the change operation means is located near the player as a result. There is a risk that an unauthorized operation may occur while striking an operator's gap, but in Example 2, an unauthorized operation can be easily performed by providing a cover body 131Xg that can be opened and closed on the rear side of the door frame 3 to cover the change operation means. Can not be done.
This cover body 131Xg is provided with a hinge part 131Xh on one side and can be pivoted in a single-opening manner. However, by providing the hinge part 131Xh on the free end side of the door frame 3, as indicated by an imaginary line in FIG. In addition, the change operation means is hidden from the player in the form of a screen in the opened state. Such a cover body 131Xg can also be applied to the first specific example, and it is of course possible to protect the change operation means in a closed state by providing a hinge portion between the change operation means and the player. In the open state, the change operation means can be hidden from the player's viewpoint while standing in a screen.

  In specific examples 1 and 2, there is a possibility that a hole is made in the synthetic resin door frame 3 with a heated rod or the like, and the changing operation means may be illegally operated from the hole. A protective plate (for example, a metal plate) excellent in heat resistance and rigidity may be provided. Of course, the cover body 131Xg may be formed of a material having excellent heat resistance and rigidity, thereby forming an openable protection plate.

[Specific Example 3]
The change operation means of the specific example 3 is provided such that a part of the change operation means of the specific example 1 or 2 is provided on the rear side of the main body frame 4 and / or the outer frame 2 on the rear side of the main body frame 4 in the closed state. It is a thing.
For example, the change operation unit of the specific example 3 includes the power switch 630a integrated with the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 2 is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 and the front side of the main body frame 4. Note that, for example, the power switch 630a, which is an element of the change operation means, may be provided inside the outer frame 2 (fixed portion).
When the setting value of the game setting changing device is changed by the changing operation means of the third specific example, the key is inserted into the cylinder lock 130 from the front of the door frame 3 in the unlocking process and is moved in a predetermined direction (for example, clockwise when viewed from the front). After rotating and thus unlocking the outer frame 2 of the main body frame 4, the key inserted into the cylinder lock 130 is rotated in the reverse direction to unlock the main body frame 4 of the door frame 3. What is necessary is just to operate each change operation means in said way. As with the door frame 3, the main body frame 4 is provided with a main body frame opening switch 4b (see FIG. 268) for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4, and both the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are opened. When switching to the change mode, a “setting change” sound flows at a large volume from the main body frame speaker 622 or the like, and a setting changing signal is transmitted from the external terminal board 558.

  As described above, since the change operation means of the specific example 3 needs to unlock the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 in order to execute the change operation, it takes time to be illegal. The risk of being discovered increases when it takes time to be fraudulent, so it is recognized that the model is difficult to capture by those who attempt fraud, and of course the detection time is improved by the amount of time required for fraud.

[Setting auxiliary device for change operation means]
FIG. 267 is a perspective view illustrating a setting assisting device 131Xi that can correspond to any of the changing operation units in the first to third specific examples.
This setting auxiliary device 131Xi includes a portable size device case 131Xj, a setting key 131Xk for setting change that matches at least the setting key switch 131Xa, an auxiliary setting operation unit 131X1 for operating the setting switching unit 131Xb, and a game setting changing device. An auxiliary setting visual display unit 131Xm that obtains and displays the setting information.

  The setting key 131Xk that matches the setting key switch 131Xa protrudes to the rear side of the device case 131Xj, and can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by the auxiliary key lever 131Xn protruding to the front side of the device case 131Xj.

  The auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl that operates the setting switching unit 131Xb manually operates (rotates) the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo (hexagon wrench) that protrudes to the rear side of the device case 131Xj and the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo, for example. An auxiliary input unit 131Xp. The game setting changing device on the pachinko machine 1 side in accordance with the auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl has a structure in which the setting switching unit 131Xb can be rotated with a hexagon wrench of the same standard as the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo. Note that if the setting switching unit 131Xb and the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo of the game setting changing device are set to a combination of special standards, the setting switching unit 131Xb cannot be changed without using the auxiliary setting connecting unit 131Xo. , Crime prevention performance is improved.

  The auxiliary setting visual display unit 131Xm that obtains and displays the setting information of the game setting changing device converts the light signal acquired by the round shaft-shaped optical sensor 131Xq and the optical sensor 131Xq into a visible display. And auxiliary setting display means 131Xr for displaying. The setting display section 131Xc of the game setting changing device has a round hole shape in which, for example, the optical sensor 131Xq can be fitted, and the setting value is unilaterally set by invisible means such as flashing light behind the round hole. The flashing of the light is acquired by the optical sensor 131Xq and converted into a visible display by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr. Therefore, since the setting value of the game setting changing device can be seen only through the auxiliary setting visual display portion 131Xm, the security value is improved because the setting value is not known to those who do not have the setting auxiliary device 131Xi.

  According to the setting auxiliary device 131Xi, when changing the setting value of the changing operation means in the above manner, after the unlocking process of opening the door frame 3, when the setting key 131Xk of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is firmly inserted to the root, The auxiliary setting connecting part 131Xo (hexagonal wrench) of the auxiliary setting operation part 131Xl fits into the setting switching part 131Xb in the order of length, and the optical sensor 131Xq of the auxiliary setting visual display part 131Xm fits into the round hole of the setting display part 131Xc. If the optical sensor 131Xq is accommodated last while being guided by the setting key 131Xk and the auxiliary setting connecting portion 131Xo in this way, the delicate optical sensor 131Xq can be prevented from being damaged.

Next, in the state where the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is set as described above, the power switch 630a which is one element of the change operation means is turned off (refer to specific examples 1 to 3 for the position of each power switch 630a) to When the setting key 131Xk is turned with the key lever 131Xn to switch the setting key switch 131Xa to ON, and the power switch 630a is turned ON in this state, the setting change mode is switched to. Then, since the setting information emitted as a one-sided light signal in the back of the round hole of the setting display portion 131Xc is read by the optical sensor 131Xq and visually displayed by the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr, the auxiliary setting display The auxiliary input unit 131Xp is turned manually while visually confirming with the means 131Xr to change the set value.
When the set value is reached, the setting key switch 131Xa is turned off, the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is removed from the pachinko machine 1, and the door frame 3 or the body frame 4 is locked.

The illustrated auxiliary setting device 131Xi is provided with a schedule display portion 131Xs for displaying the setting value to be changed separately from the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr for displaying the current setting value. The set value to be changed is input in advance in the internal data of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi together with the individual number of the pachinko machine 1.
On the other hand, the setting display unit 131Xc of the game setting changing device of the pachinko machine 1 transmits its own individual number as a light signal together with the current set value, and reads it with the optical sensor 131Xq of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi. As a result, the set value to be changed of the target pachinko machine 1 is displayed.
Therefore, the person who changes the setting changes the auxiliary input unit of the auxiliary setting operation unit 131Xl until the setting value of the scheduled change displayed on the schedule display unit 131Xs matches the display of the auxiliary setting display unit 131Xr indicating the current setting value. Since it is only necessary to rotate 131Xp, the setting operation can be performed efficiently and a setting error is unlikely to occur.

  Further, the auxiliary input unit 131Xp of the setting auxiliary device 131Xi is driven by an electric means (not shown), and in the setting change mode, at least the schedule display unit 131Xs indicating the set value to be changed is not displayed and the auxiliary input unit 131Xp is automatically displayed. For example, if the auxiliary setting display means 131Xr is turned on simultaneously to indicate that the setting change has been completed, the person who performs the setting operation does not know the set value of the hit probability. There is no risk of leaking information of the high-sling pachinko machine 1.

[Relationship between specific examples and technical ideas]
The game setting changing devices of specific examples 1 and 2 correspond to embodiments of the following technical idea.
“A frame or box-like fixed part that is fixedly attached to the gaming machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame formed so as to cover the front surface of the fixed portion and rotate in a single-opening manner;
A game machine having a main body frame that is positioned on the rear side of the door frame and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a single-opening manner with respect to the door frame and the fixed portion,
It has a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range,
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the changing operation means for changing set values of the gaming setting changing device are provided on the rear side of the door frame and / or the front side of the main body frame. "
According to such a gaming machine, when changing the setting of the hit probability with the game setting changing device, it is only necessary to rotate the door frame provided with the production parts, so there is a risk of disconnection when rotating. In addition, even if the door frame is rotated, the island equipment is still covered with the main body frame, so the risk of damage to the ball circulation equipment caused by dropping foreign objects such as tools is small, and employees Therefore, the risk of fraud in which fraudulent parts are loaded on the back side of the gaming machine is also small. In addition, there is almost no risk that the counter setting of the out sphere / safe sphere will be misaligned even if the door frame is rotated, so there is almost no risk of data failure due to a deviation in the counter setting, and the door frame is equipped with a sphere tank. Since it is lighter than that, there is an effect that the physical burden of setting change can be reduced.

The game setting changing device of specific example 3 corresponds to an embodiment of the following technical idea.
[Technical idea of Example 3]
“A frame or box-like fixed part that is fixedly attached to the gaming machine installation part in the facility,
A door frame that covers the front surface of the fixed portion and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a single-opening manner with respect to the fixed portion;
A game machine having a main body frame that is positioned on the rear side of the door frame and is formed so as to be able to rotate in a single-opening manner with respect to the door frame and the fixed portion,
It has a game setting change device that can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range,
A part of the change operation means for changing the setting value of the game setting change device is provided on the rear side of the door frame and / or the front side of the main body frame, and the other part of the change operation means is provided on the rear side of the main body frame. A gaming machine provided on the fixed portion on the side and / or on the rear side of the closed main body frame. "
According to such a gaming machine, it is necessary to unlock the door frame and the main body frame in order to execute the changing operation, and accordingly, it takes time to be illegal. Since the risk of being discovered increases when it takes time for fraud, it is recognized that the model is difficult to capture by those who attempt fraud, making it harder to be targeted. Of course, the time taken for fraud increases, and the detection rate also improves.

  As described above, the game setting crime prevention structure using the structure of the pachinko machine 1 has been described. In addition to the above, for example, the main control unit 1310 automatically clears the internal RAM by switching to the setting change mode. However, a RAM clear switch for manually clearing the RAM of the main control unit 1310 may be provided near the change operation means so that the maintenance of the gaming machine including the change of the hit probability can be performed efficiently.

In the above description, the game setting changing device can change the game setting of the winning probability by lottery within a predetermined range. However, as already described, to a specific receiving port (for example, fixed start winning port 4813). It may be possible to change the probability of entering the ball (a lottery for a role).
Specifically, the management number No. in FIG. , The excitation time (ms) of the first sorting stepping motor 4908 in “20” is “setting 1 = 324”, “setting 2 = 320”, “setting 3 to setting 6 = 316”. The excitation time (ms) of the second sorting stepping motor 4909 at 21 is set as “setting 1 to setting 3 = 428”, “setting 4 = 420”, “setting 5 = 416”, “setting 6 = 412”. Good. By doing so, the time during which the first electric distribution piece 4835 and the second electric distribution piece 4840 are stopped at a disadvantage to the player is changed, so that the probability of entering a specific entrance changes. In setting 1 to setting 3, the change target is the first electric distribution piece 4835, and in setting 4 to setting 6, the change target is the second electric distribution piece 4840, so that the places where the change of motion appears are distributed. Accordingly, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to detect a change due to a setting change.

  In the above, a pachinko machine is exemplified as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as a sparrow ball machine, an arrange ball machine, and the above-mentioned fusion machine.

1 ... gaming machine (pachinko machine)
1301 ... Cover body 1301h ... Opening part 1301i ... Cylinder part 1301z ... Cylinder end part 1302 ... Base body 1310 ... Main control part,
1310a ... Main control MPU
1311a ... Setting switch 1311d ... Mounting portion 1311e ... Setting key cylinder 1320 ... Main control board box 1320s ... Internal space K1 ... Setting key

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a lottery by establishment of a predetermined condition and gives a predetermined profit to a player when the result of the lottery is a win,
A main control unit having a main control MPU for controlling the progress of the game;
A main control board box for accommodating the main control unit;
A setting switch provided in the main control board box and capable of changing a game setting relating to the winning probability of the lottery to any one of a plurality of stages,
The main control board box includes a base body and a cover body covering the base body, and houses the main control unit in an internal space between the cover body and the base body.
The setting switch includes a mounting portion that is attached to the main control portion, and a setting key cylinder that is rotated by a setting key in a cylinder shape that is smaller in diameter than the top shape of the mounting portion, and is opened in the cover body. The top of the setting key cylinder is formed so as to face the outside from the opened opening,
Further, the setting key cylinder is fitted into a receiving tube portion protruding from the inner space side of the cover body,
On the other hand, the tube end portion on the side opposite to the opening portion of the receiving tube portion is brought close to the top of the mounting portion that protrudes outside the setting key cylinder of the setting switch, so that the space between the receiving tube portion and the setting key cylinder is reduced. A gaming machine characterized in that it can block passage of foreign matter inserted into the gap into the internal space.